Sap Ts410_en_col03_s4hana - Cloud - 2017 Rel_part_nw

For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]

Integrated Business Processes in SAP S/4HANA

.

. PARTICIPANT HANDBOOK INSTRUCTOR-LED TRAINING

. Course Version: 03 Course Duration: 10 Day(s) Material Number: 50138662





SAP Copyrights and Trademarks ©

2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate company) in Germany and other countries. Please see http://global12.sap.com/corporate-en/legal/copyright/index.epx for additional trademark information and notices. Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors. National product specifications may vary. These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only, without representation or warranty of any kind, and SAP SE or its affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials. The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services, if any. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. In particular, SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation, or to develop or release any functionality mentioned therein. This document, or any related presentation, and SAP SE’s or its affiliated companies’ strategy and possible future developments, products, and/or platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time for any reason without notice. The information in this document is not a commitment, promise, or legal obligation to deliver any material, code, or functionality. All forward-looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations. Readers are cautioned not to place undue reliance on these forward-looking statements, which speak only as of their dates, and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions.

© Copyright. All rights reserved.

iii



Typographic Conventions American English is the standard used in this handbook. The following typographic conventions are also used.

This information is displayed in the instructor’s presentation

Demonstration

Procedure

Warning or Caution

Hint

Related or Additional Information

Facilitated Discussion

iv

User interface control

Example text

Window title

Example text




Contents xi

Course Overview

1

Unit 1:

SAP S/4HANA Enterprise Management: Overview

2

Lesson: Outlining the Motivation for SAP S/4HANA

19

Lesson: Explaining the SAP S/4HANA Simplification List

27

Unit 2:

28

New User Experience: SAP Fiori UX Lesson: Understanding the New User Experience

43 49

Exercise 1: Adjust the SAP Fiori Launchpad in SAP S/4HANA Unit 3:

50

SAP S/4HANA Basics Lesson: Explain the Organizational Structures

67

Exercise 2: Display the Organizational Structures

71

Lesson: Understanding the Concept of Master Data

77 81

Exercise 3: Display a Material Master Record Exercise 4: Display a Customer Master Record

89

Unit 4:

Financial Accounting and Management Accounting: Overview

90 97

Lesson: Explaining Financial Accounting (FI) Lesson: Explaining Management Accounting (CO)

99

Lesson: Outlining the Integration Between FI and CO


v



103

Unit 5:

105

Financial Accounting and Management Accounting: Basics Lesson: Defining General Ledger (G/L) Accounts and Cost Elements

113

Exercise 5: Create a Primary Cost Account

117

Lesson: Defining Cost Centers

121 126

Exercise 6: Create and Display Cost Centers Lesson: Posting a G/L Account Document

129

Exercise 7: Create a Posting from Financial Accounting

133

Exercise 8: Display a G/L Account and G/L Account Line Items

139

Exercise 9: Check an Account in the Financial Statement Version (Optional)

141

Exercise 10: Display a Financial Statement

145

Lesson: Working with Business Partners and Invoices

151 157

Exercise 11: Create a Business Partner (FI Vendor) Exercise 12: Enter a Vendor Invoice with Document Splitting

161

Exercise 13: Post a Manual Outgoing Payment with Check Printing

165

Exercise 14: Display Vendors Account

168

Lesson: Working with Asset Accounting

175

Exercise 15: Create an Asset Master Record

179 184

Exercise 16: Post an Integrated Asset Acquisition Lesson: Working with Activity Types

187

Exercise 17: Create a Secondary Cost Account and an Activity Type

197

Exercise 18: Post an Activity Allocation

201

Lesson: Working with Internal Orders

207

Exercise 19: Maintain Master Data of an Internal Order

211

Exercise 20: Create Transaction-Based Postings to an Internal

215

Order Exercise 21: Settle Orders at Period-End

221 222 229

Unit 6:

Human Capital Management Lesson: Organizational Management in HCM Exercise 22: Create an Organizational Unit and a Position in Organizational Management

235 241 246

vi

Lesson: HCM Master Data Exercise 23: Create an Employee Master Data Record Lesson: Integrating with Success Factors




271

Unit 7:

Purchase to Pay Processing in SAP S/4HANA

273

Lesson: Describing the Purchase to Pay Business Process

286

Lesson: Defining the Master Data Used in the Purchase to Pay Process

291 297

Exercise 24: Create a Material Master Record Lesson: Creating a Vendor Master Record

299

Exercise 25: Create and Extend a Vendor Master Record

303

Lesson: Listing Additional Vendor Specific Master Data Records

307 312

Exercise 26: Create a Purchasing Info Record Lesson: Creating Purchase Requisitions

319

Exercise 27: Create a Purchase Requisition for a Stock Item and a Consumable Material

323 325

Lesson: Creating Purchase Orders Exercise 28: Create a Purchase Order with Reference to PReq.

329

Exercise 29: Run an Internal Order Report

331 336

Exercise 30: Evaluate Purchase Orders Lesson: Posting a Goods Receipt for a Purchase Order

343

Exercise 31: Post a Goods Receipt for a Purchase Order

347

Exercise 32: Transfer Posting for Material

350 355

Lesson: Processing Vendor Invoices Exercise 33: Post the Vendor Invoice

359 363

Exercise 34: Query the Supplier Account Lesson: Processing the Automatic Payment Run

365

Exercise 35: Create an Automatic Payment Run

371

Exercise 36: View Vendor Accounts


vii



381

Unit 8:

Plan to Produce Business Process in SAP S/4HANA

383

Lesson: Describing the Plan to Produce Process in SAP S/4HANA

390

Lesson: Defining the Master Data in the Plan to Produce Process

399

Exercise 37: Change a Material Master Record

403 405

Exercise 38: Change Bill of Material Exercise 39: Change a Work Center

407

Exercise 40: Change the Routing for a Finished Product

410

Lesson: Creating a Product Cost Estimate

415

Exercise 41: Create a Standard Cost Estimate

419

Exercise 42: Update Material Valuation

424

Lesson: Planning Product Demand - Integrated Planning

425

Exercise 43: Manage Planned Independent Requirements

430 437

Lesson: Defining the MRP Process Exercise 44: Display the Material Master Record

442

Lesson: Processing MRP

455

Exercise 45: Process an MRP Run

459

Exercise 46: Monitor Material Coverage

464

Lesson: Describing the Manufacturing Business Process

466

Lesson: Creating and Releasing a Production Order

469 473

Exercise 47: Convert a Planned Order to a Production Order Exercise 48: Release a Production Order

478

Lesson: Performing Material Withdrawal for a Production Order

481

Exercise 49: Perform Goods Issue for a Production Order

487

Lesson: Performing an Order Confirmation and a Materials Goods Receipt

491

Exercise 50: Confirm a Production Order and Post Goods Receipt

495 507

Lesson: Performing Period End Closing Activities Exercise 51: Calculate Variances in a Production Order

509

Exercise 52: Settle a Production Order

511

Exercise 53: Evaluate CO-PA

521

Unit 9:

Warehouse Management - Stock Transfer

522

Lesson: Explaining WM Structures and Usage

530

Lesson: Outlining the Difference between EWM, WM, and Inventory Management (IM)

532

viii

Lesson: Processing a Stock Transfer Order




541

Unit 10:

Order to Cash Processing in SAP S/4HANA

543

Lesson: Describing the Order to Cash Business Process

545

Lesson: Describing the Master Data Used in Sales and Distribution

547

Exercise 54: Check Material Master Record for Sales

551 553

Lesson: Creating a Customer Master Record Exercise 55: Create a Customer Master Data Record

559

Lesson: Creating a Condition Record

561

Exercise 56: Create a Condition Record

564

Lesson: Processing a Sales Order

571

Exercise 57: Create a Quotation and a Sales Order

575

Exercise 58: Create a Sales Order with Reference to a Quotation

579

Exercise 59: Check and Solve Sales Order Fulfillment Issues

583 587

Exercise 60: Review the Sales Order Lesson: Processing a Delivery Document

593

Exercise 61: Create a Delivery Document

597

Lesson: Processing a Customer Invoice

603

Exercise 62: Create a Customer Invoice

607

Exercise 63: Run a CO-PA Report

617

Unit 11:

Project System

619

Lesson: Describing the Process Steps in Project System

621

Lesson: Creating a Project Structure

629

Exercise 64: Create a Project Structure

633 637

Lesson: Planning a Project Exercise 65: Plan Resources in a Project

643

Exercise 66: Plan Dates in a Project

649

Exercise 67: Plan Costs in a Project

655

Lesson: Budgeting in a Project

657 660

Exercise 68: Create the Budget for a Project Lesson: Executing a Project

663

Exercise 69: Release a Project

671 675

Exercise 70: Post a Confirmation of Time for your Project Exercise 71: Post Time Confirmation with CATS

682

Lesson: Processing Period-End Closing Activities


ix



687

Unit 12:

SAP Enterprise Asset Management (EAM)

689

Lesson: Processing Business Steps in SAP EAM

691

Lesson: Describing Master Data Used in SAP EAM

695

Exercise 72: Display a Functional Location Structure

703 709

Exercise 73: Create an Equipment Master Record Exercise 74: Display an Asset Master Record

719 723 727

Lesson: Creating Notifications Exercise 75: Create a Notification Lesson: Processing Maintenance Orders

735

Exercise 76: Create a Maintenance Order

739

Exercise 77: Plan a Maintenance Order

745

Exercise 78: Release a Maintenance Order

749 755

Lesson: Executing Maintenance Orders Exercise 79: Confirm Time for Maintenance Order and Goods Issue Posting

759 763 765

x

Exercise 80: Technically Complete a Maintenance Order Lesson: Processing Period-End Closing Activities Exercise 81: Perform Period-End Closing Activities




Course Overview TARGET AUDIENCE This course is intended for the following audiences: ●

Application Consultant

●

Business Process Architect

●

Business Process Owner/Team Lead/Power User

●

Enterprise Architect

●

Program/Project Manager


xi



xii




UNIT 1

SAP S/4HANA Enterprise Management: Overview

Lesson 1 Outlining the Motivation for SAP S/4HANA

2

Lesson 2 Explaining the SAP S/4HANA Simplification List

19

UNIT OBJECTIVES ●

Outline the motivation for SAP S/4HANA

●

Explain the usage of the Simplification List


1



Unit 1 Lesson 1 Outlining the Motivation for SAP S/4HANA

LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●


SAP S/4HANA Overview

Figure 1: The Business Landscape is Increasingly Complex and Networked

If you look at the numbers in the figure, The Business Landscape is Increasingly Complex and Networked, it becomes obvious that the world around us is not getting simpler, it’s getting more complex, for the following reasons: ●

Exponential growth of digital information – social, mobile, big data

●

Globalization and spread of business networks

●

Internet of Things (you could also say, the Internet of everything)

The response so far has been the development of more complex business processes, more complex organizations, and more complex software solutions. At the end of 2009, 5% of the world’s population owned smartphones. Four years later, that figure jumped to 22%. Currently, 1.7 billion people are on social networks. Over the next three years, that audience will surpass 2.55 billion. By 2020, 5 billion people will enter the middle class and come online, while 50 billion devices will be connected to the “Internet of Things,”

2



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Outlining the Motivation for SAP S/4HANA

creating a digital network of virtually everything. And cloud computing – a $41 billion business in 2011 – will grow to a $241 billion business in that same time frame. The exponential proliferation of mobile devices, social media, cloud technologies, and the staggering amounts of data that they generate has transformed the way that we live and work. In fact, 61% of companies report that the majority of employees use smart devices for everything from e-mail to project management to content creation. While all of these advancements have improved our lives and provided us with greater opportunities for innovation than ever before, they have also accelerated the rise of an entirely new problem to contend with: unprecedented and crippling complexity. The world may be getting smarter, but it hasn’t gotten any easier.

Figure 2: Advances in Technology

In the last few years, there have been significant advances in technology that application developers can take advantage of in order to build smarter and more powerful applications. Examples include the following: ●

Multi-core processors enabling parallelism of tasks This means more throughput of data and faster processing to give us real-time responses.

●

Big memory This enables us to fit an entire organization’s database in memory, which means that we lose the mechanical spinning disk and the latency it brings.

Advances in the design of the on-board cache means that data can pass between memory and CPU cores rapidly. In the past, even with large memory, this was a bottleneck as the hungry CPUs demanded more data and the journey from memory to CPU was not optimal. We can now easily slot more servers into our landscape to add more processing power or memory in order to scale to any size. SAP rewrote its business application software to fully exploit the new hardware. SAP worked closely with leading hardware partners, who shared the product blueprints of their new CPU architectures, so that SAP knew how to write the best modern software to extract as much power as possible. Cloud computing technology has matured in the last few years and is now a compelling deployment option for our customers who do not want to take on the complexity and cost of


3


For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Unit 1: SAP S/4HANA Enterprise Management: Overview

the installation and maintenance of IT landscapes. Virtualizing machines means lower costs associated with running enterprise-wide applications. Public cloud services based on subscription models increase access to everyone to the latest solutions, reducing the costs and simplifying everything.

Figure 3: Time to Rebuild the Business Suite for the Digital World

Since the beginning of enterprise computing, SAP have been rebuilding the business applications whenever major technology shifts have occurred. Some key moments in the application development history of SAP are the following: ●

●

●

●

4

1979 – SAP invents ERP. SAP builds standard business software based on mainframe technology. The name, SAP R/2 supports and integrates major business functions in real time and handles multi-country and multi-currency implementations (R means real time, and, although there was an R/1, this is not regarded as the first major release). 1992 – With the rise of the personal computer, the introduction of client/server architecture means another rewrite of the applications to exploit the power of a layered, three-tier architecture approach, in which processing is split across three layers - client, application, and database. It is the end of the mono-chromatic, text-based, messy green screens and the start of a new graphical interface to improve the end user experience. This is the birth of SAP R/3. 2004 – Now the Web is firmly established as the common business network and customers demand better integration between their business applications and the Web. SAP develops a new integration application platform called SAP NetWeaver in order to enable this. Now all SAP applications run on a common platform, and customers and partners can build and integrate existing applications easily using widely adopted Web standards, such as service-oriented architecture (SOA). Additionally, a little later, a new switch framework is introduced to allow customers to selectively enable only the new functions developed by SAP in order to avoid disrupting their core processes. The SAP R/3 name is now replaced by SAP ERP. ERP is part of a larger family known as SAP Business Suite, which also contains many other line of business (LOB) applications from SAP, such as SAP CRM. 2015 – A new wave of advances in hardware architecture brings massive computing power at decreasing costs. Huge memory and multi-core processors arrive to offer massive




computing power. The underlying design of existing SAP applications does not fully exploit the power of the new hardware. A rewrite of the complete Business Suite is required. The new business suite is called SAP S/4HANA.

Figure 4: Core ERP Processes Unchanged

The main ERP processes are, for example, procure to pay, plan to produce, order to cash or request to service are unchanged. What is changing? The way that we access these processes has changed dramatically. In the past , these processes were executed on desktop or laptop. Today, it is important that these solutions can be used on a mobile device using data stored in Cloud solution. Additionally, new Services and new technologies require new solutions.

Figure 5: Some Facts about SAP S/4HANA

SAP S/4HANA comprises a new code base, and new SAP Fiori UX, and new guided configurations. It is our new generation of the suite.


5



These simplified applications are seamlessly integrated to offer one solution for every business problem. All of these applications offer a modern web-based SAP Fiori User Experience, ready for real cloud consumption. All this together makes these applications a completely new product: with a new database, data management, technology and front-end, offering the following: ●

10x smaller data footprint

●

1800 times faster analytics and reporting

●

ERP, CRM, SRM,SCM, PLM, in one system reintegrated

A major achievement is the ability to reintegrate ERP, CRM, SRM, SCM, PLM co-deployed - to save hardware costs, operational costs and time. This is possible because SAP S/4HANA has a 10x smaller data footprint compared to a best-in-class business suite on traditional database. Another example is less process steps: Processing receivables app in SAP GUI vs. SAP Simple Finance: Number of screen changes 8 --> 2 (4x).

Figure 6: SAP HANA – The Great Simplifier

We should recognize the key enabler of SAP S/4HANA from the software side. It is called SAP HANA, and it is the platform on which SAP S/4HANA is natively built. In 2005, SAP started researching the possibility of developing a new wave of applications built on an in-memory database. When SAP realized that no traditional database vendor had what they needed on the database side, SAP began developing its own in-memory database. SAP worked with leading chip manufacturers to identify to optimal design of a database that could exploit the full power of the new generation of powerful processors. The first release of SAP HANA was in early 2011. It was initially positioned as a standalone data mart solution, where customers could replicate data from any sources in real time to the in-memory database, and build Business Intelligence (BI) reports and applications on top. This meant BI was an early beneficiary of the power of SAP HANA. Next, SAP began developing SAP HANA-based accelerators, which were deployed as side-car engines to run alongside traditional SAP ERP functions that were critical to businesses, yet

6




were performing slowly. In simple terms, SAP HANA became a secondary helper database and stepped in to help out with the heavy processing. Around the same time, SAP developed new, innovative applications that were completely powered by SAP HANA and needed massive processing power, such as Smart Meter Analytics and Oncolyzer. Around 2012, SAP successfully converted its first major application, SAP BW, to run completely on SAP HANA. This was quickly followed up with the conversion of SAP Business Suite. These existing applications are referred to as powered by SAP HANA, or simply on HANA: for example, Suite on HANA (SoH) and BW on HANA. Ensure not to confuse SoH with SAP S/4HANA, as these are not the same. Conversion means the code has been adjusted to work with SAP HANA and also to take advantage of some basic optimizations. In 2015, SAP started from scratch and rewrote the complete SAP Business Suite natively to run only on SAP HANA. Unlike Suite on HANA, SAP S/4HANA is a brand new code-line, which works only on SAP HANA. Unlike Suite on HANA, the applications do not have to work on any other vendors’ database. This means SAP was not restricted by the limitations of these databases, which meant code always had to be built so it worked with many databases. This often meant developing over-complicated data models. SAP was finally able to code freely with no compromises, in order to exploit 100% of the power of SAP HANA.

Figure 7: SAP S/4HANA Suite — Introducing the Next Generation Core and Lines of Business Solutions for the Digital Economy

The next generation core and lines of business solutions includes solutiosn for SAP S/4HANA Finance for SAP S/4HANA HR, SAP S/4HANA Supply Chain & Asset Management, SAP S/ 4HANA Sales, Services, and Marketing, and for SAP S/4HANA Sourcing and Procurement. Thereby solutions from ARIBA, CONCUR successfactors, fieldclass and hybris will be used. SAP Ariba is the world’s business commerce network. SAP Ariba combines industry-leading cloud-based applications with the world's largest Internet-based trading community to help companies discover and collaborate with a global network of partners. Using the SAP Ariba Network, businesses of all sizes can connect to their trading partners anywhere, at any time from any application or device to buy, sell and manage their cash more efficiently and effectively than ever before.


®

7



Concur Travel and Expense Web and mobile solutions for travel and expense management. It includes corporate travel booking, expense report automation, reimbursement, audit, and business intelligence, and corporate card integration. It is offered in multiple editions (Small Business, Standard, Concurforce, Professional, Premium). SAP SuccessFactors is the leader in cloud-based Human Capital Management (HCM) software for talent management, core HR, and HR analytics. SAP Fieldglass provides a cloud-based Vendor Management System (VMS) to manage contingent workforce and services procurement programs. SAP Hybris helps businesses around the globe sell more goods, services, and digital content through every touchpoint, channel, and device. Evolution to SAP S/4HANA Enterprise Management

Figure 8: Evolution to SAP S/4HANA Enterprise Management

The evolution starts on SAP R/3 Rel. 4.7, which was able to run on any database and uses SAP NetWeaver as a basement. ERP2004 was followed by SAP ERP6.0. SAP ERP6.0 EhP7 was the first solution, which runs on SAP HANA, the starting point of SAP Finance. SAP Finance on the other hand was the first step in the SAP S/4HANA Enterprise Management Solution. All of these solutions are executed on an SAP HANA database.

8




SAP S/4HANA Enterprise Management

Figure 9: SAP S/4HANA Enterprise Management

SAP S/4HANA Enterprise Management component is enhanced by LOB Solutions. In the area of Sourcing and Procurement, SAP S/4HANA Enterprise Management is enhanced by capabilities in the Ariba Portfolio. This is the Ariba Business Network for supplier collaboration and Ariba Procurement Content in the area of Requisitions. SAP S/4HANA is not a single product. Customers can start with the basics components and add to them later. SAP S/4HANA Enterprise Management is a great place to start. This is known as the “simplified core”. Perhaps it might help to think of SAP S/4HANA Enterprise Management as the replacement for SAP ERP. Here, we find support for all core business processes, such as order to cash, procure to pay, and so on. For many customers, this is where their SAP S/4HANA adoption begins. Seamlessly integrated with the core, we find SAP S/4HANA Lines of Business (LoB) solutions. These are options that can be added at any time and provide best-in-class lines of business solutions and connections to SAP Business Networks. In the past, we had multiple add-on applications surrounding a core (for example SAP ERP, SAP CRM, and SAP SRM), but with overlapping models and much redundancy. Now overlaps and redundancy have been completely removed from SAP S/4HANA. SAP S/4HANA is built natively and optimally to run only on the SAP HANA platform. Let’s highlight the most important aspects of SAP S/4HANA and what makes it very different from what we had before. We will then drill down on individual topics in later slides. First of all, SAP S/4HANA is built on SAP HANA, so we inherit all the capabilities of this powerful data management and application platform. This includes advanced text mining, predictive analysis, simulations, and powerful real-time decision support. A brand new user experience is delivered to improve the productivity and satisfaction of business users and brings the interface up to a consumer-grade experience on any devices. SAP S/4HANA can be deployed on premise or in the cloud, or a combination of both, to provide flexible options to customers.


9



The data model has been massively simplified. This means that we lost unnecessary tables and, of course, the data in those tables, to shrink the footprint dramatically and simplify the application design and extensibility. SAP S/4HANA Logistics – Key Innovations

Figure 10: SAP S/4HANA Logistics – Key Innovations

Within SAP S/4HANA the following key innovations have been developed: ●

●

●

●

● ●

●

10

In Material Requirements Planning, fast MRP run and new working model for MRP controllers In Inventory Management, a simplified data model resulting in increased through-put, and flexible analytics at the most granular level In Material Valuation, the elimination of locking, and increased throughput for standard price utilizing Material Ledger In Available To Promise & Backorder processing, a new ATP algorithm based on SAP HANA embedded in mass component check in production In Capacity Planning, PP/DS side by side with SAP S/4HANA In Order Management & Billing, the enabled monitoring of end-to-end order-to-cash process and take action for any exceptions, information on the exceptions to resolve the issues In Procurement, increased efficiency in the Procure-to-Pay processes, new analytical apps and spend KPIs, and Ariba Network Integration for PO Order




Key Aspects of SAP S/4HANA

Figure 11: Key Aspects of SAP S/4HANA

Here we highlight the most important aspects of SAP S/4HANA and describe why it is very different from previous solutions. We then drill down on individual areas later. SAP S/4HANA is built on SAP HANA, so it inherits all the capabilities of this powerful inmemory data management and application platform. This includes advanced text mining, predictive analysis, simulations, and powerful real-time decision support, with access to any type of data in real time. A brand new user experience is delivered to improve the productivity and satisfaction of business users and brings the interface up to a consumer-grade experience, optimized for any device. SAP S/4HANA can be deployed on premise, in the cloud, or a combination of both, to provide flexible consumption options to customers. The data model has been massively simplified. This means that we have lost unnecessary tables, and of course the data in those tables, in order to shrink the footprint dramatically and simplify the application design and extensibility.


11



Bringing OLTP and OLAP Together

Figure 12: Bringing OLTP and OLAP Together

For more than 20 years, organizations have been using specialist software, usually with additional hardware, to extract, transform, and load (ETL) data from transaction systems to dedicated reporting systems. Based on the technology available, this has been the optimal way to provide a holistic view of business data with good response times (especially when you add accelerator software or hardware). Online Transaction Processing (OLTP) has been separated from Online Analytical Processing (OLAP). This is due to the database design of OLTP and OLAP. Database models have been either built for OLTP optimization or OLAP optimization, but not both. However, this has also bought with it complexity, redundancy, and latency. It has been common for today’s business figures to be available only tomorrow for analysis, once the data has been extracted and loaded to a reporting system. The database that supports SAP S/4HANA (SAP HANA) can handle both OLTP and OLAP processing from a single data model, so there is no need to move transaction data to a separate system. This means that transaction and analytical applications run off the same tables, and data is available in real time at every level of detail. Data Footprint

Figure 13: Data Footprint

A simplified solution architecture will benefit your IT organization immediately.

12




The IT landscape, processes, and maintenance routines are all positively impacted by a simplified solution architecture. The numbers shown here are from real-world experience of SAP Benchmarking Services, a division of the SAP services and support organization. The advantages offered by a simplified solution architecture include the following: ●

Simplified IT landscape Cut memory and storage resources dramatically and improve reliability

●

71% reduction in maintenance Maintenance is simplified by greatly reducing ETL and re-indexing batch jobs

●

Infinite scale Having an engine that allows the processing and analyzing of massive amounts of any data leads to a situation that only our imaginations limits the boundaries to use the system. All data, both inside and outside the company, structured and unstructured, can be processed and analyzed. Therefore, systems need the performance and scale to operate on a complete new level of data quality and quantity; it must be ensured that any redundant data is removed from the system, any data that does not directly contribute and benefit the business process or the quality of the information provided.

●

Business agility Systems need to be able to support massively increased business agility and need to instantly react on user requests. Processes that hinder system performance and system agility must be avoided. This is the end of batch processing; batch has started with punch cards, punch cards have died, UIs, which were the interfaces of function modules have died and the batch is now dying in these days.

Data Footprint 2

Figure 14: Data Footprint 2

A reduction from 593 GB to 8,4 GB provides much more than simply storage capacity reduction:


13



●

You can run the application on a mobile device.

●

You increase the flow of data through your Business Applications.

●

Response times are shorter.

●

You can see more data on a screen (statistical data directly into a data entry screen).

●

Backup and updates are faster.

●

Restores are faster.

Simplified Applications

Figure 15: Simplified Applications

We have already covered the simplification of applications from the technical side. Now we look at how simplification also applies to the business side, with an example from finance. In traditional SAP ERP finance, financial postings have been supported by two key documents, the Finance (FI) document and the Controlling (CO) document. These documents provide the required views of the finance data from a legal perspective (FI) and also an internal management accounting perspective (CO). There is a lot of overlap between these documents. Application code has had to deal with these two types of postings whenever a business event has occurred that triggered a financial outcome, for example, a material receipt. With SAP S/4HANA Finance, we now have only one document. This is called the Universal Journal Entry. A single financial posting is made to one table, which holds all information that is needed by both legal and management accounting. The application code is simplified and any views of the data that are required are created on the fly by SAP HANA. We do not lose any business meaning, but we lose the underlying complexity of the application.

14




Previous Complexity

Figure 16: Previous Complexity

Another example of application simplification relates to material requirements planning (MRP). Usually, this key business process is complex, with many steps and, as a result, can run for a long time before results are produced. MRP is an iterative process. It involves identifying the components needed to satisfy demand, then checking resource capacity to procure those components, then readjusting the plan. This can take a lot of time, and by the time the processes have completed, the data can already be out of date. For example, you collected the demand data an hour ago and ran MRP to calculate the raw materials, but the demand picture changed while you waited for these results, so information you have is already out of date. Therefore, real-time MRP is impossible, and you are always operating and making decisions on out-of-date results. In a fast-moving business where agility is essential, this is not acceptable.


15



Current Simplicity

Figure 17: Current Simplicity

With SAP S/4HANA, MRP is a real-time process. This is achieved because of the raw power available with SAP HANA, and the dramatically simplified data model and application code that runs faster. MRP is no longer a painful batch process, which means you can run it whenever an individual change occurs in the inventory position right down the BOM component level. This means that MRP becomes live. With SAP S/4HANA, you can now plan right down to a lot size of one. If a customer order is taken, you can immediately determine the effect on all the dependant subcomponents’ requirements, but only for that single order. This means that the inventory department can i begin working on the procurement of the missing items immediately, and do not have to wait until the next MRP run to tell them there are missing subcomponents.

16




Ready-to-Go Integration with Existing Cloud Solutions

Figure 18: Ready-to-Go Integration with Existing Cloud Solutions

SAP S/4HANA can be natively integrated with the existing SAP Cloud solutions, such as Ariba, SAP Concur, SAP Hybris, SAP SuccessFactors, SAP Cloud Analytics, and SAP Cloud for Customer (C4C). Let us consider an example to help illustrate what this might look like. A customer deploys SAP S/4HANA to implement a core procurements process, such as purchase to pay. Employees are now happy that they can place requests for equipment that they need. However, employees would like to be able to read reviews from other purchasers of the same items, just as they do when they are at home using consumer applications, such as Amazon. The employees would also like to be able to ask vendors detailed questions about the items. By integrating SAP S/4HANA with Ariba Network, this is possible. SAP provides best practices and tools to rapidly integrate SAP S/4HANA with all SAP Cloud solutions, including SAP Business Networks.


17



SAP S/4HANA: Deployment Options

Figure 19: SAP S/4HANA: Deployment Options

SAP S/4HANA is both available as on premise edition and as cloud edition. This training focuses on the 1511 SAP S/4HANA, on-premise edition. LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●

18





Unit 1 Lesson 2 Explaining the SAP S/4HANA Simplification List



Content of Simplification List

Figure 20: The Simplification List

With every new release of SAP S/4HANA, the simplification list is updated with releasedependent information. It describes the simplification items valid for SAP S/4HANA. This list must be treated as a complete inventory that is mapped against a productive environment to determine the impact when converting to SAP S/4HANA. It is a collection of single simplification items with the focus on what has to be considered through an implementation system conversion project. The following information is provided for each simplification item: ●

Description

●

Business impact and recommendations

●

SAP notes (for related pre-checks or custom code checks)


19



Figure 21: Simplification List As a Basis

To accomplish the transition to SAP S/4HANA, the study of the simplification list is a good starting point and guideline. SAP also provides additional tools to support the transition. Pre-checks are shipped as SAP Notes to customers that want to convert to S/4HANA. Customers can use these pre-checks to find out what mandatory steps they have to carry out before converting to SAP S/4HANA. The pre-check results list the instances that need addressing before attempting the conversion process. Custom code analysis is used to support the customer in detecting custom code that needs to be adapted so that it can be moved to SAP S/4HANA. SAP offers custom code analysis tools (as part of the SAP NetWeaver 7.50). The customer can verify whether their current custom code will be compliant with SAP S/4HANA data structures and scope. SAP S/4HANA Sales Solution Simplification — The Principle of One The principle of one includes the following: ●

SAP Global Trade Service (GTS) replaces ERP SD Foreign Trade (SD-FT).

●

SAP Credit Management replaces ERP FI Credit Management (FI-AR-CR).

●

Settlement Management

●

SAP Revenue Accounting replaces ERP SD Revenue Recognition (SD-BIL-RR).

●

replaces ERP SD Rebates (SD-BIL-RB).

Cloud for Sales and SAP CRM On-Premise are recommended for your field sales team. ERP Sales Support (SD-CAS) is not part of SAP S/4HANA Sales.

Currently, SAP offers there are two software services for international trade transactions: Foreign Trade (FT) and Global Trade Service (GTS). FT is part of the normal SD. GTS is an external service that can be installed on an additional instance. The FT functionality is not available with SAP S/4HANA 1511, because SAP GTS is the successor for the business requirement. The FI-AR-CR Credit Management is not available with SAP S/4HANA 1511. The functional equivalent in SAP S/4HANA is SAP Credit Management (FIN-FSCM-CR). In SAP S/4HANA, Settlement Management replaces SD Rebate Processing, which means that existing rebate agreements can only be processed up until the end of the validity date of the agreement. They must then be closed by a final settlement. New agreements can only be created based on condition contracts.

20



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Explaining the SAP S/4HANA Simplification List

The ERP SD Revenue Recognition is not available within SAP S/4HANA. The newly available SAP Revenue Accounting and Reporting functionality should be used instead. This functionality supports the new revenue accounting standard, as lined out in International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS15) and adapted by local Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAPs). The migration to the new solution is required to comply with IFRS15, even if an upgrade to SAP S/4HANA is not completed. Computer-Aided Selling (SD-CAS) is not available within SAP S/4HANA, because it is not the target architecture. It is recommended to use SAP CRM on-premise (side-by-side with SAP S/4HANA) or SAP Cloud for Customer.

Figure 22: Further Major Simplifications

As shown in the figure, Further Major Simplifications, the following changes are relevant for SAP S/4HANA Sales and Distribution: ●

Business partner approach

●

SD simplified data model

●

Simplifications in SD analytics

●

Billing document output management

LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●



21



22




Unit 1 Learning Assessment

1. What are some of the trends driving the need for a re-engineered business suite built for the digital? Choose the correct answers. X

A Massive increase in device connectivity

X

B Business users are taking on more technical IT tasks

X

C Increase in ownership of mobile devices

X

D Adoption of cloud computing

2. Why was the application code completely re-written for SAP S/4HANA? Choose the correct answers. X

A The optimized ABAP code that we developed for Suite on HANA would not work with SAP S/4HANA

X

B To take advantage of the simpler data model

X

C SAP S/4HANA is now built with Java

X

D To ensure that the code is optimized for SAP HANA

3. SAP S/4HANA is built to natively integrate with Business Networks such as: Choose the correct answers. X

A SAP Ariba

X

B LinkedIn

X

C Concur

X

D SAP Fieldglass

X

E SAP Hybris


23


For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Unit 1: Learning Assessment

4. What characterizes the architecture of a simple application? Choose the correct answers.

24

X

A Use of dedicated aggregation tables

X

B Works with any database

X

C Reduction in number of tables

X

D No data redundancy




Unit 1 Learning Assessment - Answers

1. What are some of the trends driving the need for a re-engineered business suite built for the digital? Choose the correct answers. X

A Massive increase in device connectivity

X

B Business users are taking on more technical IT tasks

X

C Increase in ownership of mobile devices

X

D Adoption of cloud computing

2. Why was the application code completely re-written for SAP S/4HANA? Choose the correct answers. X

A The optimized ABAP code that we developed for Suite on HANA would not work with SAP S/4HANA

X

B To take advantage of the simpler data model

X

C SAP S/4HANA is now built with Java

X

D To ensure that the code is optimized for SAP HANA

3. SAP S/4HANA is built to natively integrate with Business Networks such as: Choose the correct answers. X

A SAP Ariba

X

B LinkedIn

X

C Concur

X

D SAP Fieldglass

X

E SAP Hybris


25


For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Unit 1: Learning Assessment - Answers

4. What characterizes the architecture of a simple application? Choose the correct answers.

26

X

A Use of dedicated aggregation tables

X

B Works with any database

X

C Reduction in number of tables

X

D No data redundancy




UNIT 2

New User Experience: SAP Fiori UX

Lesson 1 Understanding the New User Experience

28

Exercise 1: Adjust the SAP Fiori Launchpad in SAP S/4HANA

43

UNIT OBJECTIVES ●

Understand the new user experience


27



Unit 2 Lesson 1 Understanding the New User Experience



Traditional User Interface

Figure 23: Traditional User Interface

It does not matter how good an application is if the user experience is poor. In the past, user interfaces all suffered from the same problem: They were too complicated. The main reason for this is that interfaces were often designed around the business function, and not around the person. The result was a cluttered screen that tried to provide many features to many different job roles. For example, consider a sales order screen: How many job roles does this screen support? You might assume one: The sales order entry clerk. However, the reality is that the same screen is used by a large number of people who need to either check information or make adjustments to an existing order. Some examples are as follows: ●

28

A quality assurance worker in the delivery department needs to release a blocked item in the order.

●

A finance person needs to adjust tax assignments.

●

A salesperson needs to adjust discounts.

●

A marketing employee needs to apply promotion codes.



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Understanding the New User Experience

●

A project manager needs to check that costs have been assigned to the correct project phases.

Each of these people could find themselves using the same screen, but only a very small part of the screen. The screen ensures that they all work hard to navigate to the specific area they need, ignoring the options they do not need. Lots of clicks are required for very little highvalue interaction.

Concepts and Influence Factors

Figure 24: Concepts and Influence Factors

The use of IT and electronic devices is no longer reserved for a group of expert users; it has spread throughout society to all social groups. People need high-performing hardware that can support a variety of software products, with different scope and potential. There is added pressure to supply an easy-to-use solution to the end user. The main drivers of this development are smartphones and tablets, with their easy-to-use and flexible User Interfaces (UIs). The focus of these UIs is no longer on huge functionality but rather a comfortable User Experience (UX), which puts the focus on the consumer. Business software must adapt and transform to turn this trend to its maximum advantage for the roles of an enterprise. In this evolution, the UI plays an important role. With regard to SAP software products, the challenge is to keep a clear view and to understand the overall SAP strategy in the area of UX. Furthermore, it is important to have a clear understanding of the goals and target groups of each UI technology, to avoid mistakes and frustrated users. In the beginning, it is helpful to clarify the terminology used. A good place to start is with the terms UI and UX.


29


For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Unit 2: New User Experience: SAP Fiori UX

Figure 25: UI versus UX

The terms UI and UX represent two different ways of thinking. From a software perspective, UI describes the interface between a human being and a device. It aims to maximize the efficiency of the device when used. UX takes on the perspective of the end user, and aims to provide motivation and emotion, not only during use, but also before and after use. UX tries to achieve a sustainable, positive attitude, and to create a motivating experience. Focus on Function

Figure 26: Focus Shift

Contrary to traditional interface design, the design approach with SAP Fiori is that the focus is now on the job role, rather than the function. SAP Fiori applications are always role-based. There are many applications to choose from, and they are organized in easy-to-use catalogs, supplied by SAP S/4HANA. You simply need to assign the roles to the users. Each SAP Fiori application is built around the user, rather than the function. As a result, the screens are very simple and uncluttered. A key goal of any SAP Fiori application is to ensure that a user can complete a task with as few clicks as possible.

30




In the past, users could find themselves working with many different interfaces, each one with a completely different look and feel, even when they only had one task to complete. With SAP Fiori, users require little training, because the simple screens are intuitive, with only the essential information and options available. Imagine checking a customer inquiry from SAP CRM using the SAP Portal interface, and then moving to SAP GUI to check the stock availability in ERP. Completely different interfaces are used with their own style and features, with different buttons, menus, and tools. With SAP Fiori, users work with just one design. Not all transactions from ERP are converted to SAP Fiori applications, so SAP GUI must still be used in some cases. The cloud edition uses only SAP Fiori applications, and there are no classic SAP GUI screens. The SAP GUI is still available with the on-premise edition, and can be used alongside SAP Fiori, but we recommend using SAP Fiori to take full advantage of the features of SAP S/4HANA. User Types

Figure 27: User Types

Depending on the industry and company, various user types can be found. There is a great variety of different user types available, depending on the structure of the specialized area and the IT department, as well as the degree of digitization. However, in almost every company there are three basic types: ●

Occasional users An occasional user uses the system occasionally, and therefore needs simple and easy-touse applications. In many cases, single-step transactions are executed.

●

Experts An expert user (or sometimes key user) is a fully-trained SAP user, who knows the processes and the available applications in detail. An expert user often uses multiple systems and different UIs.

●

Developers


31



A Developer (or programmer) has detailed process and system know-how, and deals with the adaptation and extension of the existing applications. Developers look after several applications with different UIs. Deployment Types

Figure 28: Deployment Types

The deployment type defines the license model and operational environment. In the On Premise type, the customer buys software and hardware, and operates the combination themselves. Therefore, the customer is solely responsible for implementation, the update extensions, and adaptation, as well as replacements and new investments. In the Cloud type, the cloud company provides infrastructure (hardware and software) and business software, and rents this combination to the customer. The cloud company is responsible for the operation, updates, extension, and new investments. At SAP, different operational models are available (for example, public cloud, private cloud, and privately managed cloud), with different software and service provisioning. In the Hybrid type, the customer runs certain parts of their business software on their own servers, and uses additional solutions from a cloud provider. This deployment type requires an intense integration between the On Premise parts and the Cloud types.

32




Next Generation of UI

Figure 29: Next Generation of UI

A key theme of SAP S/4HANA is simplification, and this certainly applies to the user experience. We use the term user experience , rather than user interface, because we need to consider the overall experience of the user, rather than just the look of the screen. For example, if you went to a restaurant that was strong on food presentation, but where the service was poor, you would say that the overall experience was not good, and you would not be keen to repeat it. It is important to provide not only a great-looking UI, but also features that help the user become more productive, resulting in a good overall experience. This is what SAP Fiori delivers. SAP Fiori is a completely new user experience, rather than an upgrade to any existing interface, such as SAP GUI, SAP Portal, or SAP Business Client. It works on any device that allows users to have the same experience, regardless of the device they choose to use. They can set up a basic sales order in the office using their desktop, then visit the customer to complete the configuration and agree pricing using a tablet. SAP Fiori provides the same look, feel, and productivity features on all devices. SAP Fiori applications are designed using a methodology called design thinking , which is a user-centric and solution-based approach to software and user interface design.


33



Target: Unified UX Direction for all SAP Software

Figure 30: Target: Unified UX Direction for all SAP Software

The long-term goal of the SAP UX strategy is to offer SAP Fiori (as the unified UI) to all business and all analytic applications on SAP HANA.

Types of Fiori Applications

Figure 31: Types of SAP Fiori Application Details

SAP Fiori applications can be classified into different types. Examples include the following: ●

Transactional These follow an optimal design for fast transaction processing, such as purchase receipt entry.

34




●

Analytical These provide the tools required for analysis, graphs, charts, exploration, data mining, and drill-down.

●

Factsheet These provide a 360 degree view of all key information related to a business subject. For example, enter an employee name and all information about that employee appears, such as working hours, vacation, pay, performance, manager, and awards.

Note: This is a good example of the SAP Fiori approach, which is to use a limited number of consistent interfaces to keep things simple. When a developer creates a new SAP Fiori application, they begin by selecting a template that is based on transactional, analytical, or factsheet, so they have a consistent look and feel.

Figure 32: Types of SAP Fiori Application

Here are the three most common types of SAP Fiori App: ●

●

●

Transactional apps use ABAP to provide the classic approach for functions of a business system. They are available for S/4HANA and Business Suite on any DB. Analytical apps use the analytical capabilities of SAP HANA to provide insights in business data. They are available for S/4HANA and Business Suite on HANA. Fact Sheet apps use the enterprise search capabilities of SAP HANA to provide search results. They are available for S/4HANA and Business Suite on HANA.


35



SAP Fiori Architecture

Figure 33: SAP Fiori Architecture

For the technical audience who would like to know about what goes on under the hood with a SAP Fiori application, the following is a quick view of the underlying SAP Fiori architecture. One of the key technical principles is to de-couple the interface logic from the back-end application logic. This means that, technically, SAP Fiori can be used by any back-end application, as it uses industry-standard methods of connecting the applications to the interface. In this case, the back end is an ABAP-based application (SAP S/4HANA). Front-end components identify the calling device (phone, tablet, and so on), so that you know which native template to use to present the application optimally to the device. The front end also identifies the type of foundation for the application, for example, whether the call comes from Launchpad, an SAP Fiori application, or Personas. (We will discuss Personas later.) For applications that access the back end via OData services, the SAP Gateway server is used. Otherwise, HTTPS is used directly with the back end. The Gateway component can be installed on the AS ABAP back-end server, but for production purposes we do not recommend this. The Gateway should be deployed on its own ABAP server. Otherwise, performance conflicts could arise. The database for the front-end server can be SAP HANA, SAP ASE, or SAP MaxDB. The back-end server database is always SAP HANA. The data can be exposed to the ABAP S/4HANA application directly from SAP HANA tables, but it is more likely to be exposed through CDS views. CDS views provide a business-ready view of the data, ready for consumption, and is a new approach to reusable data entities. The CDS views sit on top of the database tables.

36




Note: For more detailed information on SAP Fiori technology, follow the training courses with the code SAPX__ (SAPUI5) and GW100 (SAP Gateway).

SAP Fiori Application Examples

Figure 34: SAP Fiori Application Example: Monitor Material Coverage

A SAP Fiori application called Monitor Material Coverage supports the user in both getting an overview of stock availability (or material coverage) and directly navigating to the current material’s stock or requirements situation.


37



Figure 35: SAP Fiori Application Example: Sales Order Fulfillment Issues

An SAP Fiori application called Sales Order Fulfillment Issues supports the user in both seeing an overview of the issues in sales orders and navigating directly to the documents, to solve the issues. Search

Figure 36: Search

SAP HANA Search is available via the Launchpad at any time. You can avail of the following functions: ●

38

Highlight every search match in a results list




●

Search the result list across all business objects

●

Specify result list per document type

●

Navigate to related objects, showing an object page of the document

●

Navigate to related transactional applications to start maintaining the business object

With SAP S/4HANA, a global search across all applications, business documents, and master data is provided. By providing a search term on the top of the screen, the system starts a google-like search across various entities. The search result list is structured along categories, such as business documents (for example, purchase orders) or master data (for example, suppliers). The search term is highlighted in yellow. Depending on type of search result, either the related object page is started, or the transactional SAP Fiori application. To facilitate providing correct search results, a preview of data related to the search result is provided.

SAP Fiori Launchpad

Figure 37: SAP Fiori Launchpad

The SAP Fiori Launchpad is a role-based, personalized UI client that enables users to access SAP Fiori applications side by side with established UIs. The Launchpad is based on SAPUI5, and can be used on multiple devices to leverage the responsive design paradigm. It can be deployed on multiple platforms: SAP NetWeaver Application Server (ABAP Stack), SAP Enterprise Portal, and SAP HANA Cloud Platform. The SAP Fiori Launchpad comes with predefined content to streamline implementation processes. The SAP Fiori Launchpad is aligned with the two main UI clients: SAP Enterprise Portal (available) and SAP NetWeaver Business Client (planned). Alignment with the SAP Enterprise Portal is achieved by running the SAP Fiori Launchpad UX within the SAP Enterprise Portal (also known as the SAP Fiori framework page), while also leveraging established portal infrastructure and best practices. Note: Alignment of SAP NetWeaver Business Client for Desktop (NWBC) with SAP Fiori Launchpad design is planned for future releases.


39



The SAP Fiori Launchpad can be visually adapted and customized using the UI Theme Designer. It is designed according to the simple and intuitive SAP Fiori user experience, while supporting established UI technologies (such as Web Dynpro ABAP and SAP GUI for HTML). Role Concept

Figure 38: Role Concept

The assigned user roles control which applications are available. The applications are available for a user depending on the roles that have been assigned to that user.

SAP S/4HANA Sales Business Roles with SAP Best Practices - Examples

Figure 39: SAP S/4HANA Sales Business Roles with SAP Best Practices - Examples

SAP has created some tailored user roles within the SAP Best Practices for SAP S/4HANA. These roles include the relevant applications to fulfil the main tasks of the respective role, for example: maintain master data, and create documents within a certain process. Examples of SAP S/4HANA sales business roles with SAP best practice include the following:

40

●

Internal Sales Representative

●

Billing clerk

●

Business Partner Master Data Specialist




●

Pricing Specialist

●

Shipping Specialist

●

Sales Manager


41



42




Unit 2 Exercise 1 Adjust the SAP Fiori Launchpad in SAP S/ 4HANA

Business Example You are new to use SAP S/4HANA and the new UX. You need to know what kind of applications (SAP Fiori Apps) are available and how you can add them to your Launchpad. To do this, you must be able to find the application in the catalog and add the application to the Launchpad. First you want to see whether an application is available, therefore you check the SAP Fiori Apps Library. Once you know that the application is available, you would like to include the application in your Launchpad Find the Manage G/L Account Master Data Tile in the Catalog 1. You want to know whether the Manage G/L Account Master Data application is available and included in your catalog assigned. Therefore, you use the SAP Fiori Apps Library to identify the catalog where the application is available. What is the name of the Assigned Business Catalog?

2. Check whether that application is included in your Training for TS410 (ZTRAINING_TS410) catalog as well. In the Gateway system (T4N), open the catalog that you are assigned. Check the original business catalog identified and the corresponding Tile. With a used function, you can see whether the tile is assigned to your catalog.

Where

Add the tile Manage G/L Account Master Data to your Launchpad 1. From the Easy Access Menu in the Gateway System, open the SAP Fiori Launchpad and include the Manage G/L Account Master Data applications in the SAP Fiori Launchpad.


43



Unit 2 Solution 1 Adjust the SAP Fiori Launchpad in SAP S/ 4HANA

Business Example You are new to use SAP S/4HANA and the new UX. You need to know what kind of applications (SAP Fiori Apps) are available and how you can add them to your Launchpad. To do this, you must be able to find the application in the catalog and add the application to the Launchpad. First you want to see whether an application is available, therefore you check the SAP Fiori Apps Library. Once you know that the application is available, you would like to include the application in your Launchpad Find the Manage G/L Account Master Data Tile in the Catalog 1. You want to know whether the Manage G/L Account Master Data application is available and included in your catalog assigned. Therefore, you use the SAP Fiori Apps Library to identify the catalog where the application is available. a) Open an internet browser and go to the Web page https:// fioriappslibrary.hana.ondemand.com/sap/fix/externalViewer/# b) In Categories , choose Apps . c) To search for the Manage G/L Account Master Data application, in the Name field, enter Manage G/L Account Master Data.

Search by App

d) Choose the first entry. e) Click the Implementation

information.

What is the name of the Assigned Business Catalog? The name of the catalog is:

SAP_SFIN_BC_GL_MASTER_DATA

2. Check whether that application is included in your Training for TS410 (ZTRAINING_TS410) catalog as well. In the Gateway system (T4N), open the catalog that you are assigned. Check the original business catalog identified and the corresponding Tile. With a used function, you can see whether the tile is assigned to your catalog. a) In the SAP Easy Access Menu of the Gateway System, open the catalog and double-click the entry Training for TS410 .

Where

Training for TS410

b) To search for the catalog identified in Step 1, in the Search for Catalog name of the catalog, SAP_SFIN_BC_GL_MASTER_DATA.

field, enter the

c) When you find the catalog, look for the tiles included and see whether the Manage G/L account Master Data tile is available. Click the first icon tiles on the header and search

44




for the tile Manage G/L account Master Data the catalog search.

. When you have found the tile, go back to

d) To check if this tile is included in the ZTRAINING_TS410 training catalog, in the Search for Catalog field, enter ZTRAINING_TS410. Click the first icon tiles on the header and search for the Manage G/L account Master Data tile. e) Leave the maintenance of the catalog. Add the tile Manage G/L Account Master Data to your Launchpad 1. From the Easy Access Menu in the Gateway System, open the SAP Fiori Launchpad and include the Manage G/L Account Master Data applications in the SAP Fiori Launchpad. a) Open the SAP Fiori Launchpad. b) Go to Group for TS410 and include the c) In the Launchpad, scroll down to icon.

Manage G/L Account Master Data

Group TS410 and choose the

d) To add a new tile, scroll down to the end of group e) In the All catalogs field, select the

application.

Personalize Homepage

TS410 and choose the + entry.

Training for TS410 catalog.

f) Search for the Manage G/L Account Master Data and click Add tile to group TS410 .

tile Manage G/L account Master Data

g) Go Back and exit Action mode . The new tile should be available now in the Group as the last tile.


45




46






1. Each SAP Fiori application is built around the user, rather than the function. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X

True

X

False

2. SAP Fiori applications can be classified as which of the following: Choose the correct answers. X

A Factsheet

X

B Educational

X

C Transactional

X

D Analytical

3. The SAP Enterprise Portal is also known as the SAP Fiori framework page. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X

True

X

False

4. The SAP Fiori Launchpad can only be deployed on the SAP Enterprise Portal platform. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X

True

X

False


47




1. Each SAP Fiori application is built around the user, rather than the function. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X

True

X

False

2. SAP Fiori applications can be classified as which of the following: Choose the correct answers. X

A Factsheet

X

B Educational

X

C Transactional

X

D Analytical

3. The SAP Enterprise Portal is also known as the SAP Fiori framework page. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X

True

X

False

4. The SAP Fiori Launchpad can only be deployed on the SAP Enterprise Portal platform. Determine whether this statement is true or false.

48

X

True

X

False




UNIT 3

SAP S/4HANA Basics

Lesson 1 Explain the Organizational Structures

50

Exercise 2: Display the Organizational Structures

67

Lesson 2 Understanding the Concept of Master Data

71

Exercise 3: Display a Material Master Record

77

Exercise 4: Display a Customer Master Record

81

UNIT OBJECTIVES ●

Explain the organizational structures

●

Understand the concept of master data


49



Unit 3 Lesson 1 Explain the Organizational Structures



Organizational Structures As a long-term SAP user, you want to some insight into the use of the organizational structures in SAP S/4HANA, and the areas in which we use organizational structure.

Figure 40: Structure in SAP S/4HANA — IDES

The enterprise structure of a company is mapped to SAP applications using organizational units. Organizational units represent the enterprise structure in terms of legal or business-related purposes. Organizational units include legal company entities, plants, storage locations, sales offices, and profit centers. The following are examples of organizational levels: ●

50

Client is the highest-level unit of all organizational elements. It represents the enterprise or headquarters group.



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Explain the Organizational Structures

●

●

●

Company code is a unit used in the balance sheet of a legally independent enterprise. It is the central organizational element of Financial Accounting (FI). Sales organization is the central organizational element of Sales and Distribution that controls the terms of sale to the customer. A division is usually used to represent a product line. Plant is the central organizational unit in the context of production planning. A plant can manufacture product, distribute product, or provide a service.

Material stocks can be differentiated within one plant according to the storage location in the context of inventory management. Organizational units may be assigned to a single application or to several applications. For example, a sales organization is assigned to Sales and Distribution, while a plant is assigned to materials management, production planning, and sales. Master data is created and assigned to organizational structures at various levels. Enterprise structure – Financials and Logistics

Figure 41: Enterprise structure – Financials and Logistics

A controlling (CO) area is the basic organizational unit in Management Accounting. It is a closed entity that is used for cost accounting. You can allocate costs only within a CO area. These allocations do not affect objects in other CO areas. An operating concern is the central organizational unit in Profitability Analysis (CO-PA). It represents the structure of external market segments for the enterprise. You can assign several CO areas to each operating concern so you can analyze them together. A company code is an independent accounting unit. You prepare financial and profit and loss (P&L) statements at the company code level to meet legal reporting requirements. You can use business areas (BAs) to group strategic business units for reporting financial and P&L statements. BAs are not suitable for auditing; they are only suitable for reporting purposes. BAs can also group business units that are associated with different company codes. In logistics, a plant is an organizational unit for categorizing an enterprise according to production, procurement, maintenance, and materials planning. A plant is a place where


51


For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Unit 3: SAP S/4HANA Basics

materials are produced, or goods and services are provided. A plant is assigned to a company code. A purchasing organization is an organizational unit used in MM – purchasing. A sales organization is an organizational unit that is used in sales order management. Controlling Area

Figure 42: Controlling Area

A controlling area represents a separate unit of Cost Accounting. The controlling area identifies a self-contained organizational structure for which costs and revenues can be managed and allocated. You can assign one or more company codes to a controlling area. This enables you to carry out cross-company-code Cost Accounting between the assigned company codes; however, this is only possible if the assigned company codes and the controlling area use the same operating chart of accounts and fiscal calendar year. Company Code

Figure 43: Company Code

The characteristics of a company code are as follows:

52




●

● ●

●

A company code does not usually extend national boundaries. You can create a company code according to tax law, commercial law, and other FI criteria. Company codes are usually created based on geographic considerations. A company code is the smallest SAP entity that supports a full legal set of books. There must be at least one company code in the production environment for a business to be live. A company code key is a four-character alphanumeric field.

Segment

Figure 44: Segment

International Accounting Standards (IAS) distinguishes between business and geographical segments as follows: ●

●

●

A segment is an organizational unit. In General Ledger Accounting, segments are used as a dimension for reporting purposes. A business segment represents a subactivity of a company that involves the manufacture of a product or provision of a service, with risks and revenues that differ from those of other business segments. A geographical segment provides information about risks and revenues that differ from other geographical segments in terms of economic or political factors.

According to the United States Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (US GAAP), a segment is a part of the company that incurs costs, generates revenue, and has its own financial data with respect to profit and resource consumption. The aims of segment reporting are as follows: ●

Provide an insight into different business activities of a diversified company.

●

Provide information about the general environment.

The purposes of segment reporting are as follows:


53



●

Provide a clear review of a company’s economic performance.

●

Improve forecasting of the potential sales and financial reserves of a company.

●

Anticipate risks and opportunities of a company.

Enterprise structure in the Procurement Process

Figure 45: Enterprise structure in the Procurement Process

In the SAP ERP application, organizational levels represent the legal or organizational structures of a company. Determining the organizational levels is an important procedure in your project. It is an essential prerequisite for all subsequent activities, such as the configuration of master data, including vendor master, material master, and FI-GL accounts. The organizational levels can be further described as follows: Client The client is the highest organizational unit. The client is self-contained in both legal and organizational terms. It is also self-contained in terms of data because it uses separate master records and an independent set of tables. For example, from a business point of view, the client can represent a corporate group. Specifications or data that you create and enter at the client level applies to all company codes and all other organizational units. Therefore, you do not have to enter the specifications and data more than once in the system at the client level. This ensures a uniform data status. The system assigns access authorization on a client-specific basis. You need to create a user master record for every user for the client to work. The client separates and stores all the user input. Similarly, the processing and evaluation of data are carried out on a client-specific basis. The system defines each client uniquely using a three-digit numeric key. Company Code The company code is the smallest organizational unit of external accounting for which a complete, self-contained bookkeeping system can be replicated. This includes entering

54




all the events that need to be posted to the accounts and creating a complete audit trail for the balance sheets and profit and loss statements. A company code represents an independent unit producing its own balance sheet, for example, a company within a corporate group (client). You can set up several company codes in a single client to maintain separate sets of accounting books. The system defines a company code uniquely in the client using a four-character alphanumeric key. Plant The plant is an organizational unit within logistics that subdivides an enterprise into production, procurement, and materials planning. The system defines a plant in the client using a four-character alphanumeric key. A plant can represent a variety of entities, including the following: ●

The production facility

●

The central issuing storage location

●

The regional sales office

●

The corporate headquarters

●

The maintenance location

Storage Location The storage location is an organizational unit that facilitates the differentiation of stocks of materials in a plant. Inventory management is carried out in the plant at the storage location level. The system defines a storage location using a four-character alphanumeric key. Each storage location has a unique key. Purchasing Organization The purchasing organization is an organizational unit within logistics that subdivides the enterprise according to the purchasing requirements. The purchasing organization is responsible for procuring materials or services and negotiating the conditions of purchase with vendors, and assumes responsibility for the purchasing activities.


55



Cross Company Code Purchasing Organization

Figure 46: Cross Company Code Purchasing Organization

If you need to set up a cross-company-code purchasing organization, you must not assign the purchasing organization to any company code. When you create a purchase order, the system asks you to enter the company code you want to procure the material. The data maintained in a view may be valid for more than one organizational level. This means that, in the material master, you need to maintain the organization-level data wherever required, such as in the company code, plant, and storage location. Plant-Specific Purchasing Organization

Figure 47: Plant-Specific Purchasing Organization

In plant-specific procurement, the purchasing organization is responsible for procuring the materials for one plant. The purchasing organization is assigned to one company code and one plant of the company code.

56




Enterprise Structure in Inventory Management

Figure 48: Enterprise Structure in Inventory Management

You can create the enterprise structure by assigning organizational levels to each other; therefore, a single client may contain several company codes. A company code may contain several plants; however, a plant can only belong to one company code. Hint: Because the key of each plant in a client is unique, and a plant can belong to only one company code, by specifying the plant, you can specify the plant and the company code simultaneously. You can assign several storage locations to one plant, but a specific storage location can only belong to one plant. Storage locations are uniquely defined for a single plant. The key of a storage location needs to be unique within a plant. Within a client, you can use the same key for different storage locations because when you specify a storage location, you always have to specify the plant.


57



Enterprise Structure in Manufacturing Execution

Figure 49: Enterprise Structure in Manufacturing Execution

Enterprise Structure in Sales and Distribution

Figure 50: Enterprise Structure in Sales and Distribution

Organizational levels represent the structure of an enterprise organization. They also represent the legal and organizational views of an enterprise. The order-to-cash process is part of the Sales and Distribution (SD) application component. A sales and distribution component module includes organizational levels that are unique to the sales and distribution processes, such as sales organization, distribution channel, division, and shipping point. It also includes organizational levels, such as company code or plant, which are used in SD and in other modules. You can represent your enterprise structure using organizational levels based on your business processes.

58




Sales Organization

Figure 51: Sales Organization

The sales organization groups the enterprise according to its sales and distribution requirements. The sales organization considers the regional, national, or international subdivision of the market. Each sales organization has a unique company code, but more than one sales organization can be assigned to a company code. If you use order to cash, you need at least one sales organization. You need to maintain your own master data for a sales organization. In the sales statistics, the sales organization is the highest summation level. All items in a document created during the order-to-cash business process (all items of an order, an outbound delivery, or a billing document) belong to a sales organization. Distribution Channel

Figure 52: Distribution Channel


59



A distribution channel is a means by which customers procure goods or services. Examples of distribution channels are wholesale trade, retail trade, and internet trade. Several distribution channels can be assigned to a sales organization. If you use a sales and distribution module, you need at least one distribution channel. A distribution channel performs the following tasks: ●

Defines responsibilities

●

Achieves flexible pricing

●

Differentiates sales statistics

Division

Figure 53: Division

A division is used to group materials or services. Motorcycles, spare parts, and services are examples of possible divisions in a sales organization that sells motorcycles. One sales organization can be responsible for several divisions. Every sales and distribution module must have at least one division. The system uses a division to determine the sales areas assigned to a material or a service. For example, a division can represent a product group. Therefore, you can restrict price agreements with a customer to a certain division. You can also conduct statistical analysis by division.

60




Sales Area

Figure 54: Sales Area

A sales area is a combination of a sales organization, a distribution channel, and a division. A sales area defines the distribution channel that a sales organization uses to sell products from a certain division. Each SD document is assigned to exactly one sales area. This assignment cannot be changed. A sales area can belong to only one company code, and this relationship is created by assigning the sales organization to the organizational level. During the processing of the SD documents, the system accesses master data according to the sales area. Some examples of sales area master data information are customer master data, material master data, prices, and discounts. In addition, the system checks to make sure that certain entries are valid according to the sales area.


61



Assignment Delivery Plant

Figure 55: Assignment Delivery Plant

The delivery plant is assigned to the combination of Sales Organization and Distribution Channel. Several plants can be assigned to one combination. One plant can be assigned to several combinations of Sales Organization and Distribution Channel. Shipping Point

Figure 56: Shipping Point

A shipping point is the responsible enterprise structure for the entire shipping process. One plant can have several shipping points. One shipping point can be assigned to several plants.

62




Overall Assignment from Sales and Distribution

Figure 57: Overall Assignment from Sales and Distribution

The following relationships exist between the Sales and Distribution organizational elements, Materials Management, and Accounting: ●

● ●

●

●

A sales organization can be subdivided into several distribution chains which determine the responsibility for a distribution channel. A single distribution channel can be assigned to one or more sales organizations. Several divisions can be assigned to a sales organization, which is responsible for the materials or services provided. By assigning sales organizations and plants you create a link between company codes and sales organizations. A plant, though always linked to one company code, can be assigned to different sales organizations. Within a company code, several sales organizations can be active. A plant can be assigned to different sales organizations. All of these sales organizations can sell from that plant.


63



Enterprise Structures in HCM

Figure 58: Enterprise Structures in HCM

The figure shows the following levels of the enterprise structure: ●

Client The client is the highest level of the enterprise structure. A client can contain one or more company codes.

●

Company code The company code is defined in Financial Accounting (FI). Legally required financial statements, such as balance sheets and profit and loss statements, are created at the company code level.

●

Personnel area The personnel area is unique for each client. Each personnel area must be assigned to a company code. The individual personnel areas in a company code have four-digit alphanumeric identifiers.

●

Personnel subarea The principal organizational aspects of human resources are controlled at this level, mainly, Time Management and Payroll.

64




Enterprise Structure in Enterprise Asset Management

Figure 59: Enterprise Structure in Enterprise Asset Management

A plant is one of the most important organizational units within Logistics. It usually represents a production unit of a company. The plant in which the operational systems of a company are installed is called a maintenance plant. If maintenance work is planned at this plant, the maintenance plant is also the maintenance planning plant (this is also referred to as the planning plant). Maintenance plants that do not plan their maintenance tasks are assigned to planning plants. Planning is performed for the maintenance plants in the planning plants that you enter. Maintenance plants are subdivided according to location-based criteria such as site, building, and coordinates. A maintenance plant can also be subdivided into plant sections based on responsibility for production. The person responsible for a plant section is called the plant engineer, and the plant engineer is the contact person who coordinates production and maintenance. The units of capacity in plant maintenance are managed as maintenance work centers. Maintenance work centers are assigned to the respective maintenance plants as workshops. A maintenance planning plant is the organizational unit in which maintenance requirements are planned. These requirements either come from your own plant or from another maintenance plant assigned to this maintenance planning plant. The planners within a maintenance planning plant are defined by maintenance planner groups.


65



Cross Plant Maintenance

Figure 60: Cross Plant Maintenance

Maintenance planning and execution may occur in the same plant or in different plants in the following ways: ●

Plant-specific planning One maintenance plant is assigned to a planning plant. In most organizational structures, maintenance measures are planned in the same plant where the maintenance requirement occurs. The maintenance orders are executed by workshops from the same plant, and the spare parts are stored in the same plant (plant 1000, for example).

●

Cross-plant planning Multiple maintenance plants are assigned to a planning plant. In one plant (plant 1200, for example), there is a need for maintenance, as a technical system requires maintenance (maintenance plant). All further functions such as maintenance planning, order execution, and spare parts storage are, however, the responsibility of another plant.

●

Other constellations The planning of maintenance measures and the spare parts procurement take for one plant (plant 1300, for example) place in another plant (plant 1000). However, the tasks are performed by locally available workshops.

66




Unit 3 Exercise 2 Display the Organizational Structures

Business Example You want to gain an overview about the enterprise structures in Sales and Distribution, Logistics, and Finance. Therefore, you need to log on to the back-end system and check configuration. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Log on to the back-end system with your user, navigate to the Definition of Enterprise Structure. 2. What is the address of company code 1010? Address:_________________________________ 3. What is the valuation level? Valuation Level:_________________________________ 4. What is the key for Plant 1 DE? Plant:_________________________________ 5. What is the first key for the Sales Organization Dom. Sales Org DE? Sales organization: _________________________________ 6. Which plants are assigned to company code 1010? Plants: _________________________________ 7. Which sales organization is assigned to company code 1010? Sales Organization: _________________________________


67



Unit 3 Solution 2 Display the Organizational Structures

Business Example You want to gain an overview about the enterprise structures in Sales and Distribution, Logistics, and Finance. Therefore, you need to log on to the back-end system and check configuration. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Log on to the back-end system with your user, navigate to the Definition of Enterprise Structure. a) Log on to the back-end system with your user. b) On the SAP Easy Access Menu, choose Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project . Alternatively, use transaction code SPRO. c) On the Customizing Execute Project (F5).

initial screen, choose the

d) Open the entry

→ Definition .

Enterprise structure

SAP Reference IMG icon

You see the Definition of the enterprise Structures in various areas. 2. What is the address of company code 1010? Address:_________________________________ a) In the Financial accounting Code .

menu area, choose

b) Choose Edit Company Code Data c) Double-click 1010 and choose the

Edit, Copy, Delete, Check Company

. Address icon.

The address is Dietmar Hopp Allee 16, 69190 Walldorf. d) Go back to Display IMG . 3. What is the valuation level? Valuation Level:_________________________________ a) In the Logistics General menu area, choose

Define valuation level .

The Valuation area is plant. b) Go back to Display IMG . 4. What is the key for Plant 1 DE? Plant:_________________________________ a) In the Logistics General menu area, choose

68

Define, copy, delete, check plant

.




b) Choose Define Plant. The key for Plant 1 DE is 1010. c) Go back to Display IMG . 5. What is the first key for the Sales Organization Dom. Sales Org DE? Sales organization: _________________________________ a) In the Sales and Distribution Organization .

menu area, choose

b) Choose Define Sales Organization

Define, copy, delete, Sales

.

The first key for Sales Organization Dom. Sales Org DE is 1010. c) Go back to Display IMG . 6. Which plants are assigned to company code 1010? Plants: _________________________________ a) In the Assignments menu area, choose b) Choose Assign plant to company code

Logistics General. . .

The plants 1010 and 1020 are assigned to company code 1010. c) Go back to Display IMG . 7. Which sales organization is assigned to company code 1010? Sales Organization: _________________________________ a) In the Assignments menu area, choose

Sales and Distribution

b) Choose Assign Sales Organization to company code

.

.

The Sales Organization 1010 is assigned to company code 1010. c) Go back to Display IMG .


69




70





Unit 3 Lesson 2 Understanding the Concept of Master Data



Master Data in SAP S/4HANA As a long-term SAP user, you want some insights into the general use of master data records. To gain an overview, you look at the business partner and the material master record.

Figure 61: Business Partner Approach in SAP S/4HANA

There are redundant object models in the traditional ERP system, where the vendor master and customer master is used. The (mandatory) target approach in SAP S/4HANA is the Business Partner approach. Business partners can be categorized as a person, group, or organization, as follows: ●

●

An organization represents units, such as a company (for example, a legal person), parts of a legal entity (for example, a department) or an association. Organization is an umbrella term to map every kind of situation in the day-to-day business activities. A group represents a shared living arrangement, a married couple, or an executive board.

With current development, transaction BP is the single point of entry to create, edit, and display master data for business partners, customers, and vendors.


71



Business Partner and Assigned Roles

Figure 62: Business Partner and Assigned Roles

The Business Partner is created and the roles necessary for the usage of the BP are assigned. The different roles are created on certain organizational levels. The role FI Vendor, which is necessary to use the BP in FI based purchase postings, is assigned to the company code. So the data in this role can be maintained in each company code different. Note that vendor is also called supplier. You can assign a different vendor number and customer number to your BP inside the BP maintenance transaction. In the general role of the business partner, the name and address of the BP is entered. In the role FI vendor (BP used as a vendor in FI), you enter the following data: ●

The currency used for transactions with the vendor

●

The terms of payment

●

The names of important contacts related to the vendor (for example, sales people)

●

The reconciliation account from the general ledger (G/L), because the vendor is a creditor of the company

You can decide whether to maintain many roles at once or to add roles later, when you need them.

72



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Understanding the Concept of Master Data

Customers and Vendors Represented as Business Partners

Figure 63: Customers and Vendors Represented as Business Partners

By using the Business Partner (BP) approach, it is possible to manage master data centrally for customers and vendors. The user interface for SAP S/4HANA Cloud & On Premise is transaction BP. There is no specific user interface for customer/vendor, as known from SAP Business Suite (Transactions XD01, XD02, XD03 or VD01, VD02, VD03 / XK01, XK02, XK03 or MK01, MK02, MK03, and so on, are not available). Calls to these transactions are redirected to transaction BP. Customer/Vendor Integration (CVI) - Context and Motivation The Customer/Vendor Integration (CVI) component ensures the synchronization between the BP object and the customer/vendor objects. ●

Customer/Vendor Object Model Limitations -

●

Only a single address No relation between a vendor and a customer for the same real world entity (no role concept)

-

No persons (B2C)

-

No time-dependency

Business Partner – SAP Strategic Object Model -

General data is shared across different roles

-

One BP could perform multiple roles, for example, customer and vendor (supplier)

-

One BP could have multiple addresses

-

Time-dependency object attributes and relationships

-

Provide harmonized architecture

CVI Impact and Customer Business Processes The following outlines the impact of CVI on business processes in SAP S/4HANA, OnPremise:


73



●

●

●

●

●

The BP transaction code is the single point of entry to create, edit, and display master data for BPs, customers, and vendors. CVI ensures that customer and vendor master data tables are updated automatically after a BP is created or changed. IDOC or BAPI for customer/vendor creation not calling CVI functions CVI_EI_INBOUND_MAIN can no longer be used. As a prerequisite of an ECC-to-SAP S/4HANA conversion project, all the customers, vendors, and their contacts must be converted to BPs. It is recommended, but not mandatory, that BP ID and Customer-ID/Vendor ID are the same.

CVI Conversion Steps

Figure 64: CVI Conversion Steps

The steps for CVI conversion are as follows: 1. Preparation Implement SAP S/4HANA pre-checks according to the Pre-Checks S/4HANA Conversion Guide chapter. Activate the CA_BP_SOA business function. Check CVI customizing and trigger necessary changes, for example, the missing BP role category. Define number assignments according to the Introduce Business Partner Approach (CVI) S/4HANA Conversion Guide chapter. 2. Synchronization Synchronization (data load) according to the Introduce Business Partner Approach (CVI) S/4 Conversion Guide. 3. Conversion The conversion step is part of the system conversion from the ECC system to S/4HANA on-premise. No additional CVI action is required.

74




4. Post Processing/Test Activation of post processing direction BP -> Customer/Vendor. BP customizing must be consistent including field attributes. Material Master Record

Figure 65: Material Master Record

The material master contains the information that a company needs to manage a type of material. The material master defines how a product is sold, manufactured, purchased, inventoried, and costed. The information in the material master is grouped into views that are organized by business function.


75



76




Unit 3 Exercise 3 Display a Material Master Record

Business Example You want to gain an overview what kind of information is stored in a material master record. You will check the material master for the bicycle and see how a material master data record is structured. The material master for the bicycle is available. The number to be used is TF1##. You will use an SAP Fiori app for this task. Therefore, you need to log on to the Gateway Server and start the SAP FioriI Launchpad. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. To gain a first overview about the structure of a material master record, check the material master for the bicycle T-F1## to be produced. Check the Basic Data, the Sales Data, the Work Scheduling Data and the Accounting Data. Use the following data: Field

Value

Material number

T-F1##

Plant

1010

Sales Organization

1010

Distribution Channel

10

2. What is the material group and the gross weight of the material? Material Group: ______________________________________________________________ Gross Weight: _______________________________________________________________ 3. What is the delivery plant for this material? Delivery Plant: ______________________________________________________________ 4. What is the transportation group for this material? Transportation Group :_________________________________________________________ 5. Who is the production Supervisor for this material? Production Supervisor:_________________________________________________________ 6. Which is the valuation class for this material? Valuation Class :_________________________________________________________ 7. Go back to the SAP Fiori Launchpad.


77



Unit 3 Solution 3 Display a Material Master Record

Business Example You want to gain an overview what kind of information is stored in a material master record. You will check the material master for the bicycle and see how a material master data record is structured. The material master for the bicycle is available. The number to be used is TF1##. You will use an SAP Fiori app for this task. Therefore, you need to log on to the Gateway Server and start the SAP FioriI Launchpad. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. To gain a first overview about the structure of a material master record, check the material master for the bicycle T-F1## to be produced. Check the Basic Data, the Sales Data, the Work Scheduling Data and the Accounting Data. Use the following data: Field

Value

Material number

T-F1##

Plant

1010

Sales Organization

1010


10

a) On the Launchpad, choose the b) In the Initial screen of Enter.

Display Material tile.

Display Material , in the Material field, enter T-F1##, and press

c) In the dialog box, select views choose the following views: ●

Basic Data 1

●

Sales: Sales Org Data 1

●

Sales: General / Plant Data

●

Work Scheduling

●

Accounting 1

d) Press Enter. e) In the Window Organizational Levels

78

dialog box, enter the following data:




Field

Value

Plant

1010

Sales Organization

1010


10

f) Press Enter. 2. What is the material group and the gross weight of the material? a) Look at Basic Data 1 . The material group is

L004 and the gross weight is

6,850 kg .

Material Group: ______________________________________________________________ Gross Weight: _______________________________________________________________ 3. What is the delivery plant for this material? a) Look at Sales : Sales Organization 1 The delivery plant is

.

1010 .

Delivery Plant: ______________________________________________________________ 4. What is the transportation group for this material? a) Look at Sales : General / Plant The transportation group is

. 0001 – on pallets .

Transportation Group :_________________________________________________________ 5. Who is the production Supervisor for this material? a) Look at Work Scheduling view. The production supervisor is

YB1.

Production Supervisor:_________________________________________________________ 6. Which is the valuation class for this material? a) Look at Accounting view 1 . The valuation class is

7920 .

Valuation Class :_________________________________________________________ 7. Go back to the SAP Fiori Launchpad.


79



80




Unit 3 Exercise 4 Display a Customer Master Record

Business Example You want to see how the customer master record is structure in the system. You want to search for particular information in an existing customer master record. Because SAP S/ 4HANA uses the business partner, you need to see how the master record looks now. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. You want to see what the new customer – business partner looks like in the system. Therefore, check an existing master record, T-OVW1, and search for particular information. Use the following information: Field

Value

Business Partner

T-OVW1

Sales Area

1010 / 10 /00

Company Code

1010

2. For which partner roles is the business partner maintained? The business partner is maintained for the following partner roles: ___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ 3. Which reconciliation account is maintained for the business partner? Reconciliation Account: _______________________________________________________ 4. Which shipping condition is maintained for the business partner? Shipping Conditions: _______________________________________________________ 5. Go back to the SAP Fiori Launchpad.


81



Unit 3 Solution 4 Display a Customer Master Record

Business Example You want to see how the customer master record is structure in the system. You want to search for particular information in an existing customer master record. Because SAP S/ 4HANA uses the business partner, you need to see how the master record looks now. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. You want to see what the new customer – business partner looks like in the system. Therefore, check an existing master record, T-OVW1, and search for particular information. Use the following information: Field

Value

Business Partner

T-OVW1

Sales Area

1010 / 10 /00

Company Code

1010

a) On the Launchpad, choose the

Maintain Business Partner

b) On the Initial screen of Maintain Business Partner T-OVW1 and press Enter.

tile.

, in the Business Partner

field, enter

2. For which partner roles is the business partner maintained? a) In the Display in BP role field, choose the

Role Detail icon.

The business partner is maintained for the roles Customer .

FLCU01 Customer and FLCU00 FI

The business partner is maintained for the following partner roles: ___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ 3. Which reconciliation account is maintained for the business partner? a) Choose the partner role

FI Customer partner role.

b) Choose the Company Code icon. In the Customer: Account Management domestic reconciliation account.

you find the 12100000 – Trade receivables

Reconciliation Account: _______________________________________________________ 4. Which shipping condition is maintained for the business partner?

82




a) Switch to the Partner role Customer. b) Choose the Sales and Distribution

icon. Leave the Application.

On the Shipping tab you find the shipping conditions

01 – Standard .

Shipping Conditions: _______________________________________________________ 5. Go back to the SAP Fiori Launchpad.


83




84






1. A company code is the basic organizational unit in Management Accounting. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X

True

X

False

2. Which of the following statements about a controlling area are false? Choose the correct answers. X

A A controlling (CO) area is the basic organizational unit in Management Accounting.

X

B The controlling area identifies a self-contained organizational structure for which costs and revenues can be managed and allocated.

X

C Allocation of costs within a CO area affects objects in other CO areas.

X

D You can only assign one company code to a controlling area.

X

E You can allocate costs only within a CO area.

3. Client, plant, and ___________ are examples of organizational levels that play a role in the maintenance of material master records. Choose the correct answer. X

A Transaction

X

B Master data

X

C Storage location

4. Customer/Vendor integration ensures that customer and vendor master data tables are updated automatically when a Business Partner is created. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X

True

X

False


85



5. Which of the following statements about the material master is false? Choose the correct answer. X

A The material master defines how a product is purchased.

X

B The material master defines how a product is sold.

X

C The information in the material master is grouped into views that are organized by supplier.

X

D The material master contains the information that a company needs to manage a type of material.

6. A maintenance planning plant is the organizational unit in which maintenance requirements are planned. Determine whether this statement is true or false.

86

X

True

X

False





1. A company code is the basic organizational unit in Management Accounting. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X

True

X

False

2. Which of the following statements about a controlling area are false? Choose the correct answers. X

A A controlling (CO) area is the basic organizational unit in Management Accounting.

X

B The controlling area identifies a self-contained organizational structure for which costs and revenues can be managed and allocated.

X

C Allocation of costs within a CO area affects objects in other CO areas.

X

D You can only assign one company code to a controlling area.

X

E You can allocate costs only within a CO area.

3. Client, plant, and ___________ are examples of organizational levels that play a role in the maintenance of material master records. Choose the correct answer. X

A Transaction

X

B Master data

X

C Storage location

4. Customer/Vendor integration ensures that customer and vendor master data tables are updated automatically when a Business Partner is created. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X

True

X

False


87



5. Which of the following statements about the material master is false? Choose the correct answer. X

A The material master defines how a product is purchased.

X

B The material master defines how a product is sold.

X

C The information in the material master is grouped into views that are organized by supplier.

X

D The material master contains the information that a company needs to manage a type of material.

6. A maintenance planning plant is the organizational unit in which maintenance requirements are planned. Determine whether this statement is true or false.

88

X

True

X

False




UNIT 4

Financial Accounting and Management Accounting: Overview

Lesson 1 Explaining Financial Accounting (FI)

90

Lesson 2 Explaining Management Accounting (CO)

97

Lesson 3 Outlining the Integration Between FI and CO

99

UNIT OBJECTIVES ●

Explain Financial Accounting (FI)

●

Explain Management Accounting (CO)

●

Explain the integration between FI and CO


89



Unit 4 Lesson 1 Explaining Financial Accounting (FI)



Financial Accounting Overview

Figure 66: Financial Supply Chain

The central task of General Ledger Accounting is to provide a comprehensive picture of external accounting and financial records. The General Ledger (G/L) serves as a complete record of all business transactions. In addition to the G/L, you can use subledgers for customers, suppliers and so on. Every posting that is made in the subledgers generates a corresponding posting to the assigned G/L accounts. This ensures that the subledgers are always reconciled with the G/L. The important tasks of Financial Accounting (FI) are the recording of monetary and value flows, and inventory evaluation.

90



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Explaining Financial Accounting (FI)

The G/L contains the records of all accounting-relevant business transactions on to G/L accounts from a business point of view. Every G/L is structured according to a chart of accounts. The chart of accounts contains the definitions of all G/L accounts. These definitions include the account number, the G/L account designation, and the categorization of the G/L account as an income statement or a balance sheet account. The G/L often contains only collective postings, a collection of all AR/AP. In such cases, the posting data represented in subledgers pass on their data in compressed form to the G/L. Reconciliation accounts connect the subledgers to the G/L in real time. This means that as soon as a posting is made to a subledger, the posting to the respective reconciliation account in the G/L takes place. Accounts payable (AP) records all business transactions relating to suppliers. It takes much of its data from the procure-to-pay business process. Accounts receivable (AR) records transactions and manages accounting data of all customers. It takes much of its data from the order-to-cash business process. Asset Accounting (AA) deals with both current assets and non-current assets (fixed assets). Bank Ledger (FI-BL) supports the booking of cash flows. Stakeholders of Financials

Figure 67: Stakeholders of Financials

Financials can be subdivided in two major parts: Financial Accounting (FI) and Management Accounting. Financial Accounting has the task to meet legal requirements. The main tasks are as follows: ●

Post all financial transactions, revenues, and expenses.

●

Keep them unchanged in the system for reporting purposes.

●

Allow the setting up of a profit and loss statement and a balance sheet to fulfill the legal requirements of a country or of a financial reporting standard.

Financial Accounting is subject to legal requirements of a country, and, in addition, to requirements of certain financial reporting standards, such as US GAAP, IFRS, HGB. The


91


For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Unit 4: Financial Accounting and Management Accounting: Overview

stakeholders of such financial reportings are outside the companies, for example, suppliers, banks, tax government, and so on. Management Accounting is an internal tool for controllers and the Management reporting. The main tasks are as follows: ● ●

●

●

Reflect cost and revenues. Analyze cost variances and inefficiencies in the company and in production processes or service processes. Provide results for individual cost objects, such as cost centers, cost objects, and market segments. Provide data for cost center managers, project managers, and other employees to fulfill their tasks.

Because controlling is internal, you may use different values than used in FI. Additional cost (imputed costs) can be used in addition, some cost (neutral cost) can be excluded, different prices (transfer prices) can be used to valuate cost of purchased goods or cost of goods manufactured different. The stakeholders of such management reportings are only inside the companies, for example, cost center managers, project mangers, sales representatives, and so on. General Ledger and Subledger

Figure 68: General Ledger and Subledger

The G/L is managed at the company code level and used to compile the balance sheet and the profit and loss (P&L) statement. The material goods of a company are listed in the balance sheet, and are divided into assets and liabilities.

92




The business transactions that are entered in the subledgers, materials management, and the Treasury flow into the balance sheet in real time. The component, Treasury (TR), focuses on functions, such as payment means, treasury management (including financial means, foreign exchange, derivatives, and bonds), loans, and market risk management. Balance Sheet and P&L Statement

Figure 69: Balance Sheet and P&L Statement

The aim of recording business transactions is to create a balance sheet and P&L statement report. This report must meet specific national requirements or requirements of used financial reporting standards. You can set up different balance sheet and P&L structures (financial statement versions) to meet reporting requirements of your country or your used financial reporting standards. These structures define which accounts should appear in which balance sheet items.


93



Parallel Financial Reporting

Figure 70: Parallel G/L Ledger

General Ledger Accounting has one leading ledger in each client. However, other ledgers can also exist within the G/L, for example, to provide different ledgers for different accounting reporting standards. In G/L Accounting, one ledger has the role of a leading ledger. However, as in older systems, you can still deal with different reporting standards by using additional (parallel) accounts. Financial Accounting Versus Management Accounting

Figure 71: Financial Accounting Versus Management Accounting

FI is intended for legal reporting. It can be used to draw up a balance sheet and an income statement at the level of accounting entities. The purpose of Management Accounting is to collect revenue and expenses by areas of responsibility to be used for internal management reporting purposes.

94




The level at which FI is needed is determined by law. Legal reporting is different for each country. Management Accounting analyzes costs and revenues at high levels across country boundaries. For example, it can analyze costs for all production departments worldwide. Costs and revenues from FI are used in Management Accounting. In Management Accounting, financial data can be allocated across several (FI) boundaries. The results in Management Accounting can be compared with the result in FI (reconciliation). Management Accounting provides Controlling (CO) objects, which can represent areas of responsibilities that incur costs, revenues, or both, which allow an organization to track both costs and revenues internally. In SAP S/4HANA, Financial Accounting and Management Accounting use common line items for actual data, stored in a Universal Journal . The technical name of the table is ACDOCA. The common line items provide the following: ●

A single source of truth for all accounting components. Reconciliation is a topic of the past bringing large cost and time savings.

●

A simple but holistic data model. SAP HANA can be leveraged in the best possible manner bringing unprecedented insight (in both speed and content!).

●

The universal journal combines and harmonizes the good qualities of all accounting components. The simplification of the application is a required step and a great foundation for further enhancements.

●

Non-disruptive innovation and simplification. SAP strives to provide a true next generation application with the least possible disruption, safeguarding customer investments and processes.

SAP S/4HANA Finance - Simplified Data Model

Figure 72: SAP S/4HANA Finance - Simplified Data Model


95



The new Architecture implements a new data model to SAP S/4HANA Finance, which implies benefits, as follows: ●

One line item table with full detail for all components.

●

Data is stored only once, so no reconciliation needed by architecture.

●

● ●

Fast multi-dimensional reporting on the Universal Journal is possible without replicating data to Business Intelligence (BI). If BI is in place, one single BI extractor is needed. Reduction of memory footprint through elimination of redundancy. Technical preparation is done to enhance important structural capabilities of the Financials solution (for example, multi-GAAP, additional currencies).

Non-Disruptiveness Usage of SAP S/4HANA

Figure 73: Non-Disruptiveness Usage of SAP S/4HANA

If you migrate from an ERP System to SAP S/4HANA, despite the new data model many, old programs will still run. Therefore, SAP provides compatibility views, as follows: ● ●

Read access from custom ABAP programs or reports to prior tables will work as before Read access is automatically re-directed to the universal journal as the new single source of truth


96





Unit 4 Lesson 2 Explaining Management Accounting (CO)



Management Accounting Components

Figure 74: Different Focus of Financial Accounting (Fl) and Management Accounting (CO)

CO contains all of the functions necessary for controlling cost and revenue effectively. It covers all aspects of management controlling and includes many tools for compiling information for company management. Financial reports that are used for external reporting purposes, such as balance sheets and profit and loss (P&L) statements, are created in Fl. Similar to the various legal requirements set by relevant financial authorities, these external reporting requirements are prescribed through general accounting standards, such as generally accepted accounting principles in the US (US GAAP) or International Financial Reporting Standard (IFRS).


97



Components of CO

Figure 75: Components of Management Accounting

CO consists of several components, as shown in the figure. Similarly, costs from Overhead Cost Controlling (CO-OM) and Product Cost Controlling (COPC) can flow into Profitability Analysis (CO-PA) where, together with revenue data, the system can use these costs to calculate operating results, making it possible to establish how profitable the various areas are. Other SAP ERP applications can post costs or revenues to CO. Postings to an expense account in Fl, for example, can cause cost postings in CO-OM. In the same way, FI can post revenues directly to CO-PA. Cost flows also occur between Fl and CO-PC, where the system enters raw material costs that are incurred in the production process. In addition, there is a flow back into Fl if the system activates the production costs as a finished product or work in process (WIP). Other SAP ERP components, such as Human Capital Management (HCM) and Logistics (materials management, Sales and Distribution, and production planning), are also integrated with CO. LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●

98





Unit 4 Lesson 3 Outlining the Integration Between FI and CO



Explaining the Integration between FI and CO

Figure 76: Assignment of Company Codes to Controlling Area

By assigning more than one company code to a CO area, you can perform cost accounting for all company codes. You can allocate values in Management Accounting that affect more than one company code. In cross-company-code cost accounting, a CO area and its company codes can have different currencies. The currency of a CO area can be same as that of a company code. You can use the following currencies in Management Accounting: ●

CO area currency


99



●

Company code currency or object currency

●

Transaction currency (used for posting a document to Management Accounting)

By default, cross-company-code cost accounting displays the company code currency as the object currency. You cannot change this default value. If you have assigned only one company code to a CO area, you can also assign the object currency for each CO object, such as a cost center, as required. You can assign more than one company code to a CO area. This assignment enables controlling across company codes. A CO area and its company codes must use the same operating chart of accounts and the same fiscal year variant. However, you can link these accounts to country-specific accounts by using an alternative account number that is stored in the master data record for accounts. LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●

100






1. Which of the following are tasks of Financial Accounting? Choose the correct answers. X

A Financial Accounting posts all financial transactions, revenues, and expenses.

X

B Financial Accounting provides data for cost center managers.

X

C Financial Accounting analyzes cost variances and inefficiencies in the company.

X

D Financial Accounting allows the setting up of a profit and loss statement and a balance sheet.

2. In G/L accounting, you can deal with different reporting standards by using parallel accounts. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X

True

X

False


101




1. Which of the following are tasks of Financial Accounting? Choose the correct answers. X

A Financial Accounting posts all financial transactions, revenues, and expenses.

X

B Financial Accounting provides data for cost center managers.

X

C Financial Accounting analyzes cost variances and inefficiencies in the company.

X

D Financial Accounting allows the setting up of a profit and loss statement and a balance sheet.

2. In G/L accounting, you can deal with different reporting standards by using parallel accounts. Determine whether this statement is true or false.

102

X

True

X

False




UNIT 5

Financial Accounting and Management Accounting: Basics

Lesson 1 Defining General Ledger (G/L) Accounts and Cost Elements

105

Exercise 5: Create a Primary Cost Account

113

Lesson 2 Defining Cost Centers

117

Exercise 6: Create and Display Cost Centers

121

Lesson 3 Posting a G/L Account Document

126

Exercise 7: Create a Posting from Financial Accounting

129

Exercise 8: Display a G/L Account and G/L Account Line Items Exercise 9: Check an Account in the Financial Statement Version (Optional)

133 139

Exercise 10: Display a Financial Statement

141

Lesson 4 Working with Business Partners and Invoices

145

Exercise 11: Create a Business Partner (FI Vendor)

151

Exercise 12: Enter a Vendor Invoice with Document Splitting

157

Exercise 13: Post a Manual Outgoing Payment with Check Printing

161

Exercise 14: Display Vendors Account

165

Lesson 5 Working with Asset Accounting

168

Exercise 15: Create an Asset Master Record

175

Exercise 16: Post an Integrated Asset Acquisition

179

Lesson 6 Working with Activity Types

184

Exercise 17: Create a Secondary Cost Account and an Activity Type

187

Exercise 18: Post an Activity Allocation

197

Lesson 7 Working with Internal Orders

201

Exercise 19: Maintain Master Data of an Internal Order


207

103


For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Unit 5: Financial Accounting and Management Accounting: Basics

Exercise 20: Create Transaction-Based Postings to an Internal Order

211

Exercise 21: Settle Orders at Period-End

215

UNIT OBJECTIVES

104

●

Define a G/L account

●

Create a cost center

●

Post to a G/L account

●

Run a financial statement and query an account

●

Create a vendor master record

●

Post a vendor invoice in FI

●

Create an asset master record

●

Plan rates for cost center and activity type

●

Post an activity allocation

●

Create an internal order




Unit 5 Lesson 1 Defining General Ledger (G/L) Accounts and Cost Elements



Chart of Account

Figure 77: Chart of Account

Each G/L is set up according to a chart of accounts. The chart of accounts contains the definitions of all G/L accounts. The definitions consist of the account number, the account name, and the type of G/L account (profit and loss (P&L) account or a balance sheet account).


105



Assignment of Company Codes to Chart of Accounts

Figure 78: Assignment of Company Codes to Chart of Accounts

A chart of accounts can be used by multiple company codes so that the general ledgers of these company codes have an identical structure.

General Ledger Account and Cost Element

Figure 79: Maintenance of a G/L Account in Different Company Codes

The two segments of the G/L master record are as follows: ●

Chart of accounts segment The chart of accounts segment contains a description of the account, an indication as to whether the account is a balance sheet account or a P&L account, the account group that controls the company code segment fields, and the consolidation account number.

●

106

Company code segment



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Defining General Ledger (G/L) Accounts and Cost Elements

The company code segment contains values specific to how the company code will manage that account. The following controls are found in the company code segment: ●

Account control

●

Account management

●

Bank or financial details

●

Joint ventures

●

Interest calculation

●

Document control

Expenditures and Cost

Figure 80: Expenditures and Cost

In the economical theory, there are two approaches for values: In the first approach, the values in Financial Accounting and Management Accounting are the same. Controlling provides additional reporting opportunities by separating the FI documents along additional characteristics, such as segments, profit centers, projects, stored in a “coding block”. The results may be P&L statements and balance sheets per segment, per profit center or per project. In the second approach (most used in central Europe), Management Accounting is based on cost and revenues. Costs are only those expenditures, which are as follows: ●

Related to the business of the company

●

Exactly assigned to periods (source specific)

●

Valuated


107



For example, a gift to a welfare organization is an expenditure, but not a cost, because it is not the “business of the company” to make gifts. Expenditures, which do not meet the definition of costs, are only reflected in Financials, and not in Management Accounting. They are called “neutral expenditures”. In addition you may want to take additional costs into account, which are not reflected in FI, for example, because no financial document exists. Examples could include the following: ●

●

●

If you run your company in own offices and buildings, you do not pay rents. But of course they are production factors, which have to be reflected in the costs of the products. So you add the missing rents by additional (imputed) costs in Management Accounting. They are not part of Financial Accounting, because they are not based on a legal document like invoices. If you did invest a huge amount of money in your company you cannot invest your money in the capital market e.g. to earn interests. So the “not realized interests” are the costs (opportunity costs) for your invested money and you may want to add it to CO by using “additional cost”. If you have assets in your company, you post depreciations in Financial Accounting. How you calculate depreciations is given by laws of countries and Financial Accounting Standards and are subjected to changes of law at any time. So depreciation in US GAAP may be calculated different than in IFRS or HGB and all of them may not reflect the real decline of value of an asset. So the idea could be to install a separate depreciation calculation for CO. If now the “costing based” depreciation is higher than the “financial based depreciation”, the differences are “additional cost”. On the other hand, the difference would be “neutral expenditure”. (In SAP the different depreciations are reflected by different “valuation areas”. You will read more about this in the lesson about asset accounting later).

In SAP we give the opportunity to realize each of the theories. In SAP S/4HANA revenues, expenditures and cost are represented by financial accounts and separated by the account type of the accounts. Based on the account type, the accounts used in CO are also called “cost elements”. Financial Account and Cost Element

Figure 81: Financial Account and Cost Element

108




In the new data model , only one master record is needed: the account. A new field is added (GLACCOUNT_TYPE) to differ between the different G/L account types. Note that the account type is assigned on controlling area level. We have P&L accounts for non-operating expenses and revenues, for example, those parts of the P&L that were never associated with a cost center, order, or CO-PA characteristics in the past. We have P&L accounts for the primary cost elements; these are the cost elements used for salary expenses in Cost Center Accounting, material expenses in Order and Project Accounting and revenues and sales deductions in account-based CO-PA. The completely new approach is that we have P&L accounts for the secondary cost element; these are all cost elements used to post allocations in Management Accounting. Account Groups

Figure 82: Account Groups

Account groups classify G/L accounts into user-defined segments and also determine the number range of the accounts that will fall into these user-defined segments. You determine the field status of the company code segment of the master record when you create, change, or display the company code segment. The field status options are Suppress, Required, Display, and Optional.


109



Reconciliation Accounts

Figure 83: Reconciliation Accounts

A reconciliation account ensures real-time integration of a subledger account with the G/L. The reconciliation between subledger and G/L is always guaranteed because the G/L reconciliation account is not enabled for direct posting. In the G/L, postings are limited to reconciliation account types only.

110




Management Accounting Integrated into the Company Business

Figure 84: Management Accounting Integrated into the Company Business

Data that the system creates in other SAP ERP applications can have a direct influence on CO. For example, if you purchase a non-stock item, the system posts an expense to the general ledger (G/L). The system also posts this expense as costs to the cost center for which the item was purchased. This cost center can then pass these costs as overhead to a production cost center. FI, in the SAP ERP application, is a primary source of data for CO. In fact, most expense postings in the G/L result in a cost posting in CO. These expense postings to the G/L can be journal postings, vendor invoices, or depreciation postings from Asset Management. Sales order management is a primary source for revenue postings from billing documents to revenue postings in CO-PA and EC-PCA. Human Capital Management (HCM) can generate cost postings in CO. HCM gives you the opportunity to allocate labor costs to various controlling objects. In addition, you can transfer and use planned personnel costs for planning in CO. In materials management (MM), a goods issue transaction can create a cost posting in CO to the specified cost object. The system creates product cost estimates in CO that can update price fields in material master records. Finally, purchase orders in MM can generate commitment postings within CO. The manufacturing area of Logistics also works closely with CO. Bills of material (BOMs) and routings can be used in CO-PC. Within the Overhead Cost Controlling (CO-OM) area, you can post costs to cost centers, internal orders, and processes from other SAP ERP applications (external costs). Cost centers can then allocate these costs to other cost centers, internal orders, and processes in Activity-Based Costing (ABC). ABC, in turn, can pass costs to cost centers and internal


111



orders. Internal orders can settle costs to cost centers, processes in ABC, and other internal orders. Central cost flows can exist between CO-OM and Product Cost Controlling (CO-PC). Cost objects, such as production orders, can receive direct cost postings from FI, costs from cost centers, costs settled from internal orders, and costs allocated from ABC processes. The components of profitability accounting are also tightly integrated with CO-OM and COPC. In addition to direct postings from FI, Profitability Analysis (CO-PA) can receive cost assessments from cost centers and ABC processes, settlements of costs from internal orders, and settlements of production variances from cost objects. If you assign all cost objects to profit centers, all costs posted on these cost objects are automatically assigned to their profit centers.

112




Unit 5 Exercise 5 Create a Primary Cost Account

Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. Your company (company code

1010 ) needs a new G/L primary cost accounts.

1. Create G/L account in Chart of Accounts. Create the primary Cost account 650030## with description vehicle cost ## in chart of accounts YCOA. Choose the Manage G/L Account Master Data tile in the SAP Fiori Launchpad and create the new G/L account with the following values: Field Name

Value

G/L Account:

650030##

Description:

vehicle cost ##

Chart of Accounts:

YCOA

G/L Account Type:

P Primary Costs or Revenue

General Tab G/L Account Long Text:

vehicle cost ## gasoline

Account Group

ERG. Income statement accounts

Group Account Number:

65003000 (Vehicle Costs)

2. Before postings can be made to G/L account 650030## in company code 1010, you need to define the company code-specific settings with the following values: Field Name

Value

Control Data Tab: Account Currency:

EUR

Tax Category

V1 which means 19%

Posting without tax allowed

mark

Cost Element Category

1 (Primary costs/cost-reducing revenues)

Create/Bank/Interest Tab: Field Status Group:


YB04

113



Unit 5 Solution 5 Create a Primary Cost Account

Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. Your company (company code

1010 ) needs a new G/L primary cost accounts.

1. Create G/L account in Chart of Accounts. Create the primary Cost account 650030## with description vehicle cost ## in chart of accounts YCOA. Choose the Manage G/L Account Master Data tile in the SAP Fiori Launchpad and create the new G/L account with the following values: Field Name

Value

G/L Account:

650030##

Description:

vehicle cost ##

Chart of Accounts:

YCOA

G/L Account Type:


General Tab G/L Account Long Text:


Account Group

ERG. Income statement accounts



a) On the SAP Fiori Launchpad, choose the Manage G/L Account Master Data Master Data group of the Launchpad. You can search for the tile by entering G/L in the search box on top of the screen. b) Choose the New button on the c) Enter the following values On the

Search: G/L Accounts

tile in the manage

screen.

New Account screen, enter the following values:

Field Name

Value

G/L Account:

650030##

Description:

vehicle cost ##

Chart of Accounts:

YCOA

G/L Account Type:


d) Choose the OK button. e) Enter the following values on the

114

General screen:




Field Name

Value

G/L Account Long Text:


Account type


Account Group

ERG.



f) Choose the Save icon. You have created a G/L account on chart of account level. g) Remain on this screen for the next task. 2. Before postings can be made to G/L account 650030## in company code 1010, you need to define the company code-specific settings with the following values: Field Name

Value

Control Data Tab: Account Currency:

EUR

Tax Category

V1 which means 19%

Posting without tax allowed

mark


1 (Primary costs/cost-reducing revenues)

Create/Bank/Interest Tab: YB04

Field Status Group:

a) Choose the New icon on the Definition on Company Code (0) b) In the New Company Code

tab.

field, enter 1010.

c) Choose the OK button. d) On the Control Data tab, enter the values provided in the table for and Cost Element Category fields. e) On the Create/Bank/Interest

Account Currency

, for Field Status Group: , enter YB04.

f) Choose the Save icon. g) Remain on this screen for the next task.


115




116





Unit 5 Lesson 2 Defining Cost Centers



Cost Center Accounting

Figure 85: Standard Hierarchy of Cost Centers in a COb Area

The cost center is master data in a CO area that represents a delimited location where costs occur. You can use cost centers for differentiated assignment of overhead costs to organizational activities based on utilization of the relevant areas (cost determination function), and for differentiated controlling of costs arising in an organization (cost controlling function). The CO-OM-CCA component tracks where costs occur in your organization. Cost centers can be defined according to several design approaches, such as functional requirements, allocation criteria, activities, and services provided geographic location or area of responsibility. The approach should be consistent throughout the enterprise. As a typical approach, an enterprise can define a cost center for each low-level organizational level that has responsibility for managing costs. As costs are incurred, they are assigned or posted to


117



the appropriate cost center. These costs can include payroll costs, rent and utility costs, or any other costs relevant to a cost center. The posting and assignment of costs to cost centers makes managerial accounting possible, which is a vital step for utilizing other CO components. Cost Center Data The Basic Data section contains basic information of a cost center, such as the cost center’s name and description, the name of the cost center manager and the department to which you want to assign the cost center. The Cost Center Hierarchy field displays the standard hierarchy node to which the cost center is assigned. This field must be filled so it can be used as a control feature in Overhead Management Accounting. Each CO area must have a unique standard hierarchy that includes every cost center created in that CO area. The cost center belongs to a responsible organizational area, mostly represented by a profit enter, to which you assign the cost center. The Company Code and Segment represent the close ties between Management Accounting and FI. If a CO area has more than one company code, you must specify the company code that the user links to each cost center. If a segment reporting is required, you can derive the segment via a profit center, which you enter in the cost center master record.

Figure 86: CostCenterData Scr

The cost center master record is time dependent and assigned to a node of the standard cost center hierarchy. Additionally you assign the cost center to organizational units like company code and functional area. You can assign a cost center to a profit center. The control data is used to lock the cost center against planning and posting activities.

118



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Defining Cost Centers

Statistical Key Figures

Figure 87: Statistical Key Figures

Statistical key figures are nonmonetary information that you can plan and post on cost centers (and other cost objects). They are used as additional reporting info in cost center reports, to calculate additional key figures, such as average salaries per employee, and as distribution factors to distribute cost from one cost center to another. An example could be the distribution of cost of a facility cost center to other cost centers along the space in sq. m (or sq.ft.) that they use. To allow the system to calculate the total, you need to determine the category value, as follows: ●

●

Fixed: the periodic values can not be added to a total. The system will calculate the total of a period as an average of the single values. Total: the periodic values can be added to a total.


119



120




Unit 5 Exercise 6 Create and Display Cost Centers

Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Create Cost Center SERV-## with the appropriate transactual app in your SAP Fiori launchpad. Search with the search tool for manage Cost centers . Don’t use the Cost Center app, because this is a factsheet for a cost center. Note: In the training system you can still use transaction code alternative.

KS01 as an

SAP Note 1946054 describes which transaction codes are substituted by Apps. SAP Note 2084604 describes how to get the transaction codes back. Enter the following data: Field

Value

Controlling Area

A000

Cost Center

SERV-##

Valid from

1.1.actual year

Valid to

31.12.9999

Person Responsible

your name

Cost Center Name

service ##

Cost Center Description

service Cost Center of Group ##

Cost Center Category

H

Hierarchy area

TS4F20##

Company Code

1010

Profit Center

T–PCA##

2. Search for your cost center. 3. Create Cost Center PROD-## with the appropriate transactual app in your SAP Fiori launchpad. Search with the search tool for manage Cost centers . Use the cost center SERV-## as reference. Enter or change the following data:


121



122

Field

Value

Controlling Area

A000

Cost Center

PROD-##

Valid from

1.1.actual year

Valid to

31.12.9999

Reference Controlling Area

A000

Reference Cost Center

SERV-##

Cost Center Name

Production ##


production Cost Center of Group ##

Person Responsible

your name


F

Hierarchy area

TS4F20##

Company Code

1010

Profit Center

T–PCB##




Unit 5 Solution 6 Create and Display Cost Centers

Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Create Cost Center SERV-## with the appropriate transactual app in your SAP Fiori launchpad. Search with the search tool for manage Cost centers . Don’t use the Cost Center app, because this is a factsheet for a cost center. Note: In the training system you can still use transaction code alternative.

KS01 as an

SAP Note 1946054 describes which transaction codes are substituted by Apps. SAP Note 2084604 describes how to get the transaction codes back. Enter the following data: Field

Value

Controlling Area

A000

Cost Center

SERV-##

Valid from

1.1.actual year

Valid to

31.12.9999

Person Responsible

your name

Cost Center Name

service ##


service Cost Center of Group ##


H

Hierarchy area

TS4F20##

Company Code

1010

Profit Center

T–PCA##

a) Navigate to the SAP Fiori launchpad. Use the search tool to search for Centers and open the app.

manage Cost

b) Click the Add icon. c) Enter the required data for the cost center master data record. d) Choose Continue .


123



e) Enter the required data for the cost center master data record and choose You receive the message

Data saved .

f) Leave the screen by pressing

Back

Save .

2. Search for your cost center. a) In the Cost Center field, enter SERV-## .

The more letters you write, the less items are in the list of search results.

b) Choose the Go icon to see the final list of search results. c) Set your cursor on the name of your cost center in the list and choose d) Close the active window and leave the app by choosing

Display

Back .

3. Create Cost Center PROD-## with the appropriate transactual app in your SAP Fiori launchpad. Search with the search tool for manage Cost centers . Use the cost center SERV-## as reference. Enter or change the following data: Field

Value

Controlling Area

A000

Cost Center

PROD-##

Valid from

1.1.actual year

Valid to

31.12.9999

Reference Controlling Area

A000

Reference Cost Center

SERV-##

Cost Center Name

Production ##


production Cost Center of Group ##

Person Responsible

your name


F

Hierarchy area

TS4F20##

Company Code

1010

Profit Center

T–PCB##

a) Navigate to the SAP Fiori launchpad. Use the search tool to search for Centers and open the app.

manage Cost

b) Choose Add . c) Enter the required data for the cost center master data record. d) Choose Continue . e) Enter the required data for the cost center master data record and choose

124

You receive the message

Data saved .

f) Leave the screen by pressing

Back

Save .



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Defining Cost Centers




125



Unit 5 Lesson 3 Posting a G/L Account Document



●


Document Structure

Figure 88: External Postings with SAP S/4HANA Finance

Postings in other areas of SAP S/4HANA, which are relevant for Accounting, are posted to Financials via an Accounting Interface. The line items of the postings are stored according to the new data model in the ACDOCA table (called “Universal Journal”). As some Modules are not (or not yet) changed to the new data model, data may be stored only in the old tables (known from ERP) or in the old tables additionally.

126



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Posting a G/L Account Document

Posting Keys

Figure 89: The Posting Key

Each document line item contains one posting key. A posting key controls the following for each document line item: ●

Account type to be posted

●

Type of posting (debit or credit)

●

Fields of the line item may have or require an entry

Universal Journal Entry (ACDOCA)

Figure 90: Universal Journal Entry (ACDOCA)

The new journal entry consists of a header (table BKPF) and the respective items (table ACDOCA). There are rare cases where entries in ACDOCA are written without a respective document header (for example, carry forward, corrections in migration). These entries do not represent standard business processes. The corresponding line items have ‘artificial document numbers’ beginning with letters (for example, ‘A’).


127



The ACDOCA table contains all fields needed for G/L, CO, AA, ML, PA, providing one single “source of truth” for all these modules. For CO, the universal journal also contains all cost elements, including secondary cost elements, which are in SAP S/4HANA G/L accounts too. In addition, the universal journal has Multi-GAAP capability by using an uses a 6 digit field for line item numbering and 23 digits for currency fields.

RLDNR dimension,

As in ERP, the Universal Journal can be easily extended with customer fields. The extensibility is available for all components that use the Universal Journal (G/L, CO, AA, ML), as follows: ●

●

●

P&L line extension using “CO-PA capabilities” is provided, both for field definition (characteristics) and the rich derivation tools from CO-PA. The standard General Ledger coding block extensibility can be used and affects the Universal Journal. The new SAP HANA based reporting of all components (G/L, AA, ML, CO) can access the customer fields.

Prima Nota The Prima Nota is the source document that triggers the creation of Journal Entries. It is the single anchor that allows, for example, the reversal of the complete process triggered by the Prima Nota. The Prima Nota keeps the information that has been entered to the system, before derivations, enrichments, splits, and so on, take place in Accounting in order to create Journal Entries. In many cases, the Prima Nota is a document outside Financials. Examples are Expense Reports, Invoices, and Payroll documents. For posting within the Financials world, a Prima Nota is needed as well. For classical FI postings (FB01, FB50, FB60, FB70, and so on), the Prima Nota is still stored in the BSEG table and the corresponding Journal Entries (can be several due to the multi GAAP capability) are written to the ACDOCA table. For classic (manual) CO postings, the Prima Nota is still written to COEP table. The corresponding journal entries are written to the ACDOCA table. A Prima Nota is written as well in cases, where “CO” is triggered via BAPI interfaces (AWTYP <> AFRU, CATS). For allocation postings (assessment, settlement, and so on), no Prima Nota is required and data is written to the ACDOCA table only. The allocation process has its own history management (for example, canceling an allocation journal entry). Material price changes (MR21) or Material Debit/Credit (MR22) create a Prima Nota in the material ledger (tables MLHD, MLIT, and so on). The respective journal entries are posted to ACDOCA.

128




Unit 5 Exercise 7 Create a Posting from Financial Accounting

Business Example When you record business transactions in an application component such as Financial Accounting (FI), your company wants to be sure that the corresponding cost data is also transferred to Management Accounting in real-time without reconciliation runs. Enter business transactions in FI to see how the system uses the corresponding account assignment logic to automatically transfer the information to Management Accounting. Process Management Accounting reports to display these business transactions and drill down to access the source documents. In this exercise, in the general ledger (FI), post an expense that is relevant to a cost center and determine which costs are transferred to Management Accounting. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Create a general ledger (G/L) account posting, with today’s date, for the raw materials purchase for the German company code 1010 in EUR currency. Enter a debit amount of 2975 including 19% tax for G/L account 650030##. Specify that the offsetting credit is to be made to G/L account 11100000. 2. On the SAP Fiori Launchpad, select the Cost Center Report

Cost Centers — Plan/Actual

.

3. Drill down to the original document


129



Unit 5 Solution 7 Create a Posting from Financial Accounting

Business Example When you record business transactions in an application component such as Financial Accounting (FI), your company wants to be sure that the corresponding cost data is also transferred to Management Accounting in real-time without reconciliation runs. Enter business transactions in FI to see how the system uses the corresponding account assignment logic to automatically transfer the information to Management Accounting. Process Management Accounting reports to display these business transactions and drill down to access the source documents. In this exercise, in the general ledger (FI), post an expense that is relevant to a cost center and determine which costs are transferred to Management Accounting. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Create a general ledger (G/L) account posting, with today’s date, for the raw materials purchase for the German company code 1010 in EUR currency. Enter a debit amount of 2975 including 19% tax for G/L account 650030##. Specify that the offsetting credit is to be made to G/L account 11100000. a) Go to the SAP Fiori Launchpad and choose

Post General Journal Entries

.

b) On the screen, enter the following data: Table 1: Values for a General Ledger Account Posting

130

Field Name or Data Type

Value

Document Date

Current Date

Company Code

1010

Posting Date

Current Date

Transaction Currancy

EUR

Period

Current Period

Journal Entry Type

SA

Line Item (1) Company Code

1010

(1) G/L Account

650030## Vehicle Cost

(1) Debit Amount

2500

(1) Assignment Open the assignment to select Cost Center

SERV-##




Field Name or Data Type

Value

(1) Tax Code

V1 (19 %)

(2) G/L Account

11100000 (Bank Account)

Credit Amount

2975

In the area “Tax Items”: mark

Calculate tax

c) Check, if the Total Balance is 0. To post your journal entry, choose the d) To check your document, select the

Post button.

Display button.

2. On the SAP Fiori Launchpad, select the Cost Center Report a) On the Cost Centers: Plan/Actual Selection

Cost Centers — Plan/Actual

.

screen, enter the following data:

Table 2: Values for the Cost Centers — Plan/Actual Report Field Name or Data Type

Value

Fiscal Year

Current Year

Category

0 (Version)

Period

Current Period

Company Code

1010

Cost Center

SERV–## (your cost center)

Note: You can expand for searching possible entries. The when you compress the expanded entry fields. b) To execute the report, choose the

Start Selection

Go button is only visible

button.

3. Drill down to the original document a) To select the actual line items you want, position the cursor on the cell. b) Select the Jump to button and select the option c) check the filter

Display G/L Line Items

status . You may have to change it to

d) To get detailed information, choose

report.

All items and then press

Go

Journal Entry .

To jump to the original document posted by you in the previous step 1, choose the Journal Entry hypertext.


131



132




Unit 5 Exercise 8 Display a G/L Account and G/L Account Line Items

Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Choose the SAP Fiori app Display G/L Account Balances 650000## in company code 1010 .

to look up the balance of account

Run the balance for current year and period. 2. Choose the SAP Fiori app Display G/L Account Line Items account 650000## in company code 1010 .

to look up the line items of

Run the report for current period. 3. Choose the SAP Fiori app Display Cost Centers (Actuals) center SERV-## in company code 1010.

to look up the line items of cost

Run the report for current period.


133



Unit 5 Solution 8 Display a G/L Account and G/L Account Line Items

Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Choose the SAP Fiori app Display G/L Account Balances 650000## in company code 1010 .

to look up the balance of account

Run the balance for current year and period. a) Go to the SAP Fiori Launchpad and choose the General Ledger group of the Launchpad.

Display G/L Account Balances

tile in the

b) Enter the following data in the screen: Field Name

Value

Ledger

0L

Company Code

1010

G/L Account

650030##

Ledger Fiscal Year

Current year

Period from

Current period

Period to

Current period

Controlling Area

A000

c) Choose Go. d) Click the debit amount to see the line items resulting in this total. e) Click the Journal Entry number to see the details of the item. f) Choose Display Accounting Document

to see the posting document.

If this does not work (message FB03 does not exist), use transaction the training system T41. g) Return to the SAP Fiori Launchpad screen by choosing 2. Choose the SAP Fiori app Display G/L Account Line Items account 650000## in company code 1010 .

FB03 directly in

Home . to look up the line items of

Run the report for current period. a) On the SAP Fiori Launchpad, choose the General Ledger group of the Launchpad.

134

Display G/L Account Line Items

tile in the





Value

Ledger

0L

Company Code

1010

G/L Account

650030##

Status

All Items

Posting Date

This Month

Ledger Fiscal Year

Current year

Controlling Area

A000

c) Choose Go. d) Click the Journal Entry number to see the details of the item. e) Choose Display Accounting Document

to see the posting document.

If this does not work (message FB03 does not exist), use directly in the training system T41.

FB03 as transaction code

f) Return to the SAP Fiori Launchpad screen by choosing 3. Choose the SAP Fiori app Display Cost Centers (Actuals) center SERV-## in company code 1010.

Home . to look up the line items of cost

Run the report for current period. a) On the SAP Fiori Launchpad, choose the Controlling group of the Launchpad.

Display Cost Centers (Actuals)

tile in the


Value

Fiscal Year is

2016

Posting Period is

11

Company Code is

650030##

Cost Center is

SERV-##

c) Choose Start Selection . d) Eliminate the Row is statistical Cost Center e) Select the available field

Profit Center to the area Rows

You may need to adjust the columns in your column Profit Center

Data Analysis area afterwards to see the

f) Return to the SAP Fiori Launchpad screen by choosing


Home .

135



Financial Statement

Figure 91: Maintain Financial Statement Version

In a financial statement version, you can define a structure for the balance sheet and Profit & Loss statements reports. You can maintain the structure and you can add G/L Accounts and ranges of G/L accounts to the structure items.

136




Financial Statement Views

Figure 92: Financial Statement Views

A financial statements shows all G/L Accounts in a structure, which you define in the financial statement version. You can switch between the balance sheet and the Profit & Loss view choosing the relevant tab. By adding additional filters, you can focus on certain segments or Profit Centers.


137



138




Unit 5 Exercise 9 Check an Account in the Financial Statement Version (Optional)

Business Example Check, if your new account 650030## is already assigned to the financial statement version 1010 . Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. The new account should be included in the financial statement version 1010 . Check the financial statement subfolder 3180000 other operating expenses . You will find this subfolder under 3000000 Profit and loss statement → 3100000 Annual net income/ net loss → 3200000 operating income .


139



Unit 5 Solution 9 Check an Account in the Financial Statement Version (Optional)

Business Example Check, if your new account 650030## is already assigned to the financial statement version 1010 . Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. The new account should be included in the financial statement version 1010 . Check the financial statement subfolder 3180000 other operating expenses . You will find this subfolder under 3000000 Profit and loss statement → 3100000 Annual net income/ net loss → 3200000 operating income . a) Go to the SAP Fiori Launchpad and choose the Maintain Financial Statement Version tile in the General Ledger group of the Launchpad. b) Click into the empty field left of Financial Statement Version complete line. c) Choose Financial Statement Items

1010 to mark the

.

d) Drill down to the 3000000 Profit and loss statement → 3100000 Annual net income/ net loss → 3200000 operating income → 31800000 other operating expenses balance sheet item by clicking the folder icon in front of the balance sheet item. e) Check whether the interval 65003000 to 65003099 is entered (you need to page down) and D & C (for debit and credit balance) is marked. If not, change accordingly. f) Leave the app by closing the window.

140




Unit 5 Exercise 10 Display a Financial Statement

Business Example Run a (restricted) balance sheet to see if the postings to your new account 650030## are also displayed in the balance sheet. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Choose the SAP Fiori app Display Financial Statement to run the balance sheet for your account 650030## in company code 1010 using financial statement version 1010 . Hint: If your postings show up in the section All Accounts under Accounts not assigned , in practice, you would have to alter the financial statement version and include your new account. Run the financial statement for the current posting period (for current year and previous year). Use the following data: Field Name

Value

Company Code

1010

Ledger

0L

Financial Statement Version

1010

Fin. State. Type

Normal

End Period

Current period and current year

Comparison End Period

Current period and current year – 1

Currency

EUR


141



Unit 5 Solution 10 Display a Financial Statement

Business Example Run a (restricted) balance sheet to see if the postings to your new account 650030## are also displayed in the balance sheet. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Choose the SAP Fiori app Display Financial Statement to run the balance sheet for your account 650030## in company code 1010 using financial statement version 1010 . Hint: If your postings show up in the section All Accounts under Accounts not assigned , in practice, you would have to alter the financial statement version and include your new account. Run the financial statement for the current posting period (for current year and previous year). Use the following data: Field Name

Value

Company Code

1010

Ledger

0L

Financial Statement Version

1010

Fin. State. Type

Normal

End Period

Current period and current year

Comparison End Period

Current period and current year – 1

Currency

EUR

a) Go to the SAP Fiori Launchpad and choose the General Ledger group of the Launchpad.

Display Financial Statement

tile in the

b) Enter the data provided in the table. c) Choose Go. d) Choose Profit & Loss .

142




e) Enter the G/L account number 650030## into the search field on the right hand side and choose the magnifying glass button to search in the hierarchy. The G/L account is displayed in the balance sheet hierarchy. If not, click All Accounts . Your account is displayed under Accounts not assigned . f) Return to the SAP Fiori Launchpad screen by choosing


Home .

143



LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to:

144

●


●





Unit 5 Lesson 4 Working with Business Partners and Invoices



●


Vendor Master Record - Business Partner


There are redundant object models in the traditional ERP system where the vendor master and customer master is used. The (mandatory) target approach in SAP S/4HANA is the Business Partner approach. Business partners can be categorized as a person, group, or organization. ●

An organization represents units such as a company (for example, a legal person), parts of a legal entity (for example, a department), or an association. Organization is an umbrella term to map every kind of situation in the day-to-day business activities.

●

A group represents a shared living arrangement, a married couple, or an executive board.



145





The Business Partner is created and the roles necessary for the usage of the BP are assigned. The different roles are created on certain organizational levels. The role FI Vendor, which is necessary to use the BP in FI based purchase postings, is assigned to the company code. So, the data in this role can be maintained in each company code different. Note that vendor is also called supplier. You can assign a different vendor number and customer number to your BP inside the BP maintenance transaction. In the general role of the business partner, the BP’s name and address is entered. In the role FI vendor (BP used as a vendor in FI) you enter the following data: ●


●


●

The names of important contacts related to the vendor (for example, salespeople)

●

The reconciliation account from the general ledger (G/L), because the vendor is a creditor of the company

You can decide, whether to maintain many roles at once or to add roles later time by time, whenever you need them.

146



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Working with Business Partners and Invoices

Document Entry View for Accounting Document

Figure 95: Document Entry View for Accounting Document

In the figure, Entry View for Accounting Document, a vendor’s invoice is posted and the services are charged to two different cost centers. Each line item is assigned to a different cost center, profit center, and segment. The figure displays the journal entry. Corporate groups may have a requirement to create balance sheets at the segment level. As you can see in the figure, the vendor line is not assigned to a segment. The segments only receive the expense posting, and not the balance sheet posting, which prevents an accurate balance sheet by segment. This is why SAP uses document splitting. Document Split in the General Ledger View

Figure 96: Document Split in the General Ledger View

Note: The layout or display variant of the document sorts segments with subtotals in ascending order in the Segment column.


147



You can specify in Customizing that the system needs to complete the missing entries automatically. The correct amount is shown in the figure. You activate document splitting to ensure the segment characteristic splits uniformly. Systematic segmentation means that each document has a zero balance for the entity in question. There are six lines in the document now. The vendor line item and the tax item are split across the two (segments A and B). The balance for each segment is zero. You can create the balance sheet and profit and loss (P&L) statement in full, and the system balances the balance sheet in the background. The figure also shows how the accounts payable and the tax items inherit the segment entity in the document. Document splitting reduces the time and effort the user spends entering documents. Entering six account assignment items would be time consuming. Document splitting is only possible in the new General Ledger. There are two views of the posted documents - the Entry view and the General Ledger view. You can decide which view to use. If you do not need document splitting or it is inactive (for example, the customer only needs to create balance sheets at the company code level), then both views are identical. Customer invoices that distribute revenues among various entities are handled in the same way. Payment Process

Figure 97: Payment Process

You can pay vendors manually or by using the automatic payment program. The standard system contains common payment methods and corresponding forms defined by country. The system performs the following actions during the payment:

148




●

Posts payment documents

●

Clears open items

●

Prepares data for printing the payment media


149



150




Unit 5 Exercise 11 Create a Business Partner (FI Vendor)

Create a new Business Partner master record to use as vendor and as customer as well. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Start the Maintain Business Partner app from your Central Master Data — Business Partner group in the SAP Fiori Launchpad. 2. Create the new business partner and maintain the information:

General Data using the following

Field Name

Value

Business Partner Categorization

Organization

Business Partner

T-BP##

Grouping

External alpha-numeric numbering

Title

Company

Name

Bikes & More ##

Street/House Number

Pascalstr. ##

Postal Code/City

70173 Stuttgart

Country

DE (Germany)

Region

BW (Baden-Wurttemberg)

Language

German

3. Maintain the Company Code Data information:

for the new business partner using the following

Field Name

Value

BP Role

FI Vendor (FLVN00)

Company Code

1010

Reconciliation Account

21100000

4. Maintain the Tax Classification on the


Control Data and use the following information:

151



152

Field Name

Value

BP Role

Vendor (BBP000)

Country

DE

Tax Type

MWST

Tax Group

FULL




Unit 5 Solution 11 Create a Business Partner (FI Vendor)

Create a new Business Partner master record to use as vendor and as customer as well. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Start the Maintain Business Partner app from your Central Master Data — Business Partner group in the SAP Fiori Launchpad. a) Choose the Maintain Business Partner tile in your Central Master Data — Business Partner group on the SAP Fiori Launchpad to start the app. 2. Create the new business partner and maintain the information:

General Data using the following

Field Name

Value

Business Partner Categorization

Organization

Business Partner

T-BP##

Grouping

External alpha-numeric numbering

Title

Company

Name

Bikes & More ##

Street/House Number

Pascalstr. ##

Postal Code/City

70173 Stuttgart

Country

DE (Germany)

Region

BW (Baden-Wurttemberg)

Language

German

a) Choose the Create Organization b) Fill the fields Business Partner

button. and Grouping .

c) On the Address tab, maintain the corresponding data. d) Save your entries, but don’t leave the screen. 3. Maintain the Company Code Data information:


for the new business partner using the following

153



Field Name

Value

BP Role

FI Vendor (FLVN00)

Company Code

1010


21100000

a) Switch to change mode by using the respective button. b) In the Change in BP role field, choose the value

FI Vendor.

c) Click the Company Code button at the top of the screen. d) Enter the Company Code. e) On the Supplier: Account Management Account.

tab page, enter the

Reconciliation

f) Save your entries, but don’t leave the screen. 4. Maintain the Tax Classification on the

Control Data and use the following information:

Field Name

Value

BP Role

Vendor (BBP000)

Country

DE

Tax Type

MWST

Tax Group

FULL

a) In the Change in BP role field, choose the value

Vendor.

b) Click the Control button on the screen. c) Enter the required data d) Save your entries but don’t leave the screen.

154





155



156




Unit 5 Exercise 12 Enter a Vendor Invoice with Document Splitting

Business Example We receive a service invoice for the inspection of two company cars. The invoice refers to two different cost centers and thus two different profit centers. The invoice amount is EUR 1,785. The amount includes input tax (tax code V1) of 19%, that is, EUR 285 . EUR 1000 is attributed to the cost center, SERV-##, and EUR 500 to cost center PROD-##. Use your vendor TBP## . The invoice has the previous day as the invoice date and was sent directly to the accounting department, without going through logistics invoice verification. The invoice has the number 4## . The G/L account assignment is to account 650030## (Vehicle Costs). Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Post the invoice from vendor T-BP## using the SAP Fiori app Create Incoming Invoices on the two cost centers specified (SERV-## and PROD-##). Use the Z_WITH_COST_CENTER screen variant. Use the G/L account 650030## as an offsetting account. Enter the invoice number in the Reference field and enter Inspection costs group ## as the text. Write down the accounting document number: Document Number:__________________________________________________________________________ _ Display the document. Choose a layout in which the Profit Center field is displayed. You want to make sure that this document is suitable for creating financial statements at profit center level. Call up the relevant document view. 2. Display the document. If possible, use the Menue icon on the left upper area of the screen. Use the option to switch between each document view. If this is not possible, leave the app and choose the app Manage Journal Entry on your Launchpad to show the document. Use a layout in which all the relevant fields are displayed. If this is not the case, choose layout / AC_1 (Layout with Cost Center, Profit Center, Segment, Functional Area). What distinguishes the Entry View from the Leading Ledger view?


157



Unit 5 Solution 12 Enter a Vendor Invoice with Document Splitting

Business Example We receive a service invoice for the inspection of two company cars. The invoice refers to two different cost centers and thus two different profit centers. The invoice amount is EUR 1,785. The amount includes input tax (tax code V1) of 19%, that is, EUR 285 . EUR 1000 is attributed to the cost center, SERV-##, and EUR 500 to cost center PROD-##. Use your vendor TBP## . The invoice has the previous day as the invoice date and was sent directly to the accounting department, without going through logistics invoice verification. The invoice has the number 4## . The G/L account assignment is to account 650030## (Vehicle Costs). Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Post the invoice from vendor T-BP## using the SAP Fiori app Create Incoming Invoices on the two cost centers specified (SERV-## and PROD-##). Use the Z_WITH_COST_CENTER screen variant. Use the G/L account 650030## as an offsetting account. Enter the invoice number in the Reference field and enter Inspection costs group ## as the text. Write down the accounting document number: Document Number:__________________________________________________________________________ _ Display the document. Choose a layout in which the Profit Center field is displayed. You want to make sure that this document is suitable for creating financial statements at profit center level. Call up the relevant document view. a) Go to the SAP Fiori Launchpad and choose the Accounts Payable group of the Launchpad.

Create Incoming Invoices

tile in the

b) Enter the company code if the company code dialog box appears. Field Name

Value

Company code

1010

c) Press Enter. d) On the Basic data tab page, enter the following data:

158

Field Name

Value

Vendor

T-BP##




Field Name

Value

Invoice date

Posting date

Reference

4##

e) Press Enter. f) Confirm warning messages with

Enter .

A link to the vendor master record is now shown on the right of the screen. g) Enter the following data: Field Name

Value

Amount

1785

Tax amount

285

Tax code

V1 (19% Input Tax)

Text

*Inspection costs group ##

h) Select the Tree on button. In the Screen variants for items folder, select the variant, Z_WITH_ COST_ CENTER. Enter the following in separate line items: Field Name

Value

G/L account

650030##

D/C

Debit

Amount in doc. curr.

1000

Tax code

V1

Cost center

SERV-##

Field Name

Value

G/L accountt

650030##

D/C

Debit

Amount in doc. curr.

500

Tax code

V1

Cost center

PROD-##

i) Choose Post . Do not choose the

Park document

icon.

j) Make a note of the accounting document number. k) Do not close the

Create Incoming Invoices

browser tab page.

2. Display the document. If possible, use the Menue icon on the left upper area of the screen. Use the option to switch between each document view. If this is not possible, leave the app


159



and choose the app Manage Journal Entry on your Launchpad to show the document. Use a layout in which all the relevant fields are displayed. If this is not the case, choose layout / AC_1 (Layout with Cost Center, Profit Center, Segment, Functional Area). What distinguishes the Entry View from the Leading Ledger view? a) Choose Document → Display in the menu bar. You are in the data entry view, Display Document: Data Entry View . You see the three line items that you entered and the tax item generated automatically by the system. b) On line item level, choose the layout variant /AC_1 (Layout with Cost Center, Profit Center, Segment, Funct. Area) from the Layout Setting Global drop down list. . This layout shows that the two expense items refer to different profit centers and segments. The vendor line item and the tax item are displayed without profit center and segment assignment c) Choose the General Ledger View button to switch from the Data Entry View to the General Ledger View of Ledger 0L. Instead of the four line items, six are displayed in the Leading Ledger view (the ledger views are also called general ledger or split views). After the amounts in the G/L account have been split, the amounts for the vendor payables and tax items are split in the same way. This ensures that the balance for each profit center is zero. Note: To ensure that the balance sheet can also be created at profit center and/or segment level, the balance must be zero in the document at profit center and/or segment level. This is why document splitting is used. When the document is posted, the system automatically splits the document according to the Customizing settings. d) Close the Create Incoming Invoices

160

browser tab.




Unit 5 Exercise 13 Post a Manual Outgoing Payment with Check Printing

Business Example The vendor T-BP## , requires the money urgently, and asks the accounting department to make the payment quickly. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Make sure, the correspondence language of your Business Partner Master Record TBP## is set to the language of your country. You may adjust it using the app Business Partner .

Maintain

2. Post a manual outgoing payment with simultaneous cheque printing. The payment is to be made via the house bank S4F10 and Account—ID GIRO. Enter LP01 as the printer. Have the system calculate the payment amount. Use payment method

S.

3. Write down the number of the payment document and print out the check. Document number: _______________________________ 4. Check whether the outgoing payment has cleared the original open item, and write down how much cash discount was calculated and posted.


161



Unit 5 Solution 13 Post a Manual Outgoing Payment with Check Printing

Business Example The vendor T-BP## , requires the money urgently, and asks the accounting department to make the payment quickly. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Make sure, the correspondence language of your Business Partner Master Record TBP## is set to the language of your country. You may adjust it using the app Business Partner . a) Go to the SAP Fiori Launchpad and choose the Accounts Payable group of the Launchpad. b) Enter Business Partner c) In the menu bar, choose


Maintain tile in the

T-BP## and press Enter. Business Partner

d) Enter your Correspondence language entered already.

→ Display <-> Change .

on the Address tab page if it has not been

You will find this field in the Name area of the tab page. e) Choose Save . f) Close the Maintain Business Partner

browser tab page.

2. Post a manual outgoing payment with simultaneous cheque printing. The payment is to be made via the house bank S4F10 and Account—ID GIRO. Enter LP01 as the printer. Have the system calculate the payment amount. Use payment method

S.

a) Go to the SAP Fiori Launchpad and choose the Post Supplier Outgoing Payments With Print tile in the Accounts Payable group of the Launchpad. The Payment with printout: Header Data

screen is displayed.

Hint: If you do not see this header screen, use the Back icon to return to it. Once you access this header screen when you log on, the system assumes you want to keep the same header information for all single cheques. This screen is therefore skipped after you enter data on it for the first time.

162




b) Enter the following data: Field Name

Value

Company code

1010

Payment method

S

House bank

S4F10

Printer for forms

LP01

Calculate pmnt amnt

Select

Print immediately

Select

c) Choose the Enter Payments

button.

d) In the Payee section, enter the following data: Field Name

Value

Vendor

T-BP##

e) Adopt all of the other data. f) Choose Process Open Items

.

g) If the open item is not automatically selected (Assigned = 0,00), double-click the EUR Gross amount. h) Choose Post . i) If House Bank – ID and Acct. – ID is required for posting the outgoing payment, enter the following data: Field Name

Value

House Bank

S4F10

Acct. ID

GIRO

j) Choose Post . 3. Write down the number of the payment document and print out the check. Document number: _______________________________ a) Write down the number of the payment document. b) Confirm information about the document number with

Enter .

This automatically displays an overview of generated payment media. c) Double-click Check in the Overview of generated payment media

window.

d) Place the cursor on the correct spool file checkbox. e) Choose the Display contents

icon.

The cheque is displayed and can be printed from the printer that is installed. Use the scroll bar to view the entire cheque. f) Close the Post Supplier Outgoing Payments With Print


browser tab page .

163



4. Check whether the outgoing payment has cleared the original open item, and write down how much cash discount was calculated and posted. a) Go to the SAP Fiori Launchpad and choose the Manage Supplier Line Items tile in the Accounts Payable group of the Launchpad. Enter the following data in the filter bar: Field Name

Value

Supplier

T-BP##

Company Code

1010

Status

Cleared Items

Clearing Date

Current date

Item Type

Normal Items

b) Choose Go. c) Click the payment document number 15XXXXXXXX. d) Choose Manage Journal Entries

on the Document number

e) If only one line item is displayed, choose the screen.

window.

Back to Journal Entry

on the bottom right of

Depending on the payment conditions of your business partner you may see the item for posting the cash discount received (account number 70040000). If the vendor T-BP## grants a 3% cash discount for payment made within 14 days, you will receive a cash discount of 45 EUR on your payment of 1500 EUR. In addition, 8.55 EUR are will be posted to the input tax account as a tax on sales or purchases. f) Choose the Home button to go back to the SAP Fiori Launchpad.

164




Unit 5 Exercise 14 Display Vendors Account

Look up the balance of your vendor to verify the balance is zero. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Look up the balance of your vendor by using the


Display Supplier Balances

app.

165



Unit 5 Solution 14 Display Vendors Account

Look up the balance of your vendor to verify the balance is zero. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Look up the balance of your vendor by using the

Display Supplier Balances

app.

a) Enter your supplier T-BP## and press Go. You will see the debits and credits by period on your suppliers account. b) Click the debit or credit amount to drill down to the according line item. c) Click a document number to see the available apps to which you can navigate. Choose Display Fact Sheet . You see several documents and info related to the vendors account. d) Navigate back to the Launchpad.

166






●



167



Unit 5 Lesson 5 Working with Asset Accounting



Creating an Asset Master Record

Figure 98: Assets in Financial Accounting (FI) Organizational Units

Each asset belongs to a company code and a segment. All postings made for the asset (acquisitions, retirements, depreciation, and so on) are applied in the assigned company code and segment. Additionally, you can assign the asset to various Controlling (CO) objects (cost center, internal order, activity type, and so on) and logistic organizational units (for selection purposes only).

168



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Working with Asset Accounting

Asset Class

Figure 99: Asset Class

An asset class is the main criterion for defining an asset. Each asset has to be assigned to an asset class. In an asset class, you can define certain control parameters and default values for depreciation and other master data. Assets that do not appear in the same line item of the balance sheet (such as buildings and equipment) must be assigned to different asset classes. Additionally, there is at least one special asset class for assets under construction and one asset class for low-value assets. Examples for Asset Classes include the following: ●

3100 - Vehicles

●

4000 – Assets under construction

●

5000 – Low-value assets

Note: You can also create asset classes for intangible assets and leased assets. Functions are available for processing leases. The Plant Maintenance application component is used for the technical management of assets. The Treasury application component is used for managing financial assets.


169



Posting an Aquisition of an Asset

Figure 100: Asset Explorer

The Asset Explorer offers an overview of the activity for an asset. You can see transactions that have been posted to the asset. You can also see planned and posted depreciation per depreciation area, per period, for each fiscal year. You can drill down to the details of the Financial Accounting (FI) transactions. You can branch to master data and other cost objects, and perform simulations. Depreciation Areas

Figure 101: Depreciation Areas

170




Asset balances and transactions often need to be valuated differently, for various purposes. To have more than one valuation basis, depreciation areas are kept in SAP. Separate transaction figures are kept in each area per asset and depreciation area, as well as for individual value components (such as balances, depreciation, and the remaining book value) the asset master record, different data for valuation areas is stored. The data controls the calculation of normal and special depreciation for the respective valuation areas. Therefore, you can use a different depreciation method for general business procedures as compared to the depreciation method that the tax authorities require. Control Data in Depreciation Areas

Figure 102: Control Data in Depreciation Areas

In the asset master record, different data for valuation areas is stored. The data controls the calculation of normal and special depreciation for the respective valuation areas. Therefore, you can use a different depreciation method for general business procedures compared to the depreciation method that the tax authorities require.


171



Depreciation Run

Figure 103: DepreciationRun

Every asset transaction in Asset Accounting (AA) immediately causes a change in the forecasted depreciation. However, it does not immediately cause an update of the depreciation and value adjustment accounts for the balance sheet and profit and loss statements. The planned depreciation is posted to the G/L when you run the periodic depreciation posting run. This posting run uses a batch input session to post the planned depreciation for each posting level. It posts each individual asset as a lump-sum amount. The actual depreciation is posted in Asset Accounting (FI-AA) and the General Ledger (G/L) only after the depreciation posting run is completed. The depreciation is posted to the corresponding depreciation accounts in the G/L and to the Controlling (CO) cost object assigned to the asset master record. The depreciation run can be in the direct or batch mode.

172




Transaction Type

Figure 104: Transaction Type

The transaction type is an addition to the asset posting keys 70 (debit) and 75 (credit). It must be included when posting to an asset account. The transaction type is necessary for AA because it specifies exactly where the asset posting is listed on the asset history sheet. The transaction type is the distinguishing characteristic of the various asset postings. Some asset postings are as follows: ●

Buying and selling

●

Credit memos

●

Acquisitions from internal production

●

Adjustment postings

●

Retirements without revenue

●

Depreciation and appreciation


173



174




Unit 5 Exercise 15 Create an Asset Master Record

Business Example Your company is purchasing a car to enlarge the car fleet. You need to create an asset master record in asset class 3100 (Vehicles) with the description, Car for my car fleet ##. Let us assume, the legal depreciation time is 5 years. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Create an asset master record and assign the new office building to cost center SERV-##, using the data from the following table: Field Name

Value

Asset Class

3100 (Vehicles)

Company Code

1010

Number of similar assets

1

Description

Car for my car fleet ##

Cost Center

SERV-##

2. Save the asset, and make a note of the asset number: ________________________. Note: It is not necessary to note the zero after the blank at the end of the asset number. It represent the asset subnumber. 3. Display the asset master record, and identify how many depreciation areas are displayed. Seven depreciation areas are displayed for the asset. In this case, some depreciation keys of the depreciation areas are different, so different calculations are being driven.


175



Unit 5 Solution 15 Create an Asset Master Record

Business Example Your company is purchasing a car to enlarge the car fleet. You need to create an asset master record in asset class 3100 (Vehicles) with the description, Car for my car fleet ##. Let us assume, the legal depreciation time is 5 years. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Create an asset master record and assign the new office building to cost center SERV-##, using the data from the following table: Field Name

Value

Asset Class

3100 (Vehicles)

Company Code

1010

Number of similar assets

1

Description

Car for my car fleet ##

Cost Center

SERV-##

a) Go to the SAP Fiori Launchpad and choose the Create Asset Master tile in the Asset Accounting group of the Launchpad. Alternatively, enter the transaction code AS01. b) On the Create Asset: Initial screen , enter the asset class, company code, and the number of similar assets, using the values in the table. c) Choose the Master data button. d) On the General tab page, enter the e) On the Time-dependent

Description , using the value in the table.

tab page, enter the

Cost Center , using the value in the table.

2. Save the asset, and make a note of the asset number: ________________________. a) Choose Save . b) On the status bar, note the asset number, excluding the zero after the blank at the end. c) Leave the app.

Note: It is not necessary to note the zero after the blank at the end of the asset number. It represent the asset subnumber.

176




3. Display the asset master record, and identify how many depreciation areas are displayed. a) Go to the SAP Fiori Launchpad and choose the Display Asset Master tile in the Asset Accounting group of the Launchpad. Alternatively, enter the transaction code AS03. b) On the Display Asset: Initial screen, in the Asset field, enter the asset number that you noted earlier in the exercise, and choose Enter . c) On the Display Asset: Master data d) On the Deprec. areas

screen, choose the

Deprec. Areas tab.

tab page, count the number of depreciation areas listed.

Seven depreciation areas are displayed for the asset. In this case, some depreciation keys of the depreciation areas are different, so different calculations are being driven.


177



178




Unit 5 Exercise 16 Post an Integrated Asset Acquisition

Business Example Your company (company code 1010) purchased a car from vendor T-BP##. You need to post the asset acquisition. The value of the car is EUR 20,000. The tax of 19% is not included in the price. This exercise uses a record created in the exercise, Create Asset Master Data. The record is the asset master record with description Car for my Car Fleet ##. Note that, in this exercise, when a value includes ##, replace the ## characters with the number that your instructor assigned you. 1. Post an integrated asset acquisition, that is, post the asset acquisition and the amount payable to the vendor in one document. The company code is 1010. The invoice and posting date is today’s date. The input tax of 19% (V1) is in addition to the net amount. Ensure that you use the payment terms 0001. Use transaction type 100 (External asset acquisition). Hint: For posting purposes, use the F4 help to search for the asset with the description Car for my Car Fleet ##. FI document number: _______________________________________ 2. Display the FI document. 3. Which accounts were posted to in the operational part (vendor invoice) and the valuation parts (asset accounting) of the document. 4. Use the Asset Explorer ( 360° view on Asset app) to check the values of the new asset in the depreciation area, 32 (IFRS in local currency). 5. What are the planned and posted depreciation values for the current year?

6. Close the browser tab page


360° view on Asset .

179



Unit 5 Solution 16 Post an Integrated Asset Acquisition

Business Example Your company (company code 1010) purchased a car from vendor T-BP##. You need to post the asset acquisition. The value of the car is EUR 20,000. The tax of 19% is not included in the price. This exercise uses a record created in the exercise, Create Asset Master Data. The record is the asset master record with description Car for my Car Fleet ##. Note that, in this exercise, when a value includes ##, replace the ## characters with the number that your instructor assigned you. 1. Post an integrated asset acquisition, that is, post the asset acquisition and the amount payable to the vendor in one document. The company code is 1010. The invoice and posting date is today’s date. The input tax of 19% (V1) is in addition to the net amount. Ensure that you use the payment terms 0001. Use transaction type 100 (External asset acquisition). Hint: For posting purposes, use the F4 help to search for the asset with the description Car for my Car Fleet ##. a) Go to the SAP Fiori Launchpad and choose the Acquisition without order (integrated AP) tile in the Asset Accounting group of the Launchpad. Alternatively, enter the transaction code F-90. Make a note of the FI document number. Use the following data: Field Name

Value

Document Date/Posting Date

Current date

Company Code

1010

Currency

EUR

First line item Posting key (PstKy)

31

Account

T-BP##

b) Press Enter and enter the following data:

180

Field Name

Value

Amount

23,800




Field Name

Value

Tax Amount

3,800

Tax code

V1 (19% Input Tax)

Payment terms

0001

Next line item PstKy (posting key)

70

Account

The asset number that you noted in the exercise, Create Asset Master Data (alternatively, use the F4 help to search for your asset with the description, Office building Hamburg ##)

TType (Asset Transaction Type)

100 External asset acquisition

c) Press Enter. To confirm the warning about changing the payment terms, press Enter. Field Name

Value

Amount

*

Tax code

V1

d) To view all account assignments, choose the

More button in the line item.

Field Name

Value

Reference Date

Current date

e) Choose Continue . f) Choose Post . g) Make a note of the FI document number. h) Remain on this screen. FI document number: _______________________________________ 2. Display the FI document. a) From the menu, choose

Document → Display .

3. Which accounts were posted to in the operational part (vendor invoice) and the valuation parts (asset accounting) of the document. a) The document is posted: ●

To the technical clearing account for integrated asset acquisitions (16014000)

●

Via the vendor to the payables balance sheet account (21100000)

●

To the tax account (12600000)

b) Choose the Asset Accounting


button.

181



The document is posted for accounting principle ●

●

IFRS and Ledger Group

Via the asset to the APC (acquisition and production costs) balance sheet account (16001000) To the technical clearing account for integrated asset acquisitions (16014000)

c) Choose Accounting Principle principle LG: Local GAAP.

to display the posting in relation to the accounting

The document is posted for accounting principle ●

●

0L:

LG: Local GAAP and ledger group

2L :

Via the asset to the APC (acquisition and production costs) balance sheet account (16001000) To the technical clearing account for integrated asset acquisitions (16014000)

4. Use the Asset Explorer ( 360° view on Asset app) to check the values of the new asset in the depreciation area, 32 (IFRS in local currency). a) Go to the SAP Fiori Launchpad and choose the 360° view on Asset tile in the Asset Accounting group of the Launchpad. Alternatively, enter the transaction code AW01N. Enter the following data: Field Name

Value

Company code

1010

Asset

The asset number that you noted in the exercise, Create Asset Master Data (alternatively, use the F4 help to search for your asset with the description, Car for my Car Fleet ##)

b) Select Depreciation area 32 (IFRS in local currency) from the structure on the left hand side of the screen.

Depreciation Areas

folder

5. What are the planned and posted depreciation values for the current year? In contrast to the planned values, the posted depreciation is still 0 because the depreciation is not posted until the depreciation posting run is executed 6. Close the browser tab page

182

360° view on Asset .







183



Unit 5 Lesson 6 Working with Activity Types



●


Rates Planning

Figure 105: General Ledger (G/L) Accounts and Cost Elements

The chart of accounts is created in Financial Accounting (FI). Expense accounts to which the system posts the costs for cost accounting purposes must be created with G/L Account type P (Primary costs or revenues) or S (Secondary cost elements). This ensures that all postings to this type of expense account always arrive in Management Accounting at the same time on a Management Accounting object, for example, cost center, internal order, project. In addition a cost element category is assigned. You can use the cost element only as predefined by the assigned cost element category.

184



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Working with Activity Types

Figure 106: Activity Types

The activity type classifies the activities performed within a company by one or several cost centers. If a cost center provides services for other cost centers, orders, and processes, this means that the resources of the cost center are used. The costs of these resources need to be allocated to the receivers of the activity. Activity types serve as tracing factors for this cost allocation. In an internal activity allocation, the quantity of the activity, such as the number of consulting hours, is entered either manually or automatically into SAP S/4HANA Finance. The system calculates the associated cost based on the activity price, and generates a debit to the receiver and a credit to the cost center providing the activity for quantity and costs. To perform the allocation, the system uses a secondary cost element that is stored in the activity type master record as default values. You can restrict the use of the activity type to certain types of cost centers by entering the allowed cost center categories in the activity type master record. You can enter up to eight allowed cost center categories, or leave the assignments unrestricted by entering an asterisk (*).


185



186




Unit 5 Exercise 17 Create a Secondary Cost Account and an Activity Type

Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number provided by your instructor. 1. Create a secondary cost account 943110## by using the appropriate transactional app in your SAP Fiori launchpad. Search with the search tool for Manage G/L Account Master Data. Note: In the training system you can still use transaction code redirected to transaction code FS00.

KA01, but you will be

SAP Note 1946054 describes which transaction codes are substituted by apps. SAP Note 2084604 describes how to restore these transaction codes.

Note:

Enter the following data: Field

Value

G/L Account

943110##

Company Code

1010

Description

Consulting Hours ##

Chart of Accounts

YCOA

G/L Account Type

Secondary Costs

Account group

SECC — Secondary Costs / revenue

Group Account Number

50304000


43

Unit of Measurement

H

Field Status Group

YB04

2. Create an activity type by using the app Press Create and enter the following data:


MANAGE ACTIVITY TYPES.

187



Field

Value

Activity Type

Pers##

Valid from

1.1.actual year

Valid to

31.12.9999

Name

personnel hours ##

Cost Center Categories

* (All)

Activity unit

H

Activity Type Category

Manual Entry, Manual Allocation

Allocation Cost Element

943110##

3. Assign your activity type Pers## to your cost center SERV-## and enter an activity price. You do both by using the appropriate transactional app in your SAP Fiori Launchpad. Search with the search tool for Enter Activity Price Use the following data: Field

Value

Planner profile

sapall

Version

0

From Period

1

To Period

12

Fiscal Year

actual year

Cost Center

SERV-##

Activity Type

PERS##

. Use the following price information: Field

Value

Price (fixed)

50

Variable Price

80

4. Assign the activity types 1420, 1421 and 1422 to your cost center PROD-## and enter activity prices. You do both by using the appropriate transactional app in your SAP Fiori Launchpad. Search with the search tool for Enter Activity Price Use the following data:

188

Field

Value

Planner profile

sapall

Version

0

From Period

1

To Period

12




Field

Value

Fiscal Year

actual year

Cost Center

PROD-##

Activity Type

1420

to

1422

Use the following price information: Field

Value

Price (fixed)

40

Variable Price

60


189



Unit 5 Solution 17 Create a Secondary Cost Account and an Activity Type

Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number provided by your instructor. 1. Create a secondary cost account 943110## by using the appropriate transactional app in your SAP Fiori launchpad. Search with the search tool for Manage G/L Account Master Data. Note: In the training system you can still use transaction code redirected to transaction code FS00.

KA01, but you will be

SAP Note 1946054 describes which transaction codes are substituted by apps. SAP Note 2084604 describes how to restore these transaction codes.

Note:

Enter the following data: Field

Value

G/L Account

943110##

Company Code

1010

Description

Consulting Hours ##

Chart of Accounts

YCOA

G/L Account Type

Secondary Costs

Account group

SECC — Secondary Costs / revenue


50304000


43

Unit of Measurement

H

Field Status Group

YB04

a) Navigate to the SAP Fiori Launchpad and open the b) Enter the account number

190

Manage G/L Account app.

943110##, the company code, and choose

Create .




c) Enter the required data for the account master record up to


d) On the Control Data tab, enter the rest of the data provided in the table up to Status Group . e) On the Create/bank/interest

tab, in the Field Status Group

.

Field

field, enter YB04.

f) Choose Save . You receive the message

Data saved.

g) Leave the screen by closing the browser tab. 2. Create an activity type by using the app Press Create and enter the following data:

MANAGE ACTIVITY TYPES.

Field

Value

Activity Type

Pers##

Valid from

1.1.actual year

Valid to

31.12.9999

Name

personnel hours ##

Cost Center Categories

* (All)

Activity unit

H

Activity Type Category

Manual Entry, Manual Allocation

Allocation Cost Element

943110##

a) Navigate to the SAP Fiori Launchpad and open the

Manage Activity Type app.

b) Enter the required data for the activity type. c) Choose Save . d) Leave the app. 3. Assign your activity type Pers## to your cost center SERV-## and enter an activity price. You do both by using the appropriate transactional app in your SAP Fiori Launchpad. Search with the search tool for Enter Activity Price Use the following data: Field

Value

Planner profile

sapall

Version

0

From Period

1

To Period

12

Fiscal Year

actual year

Cost Center

SERV-##

Activity Type

PERS##


191



. Use the following price information: Field

Value

Price (fixed)

50

Variable Price

80 Enter

a) Navigate to the SAP Fiori launchpad and use the search tool to search for Activity Price and open the app. b) In the Planner profile field, enter sapall and choose the green checkmark. c) Enter the data provided in the first table and choose

Overview Screen .

d) Enter the data provided in the table for price information and choose

Save .

e) Leave the screen by closing the browser window. 4. Assign the activity types 1420, 1421 and 1422 to your cost center PROD-## and enter activity prices. You do both by using the appropriate transactional app in your SAP Fiori Launchpad. Search with the search tool for Enter Activity Price Use the following data: Field

Value

Planner profile

sapall

Version

0

From Period

1

To Period

12

Fiscal Year

actual year

Cost Center

PROD-##

Activity Type

1420

to

1422

Use the following price information: Field

Value

Price (fixed)

40

Variable Price

60 Enter

a) Navigate to the SAP Fiori launchpad and use the search tool to search for Activity Price and open the app. b) In the Planner profile field, enter sapall and choose the green checkmark. c) Enter the data provided in the first table, mark Screen .

Form-Based and choose

d) Enter the data provided in the table for price information and choose

192

Overview

Save .




e) Leave the screen by closing the browser window.


193



Activity Allocations

Figure 107: Cost Center and Activity Type

After creating both the cost center and activity type master records, you then assign a planned price to this combination. The system uses this price to valuate the quantity entered in the direct activity allocation. You specify this in the SAP S/4HANA Finance system by planning the activity output or prices for a cost center. To enable this, the SAP system provides a wide range of options. You can enter the planned price manually or you can have the system calculate it.

194




Assessment

Figure 108: Assessment

For some cost centers, you cannot determine sensible output quantities, for example, facility management cost centers, because they do not really bring out any countable services for others. In this case you may choose to distribute the cost along to a sensible measurement factor, like number of persons using the facility. So you could decide to plan or post the statistical key figure “Number of Employees” to the receiving cost centers and to allocate the cost along this tracing factor. Even if you use activity allocations, the sender may be not balanced at the end of the period. So you may choose to allocate the balance of the cost center by an assessment to others in order to bring the cost center to a balance of zero.


195



196




Unit 5 Exercise 18 Post an Activity Allocation

Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Allocate 20 hours of the activity type PERS## from cost center SERV-## to cost center PROD–## by using the Enter Activity Allocation app. Use the search tool to find the app. Field

Value

Send. CCtr

SERV-##

SAtyTyp

PERS##

Rec. CCtr

PROD-##

Total Quantity

40

2. Check the CO documents that have been created using the Documents app.

Display Actual Controlling

3. Check the FI documents that have been created using the Display G/L Account Line items app. Verify the posting has a portion of fix cost and save your report as new tile in your launchpad group. Ledger

0L

G/L Account

943110##

Status

All Items

Time Interval

From Posting Date

Posting Date

1.1. actual month


197



Unit 5 Solution 18 Post an Activity Allocation

Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Allocate 20 hours of the activity type PERS## from cost center SERV-## to cost center PROD–## by using the Enter Activity Allocation app. Use the search tool to find the app. Field

Value

Send. CCtr

SERV-##

SAtyTyp

PERS##

Rec. CCtr

PROD-##

Total Quantity

40

a) In the Launchpad, open the

Enter Activity Allocation app.

b) Enter the required data. c) Choose Post (Ctrl + S). d) Note the document number and leave the app. 2. Check the CO documents that have been created using the Documents app. a) In the Launchpad, open the

Display Actual Controlling

Display Actual Controlling Documents

app.

b) Enter your Document number or choose the Selection Options icon, choose User Name , and enter your User. Enter Document number from 1 to 9999999999. Be sure not to enter more than 10 digits. c) Choose Execute . d) Drill down from your document to the line items. Set your cursor on your cost center and press the Details icon. You see the posting amount as total value and as fixed value. e) Close the window. 3. Check the FI documents that have been created using the Display G/L Account Line items app. Verify the posting has a portion of fix cost and save your report as new tile in your launchpad group.

198

Ledger

0L

G/L Account

943110##

Status

All Items




Time Interval

From Posting Date

Posting Date

1.1. actual month

a) In the Launchpad, open the

Display G/L Account Line items

b) Enter the required data and choose

app.

Go.

c) Choose Settings , select Fixed amt in GC in the list of columns, and choose You see the new column

Go.

Fixed amt in GC as last column in your list.

d) Move the Fixed amt in GC column with pressed left mouse button to stand behind the column Amount in CC Crcy Note: The value flows between controlling objects are visible in Financial Accounting directly in real time and with the original cost element or account. The values are posted on the same account in Financial Accounting and Management Accounting. We use the same source of truth , which is the Universal Journal (table ACDOCA). So we see of course the same information independent from viewing the data with a FI or a CO report. e) Press in the screen area Line items on the name of the screen variant. Choose Use Name with fix amount, select Set as Default , and choose OK.

Save as .

f) Choose Share to save the report as new tile. Enter as title My G/L Account line items with fix portion and use your launchpad group as Group g) Leave the app


199




200

●


●





Unit 5 Lesson 7 Working with Internal Orders



Internal Orders

Figure 109: Internal Orders

An internal order is a flexible Controlling (CO) tool that can be used for various purposes (to track costs and revenues within a controlling area, for example). Internal orders provide capabilities for planning, monitoring, and allocating costs. Internal orders can be grouped into the following general categories: ●

Overhead orders Overhead orders are used to monitor overhead costs incurred for a particular purpose, such as conducting a trade fair or tracking costs for maintenance and repair work.

●

Investment orders Investment orders are used to monitor costs incurred in the production of a fixed asset, such as building a storage facility.

●

Accrual orders


201



Accrual orders are used to offset postings of accrued costs (costs calculated in CO) to cost centers. ●

Orders with revenue Orders with revenue are used to replace the cost accounting parts of Sales and Distribution (SD) sales orders if SD is not being used. This category is used to track both costs and revenues. If billing is not automated, these orders are also used to monitor revenues that do not affect the core business of an organization, such as miscellaneous revenues.

Internal Order Data

Figure 110: Internal Order Data

The internal order master record consists of different sections. Each section is represented by a tab with predefined field groups. You can change the tab title in Customizing and assign different fields to the tabs. The Order type field is the most important field in the internal order master data. This field allows you to specify the default values for the different master data fields. It also allows you to define certain order characteristics, such as the settings for settlement, planning, and budgeting, depending on what the order is used for. You can use internal orders for planning, collecting, monitoring, and settling costs of certain operations and tasks in an enterprise. You can use the SAP system to control your internal orders throughout the life cycle of an internal order (from creation to final settlement, including planning and posting actual costs).

202



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Working with Internal Orders

Posting to a Real Internal Order

Figure 111: Posting to a Real Internal Order

You can post actual data to an internal order, debiting the internal order. In a cost allocation to the order, the order is debited and the sender is credited. If the internal order is a “real” controlling object, the debits are posted with value type (actual cost) and can be settled later. In addition to the real posting, you can address other “statistical” objects, which will be posted “statistically”. Statistical cost can be used only for analysis purposes, but not for allocations and do not count in any reconciliation between CO and other modules.

04

Figure 112: Posting to a Statistical Order


203



If you mark the internal order to be statistical, you can assign cost to the order in addition to the posting on a real object. An example is as follows: You want to collect the cost for your car fleet on a cost center but additionally for each single car on a separate internal order. The statistical order allows you to post cost of a car “real” on the cost center and at the same point of time “statistical” on the appropriate internal order for that car. The advantages include the following: ● ●

You can analyze the cost on the order and on the cost center at once. You don’t have to settle the order later (and you cannot settle the order later), which would consume time and would result in an additional financial document.

Note: A statistical order should be used, if you only want to collect the cost of an object or an action for reporting purposes without the requirement to allocate the cost to other cost objects later. Order Settlement

Figure 113: Order Settlement

Internal orders are usually used as an interim collector of costs and aid the planning, monitoring, and reporting processes. When a task is complete, the costs have to be passed on to their final destination, such as cost center, fixed asset, and profitability segment. This process is called settlement. It is another form of periodic cost allocation. Depending on the type of internal order and its business purpose, a settlement will occur at the end of each period or at the end of the life of an order.

204




An order settlement can be made to different types of receivers as long as the receivers are defined as valid in Customizing and no impending system restrictions (such as locks) prevent settlement. The figure shows examples of possible settlement receivers. A settlement rule must be defined for each order. This rule is defined in the order master record. The settlement rule may specify that all of the costs on the order are settled to a single receiver or may be split to multiple receivers. Settlement can be structured flexibly by using one of the many available settlement options. Results of Settlement

Figure 114: Results of Settlement

During a settlement, the actual costs incurred on an internal order are allocated to one or more receivers. The system automatically generates offsetting entries to credit the internal order. After settlement, the balance of the internal order should be zero. The costs settled are updated on the corresponding receiver object and displayed in reporting.


205



206




Unit 5 Exercise 19 Maintain Master Data of an Internal Order

Business Example You want to collect cost which are partially connected to your car fleet on a separate order for better controlling. Later you want to settle certain portions of the cost to the cost center SERV-## and to your cost center PROD-##. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. Create an Internal Order for Overhead Cost Management Create an internal order for overhead management by using the

Manage Internal Orders

app.

1. Start the App and enter the following data: Field

Value

Order Type

1000

Order number

HD-XY## (this is an external order number, reflecting your car licence number)

Description

Cost for maintenance services

Currency

EUR

Assignments: Company Code

1010

Object Class

Overhead Costs

Profit Center

T-PCA##

Cost Center Responsible

S4F20

Maintain as Settlement rule: Field

Value

ID 001 Category

Cost Center

Receiver

SERV-##

%

30

Settlement Type

Full Settlement

ID 002 Category


Cost Center

207



208

Receiver

PROD-##

%

70

Settlement Type

Full Settlement




Unit 5 Solution 19 Maintain Master Data of an Internal Order

Business Example You want to collect cost which are partially connected to your car fleet on a separate order for better controlling. Later you want to settle certain portions of the cost to the cost center SERV-## and to your cost center PROD-##. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. Create an Internal Order for Overhead Cost Management Create an internal order for overhead management by using the


app.

1. Start the App and enter the following data: Field

Value

Order Type

1000

Order number

HD-XY## (this is an external order number, reflecting your car licence number)

Description

Cost for maintenance services

Currency

EUR

Assignments: Company Code

1010

Object Class

Overhead Costs

Profit Center

T-PCA##

Cost Center Responsible

S4F20

Maintain as Settlement rule: Field

Value

ID 001 Category

Cost Center

Receiver

SERV-##

%

30

Settlement Type

Full Settlement

ID 002 Category


Cost Center

209



Receiver

PROD-##

%

70

Settlement Type

Full Settlement

a) Navigate to the


app and choose

Create .

b) Enter the data provided in the table. c) Choose Maintain Settlement Rule

.

d) In the Distribution Rules screen area, choose

Insert .

e) Enter the data provided in the second table into the line with line ID 001. f) Choose Insert again and enter the data from the second table into the line with line ID 002. g) Choose Done to leave the settlement rule maintenance and choose order.

210

Save to save your




Unit 5 Exercise 20 Create Transaction-Based Postings to an Internal Order

Business Example You know that the orders used by the departments of your group are updated when business transactions are carried out in Materials Management and Financial Accounting, as well as directly in Management Accounting. In this case we assume that some service cost are directly posted from Financial Accounting to the internal order HD-XY##. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number provided by your instructor. Create G/L Account Postings Create G/L account postings for your marketing brochure overhead order and for your motor pool order and compare the results in the information system. 1. In the SAP Fiori app, Post General Journal Entries services using the data in the table.

, create a posting for layout consulting

Field

Value

Document Date

current date

Posting Date

current date

Company Code

1010

Transaction Currency

EUR

1st Line Item: G/L Account

65001000

Debit Amount

4000

Choose Details Tax Code

V1 (19%)

Order

HD-XY##

2nd Line Item: G/L Account

10010000

Credit Amount

4760

Tax Item:


211



Field

Value

Calculate Tax

check the box

2. In the SAP Fiori app, Internal Orders Plan/Actual , check the effect of the G/L account postings on your order HD-XY##. Display the posted document. Field

Value

Fiscal year

current fiscal year

Category

0

Posting Period Order Number

212

is

current period HD-XY##




Unit 5 Solution 20 Create Transaction-Based Postings to an Internal Order

Business Example You know that the orders used by the departments of your group are updated when business transactions are carried out in Materials Management and Financial Accounting, as well as directly in Management Accounting. In this case we assume that some service cost are directly posted from Financial Accounting to the internal order HD-XY##. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number provided by your instructor. Create G/L Account Postings Create G/L account postings for your marketing brochure overhead order and for your motor pool order and compare the results in the information system. 1. In the SAP Fiori app, Post General Journal Entries services using the data in the table.

, create a posting for layout consulting

Field

Value

Document Date

current date

Posting Date

current date

Company Code

1010

Transaction Currency

EUR

1st Line Item: G/L Account

65001000

Debit Amount

4000

Choose Details Tax Code

V1 (19%)

Order

HD-XY##

2nd Line Item: G/L Account

10010000

Credit Amount

4760

Tax Item:


213



Field

Value

Calculate Tax

check the box

a) In SAP Fiori, search for and open the

Post General Journal Entries

b) Enter the data from the table and choose c) If no error messages show up, choose

app.

Simulate . Post .

d) Leave the App. 2. In the SAP Fiori app, Internal Orders Plan/Actual , check the effect of the G/L account postings on your order HD-XY##. Display the posted document. Field

Value

Fiscal year

current fiscal year

Category

0

Posting Period

is

current period

Order Number

HD-XY##

a) In SAP Fiori, search for and open the

Internal Orders Plan/Actual

app.

b) Enter the data from the table. c) Choose Start Selection . Check the posting on your order on G/L account 65001000. d) Choose Jump to . e) Select the Display G/L Line Items f) Change the Status to

report.

All Items and choose

Go.

g) Verify the document number in the Journal Entry column and the related amount according to the posting.

214




Unit 5 Exercise 21 Settle Orders at Period-End

Business Example In this scenario you will settle your order to cost centers. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. Perform a Settlement Run Carry out a settlement run for your marketing brochure order. 1. Run the actual settlement for your order using the app.

Execute Actual Settlement (Orders)

Check the Balance of your Order Check the balance of your marketing brochure order. 1. Call up the Orders: Actual/Plan/Variance

report for the current period.

What is the balance on your order?

2. Examine the costs that have been settled to each cost center ( SERV-## or PROD–## ). Call up the Cost Centers: Actual/Plan/Variance report for the current period. Execute the report for each of the cost centers and the settlement cost element ( 92112000 ). Go to the Actual Line Items report and switch to the Secondary costs: Value settlement layout so you can see the partner objects of the transactions. Your marketing brochure order should be displayed as a partner object.


215



Unit 5 Solution 21 Settle Orders at Period-End

Business Example In this scenario you will settle your order to cost centers. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. Perform a Settlement Run Carry out a settlement run for your marketing brochure order. 1. Run the actual settlement for your order using the app.

Execute Actual Settlement (Orders)

a) In SAP Easy Access, choose Accounting → Controlling → Internal Orders End Closing → Single Functions → Settlement → Individual Processing . HD-XY##.

b) In the Order field, enter the order number c) In the Settlement period

→ Period-

field, enter order the current period.

d) In the Posting period , field, enter the current period. e) In the Fiscal year field, enter the current fiscal year. f) For the processing type, choose g) Deselect the

Automatic .

Test Run checkbox.

h) Choose Execute . i) Choose the Detail list icon. j) To display the cost element information, choose

Receiver .

k) Press Back . l) To display the accounting documents, choose the Accounting Document Number .

Accounting Documents

and double-click

m) Leave the Transaction. Check the Balance of your Order Check the balance of your marketing brochure order. 1. Call up the Orders: Actual/Plan/Variance

report for the current period.

a) In the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Internal Orders → Information System → Reports for Internal Orders → Plan/Actual Comparisons → Orders: Actual/Plan/ Variance . b) Choose Execute .

216




c) In the Controlling area field, enter A000. d) In the Fiscal year field, enter the current fiscal year. e) In the From period field, enter order the current period. f) In the To period , field, enter the current period. g) In the Plan version field, enter 0. HD-XY##.

h) In the first Or value(s) field, enter the order number i) Choose Execute . What is the balance on your order? The balance should be

zero (blank).

2. Examine the costs that have been settled to each cost center ( SERV-## or PROD–## ). Call up the Cost Centers: Actual/Plan/Variance report for the current period. Execute the report for each of the cost centers and the settlement cost element ( 92112000 ). Go to the Actual Line Items report and switch to the Secondary costs: Value settlement layout so you can see the partner objects of the transactions. Your marketing brochure order should be displayed as a partner object. a) Choose Accounting → Controlling → Cost Center Accounting → Information System → Reports for Cost Center Accounting → Plan/Actual Comparisons → Cost Centers: Actual/Plan/Variance . b) In the Controlling area field, enter A000. c) In the Fiscal year field, enter the current fiscal year. d) In the From period field, enter order the current period. e) In the To period , field, enter the current period. f) In the Plan version field, enter 0. g) In the first Or value(s) field, enter cost center numbers

SERV-## to PROD–##.

h) Choose Execute . i) Double-click the report line for cost element 92112000. j) Double-click Cost Centers: Actual Line Items k) Choose Settings

→ Layout → Choose .

l) Double-click Secondary costs: Value settlement


.

.

217




218






1. Reconciliation accounts are designed for direct posting. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X

True

X

False

2. Which of the following statements are true about a posting key? Choose the correct answers. X

A A posting key applies to the entire Financial Accounting (FI) document.

X

B A posting key defines the account type to be posted.

X

C A posting key defines the type of posting (debit or credit).

X

D A posting key specifies the debit and credit totals of the document.

3. For which of the following elements does the Asset Explorer give a clear overview of the activity for an asset? Choose the correct answers. X

A Planned value

X

B Posted and planned depreciation

X

C Depreciation parameters

X

D Settled value

4. The depreciation is posted in Asset Accounting (AA) and the General Ledger (G/L) before the depreciation posting run is completed. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X

True

X

False


219




1. Reconciliation accounts are designed for direct posting. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X

True

X

False

2. Which of the following statements are true about a posting key? Choose the correct answers. X

A A posting key applies to the entire Financial Accounting (FI) document.

X

B A posting key defines the account type to be posted.

X

C A posting key defines the type of posting (debit or credit).

X

D A posting key specifies the debit and credit totals of the document.

3. For which of the following elements does the Asset Explorer give a clear overview of the activity for an asset? Choose the correct answers. X

A Planned value

X

B Posted and planned depreciation

X

C Depreciation parameters

X

D Settled value

4. The depreciation is posted in Asset Accounting (AA) and the General Ledger (G/L) before the depreciation posting run is completed. Determine whether this statement is true or false.

220

X

True

X

False




UNIT 6

Human Capital Management

Lesson 1 Organizational Management in HCM

222

Exercise 22: Create an Organizational Unit and a Position in Organizational

229

Management

Lesson 2 HCM Master Data

235

Exercise 23: Create an Employee Master Data Record

241

Lesson 3 Integrating with Success Factors

246

UNIT OBJECTIVES ●

Understand the usage of Organizational Management

●

Explain the employee master data record

●

Understand the integration with Success Factors


221



Unit 6 Lesson 1 Organizational Management in HCM



Organizational Management

Figure 115: Organizational Units in Management Accounting

The operating concern is the highest reporting level for profitability and sales and marketing controlling, and the central organizational unit in Profitability Analysis (CO-PA) used to segment and structure the market. Controlling areas structure the internal accounting operations of an organization within Management Accounting. They represent closed units that are used to calculate costs. All internal allocations relate solely to objects that belong to the same controlling area. Company codes are independent accounting units within Financial Accounting. They represent the smallest organizational units for which an account group can be set up for the purposes of external reporting. The process of external reporting involves recording all relevant transactions and generating all supporting documents for financial reports (such as balance sheets and profit and loss statements).

222



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Organizational Management in HCM

Profit Centers are organizational units in accounting that reflect a management-oriented structure of the organization for the purpose of internal control. You can analyze operating results for profit centers using either the cost-of-sales or the period accounting approach. By calculating the fixed capital as well, you can use your profit centers as investment centers. The Cost Element

Figure 116: The Cost Element

The universal journal contains one field, Account, that covers G/L accounts and G/L accounts of type Costs; costs are part of the chart of accounts and maintenance is executed via Account master data maintenance. If you create a G/L account that represents costs, you will always have to assign a CO object such as a cost center, a project, an internal order, or a CO-PA segment. Secondary costs are exclusively used in Management Accounting to identify internal cost flows such as assessments or settlements. Reports, such as the trial balance, will display all posted costs (primary and secondary costs).


223


For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Unit 6: Human Capital Management

Organizational Structure

Figure 117: Organizational Structure

You create your organizational plan using organizational objects and positions. An organizational plan is a comprehensive and dynamic model of the structural and personnel environment in your enterprise. Map hierarchies within your organizational plan as follows: ●

The organizational structure of your enterprise The organizational structure shows the hierarchy that exists between the various organizational units in your enterprise. You create the organizational structure by creating and maintaining organizational units and relating them with one another.

●

The individual positions and reporting structure (chain of command) A reporting structure depicts the line structure that exists in your enterprise. You create a reporting structure by creating and maintaining positions and relating these with one another.

224




Object Types – Organizational Units

Figure 118: Object Types – Organizational Units

Organizational units describe the business units in your enterprise. Multiple organizational units and the relationships between them form the organizational structure. Organizational units can be classified generally (for example, by function or region) or specifically (for example, by project group). The way in which organizational units are classified depends on the company. You must relate organizational units with one another in an organizational plan. The hierarchical interrelationships that exist among the organizational units represent the organizational structure of your enterprise. Organizational units can be linked to cost centers from accounting. The figure illustrates the executive board organizational unit as the superior object over two subordinate objects, HR and Finance. Organizational Structure – Jobs

Figure 119: Organizational Structure – Jobs

Each job represents a unique classification of responsibilities in your organization. When you create a job, consider the specific tasks and requirements associated with it.


225



Jobs are used in the following application components: ●

Shift planning

●

Personnel Cost Planning

●

Personnel Development

Hint: Make your job descriptions as general as possible and as specific as necessary.

Organizational Structure – Positions

Figure 120: Organizational Structure – Positions

After you create a job, you must specify the number of corresponding positions required in the organization. A position inherits the tasks of a job. However, you can define additional tasks that must be performed only by this position. Positions can be 100 percent filled, partially filled, or vacant. Positions, rather than jobs, are held by employees. One position may also be shared by a number of employees, each working less than full time. For example, two employees can hold 60 percent and 40 percent of a full-time position.

226




Object Types – Cost Centers

Figure 121: Object Types – Cost Centers

Cost centers are maintained in Controlling and can be linked to either organizational units or positions. Cost center assignments are inherited along with the organizational unit structure. Organizational Structure – Persons

Figure 122: Organizational Structure – Persons

Persons represent employees in your company. Persons hold positions in the organizational structure that is governed by Organizational Management.


227



Infotypes for persons are maintained in Personnel Administration and linked to an organizational plan through their position assignment. Other defaults in Personnel Administration can be derived from Organizational Management data, such as the Employee Group/Subgroup infotype (1013). Personnel Administration and Planning

Figure 123: Personnel Administration and Planning

If Personnel Administration and Personnel Planning are integrated, you can enter the position in the Actions infotype (0000). This infotype must be added first. You cannot overwrite the job, organizational unit, or cost center fields. These fields define the relationships to the position. Default values can be configured for the personnel area, personnel subarea, business area, employee group, and employee subgroup fields.

228




Unit 6 Exercise 22 Create an Organizational Unit and a Position in Organizational Management

Business Example As the responsible person for the structures in HCM, you need to extend the organizational structure because there is a need for a new position. You will create a new organizational unit for the project department and a new position for a production worker in this department. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise use the cost center, PROD-##, created in the exercise, Create a Cost Center The data created in this exercise is required to create the employee master record in the next exercise. Create a New Organizational Unit for the Project Team Create a new organizational unit, PRD-## as a member of the organizational unit TS410 .

Training

You need to log on to the backend system to create the organizational unit directly, because there is currently no SAP Fiori App available. 1. To create the organizational unit directly, log on to the backend system. 2. Change the validity date to the first day of the current year and change the time period for 24 months. 3. Search for the organizational unit, 4. Create a new organizational unit, Use the following information for the

Training TS410 . PRD-##, using the following information: Details for the Organizational Unit

Field

Value

Organizational Unit 1

PRD-##

Description

Project Department ##

:

Use the following information for the account assignment: Field

Value

Controlling Area

A000

Master Cost Center

PROD-##


229



Create a New Position for the Production Worker Create a new position for an employee in the production area. 1. Create the new position POS-## (Production worker) in the new organizational unit Project Department ##. Mark the newly created organizational unit Project Department ##.

230




Unit 6 Solution 22 Create an Organizational Unit and a Position in Organizational Management

Business Example As the responsible person for the structures in HCM, you need to extend the organizational structure because there is a need for a new position. You will create a new organizational unit for the project department and a new position for a production worker in this department. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise use the cost center, PROD-##, created in the exercise, Create a Cost Center The data created in this exercise is required to create the employee master record in the next exercise. Create a New Organizational Unit for the Project Team Create a new organizational unit, PRD-## as a member of the organizational unit TS410 .

Training

You need to log on to the backend system to create the organizational unit directly, because there is currently no SAP Fiori App available. 1. To create the organizational unit directly, log on to the backend system. a) On the SAP Logon, choose the entry user.

T41 and log on to the backend system with your

2. Change the validity date to the first day of the current year and change the time period for 24 months. a) From the menu tree, choose Human Resources → Organizational Management → Organizational Plan → Organization and Staffing → Change . Alternatively, use transaction code PPOME. b) Change the validity date to the first day of the current year and change the time period for 24 months. 3. Search for the organizational unit,

Training TS410 .

a) On the left side, choose

Find by Organizational Unit

b) In the dialog box, in the

With name field enter Training TS410.

4. Create a new organizational unit, Use the following information for the


PRD-##, using the following information: Details for the Organizational Unit

:

231



Field

Value

Organizational Unit 1

PRD-##

Description


Use the following information for the account assignment: Field

Value

Controlling Area

A000

Master Cost Center

PROD-##

a) Right-click the Training TS410 organizational unit and choose

Create .

b) Choose New relationship → Organizational Unit . c) In the Details for the Organizational Unit d) On the Account Assignment

, enter the data provided in the first table.

tab, enter the data provided in the second table.

e) To reassign the controlling area, choose the the controlling area A000 in the field.

Reassign Controlling area

icon and enter

f) Save your entries. Create a New Position for the Production Worker Create a new position for an employee in the production area. 1. Create the new position POS-## (Production worker) in the new organizational unit Project Department ##. Mark the newly created organizational unit Project Department ##. a) Select the newly created Organizational Unit Production position and use the following data:

PRD-## . Create a new

Basic data: Field

Value

Short Key

POS-##

Short Description

Production Worker ##

Account assignment: Field

Value

Controlling Area

A000

Master Cost Center

PROD-##

b) Select the Organizational Unit Project Department ## and create a new assignment. Choose the Create icon. In the dialog box, choose the position entry. On the Basic Data tab, enter the following data:

232




Field

Value

Short Key

POS-##

Short Description


c) On the Account assignment

tab, enter the following data:

Field

Value

Controlling Area

A000

Master Cost Center

PROD-##

d) Save the data.


233




234





Unit 6 Lesson 2 HCM Master Data



Employee Master Data Record

Figure 124: From Vacancy to Hiring

You can use the e-recruitment component to complete the entire recruitment process, from initial entry of applicant data to filling vacant positions. The SAP system supports you in identifying workforce requirements, creating job advertisements, screening applicants, and managing applicant correspondence. When you hire a candidate, you can transfer the candidate data recorded in e-recruitment to Personnel Administration as employee data. Line managers can use the Manager's Desktop to map their decisions on candidates and trigger further administration in the Human Resources (HR) department, efficiently and cost-effectively.


235



Infotypes

Figure 125: Infotypes

Personal information, such as last name, first name, and date of birth, is defined in data fields. Data fields are grouped into data groups or information units according to their content. In Human Resources (HR), these information units are called information types or infotypes for short. HR data is stored in groups that logically belong together according to content. For example, place of residence, street, and house number make up the address of an employee and are so stored (together with additional data) in the Addresses infotype. Infotypes have names and four-digit keys, for example, the 0006.

236

Addresses infotype has the key



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: HCM Master Data

Employee Master Record

Figure 126: Ways to Maintain an Employee Master Record

Employee data must be kept current. Data can be displayed, corrected, and supplemented. Human Capital Management (HCM) stores the data of an employee in infotype records. Each infotype record has validity, which is a validity interval or a key date. Infotype records can be processed in the following ways: ●

Single screen maintenance (individual infotype maintenance) You can call individual infotypes to maintain data for a particular subject or situation. You maintain one infotype at a time for a personnel number.

●

Personnel actions You can use personnel actions if the subject or situation is more complex and you need to maintain more than one infotype. When you perform a personnel action, the system displays all the relevant infotypes for you to maintain, one after the other.

●

Fast entry You can use fast entry to maintain an infotype for more than one personnel number simultaneously.


237



Initial Entry Screen for Infotype Maintenance

Figure 127: Initial Entry Screen for Infotype Maintenance

Infotypes that are most frequently used are grouped together by subject matter and assigned to static menus. One infotype can be included in more than one menu. However, infotypes that are rarely used might not be included in any menus. To access a particular menu, choose the tab on the Maintain HR Master Data screen. The green ticks next to the menu list of infotypes indicate that these records already exist for the selected personnel number.

238




Personnel File

Figure 128: Personnel File

The personnel file lists all the infotypes for which records have been created for a personnel number. The infotypes are displayed in ascending numerical order. If more than one record exists for an infotype, the records are displayed one after the other. The system then goes to the next infotype, after which it returns to the initial screen. You can scroll forward and backward within the personnel file.


239



240




Unit 6 Exercise 23 Create an Employee Master Data Record

Business Example You hired a new Project Engineer. Therefore, you need to create an employee master record. The new employee will be assigned to the vacant position of the Project Department. This exercise requires the position, POS-## and the organizational unit, the exercise, Create a New Employee Master Record for a Project Engineer.

PRD-## , created in

The employee master record created in this exercise is required in one or more subsequent exercises in this course. 1. Create a new employee master record using the old transaction, because there is no SAP Fiori app available. Log on to system T41 to create the master data record. Hire a new employee for the position POS-## to be used in the project system later. The personal number will be given internally by the system. You will use the action HIRE to create the employee master record. Go to Personnel Actions (transaction code PA40) to create the employee master record. Use the following data to create the employee master record: Field

Value

Personnel number

Leave blank

From

Today’s date

Choose the HIRE Personnel Action and enter the following data: Field

Value

Personnel Area

1010

Employee Group

1

Employee subgroup

Y1

On the Create Personal data


Field

Value

Title

Own choice

Last Name

Own choice

First Name

Own choice

Birth date

Own choice


241



Field

Value

Nationality

German

On the Create Organizational Assignment

tab enter the following data:

Field

Value

Payroll Area

X0

Position

Number for POS-##

Delimit the vacancy for the proposed day. In the Create Addresses

tab, enter any address data of your choice.

Note: We will not add any entries on the

Create Communication

tab.

Write down your personnel number. ____________________________________________________________

242




Unit 6 Solution 23 Create an Employee Master Data Record

Business Example You hired a new Project Engineer. Therefore, you need to create an employee master record. The new employee will be assigned to the vacant position of the Project Department. This exercise requires the position, POS-## and the organizational unit, the exercise, Create a New Employee Master Record for a Project Engineer.

PRD-## , created in

The employee master record created in this exercise is required in one or more subsequent exercises in this course. 1. Create a new employee master record using the old transaction, because there is no SAP Fiori app available. Log on to system T41 to create the master data record. Hire a new employee for the position POS-## to be used in the project system later. The personal number will be given internally by the system. You will use the action HIRE to create the employee master record. Go to Personnel Actions (transaction code PA40) to create the employee master record. Use the following data to create the employee master record: Field

Value

Personnel number

Leave blank

From

Today’s date

Choose the HIRE Personnel Action and enter the following data: Field

Value

Personnel Area

1010

Employee Group

1

Employee subgroup

Y1

On the Create Personal data


Field

Value

Title

Own choice

Last Name

Own choice

First Name

Own choice

Birth date

Own choice


243



Field

Value

Nationality

German

On the Create Organizational Assignment

tab enter the following data:

Field

Value

Payroll Area

X0

Position

Number for POS-##

Delimit the vacancy for the proposed day. In the Create Addresses

tab, enter any address data of your choice.

Note: We will not add any entries on the

Create Communication

tab.

Write down your personnel number. ____________________________________________________________ a) To create the employee master data record, choose Human Resources → Personnel Management → Administration → HR Master Data → Personnel Actions . Alternatively, use transaction code PA40. b) On the Data Screen Personnel Actions tab, leave the personnel number blank (the number will be given internally). In the field from enter today’s date. For the action type Hire , enter the data provided in the relevant table. No entry is required on the

Create Actions tab.

c) Save the data. d) On the Create Personal Data

tab, enter the data provided in the relevant table.

e) Save your entries. f) On the Create Organizational Assignment table.

tab, enter the data provided in the relevant

g) Save your entries. h) On the Create Addresses

tab, enter any data of your own choice.

i) Save your entries.

244







245



Unit 6 Lesson 3 Integrating with Success Factors



Integration with Success Factors

Figure 129: Time Management

Evaluating work performed by employees and determining employee availability are essential elements for a human resources system. This information is also relevant for other areas, such as controlling (how the employee spent their time) and logistics (determines employee availability for planning activities) and is a factor that influences enterprise-wide decisions. Time management allows you to display and record working times flexibly. Information on working times is used to calculate gross wages in payroll. There are various options available for recording time data, such as hours worked, vacation, off-site work or substitutions. Time recording options include the following: ●

●

246

Online data entry by the time administrator (for example, using the Time Manager's Workplace) Using front-end time recording systems (for example, Kronos)



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Integrating with Success Factors

●

Using the Cross-Application Time Sheet (CATS)

●

Using Employee Self-Service (ESS) applications

Planned Working Time Time data is stored in special time infotypes, just like HR master data information. The planned working time infotype 0007 is the central time management infotype. It contains the times when the employee is scheduled to work according to the assigned work schedule.

Figure 130: Planned Working Time Infotype

By defining the planned working time for your employees, you determine how long they must work on a daily basis. Payroll Designed for global business, SAP ERP HCM supports payroll functions and regulatory requirements. In general terms, payroll is concerned with calculating each employee's remuneration for the work performed. It encompasses a multitude of processes, such as the creation of payroll results and salary statements, bank transfers and payment to employees.


247



Figure 131: Payroll

Payroll includes a number of additional subsequent activities. Examples of these activities include the following: ●

Transfer of payroll results to accounting (for example, expenses and liabilities)

●

Data medium exchange (transfer of net pay amounts to financial institutions)

●

Other evaluations, such as the payroll account and payroll journal

●

The preparation of pay statements

The calculation of payments to employees includes the following: ●

Calculation of pay elements (gross amount)

●

Statutory and voluntary deductions (country-specific, net amount)

These payments and deductions are included in the payment calculation, using different wage types. The employee is usually paid by bank transfer or check and the payment amount is printed on a form for the employee. Employee Self-Service Using Employee Self-Service (ESS), employees maintain their own personal information and control many administrative transactions and other processes once handled by the HR staff. ESS streamlines approval processes for activities such as vacation requests and allows employees to check, for example, their vacation balance or benefits, thus reducing administrative costs. With ESS, employees can take responsibility for updating their own data. ESS empowers employees to view, create, and maintain their data any time, anywhere, via Web based technology. ESS has an intuitive, HTML-based user interface. ESS is an effective means to provide real-time access and data maintenance capabilities to the source or owner of the data, and to offload many of the data entry and related customer

248




service activities that may typically be performed in a company’s human resources, payroll, benefits, and travel departments. The following table provides an overview of the activities that employees complete using ESS: Table 3: ESS Activity Employee Self-Service Activity

Employee Self-Service Activity

Submit travel expenses

Enter work times

View the calendar

Enroll in benefits

Search the Who's Who

Update banking information

Update personal information (such as address, marital status, and so on)

Enroll in a training course

ESS: Highlights ●

Extensive functionality beyond basic HR functionality, including travel management and purchasing

●

Inherent integration between SAP system business scenarios, ESS, and Workflow

●

Global availability of all functions

●

Access from any platform at anytime from anywhere

●

Easy to use

●

Personalized

Benefits of ESS include the following: ●

Well-informed employee decisions

●

Reduced administrative costs and shorter cycle times

●

Accurate employee records

●

Time and resources saved for strategic HR initiatives

Manager Self-Service Manager Self-Service (MSS) consists of a set of easy-to-use tools, transactions, and reporting capabilities. MSS gives managers a single point of access to information and enables them to manage information efficiently, effectively, and proactively in one Web interface. It empowers managers to execute human capital and finance management strategies for budgeting, recruitment, compensation, and cost management, thus creating return on investment. MSS leverages human resources and financial back-end systems by making pertinent information available to managers throughout your enterprise. Self-service tools automate paper-based processes, such as requests for employee master data changes (for example, transfers and salary increases) or performance appraisals. The MSS solution integrates different systems and management information is consistent across the organization.


249



Figure 132: Single Point of Access

Managers can use MSS to do the following: ●

Obtain information

●

Recruit employees

●

Perform compensation planning

●

Control costs

●

Manage budget and headcount planning

●

Submit personnel data changes

SAP ERP HCM allows you to manage employees with multiple assignments. In the standard system, you can track and manage all the employment relationships of an employee, in various countries. This is especially important for global enterprises. In SAP ERP HCM, global employees are managed by linking each employee's personnel assignments to the person.

250




HR Renewal Overview

Figure 133: HCM Core Renovation

SAP Business Client (BC), as of enhancement package 5, allows customers to implement employee self-services or manager self-services without using a portal. The look and feel of the SAP BC screens are similar to those displayed using a portal. SAP BC offers a unified environment for, and a single point of entry to, SAP applications. SAP BC is an environment that hosts SAP GUIs to provide a unified environment with a more efficient, intuitive, and complete user experience. Within SAP BC you can move seamlessly between Web Dynpro and SAP GUI transactions. For SAP GUI to run within the SAP BC, SAP GUI must be installed (as part of the SAP BC installation or separately). The benefits of SAP BC include the following: ●

There is a single point of entry for SAP GUI applications and Web Dynpro applications.

●

New Web Dynpro applications including POWER Lists improve functionality and usability.

●

Desktop integration gives users the potential to leverage everything on the desktop.

●

There is powerful search functionality including desktop search and external search engines.

●

The smart client improves the performance of Web Dynpro applications.

●

Minimal training effort due to familiar look and feel.

●

The state-of-the-art UI more than matches the quality of the competition and it has distinctive SAP branding.

Human Capital Management for core users such as HR professionals, employees, and managers has undergone a facelift. It has fresh interfaces based on new technologies plus updated screen layouts. HR Renewal delivers rich functionality using browser based screens.


251



HR Renewal is available using SAP BC and the Enterprise Portal. For more information about HR Renewal and the Enterprise Portal, refer to SAP Note 1701634 — HR Renewal 1.0. Barriers between Personnel Administration (PA) and Organizational Management (OM) have been removed and you can work with Organization Units, Positions, or Employee objects using the same interfaces. HR Renewal roles enable fast access options to guide you to required functionality and processes. Accessibility is enabled using a lanes concept, which is the new access option for different specialists, such as HR Professionals, employees, and managers. HR Professional Role — Landing Page

Figure 134: HR Professional Role — Landing Page

The HR Professional role is part of HR Renewal and has improved new functionality available with the new user interface. Role-specific start pages allow the user to easily access such things as important action items, frequently used applications, collaboration, and subscribed feeds. Selected PA and OM data is displayed to the HR Professional, allowing them to edit combined PA and OM data for single-step processes, for example, employee hiring, employee transfer, employee/ promotion, and organizational changes. Mass data change activities such as mass hiring is also available. A harmonized UI allows the HR Professional user to navigate and change employee data and organizational structures easily. The newly redefined navigation helps the users work more effectively and efficiently by allowing quick navigation with fewer clicks to the content. Information is organized, prioritized, and accessible to the user. Fast data entry aids such as cut, copy, paste, and user friendly capabilities such as, search and save as draft, provide better usability. The following are the high-level tasks involved in deploying HR Renewal and activating the landing page: 1. Install HR Renewal. HR Renewal complete functionality is delivered with ERP EhP7. 2. Activate business functions. 3. Activate OData services. 4. Maintain SAP Gateway OData Services (Configure ICF nodes). 5. Maintain Customizing settings. 6. Copy or build the composite role.

252




The HR Professional landing page is a single point of access to employee and organizational data. A landing page is the initial page displayed when a role is accessed. The landing page provides access to vertical lanes showing high-level information or favorite content for a given subject area. When selected, a lane expands to display detail and give access to more functionality. An expanded lane can be condensed again by closing. HR Professional lanes include the following: ●

Actions

●

Analytics

●

Organization

●

Tasks by priority

●

Tasks by time

●

Tasks by draft

●

Discussions (Feeds and collaboration)

●

Search

●

Processes

Lanes can exist in multiple landing pages and the level of access to the data is controlled by the type of lane and by user authorizations. You can personalize the user interface, create Favorites, access recently used items, select which lanes you want to see, change the order of the lanes, and select a preferred background picture. HR Professional Role — Actions

Figure 135: HR Professional Role — Actions

The HR Professional can edit infotypes for the selected objects using the BizCard view, dataset view, or table view. Single infotype editing can be completed using a form called in the action menu. Employee data maintenance for one infotype at a time (single infotype) has different views and displays depending on the view selected or the tasks required.


253



The table view of an infotype includes the following information: ●

A list of records in a table

●

Key fields of the selected infotype displayed

●

‘In-place’ editing options (editing on the screen)

The dataset view of an infotype includes the following information: ●

Extracts or blocks of records instead of a table

●

Navigation to editing

Multi-infotype scenarios include employee data maintenance that involves multiple infotypes. Before HR Renewal, this action was called a personal action in the backend and is now called a multi-infotype scenario. Multi-infotype scenarios are delivered from the actions lane and are based on HCM Processes and Forms. A multi-infotype scenario can represent a PA action or an OM action. The user processing information, whether an HR professional or a manager processing information for an employee, does not have to worry about different selections for single infotype changes, multi-infotype changes, or changing screens either with or without workflow. All information is available within the same application and the context-specific action menu provides the appropriate fields to be completed. An action completed using HR Renewal functionality is not the same as a classical PA action. Manager Self Service (MSS)

Figure 136: Manager Role

As a manager, the following lanes are available: ●

Approvals This lane enables managers to access their inbox, which lists work items they are responsible for processing.

●

Work Feeds This lane displays notifications pushed from the backend to the manager. A work feed notification can, for example, advise the manager of a missing employee time sheet.

●

254

My Team




This lane provides the manager with a view of information on their direct reports in the team. ●

My Team Services The manager can start services applicable to the team from this lane.

●

KPI Monitor This lane provides managers with an overview on the status of key performance indicators (KPIs) for their area of responsibility.

●

My KPIs This lane provides managers with an overview of their favorite KPIs for their area of responsibility.

●

My Reports This lane provides managers with a single point of entry to access required reports.

In addition to the MSS lanes, as an employee, you also have access to ESS lanes. You can personalize your landing page by, for example, changing the order of lanes, their names, and the background image used. Employee Self Service (ESS)

Figure 137: Employee Role

As a nonmanager employee, the following lanes are available: ●

Search: Provides a central search function


255



●

My Information: Maintain your own infotypes

●

My Learning: Manage your learning activities

●

My Services: Provides access to ESS services

●

Work Feeds: Provides notification of tasks or activities to be completed by the employee (for example, complete a self-assessment for a performance review)

You can personalize your landing page by, for example, changing the order of lanes, their names, and the background image used. Learning Solution (LSO)

Figure 138: Learner Role

When the learning solution business function HCM_LSO_CI_4 is applied, the My Learning lane appears as part of the ESS role. Expanding the lane takes you to the Training Home page. The Training Home page allows you to do the following:

256

●

Review your course bookings

●

Search for courses

●

View notifications about courses you need to take or retake

●

Run a profile match-up to find gaps in your skills and competencies




SuccessFactors Overview

Figure 139: Success Factors

Backed by SAP experience and global reach, SuccessFactors (an SAP company) solutions benefit from SAP years of experience in HR systems. SuccessFactors solutions are modular and support you as you transition to the Cloud at your pace. SuccessFactors offers a “your cloud, your way” adoption path. You can start anywhere; leverage your investments in onpremise solutions and easily deliver leading core HR, talent, and analytics solutions in the Cloud, or move all your HR processes to the Cloud immediately. Scenarios are supported with pre-delivered integrations developed and maintained by SAP to deliver the lowest total cost of ownership (TCO) possible. SuccessFactors products are very cost effective and typically take two to six months to implement. Software is updated 4 times a year, which means that you benefit from new features four times a year.

Figure 140: Modular Deployed at your Pace

Employee Central Employee Central delivers a suite of applications for your most demanding business priorities. The next-generation core HR system (HRIS) is designed for the global enterprise workforce and delivered securely using the SuccessFactors cloud. Employee Central is the central repository for all of your employee data and it is the foundation for all of the SuccessFactors solutions. Employee Central is built using modern technology, so it is much more flexible and much easier to use than traditional applications. Features of Employee Central include the following:


257



●

●

●

● ●

●

One global system of record: The SuccessFactors platform is effective-dated across geographies, cost centers, legal entities, and employee types. Complete workforce data: Combined HR and talent data delivers a comprehensive employee profile. Powerful analytics: Correlate workforce data with financials, CRM, and other data for actionable insights. Social collaboration: Optimize workforce productivity and accelerate innovation. Seamless integration: Connect with on-premise or cloud-based applications such as ERP, time and attendance, and benefits. Continuous innovation: Cloud-delivered enhancements are provided four times per year, with no additional cost or disruption.

SAP Cloud Payroll Available for Employee Central Global payroll solution designed by SAP is available as a hosted option that comes integrated with Employee Central. For organizations that wish to manage payroll in-house using a cloudbased solution, Employee Central Payroll offers all the same features and benefits as onpremise payroll SAP solution and is delivered with the security, scale, and flexibility of the SuccessFactors cloud. Employee Central Payroll offers you the following: ●

● ●

● ●

A proven solution: Based on the world's leading-edge payroll solution, it is currently used by thousands of organizations worldwide. Global reach: Employee Central Payroll is currently available for many countries. Choice: Available for customers who want the benefits and convenience of cloud delivery, but who also want the control of implementing and managing payroll in-house. Lower TCO: Realize the significant cost advantages of a cloud-based solution. Compliance: Employee Central Payroll delivers legal compliance and best practices. Dedicated specialists and country-specific product managers stay on top of all local statutes so you do not have to.

Compensation Employee compensation is a huge expense, often the largest expense for many companies. With SuccessFactors Compensation, you can allocate compensation funds effectively to retain your top performers and avoid overpaying underachievers. Beyond rewarding great performance, you can also optimize budgets, improve compliance, and reduce manual errors, all leading to better business execution and results. SuccessFactors Compensation allows you to do the following: ●

●

●

●

258

Manage compensation easily: Intuitive, configurable processes for base and variable pay have simple, accurate, and streamlined workflows. Eliminate manager bias: Performance-based calibration across the company improves fairness and retention. Increase insight with metrics: Dashboards and reports can be combined with other business data for total employee compensation analysis. Improve budget and regulatory compliance: Automated monitoring and built-in reports keep payouts in line with budgets and regulations.




●

Assure data integrity: Automatically stored data saves time, reduces risk, and improves audit compliance.

SAP Jam SAP Jam delivers social collaboration where you work, connecting customers, partners, and colleagues with information, applications, and processes to solve business-critical problems. It also facilitates driving results; all in your business applications, on your mobile device, or in SAP Jam. By adding collaboration to sales, HR, and other processes, you shorten sales cycles, increase customer, and employee engagement, and reduce training costs. You avoid disconnected silos of collaboration; instead, there is a single, secure social foundation across your entire business. SAP Jam enables you to do the following: ●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Connect: Improve communications and better connect employees across different geographies. Improve information sharing: Enable employees to find subject matter experts quickly and to share best practices. Drive decision making: Help teams tame project chaos, build consensus, and drive informed decisions. Collaborate externally: Strategize, communicate, and drive progress with customers, vendors, and partners. Social or blended learning: Reduce training costs with informal learning where experts can create content or video and can share expertise. Complement formal training with collaborative communities. Social onboarding: Improve time to contribution for new employees by connecting them with the people and content that they need to know. Collaborative performance and goal management: Create and share goals collectively for faster and better goal alignment and completion. Collaborative opportunity management: Bring all key participants together (sales, product management, service, partners, and others) in the opportunity process to reduce analysis and proposal development time. Keep key stakeholders updated in real time regarding opportunity progress.

Learning SuccessFactors Learning combines formal, social, and extended learning with unmatched content management, reporting, analytics, and mobile abilities. The result is learning that transforms the business and provides verifiable return on investment (ROI). SuccessFactors Learning enables you to do the following: ●

●

●

●

Manage learning more efficiently: Store learning activities in a single location to reduce costs and create greater visibility. Improve compliance reporting: Use the Learning Management System (LMS) to track, train, and automate required certification assignments. Blend formal and social for greater ROI: Accelerate performance and increase learning retention by using SAP Jam as part of learning processes. Extend learning easily: Train your partners and customers with an Extended Enterprise solution that includes e-commerce functions.


259



●

●

Make administration more powerful and intuitive: Wizard-based processes and assignment profiles provide unparalleled automation for your administrators. Improve content delivery: Reduce costs, increase efficiency, and assure that e-learning exceeds business results with a unique iContent service.

Performance and Goals SuccessFactors Performance and Goals equips you with the in-depth employee performance information you need to retain, reward, and develop your best people. It’s innovative capabilities and intuitive user experience ensure aligned, clear goals, and accurate objective talent assessments. SuccessFactors Performance and Goals allows you to do the following: ●

●

●

●

●

●

Align goals: Employees and managers can align individual goals with company business objectives. Deliver relevant formal reviews: Easy and engaging focal reviews. 360-degree assessments expand performance insight and improve employee engagement and retention. Calibrate performance: Intuitive, visual employee comparisons ensure objective and factbased assessment decisions. Support managers: Writing Assistant and Coaching Advisor help managers provide more meaningful feedback and coaching. Identify top talent: Compare and rate employees across the same dimensions to identify high performers and potential future leaders. Communicate continuously: With SuccessFactors Mobile Touchbase, you can easily track issues and accelerate work on top-priority projects.

Recruiting SuccessFactors Recruiting is the only comprehensive recruiting solution that helps you attract and engage top talent, select and hire the best-fit candidates, and then measure the business results. Unlike other solutions, you can focus on more than just the selection phase of the process. SuccessFactors Recruiting allows you to do the following: ●

●

●

●

●

Target the talent you need: the patented methodology of SuccessFactors ensures that your jobs get in front of the right candidate with the right message at the right time. Engage easily and effectively: Apply marketing best practices to cultivate strong candidates so you have a pipeline that will save recruiters time and get results. Improve selection: SuccessFactors uses social, mobile, and competency-based approach to evaluating candidates speeds up the hiring process but keeps it fair. Onboard seamlessly: Accelerate new-hire engagement and impact with automated forms, and broaden your access to people and resources in the employee social network. Get results you can see: Improve return on your recruiting dollars, and demonstrate how your recruiting strategy is driving business results.

Succession and Development Successful business execution requires the right people in the right places for maximum impact throughout your organization. SuccessFactors Succession and Development helps you identify, develop, and retain talent at every level of your company, keeping your workforce responsive and flexible. With a dynamic, comprehensive, and objective view of your

260




workforce, you can recognize and bridge the talent gaps in your organization. SuccessFactors Succession and Development enables you to do the following: ●

●

●

●

●

●

Identify key positions: Succession management allows you to address current and potential talent gaps to reduce the risk of poor business execution. Provide talent continuity: Proactively identify your go-to employees and develop them for upcoming job transitions. Gain workforce insights: Gain visibility into employee experience, expertise, performance, and career aspirations. Understand employee histories: Map every staffing move across the company and see gained employee experience. Improve career planning: Address talent gaps, engage employees, and accelerate learning with targeted development plans. Calibrate ratings: Ensure objective, accurate ratings across groups, and departments using competency-based criteria.

Workforce Analytics Workforce Analytics improves decision making by helping companies find answers to key questions about workforce challenges and provides guidance to help solve them. Workforce Analytics provides answers that can help drive successful workforce initiatives. Features of SuccessFactors Workforce Analytics include the following: ●

●

Designed for business execution: Workforce Analytics is fully integrated with SuccessFactors, is easy to use, and provides the insights and tools you need to take action. Built-in expertise: With more than 30 years of expertise in HR metrics built into our tools, technology, processes, and services, SuccessFactors sets the standard for workforce metrics and benchmarks, and it provides the tools that make everyone successful.

SuccessFactors Workforce Analytics provides you with access to a community of experts. SuccessFactors consultants offer proven excellence in HR analytics, planning, and metrics, and are available to share best practices and accelerate your business execution. Customers are encouraged to join a peer community and share ideas. Workforce Planning Workforce Planning helps you to manage your organization's exposure to significant risks from global talent shortages or an aging workforce. Understanding and closing the gap between current and projected talent needs can help you to execute strategy effectively. SuccessFactors Workforce Planning helps you to ensure that you have the right people with the right skills, at the right time and cost, so that you can execute your business strategy successfully, now and in the future. Fully integrated with SuccessFactors, Workforce Planning enables “what-if” scenario planning and analysis, allowing your leaders to act with confidence and a clear understanding of the financial and operational implications of your plans. Proper planning results in improved short-term and long-term recruiting, succession, learning, development, performance, and other workforce initiatives. For more information, see workforce-planning.html


http://www.successfactors.com/en_us/solutions/analytics/

261



Cloud Transition

Figure 141: Cloud Transition Scenarios for SAP Customers

Cloud transition scenarios for SAP customers enable you to leverage existing investments, and connect with delivered integrations. SuccessFactors and SAP Integration strategy is built on the following strategic pillars: ●

●

●

Data Foundation: Builds the foundation for integrated data between SAP and SuccessFactors -

Include employee and organizational data (such as reporting relationships)

-

Eliminate double data entry and maintenance

-

Integrate two systems of records

Process Integration: End-to-end process integration across a loosely-coupled suite -

Driven by processes (for example, pay-for-performance, attract-to-hire)

-

Support end-to-end HR processes by bidirectional integration

-

Increase integration quality (for example, event-based and periodical)

Seamless User Experience: Unified access for end users to all HCM processes, regardless of back-end system -

Provide a single point of access across systems

-

Unified menus and navigation

Customers benefit by additional choice of solutions based on their business needs. We offer a comprehensive portfolio of solutions to run your HCM processes fully in the cloud, onpremise, or in a hybrid deployment combining both. The following are some of the solutions we offer:

262

●

Cloud-based technology

●

Real-time, bidirectional process integration

●

Data integration

●

Graphical flows and mappings

●

Centralized monitoring and administration




●

Prebuilt adapters

●

Community marketplace (future)

●

●

Compatible with content (mappings, for example) of SAP Process Integration and SAP Data Services (planned) Lower cost of change over time

Integration Options

Figure 142: SuccessFactors and SAP Integration

We have the capability to offer integration out-of-the-box more cost-effectively than any other combination of SAP and non-SAP. The overall cloud strategy is best described as a “loosely coupled suite” (or a suite of best of breed). For example, you receive the benefits of cloudbased solutions on top of your on-premise solutions and allow for seamless integration. That is why the SuccessFactors solutions for talent management and ERP HCM are separate and we focus on the orchestration of the two. With our existing integration packages we ensure that all employee master data is available for all of the SuccessFactors talent modules. That includes core talent management as well as learning and recruiting, and analytics. Deeper integration for areas such as compensation management and recruiting are supported with various interfaces. You can choose solutions based on your business needs. A comprehensive portfolio of solutions is available to run your HCM processes fully in the cloud, on-premise, or in a hybrid deployment combining both. These solutions allow you to do the following: ●

●

Make the most of your investment -

Complement and extend your on-premise core HR applications

-

Use a phased approach to transform your organization

-

Deploy an integrated suite of talent management applications at your pace

Take advantage of easy implementation -

Replace applications as needed; no need to switch everything overnight


263



●

Create a roadmap that fits your future -

●

Strong roadmap of enhancements and new functionality with huge research and development investment ensure successful delivery Benefit from increasing integration of SAP and SuccessFactors

Provide standard integration, delivered and maintained by SAP -

●

SuccessFactors and the SAP Business Suite run by hundreds of customers already

Programs, tools, and methodologies to help customers leverage a combination of SAP and SuccessFactors HR processes as seamlessly as possible and at the lowest possible TCO

Design as a “loosely coupled suite” -

-

A stable Core HR (on premise) while easily absorbing ongoing innovations in talent management via the cloud enabled to the clients No platform interdependencies

SuccessFactors Functionality

Figure 143: Talent Hybrid Overview

With the talent hybrid model, you can run core HR processes (for example, personnel administration, organizational management, payroll) on-premise with SAP ERP HCM connected with talent solutions (performance management, learning, recruiting) and optionally workforce analytics, all in the cloud, with SuccessFactors.

264




Pre-Delivered Process Integration — Compensation

Figure 144: Pre-Delivered Process Integration — Compensation

The figure Pre-Delivered Process Integration — Compensation shows the pre-delivered process integration between SuccessFactors Compensation and SuccessFactors HCM integration 1.0 SP2. The delivered integration is as follows: 1. Send current salary information to SuccessFactors Compensation. 2. Plan compensation in SuccessFactors Compensation with SAP employee, organizational, and salary data. 3. Pay approved merit increases, bonuses, and lump-sum payments with SAP Payroll. LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●



265



266





1. Profit Centers can be used as investment centers. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X

True

X

False

2. Which of the following elements are part of the organizational structure? Choose the correct answers. X

A Payroll area

X

B Jobs

X

C Employee group

X

D Persons

3. ____________________ is assigned to a company code. Choose the correct answer. X

A An employee group

X

B A personnel subarea

X

C A payroll area

X

D A personnel area

4. Which of the following functions can an employee perform by using Employee Self-Service (ESS)? Choose the correct answers. X

A Search the Who’s Who

X

B Submit travel expenses

X

C Check employee reviews

X

D Update banking information


267



5. Which of the following areas are covered in Manager Self-Service (MSS)? Choose the correct answers.

268

X

A Performance appraisal (employee reviews)

X

B Change requests of an employee

X

C Monitoring

X

D Execution





1. Profit Centers can be used as investment centers. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X

True

X

False

2. Which of the following elements are part of the organizational structure? Choose the correct answers. X

A Payroll area

X

B Jobs

X

C Employee group

X

D Persons

3. ____________________ is assigned to a company code. Choose the correct answer. X

A An employee group

X

B A personnel subarea

X

C A payroll area

X

D A personnel area


269



4. Which of the following functions can an employee perform by using Employee Self-Service (ESS)? Choose the correct answers. X

A Search the Who’s Who

X

B Submit travel expenses

X

C Check employee reviews

X

D Update banking information

5. Which of the following areas are covered in Manager Self-Service (MSS)? Choose the correct answers.

270

X

A Performance appraisal (employee reviews)

X

B Change requests of an employee

X

C Monitoring

X

D Execution




UNIT 7

Purchase to Pay Processing in SAP S/4HANA

Lesson 1 Describing the Purchase to Pay Business Process

273

Lesson 2 Defining the Master Data Used in the Purchase to Pay Process

286

Exercise 24: Create a Material Master Record

291

Lesson 3 Creating a Vendor Master Record

297

Exercise 25: Create and Extend a Vendor Master Record

299

Lesson 4 Listing Additional Vendor Specific Master Data Records

303

Exercise 26: Create a Purchasing Info Record

307

Lesson 5 Creating Purchase Requisitions

312

Exercise 27: Create a Purchase Requisition for a Stock Item and a Consumable

319

Material

Lesson 6 Creating Purchase Orders

323

Exercise 28: Create a Purchase Order with Reference to PReq.

325

Exercise 29: Run an Internal Order Report

329

Exercise 30: Evaluate Purchase Orders

331

Lesson 7 Posting a Goods Receipt for a Purchase Order

336

Exercise 31: Post a Goods Receipt for a Purchase Order

343

Exercise 32: Transfer Posting for Material

347

Lesson 8 Processing Vendor Invoices

350

Exercise 33: Post the Vendor Invoice


355

271


For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Unit 7: Purchase to Pay Processing in SAP S/4HANA

Exercise 34: Query the Supplier Account

359

Lesson 9 Processing the Automatic Payment Run Exercise 35: Create an Automatic Payment Run Exercise 36: View Vendor Accounts

363 365 371

UNIT OBJECTIVES

272

●

Describe the purchase to pay business process

●

Create a material master record

●


●

List additional vendor specific master data records

●

Create a purchase requisition for stock item and consumable material

●

Create a purchase order

●

Integrate ARIBA functionality with procurement in SAP S/4 HANA

●

Post a goods receipt for a purchase order

●

Post the vendor invoice

●

Process the automatic payment run




Unit 7 Lesson 1 Describing the Purchase to Pay Business Process



Purchase to Pay Overview As a long-term SAP user, you want to gain an overview of the purchase to pay process. Therefore, you need to know the basic functions covered in purchasing and the integration aspects.

Figure 145: Purchase-to-Pay Business Process

The figure, Purchase-to-Pay Business Process, shows the steps of the purchase-to-pay business process, which are follows: 1. Determine requirements. The responsible department manually creates a purchase requisition to inform purchasing of its requirements. The system can automatically generate a purchase requisition with the Materials Requirements Planning (MRP) process.


273



2. Determine the source of supply. As a buyer, you can use the source of supply determination to create requests for quotation (RFQs) and then enter the quotations. You can also refer to purchase orders, contracts, and conditions that already exist in the system. 3. Select the vendor. Price comparisons between various quotations make it easier for you to select vendors. The system can send rejection letters automatically. 4. Handle purchase orders. You can create purchase orders manually or let the system create them automatically. When you create purchase orders, you can copy data from other documents (such as purchase requisitions or quotations) to reduce the number of entries you have to make. You also have the option to work with outline agreements. 5. Monitor purchase orders. You can monitor the processing status of purchase orders in the system. For example, you can determine whether a delivery or an invoice has already been received for a purchase order item. You can remind vendors about outstanding deliveries. 6. Receive goods. When you enter inbound deliveries in the system, you refer to the associated purchase order. This reduces the number of entries you have to make and allows you to check whether the type of goods and the quantities delivered match the purchase order. The system also updates the purchase order history. 7. Verify the invoice. When you enter invoices, you can reference the purchase order, the delivery note number, or the bill of lading. You must enter the delivery note number and the bill of lading at the time of goods receipt. After entering one of the documents, the system performs a three way accounting match to verify that the total invoice amount agrees with the goods receipt quantity at the purchase order price. 8. Make payments. You can pay the vendor’s open items using the payment program. The accounting department is responsible for running the payment program on a regular basis. Co-Deployment of SAP SRM and Supplier Lifecycle Management ●

Procurement and SAP SRM S/4HANA Integration

●

Co-Deployment of SAP Supplier Lifecycle Management (SAP SLC)

The functional scope of SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) will gradually be made available within SAP S/4HANA. The related functions will become part of the procurement solution of SAP S/4HANA. In the first release of SAP S/4HANA, on-premise edition, a limited functional scope might be available compared to SAP SRM. The coverage will grow over time. Technically, the procurement solution within SAP S/4HANA is not a successor to the SAP SRM components. Therefore, the SAP SRM software components and SAP S/4HANA cannot be installed on the same system. Technically, it is not a codeployment, but, in the future, the procurement solution will evolve to take over the SAP SRM functions.

274



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Describing the Purchase to Pay Business Process

Customers with SAP SRM and SAP Business Suite on one server need to reimplement the procurement processes that have been used on SAP Business Suite source release within the SAP SRM installation on the SAP S/4HANA, on-premise edition system. It is not possible to install the SAP SRM software components within the SAP S/4HANA stack. The functional scope of the new procurement solution available with the first release of SAP S/4HANA is not identical with the SAP SRM functions. The goal is that, over time, the functional scope of SAP Supplier Lifecycle Management (SAP SLC) will be available within the SAP S/4HANA stack. Customers who have deployed SAP Supplier Lifecycle Management on SAP ERP and want to migrate to SAP S/4HANA, can continue to use those parts of the SAP SLC functionality that have been integrated into the SAP S/4HANA Core and are referred to as Supplier and Category Management . Customers who have been using a standalone SAP SLC system can continue to use it, but have to use MDG-S for supplier data integration. For the functional differences and for more information, see the simplification item “Dedicated SAP Supplier Lifecycle Management (SAP SLC) business processes.” The functional scope of Supplier and Category Management in SAP S/4HANA is currently not identical to the SAP SLC functionalities. Master categories in purchasing category are not available. As a successor, material groups are available in purchasing categories. The following transactions are not available in SAP S/4HANA, on-premise edition: ●

ME21, ME22, ME23, ME24, ME25, ME26, ME27, ME28

●

ME51, ME52, ME53, ME54, ME59, MR01, MR1M

Classic SAP ERP Materials Management (MM) transactions and BAPIs for the business objects Purchase Order, Purchase Requisition, and Supplier Invoice have been replaced by the corresponding transactions and BAPIs made available with SAP R/3 Enterprise 4.70. With SAP S/4HANA, on-premise, these classic MM transactions and BAPIs will no longer be available. The replacements that are available since SAP R/3 Enterprise 4.70 will be used. See the following SAP notes: ●

1803189: FAQ: End of Support of ME21, ME51, and BAPI_PO_CREATE and so on. 144081: Replacing MR01 / Functions of MR1M (Release 4.6)

Foreign Trade and SAP Global Trade Services (GTS) Currently, there are two software services for international trade transactions: Foreign Trade and SAP Global Trade Services (GTS). Foreign Trade is part of standard Materials Management (MM). SAP GTS is an external service that can be installed on a separate instance. With SAP S/ 4HANA on-premise edition 1511, the foreign trade solution will be not available because SAP Global Trade Services is the successor for the business requirement. For Intrastata, customers can leverage functionality within SAP S/4HANA, on-premise edition 1511. Additional functions for import and export management are available with SAP GTS. The customer needs to check whether 3rd party foreign trade systems are in use for foreign trade processes. Because of the replaced foreign trade functionality in SAP S/4HANA, it is possible that third party foreign trade system will need adjustments by the respective third-party Solution or


275



Service Provider. However, SAP GTS can be connected to SAP S/4HANA to run the respective foreign trade processes. Logistics Material Management Inventory Management ●

●

Actual stock quantity data will be calculated on-the-fly from the new material document table MATDOC. The advantage of the new MM-IM data model is the capability of simple and fast reporting, because the most information is in one place (the MATDOC table). The following transactions are not available with SAP S/4HANA: MB01, MB02, MB03, MB04, MB05, MB0A, MB11, MB1A, MB1B, MB1C, MB31, MBNL, MBRL, MBSF, MBSL, MBST, and MBSU.

The SAP ERP 6.0 stock inventory management data model consists of the two document tables MKPF for document header information and MSEG for document item data. Additionally there were aggregated actual stock quantity data stored in several tables. Some of these tables also store material master data attributes like the tables MARC, MARD and MCHB. Such tables, with material master data attributes as well as actual stock quantities, will be named as hybrid tables. In contrast, there are also tables, such as MSSA, containing only aggregated actual stock quantities for sales order stock. Such tables will be called replaced aggregation tables. With SAP S/4HANA, this data model has been changed significantly. The new denormalized table, MATDOC, has been introduced which contains the former header and item data of a material document as well as a lot of further attributes. Material document data will be stored in MATDOC only and no longer in MKPF and MSEG. Additionally, the aggregated actual stock quantities will no longer be persisted in the hybrid or replaced aggregation tables. Instead, actual stock quantity data will be calculated on-the-fly from the new material document table MATDOC, for which some of those additional special fields are used. With the new MM-IM data model, the system works on database level in an INSERT only mode without DB locks. For stock decreasing processes, there will be still ABAP locks to ensure stock consistency. A further advantage of the new MM-IM data model is the capability of simple and fast reporting because the most information is in one place: MATDOC. The following tables of the SAP ERP 6.0 world still exist in SAP S/4HANA as DDIC definition, as well as database object, and the hybrid tables will still be used to store the material master data attributes. For compatibility reasons, there are Core Data Service (CDS) Views assigned as proxy objects to all those tables, ensuring that each read access to one of the tables below still returns the data as before in SAP ERP 6.0. The CDS Views perform the on-the-fly aggregation of actual stock quantities from the new MM-IM data model and join the master data attributes from the material master data table. All customer coding will work as before, because each read access to one of the tables will get redirected in the database interface layer of NetWeaver to the assigned CDS view. Valuation of special stock is derived from customizing as well as the material master and stored in the predecessor of the material document. The valuation is also stored in the material document and was stored in SAP ERP 6.0 in the aggregate tables MSSA, MSSQ, and MSSL respectively. In SAP ERP 6.0, there was just one possible valuation for special stock at order on hand, project stock and special stock with vendor. With the new MM-IM data model, various valuations would be possible but this is not available across the whole process chain. A change of the valuation after an initial posting on special stock will not be supported. The following transactions for entering and displaying goods movements (material documents), called "MB transactions" are not available with SAP S/4HANA. In SAP S/

276




4HANA, the single-screen generalized transaction available in SAP Business Suite since Release 4.6):

MIGO is available (transaction MIGO is

MB01, MB02, MB03, MB04, MB05, MB0A, MB11, MB1A, MB1B, MB1C, MB31, MBNL, MBRL, MBSF, MBSL, MBST, and MBSU The transactions MMBE_OLD (Stock overview), MMBE (Stock overview), MB51 (Material Document List), MB52 (Display Warehouse Stocks of Material) and MB5B (Stock at posting date) are still available but will not be available midterm. Successor functionalities are already available as SAP Fiori applications or as Virtual Data Model (VDM) to be consumed by SAP Lumira or SAP Design Studio: ●

MMBE_OLD: Fiori application Stock – Single Material, VDM view C_MaterialStockActual

●

MMBE: Fiori application Stock – Single Material, VDM view C_MaterialStockActual

●

MB51: Fiori application Material Documents Overview

●

MB52: Fiori application Stock – Multiple Materials, VDM view C_MaterialStockActual

●

MB5B: Fiori application Stock – Multiple Materials, VDM view C_MaterialStockByKeyDate

Material Ledger Obligatory for Material Valuation ● ●

●

Flexible valuation methods in multiple currencies Parallel accounting standards while simultaneously reducing required system resources and improving scalability of the business processes Statistical moving average price One major innovation in SAP S/4HANA in the area of MM is the significant increase of transactional data put through for high volume transactions, especially goods movements. Parallel statistical moving average valuation is not available in SAP S/4HANA, on-premise edition 1511.

This simplification makes it obligatory to use the Material Ledger in all SAP S/4HANA systems. When a system is converted to SAP S/4HANA, the Material Ledger will be activated, if not active already. Latest trends in material management aim for improved and more flexible valuation methods in multiple currencies and parallel accounting standards, while simultaneously reducing required system resources and improving scalability of the business processes. Since the data model of the Material Ledger (ML) module supports these business requirements, it was chosen as the basis for material inventory valuation in the new solution SAP S/4HANA. It is important to distinguish between Material Ledger, in its role as an inventory subledger in Accounting, and business feature Actual Costing. Material Ledger, as the inventory subledger, valuates material inventories in multiple currencies and GAAPs in parallel. In addition, Material Ledger is a base prerequisite for the use of Actual Costing. With Actual Costing, you can valuate your material inventories, work in process and cost of goods sold with weighted average unit costs that are being calculated after the fact by evaluating business transactions of one or several posting periods. Other features, for example, actual cost component split, are provided by Actual Costing. Before SAP S/4HANA, the inventory valuation tables xBEW(H) - tables: EBEW, EBEWH, MBEW, MBEWH, OBEW, OBEWH, QBEW, QBEWH - contained transactional, as well as master data attributes.


277



With SAP S/4HANA, the inventory valuation tables still exist as DDIC definition, as well as database object. However, they will only be used to store material master data attributes. The transactional fields LBKUM, SALK3, and SALKV will be retrieved from the Material Ledger. Those fields are no longer updated in the original xBEWH(H) tables. As a consequence, the tables need to be updated less often, which leads to a higher throughput due to fewer database locks. For compatibility reasons, there are Core Data Service (CDS) Views assigned as proxy objects to all those tables ensuring that each read access to one of the mentioned tables still returns the data as before. The CDS views consist of database joins in order to retrieve both master data from the original xBEW(H) table and transactional data from Material Ledger tables. All customer coding, reading data from those tables, will work as before because each read access to one of the tables will get redirected in the database interface layer of NetWeaver to the assigned CDS view. If transactional fields are affected, Write access to those tables has to be adjusted If customers are not using the material ledger already, it will be activated during the conversion process. In MM02 and MR21, material prices can now be maintained in multiple currencies. In Financials, the inventory account balances are calculated separately for each currency and result, therefore, in a cleaner and more consistent valuation in currencies other than the local currency. A major innovation in SAP S/4HANA in the area of MM is the significant increase of transactional data throughput for high volume transactions, especially goods movements. To enable this from a technical point of view, application logic should avoid exclusive locking on the application layer. For goods movements, this can be achieved with few exceptions for materials with price control Standard , where the relation between unit costs for material inventory (standard price), and inventory quantity and inventory value is kept constant during goods movements. To calculate a consistent moving average valuation, the system is still forced to use exclusive locks. Therefore, the same increase of transactional data throughput cannot be achieved for materials with price control Moving Average in comparison to materials with price control Standard . In classic SAP Business Suite the system calculates for materials with price control Standard , also a moving average valuation in parallel, the so called "statistical" moving average price. Obviously this statistical valuation also requires exclusive locking. As said, exclusive locking is limiting the transactional data throughput, and therefore shall be avoided in SAP S/4HANA. In consequence, this parallel statistical moving average valuation is not available in SAP S/ 4HANA, on-premise edition 1511. The deactivation of the statistical moving average is not mandatory in SAP S/4HANA, but recommended to achieve a significant increase of transactional data throughput for goods movements. It is important to note that the deactivation is not reversible. The deactivation of the statistical moving average is the consequence of a new lock behavior for materials with price control Standard . This new lock behavior does not use exclusive locks anymore. The activation of the new lock behavior leads to the deactivation of the statistical moving average. As a result, end users, creating material master data in SAP S/4HANA, have to select one of the following material valuation methods for a material: ●

278

Price control Standard that offers a fixed price inventory valuation, no parallel "statistical" moving average valuation. Only dedicated business transactions can change unit costs (for example, MR21). But a significantly increased transactional data throughput for goods movements can be achieved.




●

Price control Moving Average with which unit costs of material inventory might be changed by any business transaction, but transactional data throughput is still limited by the exclusive locking.

The statistical moving average price is as the name already implies purely statistical and does not have an impact on actual financials-relevant valuation. Without the statistical moving average price in few scenarios an alternative way of valuation needs to be used. This concerns, for example: ●

Balance Sheet Valuation: Selection variants must be checked and adapted.

●

Product Cost Planning: Valuation variants must be checked and adapted.

Even though Material Ledger is becoming obligatorily active, Actual Costing is not. Activation of Actual Costing is still optional. Output Management ●

Print Channel The SAP S/4HANA Output Management supports the following Channels:

●

-

E-mail

-

Printout

-

XML

Print Technology The SAP S/4HANA Output Management supports the following print technologies: -

Smart Forms

-

Adobe Forms

-

Adobe Forms using Fragments

Over the years, several output management tools have been established. Different applications are using different output management tools to determine what is to be communicated, how it is to be communicated and when it is to be communicated. In addition, if communication is via printing, different print form technologies have been established, such as SAP Script, Smart Forms and Adobe Form technology. For example, form determination (along with other output parameters) occurs via message determination (NAST) in SD and MM, while other applications use different output management technologies, for example, FIN. The output management based on NAST supports the following: ●

Print Channels: -

Print output

-

Fax

-

Telex

-

External send


279



●

-

EDI

-

Simple Mail

-

Special function

-

Events (SAP Business Workflow)

-

Distribution (ALE)

-

Tasks (SAP Business Workflow)

Print Technologies: -

SAP Script

-

Smart Forms

-

Adobe Forms

There is a new and modern Output Management within SAP S/4HANA. The new output management by design includes cloud qualities like extensibility enablement, multi tenancy enablement, and modification free configuration. Therefore, the complete configuration differs from configuration that is used when output management is based on NAST. The configuration is based on BRF+ which is accessible for Customers on premise. Information about the configuration steps is available in the CSS note 2228611. In SAP S/4HANA the target architecture is based on Adobe Document Server and Adobe Forms only. For the form determination rules (along with other output parameters) BRF+ functionality is used (in this sense in combination with the message determination). Regarding the forms especially footer and Logos for the new output management: ●

The standard SAP Script Repository is used (Transactions: SO10 and SE78). A customer can maintain texts and logos centrally. The determination rules can be accessed via Customizing. The access is available for Customers on premise (and for Service Center in the cloud edition).

SAP S/4HANA Analytics ●

● ●

Real-Time operational reporting approach – enables a key user or creates and modifies reports, KPIs, or any other analytical data according to their needs, based on easy to use and cloud enabled administration tools. The Analytics functionality within SAP S/4HANA is designed for ultimate simplicity. The new SAP S/4HANA Analytics concept as the target architecture technology is based on ODATA and open CDS and is introduced in addition to the existing analytics functionalities in SAP Business Suite.

Customers will be able to extract data from SAP S/4HANA, on-premise edition 1511 to their own BW Hub using the BW-extractors delivered by SAP. In some areas, extractors have been deprecated or can no longer be used with SAP S/4HANA, on-premise edition 1511. Please refer to the general restriction note 2214213 for SAP S/4HANA, on-premise edition 1511. There, in section 11, restriction notes of multiple areas are listed which contain the list of no longer available BW extractors.

280




Note: Data Source adjustments might be required to comply with changed Scope and data structures within SAP S/4HANA, on-premise edition 1511. This needs to be verified on customer-specific basis. Using selected SAP BW Extractors for transferring data to their own BW Hub will be possible for customers starting with SAP S/4HANA, on-premise edition 1511 FPS1. Search, Object Pages, and Quick Navigation

Figure 146: Search, Object Pages, and Quick Navigation

In the classical system setup, there is no global generic search existing across business documents and master data. Users can start separately masterdata maintenance transactions, but would not have the chance to see the relevant business documents and jump directly to these documents. In SAP S/4HANA, users can use the generic search, SAP Fiori Apps or object pages to view(other) object pages and jump from there again to other SAP Fiori Apps, other object pages or Web Dynpros or Web GUIs. Object Pages can also be shared via link and sent to other users to discuss business issues.


281



SAP Fiori Inbox

Figure 147: SAP Fiori Inbox

On the left side of the figure, SAP Fiori Inbox, the business workflow screen in ERP is displayed. A workitem can be selected from the list and the details are shown. Customers frequently ask for mobile workflow capabilities. This is not possible in standard ERP. On the right side, you see the SAP Fiori inbox, with all work items on one screen. The screen on the right is updated if another item on the left side is selected. In addition, filtering and sorting are possible. Mobile approval is, of course, possible.

282




SAP Fiori Apps for Procurement

Figure 148: SAP Fiori Apps for Procurement

As shown in the figure, SAP Fiori Apps for Procurement, there are three types of SAP Fiori apps; transactional SAP Fiori apps, analytical SAP Fiori apps, and object pages. This figure shows the SAP Fiori App Portfolio for SAP S/4HANA Sourcing and Procurement 1511 on-premise. Solution Explorer — Streamlined Procure to Pay

Figure 149: Solution Explorer — Streamlined Procure to Pay

Core ERP processes have remained unchanged, but there are new market trends due to the digital transformation. Although the processes have not changed, the way they are executed has. For example, the way the consumers want and the speed at which they expect their orders to be fulfilled has changed. Trends such as sensors, which enable Internet of Things scenarios, and big data, which fundamentally changes how we interact with information, consumer grade user


283



experience on any device, easy to consume cloud services, entering new markets, which are not just global, but also hyperconnected. To stay relevant in these times of massive disruptions, enterprises are forced to see if their internal systems are supporting the new business realities. Consequently, enterprise management has to adapt to this changing digital world (digital transformation). It is clear to see that technology is disruptive. This is precisely why we need to talk about digital transformation. Driven by the combination of ever-growing digitization and evolving consumer demands, digital transformation is the use of new technologies to drive significant business improvements. This includes capitalizing on new opportunities as well as effectively transforming existing business. In this new world, the CIO (Chief Information Officer) focus is fundamentally changing, because the business is changing. Managing the traditional IT scope is no longer sufficient. Instead, new priorities need to be tackled. For the CIO to stay relevant, he or she needs to embrace these changes and talk business, or become relegated to a pure non-strategic operations role. CIOs need to rethink their strategic purpose in the organization and start a journey to achieve the strategic purpose. Streamlined Procure to Pay — Solution Capabilities

Figure 150: Streamlined Procure to Pay — Solution Capabilities

Streamlined Procure To Pay provides four end-to-end solutions: ●

Operational Procurement

●

Invoice and Payables Management

●

Sourcing and Contract Management

●

Supplier Information and Master Data

Assigned to the end-to-end solutions are solution capabilities, as follows:

284

●

No changes: here no new development was done for 1511 on-premise

●

Enhanced: new additional development was done for 1511 on-premise




●

SAP Fiori UI: one or more new SAP Fiori UI or SAP Fiori apps was developed for this solution capability




285



Unit 7 Lesson 2 Defining the Master Data Used in the Purchase to Pay Process



Material Master Data As a long-term SAP user, you want to gain an overview of the master data used in the purchase to pay process. Therefore, you need to know master data used and the usage of them.

Figure 151: Material Number Field Length Extension

SAP S/4HANA, on-premise edition 1511 can support a material number with 40 characters. The appropriate, related SAP development entities (domains, structures, table types, and transparent tables, external and internal interfaces, user interfaces, and so on) have been adapted accordingly. Where required, automated logic is in place and executed automatically in case a customer converts a current SAP Business Suite system into SAP S/4HANA, on-premise edition 1511. There might be constellations about which a customer needs to be aware, for example: ●

●

286

In certain constellations there might be the requirement to adapt custom code related to the material number field length extension. In a multi-system landscape, the customer has to decide if and when to switch on the extended material number functionality, as the switch impacts how compatible the system communicates within a system landscape.



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Defining the Master Data Used in the Purchase to Pay Process

The material number field length extension was done with SAP S/4HANA and is available within the SAP S/4HANA, on-premise edition 1511 and SAP S/4HANA, cloud edition 1511. For the first step into SAP S/4HANA – SAP Simple Finance, on-premise edition 1503 – the maximum field length is still 18 characters long. Note that the next version of SAP Simple Finance, on-premise edition, which will be based on Enhancement Package 8, will also be based on an 18 characters long material number. Extending the material number on the database means that the field length of the MATNR field on the database has been extended from 18 to 40 characters. This has been done in all tables (and all fields within the tables) in which a material number can be stored. Although the maximum length of the database field used to store the material number is now 40 characters, the way how the material number content is stored in the database field has not been changed compared to SAP Business Suite. This means that, for such fields, no data conversion is normally needed when converting from SAP Business Suite to SAP S/4HANA, on-premise edition 1511. This holds especially true for pure numeric material numbers. With standard Customizing (leading zeroes are not significant, lexicographic flag not set), pure numeric material numbers are still restricted to 18 characters and will be filled up on the database only up to 18 characters by leading zeroes. This is the same behavior as in SAP Business Suite. Overall, the chosen way of storing material number content avoids data conversions in the database. Note that data conversion will be needed when a material number is stored in a field that has a concatenated content, and the material number is part of that concatenated content: Concatenation in the code uses the complete technical length of the field (which now is 40 characters) and is also reflected in the database content. This will be explained in detail later in this Simplification Item. Usually a customer has a multi-system landscape: The ERP system is connected to miscellaneous internal and external (SAP or non-SAP) systems. Accordingly, an SAP S/ 4HANA, on-premise edition 1511 system with a material number field length of 40 characters needs to consider this multi-system landscape requirement where not all related systems are able to deal with a 40 character material number. Furthermore, it cannot be assumed that all ERP systems in a customer landscape will be converted to SAP S/4HANA, on-premise edition 1511 at the same point in time. That means that the external interfaces used for integration have to be compatible to old versions of the interface. This is especially relevant for the commonly used integration techniques BAPI, RFC, and IDoc, because these techniques rely on a fixed length and order of fields in the transmitted data. Simply extending the material number field (or other extended fields) in these interfaces would therefore technically break the version compatibility. We have decided to provide a technical-version compatibility for released external interfaces in the way that is commonly used and proposed for BAPI interfaces: The already existing field keeps its original length and a new field has been added at the end of the structure (or as new parameter) that allows transmitting material numbers with 40 characters. Besides this, it must be ensured that no material number (or other extended field) can be maintained in the system with a content length greater than the old length of the field. To enforce this and to make the field length extension as far as possible non-disruptive for the SAP S/4HANA customers, the extended material number functionality must be switched on explicitly. Only after this decision it is possible to allow more than 18 characters for the material number.


287



The changes described have been done for BAPIs, IDocs, and released remote-enabled function modules. This has additionally been implemented where necessary for remote function calls issued by the SAP S/4HANA system and for unreleased remote-enabled function modules that are used to communicate with other SAP Business Suite products like SAP SCM or SAP CRM. A complete list of relevant function modules, IDocs, and structures that have been extended in this way can be found in the piece lists in the simplification database. For released Web Services (SOA), adding a new field or extending the material number field was not necessary as these services usually already allow material number with up to 60 characters in their interfaces. After an SAP Business Suite System has been converted to SAP S/4HANA, on-premise edition 1511 or an SAP S/4HANA on-premise edition 1511 was newly installed, the extended material number functionality will by default be switched off. The default setting, both after the move to SAP S/4HANA and for new installations, is that the extended material number functionality is NOT activated. To use a material number with 40 characters, the customer needs to activate this functionality. The following settings are required: 1. Activation of the Extended Material Number Functionality The activation is realized as client-dependent customizing table. IMG → Cross-Application Components → General Application Functions Extension → Activate extended fields .

→ Field length

Alternatively, use transaction FLETS (For the table maintenance the authorization group FLE [authorization object S_TABU_DIS] is required). 2. Changing the Material Number Format Transaction OMSL allows a customer-specific settings regarding the material number field length. Here, the settings need to be adapted to allow a field length of more than 18 characters. Define Output Format of Material Number can be accessed via → Material Master → Basic Settings .

IMG → Logistics General

Note: If the extended material number functionality is activated in a system, it cannot be easily deactivated as values may exist in different fields that are only allowed with extended material number. 2.1.1.3.8 The Long Material Number within the DIMP Add-On (Discrete Industries & Mill Products). The extension of the material number is a well-known requirement in SAP Business Suite requested by several customers. An Add-On solution was provided several years ago as part of the industry solution Discrete Industries & Mill Products (DIMP). The DIMP LAMAfunctionality is a part of the industry solution Automotive, which is one component of the AddOn DIMP (Discrete Industries & Mill Products). The industry solution DIMP is part of SAP S/4HANA, on-premise edition 1511, but the DIMP LAMA functionality with the long material number (LAMA) is not part of SAP S/4HANA. The reason is purely based on the fact that the material number is natively extended to 40 characters within SAP S/4HANA.

288




Material Master Record

Figure 152: Material Master Record

The material master record is a central source of material-specific data in your company. You use the material master record in all areas of logistics. Integrating all the material data in a single database object eliminates the problem of data redundancy. All areas, such as purchasing, inventory management, materials planning, and invoice verification, can use the stored data at the same time. You use the data stored in the material master for many activities, including the following: ● ●

Purchasing data for ordering purposes Inventory Management data for posting goods movement and physical inventory management

●

Accounting data for material valuation

●

Materials planning data to plan your material requirements

Several user departments within a company work with one material, and each department stores different information. Therefore, the system subdivides the data in a material master record according to each specific user department or view. Each user department has its own view of a material master record and is responsible for maintaining this data.


289



Material Master — Organizational Levels

Figure 153: Material Master — Organizational Levels

Some material data is valid for all organizational levels, while some is valid only for certain levels. The system organizes the material data so that it reflects the structure of a company. This ensures that you can administer the material data centrally, without putting an unnecessary load on the database due to redundant information. The following are examples of organizational level data: ●

Data at the client level Data stored at the client level refers to material data valid for your entire organization.

●

Data at the plant level Data stored at the plant level refers to all data that is valid within a plant for all storage locations belonging to that plant.

●

Data at the storage location level Data stored at the storage location level refers to all data valid for a particular storage location.

Client, plant, and storage location organizational levels are relevant for the external procurement process. These levels play a role when you enter data for purchasing, inventory management, and accounting. Other organizational levels can be relevant for other departments. For example, you enter the sales and distribution data depending on the sales organization and the distribution channel. Therefore, you must specify a warehouse number and storage type for the Warehouse Management (WM) data.

290




Unit 7 Exercise 24 Create a Material Master Record

Business Example You have decided to include a stronger lock into your bicycle. Therefore, you need to create a new material master record for the lock to be included later in the structure (BOM) of the finished product. As a responsible person for the material master data you create a new material initially for plant 1010. Note that in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. The Material Master created in this exercise is required for one or more subsequent exercises in this course. 1. Create a new material master record, Engineering and with the material type

T-R9## , for the industry sector Raw Materials , as follows:

Field

Value

Material

T-R9##

Industry Sector

Mechanical Engineering

Material Type

Raw Material

2. Create the following views for Plant ●

Basic Data 1

●

Purchasing

●

Purchasing Order Text

●

General Plant Data / Storage 1

●

Accounting 1

1010 in Storage Location

Mechanical

101C:

3. Enter the following data in the specified views: View

Data

Basic Data 1

The short description for the material Lock Ultra Strong TERP10-## . Maintain the short description in DE Schloß extra stark. The base unit of measure is PC (Piece). The Lock is assigned to the material group L002 Material Group Raw Material . The gross weight and the net weight of the Lock is 50 G (Gram)


291



292

View

Data

Purchasing

Purchasing Group Z## is responsible for procuring the Lock. The Goods receipt processing time is 1 day. Reminder letters (expediters) regarding undelivered goods must be sent after 10, 20, and 30 days after the date when delivery is due. Under-delivery or over-delivery of the material is not acceptable. Choose the suitable purchasing value key. The material should be posted to Quality Inspection when posting Goods Receipt. Mark the corresponding entry.

Purchase Order Text

The material supplied must be in accordance with our technical specification 65432.


The Lock will be stored in storage bin BL-01 at the storage location 101C.

Accounting 1

You assign the Lock to the valuation class 3000 Raw Materials 1. The lock is valuated using the moving average price of €5 per 1 Piece. The currency automatically populates based on the company codes currency.




Unit 7 Solution 24 Create a Material Master Record

Business Example You have decided to include a stronger lock into your bicycle. Therefore, you need to create a new material master record for the lock to be included later in the structure (BOM) of the finished product. As a responsible person for the material master data you create a new material initially for plant 1010. Note that in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. The Material Master created in this exercise is required for one or more subsequent exercises in this course. 1. Create a new material master record, Engineering and with the material type

T-R9## , for the industry sector Raw Materials , as follows:

Field

Value

Material

T-R9##

Industry Sector

Mechanical Engineering

Material Type

Raw Material


Mechanical

Create Material tile.

b) On the Create material (initial screen)

, enter the data provided in the table.

c) Press Enter. 2. Create the following views for Plant ●

Basic Data 1

●

Purchasing

●

Purchasing Order Text

●


●

Accounting 1

1010 in Storage Location

101C:

a) On the Select Views screen, select the views listed above. b) Choose Continue . c) In the Organizational Level dialog box, enter the following data:


293



Field

Value

Plant

1010

Stor. Location

101C

d) Choose Continue . 3. Enter the following data in the specified views: View

Data

Basic Data 1

The short description for the material Lock Ultra Strong TERP10-## . Maintain the short description in DE Schloß extra stark. The base unit of measure is PC (Piece). The Lock is assigned to the material group L002 Material Group Raw Material . The gross weight and the net weight of the Lock is 50 G (Gram)

Purchasing

Purchasing Group Z## is responsible for procuring the Lock. The Goods receipt processing time is 1 day. Reminder letters (expediters) regarding undelivered goods must be sent after 10, 20, and 30 days after the date when delivery is due. Under-delivery or over-delivery of the material is not acceptable. Choose the suitable purchasing value key. The material should be posted to Quality Inspection when posting Goods Receipt. Mark the corresponding entry.

Purchase Order Text

The material supplied must be in accordance with our technical specification 65432.


The Lock will be stored in storage bin BL-01 at the storage location 101C.

Accounting 1

You assign the Lock to the valuation class 3000 Raw Materials 1. The lock is valuated using the moving average price of €5 per 1 Piece. The currency automatically populates based on the company codes currency.

a) On the Create Material T-R9## (Raw Material) Basic Data 1 tab:

screen, enter the following data on the

Field

Value

Description

(For EN:) Lock Ultra Strong TERP10-## (For DE:) Schloß extra stark

294

Base Unit of measure

PC

Material Group

L002

Gross Weight

50

Weight Unit

G




Field

Value

Net Weight

50

b) Choose the Additional data icon and maintain the description in DE. Language DE: Schloß extra stark. c) On the Purchasing Data

view, enter the following information:

Field

Value

Purchasing Group

Z##

Purchasing Value Key

1

GR Processing Time

1

Post to Inspection Stock

X

d) Review any warning messages and choose the next data screen. e) On the Purchase order text

Enter to clear the messages and proceed to

screen, enter the following text:

The material supplied must be in accordance with our technical specification 65432. For DE, enter the following test: Das Schloß muss unserer Technische Spezifikation 65432 entsprechen.

f) On the Plant Data / Storage Location 1

tab, in the Storage Bin field, enter BL-01.

g) On the Accounting 1 data tab, enter the following information: Field

Value

Valuation Class

3000

Per Unit Price

5

Price Control

V

h) Save your entries and close the tile.


295




296





Unit 7 Lesson 3 Creating a Vendor Master Record



Vendor Master Record As a long-term SAP user, you want to gain an overview of the master data used in the purchase to pay process. Therefore, you need to understand the new business partner from the perspective of a vendor.


There are redundant object models in the traditional ERP system where the vendor master and customer master is used. The (mandatory) target approach in SAP S/4HANA is the Business Partner approach. Business partners can be categorized as a person, group, or organization, as follows: ●

●

An organization represents units such as a company (for example, legal person), parts of a legal entity (for example, department) or an association. Organization is an umbrella term to map every kind of situation in the day-to-day business activities. A group represents a shared living arrangement, a married couple, or an executive board.



297





The Business Partner is created and the roles necessary for the usage of the BP are assigned. The different roles are created on certain organizational levels. The FI Vendor role, which is necessary to use the BP in FI based purchase postings, is assigned to the company code, which means that the data in this role can be maintained in each company code different. Note that vendor is also called supplier. You can assign a different vendor number and customer number to your BP inside the BP maintenance transaction. In the general role of the business partner, the BP name and address is entered. In the FI vendor role (BP used as a vendor in FI) you enter the following data: ●


●


●

The names of important contacts related to the vendor (for example, salespeople)

●

The reconciliation account from the general ledger (G/L), because the vendor is a creditor of the company.

You can decide whether to maintain many roles at once, or to add roles later time by time, whenever you need them.

298




Unit 7 Exercise 25 Create and Extend a Vendor Master Record

Business Example Your company recently redesigned one of the bicycles. Your company started a business relationship with a new vendor, which will supply the new stronger lock. To order from this vendor, approve invoices for payment, and carry out other processes, you must create a new vendor master record. You already know that the system maintains the vendor master data using various organizational levels. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise requires the Vendor Master (Business Partner) that you created the exercise, Create a Vendor Master Record. The Vendor Master created in this exercise is required for one or more subsequent exercises in this course. 1. Change the vendor master record (Organization) with the number Business Partner in the BP role Supplier (new) . Note: When changing the BP role there is a message. Choose that appears. 2. Create the Purchasing Data for Purchasing Organization

Create in the window

1010 using the following data:

Field

Value

Order Currency

EUR

Terms of payment

0001

Incoterms

EXW

Inco. Location 1

Heidelberg

Partner Role

T-BP##


T-BP## . Create the

299



Unit 7 Solution 25 Create and Extend a Vendor Master Record

Business Example Your company recently redesigned one of the bicycles. Your company started a business relationship with a new vendor, which will supply the new stronger lock. To order from this vendor, approve invoices for payment, and carry out other processes, you must create a new vendor master record. You already know that the system maintains the vendor master data using various organizational levels. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise requires the Vendor Master (Business Partner) that you created the exercise, Create a Vendor Master Record. The Vendor Master created in this exercise is required for one or more subsequent exercises in this course. 1. Change the vendor master record (Organization) with the number Business Partner in the BP role Supplier (new) .

T-BP## . Create the

Note: When changing the BP role there is a message. Choose that appears. a) On the Launchpad, choose the


Create in the window

tile.

b) Enter the following data: Field

Value

Business Partner

T-BP##

Create in BP role

Supplier (new)

Grouping

Ext. Alpha-num numbering

c) Press Enter. 2. Create the Purchasing Data for Purchasing Organization

300

1010 using the following data:

Field

Value

Order Currency

EUR

Terms of payment

0001



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Creating a Vendor Master Record

Field

Value

Incoterms

EXW

Inco. Location 1

Heidelberg

Partner Role

T-BP##

a) On the Create Organization: role Supplier Data Screen Enter the Purchasing organization b) In the Purchasing Organization

, choose the

Purchasing icon. a)

field, enter 1010.

c) Press Enter. d) On the Purchasing Data

tab, enter the data provided in the table.

e) Go to the Partners tab and enter the data provided in the table. f) Check and Save the data.


301




302





Unit 7 Lesson 4 Listing Additional Vendor Specific Master Data Records



Purchasing Info Record

Figure 156: Purchasing Info Record

The purchasing info record, or the info record, provides the option to store information about a vendor and a material at the purchasing organization level and at the plant level. You can define the following information in info records: ● ●

The current and future prices and conditions (for example, freight and discounts) The delivery data (for example, the planned delivery time and the overdelivery and underdelivery tolerances)


303



●

The vendor data (for example, the contact person at a given vendor) and vendor-specific data about the material (for example, which vendor subrange the material belongs to and the description of the material for the vendor)

●

The last purchase order number

●

The internal comments and text from the purchase order

Purchasing Info Records – Text Types The following text types in the purchasing info record are stored in the system: ●

The internal info record memo The internal info record memo is an internal comment you transfer to the PO item. This text is not printed.

●

The PO text in the purchasing info record The PO text is used to describe the PO item. You transfer this text to the PO item and print it.

The purchasing info record is an important source of information for the buyer. When you create the purchasing documents, the system transfers the data from the info record to the document as default values. Data for a purchasing info record is divided into the following categories: ●

The generally applicable data (valid for a single client)

●

The purchasing organization-specific data

●

The purchasing organization-specific and plant-specific data

Conditions

Figure 157: Conditions

Conditions represent the elements, such as gross price and discounts of a vendor's price. You can maintain conditions while entering quotations, info records, outline agreements

304



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Listing Additional Vendor Specific Master Data Records

(contracts, scheduling, and agreements), and POs. The system determines the net and effective prices in a purchasing document based on these conditions. You can also store general conditions at the vendor level. The system uses these conditions for price determination. You can use the following types of conditions in purchasing: ●

●

Conditions in a contract apply to all contract release orders created with reference to the contract. Conditions in a purchasing info record apply to all the PO items containing the material and the vendor in the purchasing info record.


305



306




Unit 7 Exercise 26 Create a Purchasing Info Record

Business Example Your company recently redesigned one of the bicycles. Your company started a business relationship with a new vendor, which will supply the new stronger lock. To order from this vendor, you want to use purchasing info records including conditions, because you receive a lower price by ordering higher quantities. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise requires the Vendor Master, created in the exercise, Extend a Vendor Master Record, and the Material Master, created in the exercise, Create a Material Master Record. The Purchasing Info Record created in this exercise is used in one or more subsequent exercises in this course. Create a New Purchasing Info Record for the Lock 1. Create a new purchasing info record for the procurement of your new material for your new vendor. Use the material number T-R9## and the vendor number T-BP## . Create a purchasing info record valid for all plants and purchasing organization 1010 , as follows: Field

Value

Vendor

T-BP##

Material

T-R9##

Purchasing Org.

1010

2. Enter the purchasing organization data, base on an agreed delivery time of 2 days and standard quantity for ordering of 10 PC. Field

Value

Pl. Del. Time

2

Standard Qty

10

Purch Group

Z##

Net Price

5

3. Create the default gross price conditions. The vendor offers a quantity based price for this material as follows:


307



Qty

Price

Up to 99

5

from 100

4,75

From 500

4,50

Check the Created Purchasing Info Record You want to check the newly created purchasing info record. Therefore, you want to use a Fact Sheet App. 1. Check the purchasing Info Record. Search for the purchasing info record created today by all the participants.

308




Unit 7 Solution 26 Create a Purchasing Info Record

Business Example Your company recently redesigned one of the bicycles. Your company started a business relationship with a new vendor, which will supply the new stronger lock. To order from this vendor, you want to use purchasing info records including conditions, because you receive a lower price by ordering higher quantities. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise requires the Vendor Master, created in the exercise, Extend a Vendor Master Record, and the Material Master, created in the exercise, Create a Material Master Record. The Purchasing Info Record created in this exercise is used in one or more subsequent exercises in this course. Create a New Purchasing Info Record for the Lock 1. Create a new purchasing info record for the procurement of your new material for your new vendor. Use the material number T-R9## and the vendor number T-BP## . Create a purchasing info record valid for all plants and purchasing organization 1010 , as follows: Field

Value

Vendor

T-BP##

Material

T-R9##

Purchasing Org.

1010


Create Purchasing Info Record

b) On the Create Info Record Initial Screen

tile.

, enter the data provided in the table above.

c) Press Enter. There is no need to change any information In the

General Data view.

2. Enter the purchasing organization data, base on an agreed delivery time of 2 days and standard quantity for ordering of 10 PC. Field

Value

Pl. Del. Time

2

Standard Qty

10

Purch Group

Z##


309



Field

Value

Net Price

5

a) Choose the Purchasing Org. Data 1

icon.

b) On the Purchasing Organization Data 1

tab, enter the data provided in the table.

3. Create the default gross price conditions. The vendor offers a quantity based price for this material as follows: Qty

Price

Up to 99

5

from 100

4,75

From 500

4,50

a) Choose Conditions . b) In Create default gross Price Condition (PPR0): Fast Entry Scales .

, select the entry and choose

c) In the Data View for Scales , enter the data provided in the table. Hint: In the first row of the conditions you do not need to enter a quantity.

d) Press Enter and

Save the data record.

Check the Created Purchasing Info Record You want to check the newly created purchasing info record. Therefore, you want to use a Fact Sheet App. 1. Check the purchasing Info Record. Search for the purchasing info record created today by all the participants. a) On the Launchpad, choose the

Purchasing Info Record

b) Choose Filters and include the

Material , Vendor , and Created on fields in the filter.

tile.

c) Save this choice as a variant. d) In the data screen Filters in the data section Purchasing Info Record choose more filters. Mark the fields Created on, Vendor, Material. e) Include these materials in the filter bar and save your settings. f) Name the Variant:

U_TERP10## and set as default.

g) Search for all the purchasing info records created today. Choose your info record and display the fact sheet.

310



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Listing Additional Vendor Specific Master Data Records




311



Unit 7 Lesson 5 Creating Purchase Requisitions



Purchase Requisitions As a long-term SAP user, you want to understand the usage of purchase requisitions in the purchase to pay business process as well as the usage of document types, item categories and account assignment for consumable items.

Figure 158: Purchase Requisitions

A purchase requisition is an internal document that the purchasing department uses to procure a particular quantity of a material or a service for a particular date. You can create requisitions directly or indirectly. Creating a requisition directly means that someone from the requesting department enters a purchase requisition manually. The person who creates the requisition determines what and how much to order, and the delivery date. Creating a requisition indirectly means that another SAP component initiates the creation of the purchase requisition automatically. You can use the following to create requisitions indirectly: ●

312

Material requirement planning(MRP)



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Creating Purchase Requisitions

●

Maintenance orders

●

Production orders

●

Networks

You can also initiate purchase requisitions from SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM) or SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM). When you create a purchase requisition for materials that have a material master record, the system transfers the data in the material master record to the purchase requisition. You also have the option to select items from a web-based catalog. You can convert purchase requisitions into requests for quotations (RFQs), POs, or outline agreements. Purchase Requisition Processing

Figure 159: Purchase Requisition Processing

You can create a purchase requisition manually, through the requesting department, or automatically, using materials planning. You can use the creation indicator in the statistics data of the purchase requisition item to see which procedure was used to create the purchase requisition. When you create a purchase requisition, you can enter a source of supply for the relevant item or specify a desired vendor. The purchasing department is responsible for determining the source of supply and for converting the purchase requisition into a PO or RFQ. First, the purchaser assigns the purchase requisition by selecting a valid source of supply. Then, the purchaser converts the purchase requisition into a purchase order or an RFQ. The source of supply determination process can be automated. The buyer who is responsible for the purchase requisition converts it into a PO manually, or the system converts it automatically.


313



Account Assignment Objects

Figure 160: Account Assignment Objects

You need to enter an account assignment for an item under the following circumstances: ●

If you order a material that is not subject to value-based inventory management and post its value directly to consumption (pure consumable material)

●

If you order an article that does not have a material master record

●

If you order a service

If you want to procure a material as a consumable, you must specify an account assignment category and other account assignment data in the document item of the purchase requisition or purchasing document. The account assignment category determines the account assignment object category that is to be charged. You must provide the account assignment data. The accounts are debited when the goods receipt or invoice is posted. The following are the examples of account assignment objects: ●

●

314

The account assignment object cost center (account assignment category K) When you make an account assignment to a cost center, you must enter the general ledger (G/L) account number of the consumption account. You must also enter the cost center for which the material will be procured on the account assignment data screen. You can specify that the system automatically proposes the number of the GL account to be charged in Customizing. The account assignment object asset (account assignment category A) If you use account assignment category A, you have to enter the asset number on the account assignment data screen. The system automatically determines the G/L account to charge based on the asset number you cannot enter manually.




Procurement for Consumption

Figure 161: Procurement for Consumption

When you procure a material directly for consumption, no material master record is necessary. The characteristics of consumable materials with a master record are as follows: ●

There is no value-based inventory management.

●

The system automatically updates consumption in the material master record.

In the SAP ERP application, the term “consumable material” is any material subject to procurement whose value is settled using cost element accounts or asset accounts. Therefore, a consumable material is procured directly for an account assignment object. When procuring a consumable material without a material master record, you have to enter a short description, a material group, and a purchase order unit in the document manually. You have to do this because you cannot fetch this data from a master record. This is not true for a material with a master record. For these materials, the material type controls whether inventory management takes place on a value basis. In the figure, Procurement for Consumption, the procurement processes for stock and consumable materials are shown with regard to account assignment. Stock material needs a material master record. You do not specify an account assignment category in the purchase order. The material master record determines the account assignment based on valuation class. The system posts the stock value to a stock account during goods receipt. This updates the stock value and the stock quantity in the material master record.


315



Procurement for Consumable Materials When you procure a consumable material, a material master record is not required, but can be used. You can procure stock material for consumption. In all cases, you must specify an account assignment category and other dependent account assignment data, such as an account assignment object and a G/L account (consumption account). At the time of goods receipt or invoice receipt, the system debits the consumption account the purchase order specifies with the procurement value. Additionally, the system posts the amount to the account assignment object.

Figure 162: Creating a Purchase Requisition

The Procure to Pay business process integrates with many different SAP application modules. Creating a Purchase Requisition A purchase requisition can be created from a MRP run. If a purchase requisition line item is a consumable for a cost object, then upon saving the purchase requisition, a commitment in Management Accounting is created. Please note: Commitment Management within Management Accounting needs to be activated. Creating a Purchase Order If a purchase order line item is a consumable for a cost object, then upon saving the purchase order, a commitment in Management Accounting is created. Please note: Commitment Management within Management Accounting needs to be activated. Posting a Goods Receipt When you save a goods receipt for stock materials, on hand inventory is increased.

316




If a change in material valuation occurred, then the system creates an accounting document in Financial Accounting. If the purchase order was for consumable materials, the system not only creates an accounting document in Financial Accounting, but also creates a controlling document in Management Accounting. If the organization is using Warehouse Management, then the system creates a transfer requirement. Lastly, the system updates the purchase order history. Posting an Invoice Receipt When an invoice is posted, the system creates an accounting document, in Financial Accounting to record the liability owed to the vendor. The system, also creates an open item against the vendor’s account. If the purchase order was for consumable materials, and the invoice amount differs from the purchase order amount, then the system creates a controlling document, in Management Accounting.


317



318




Unit 7 Exercise 27 Create a Purchase Requisition for a Stock Item and a Consumable Material

Business Example Your company is procuring new powerful stronger locks because it has redesigned one of its bicycles. The engineering department will use some of the locks and the rest of the locks will be received into inventory for use in production. Currently, only one vendor can supply the locks. You must create a purchase requisition for the locks, separating the stock portion from the consumable portion. Use a purchase requisition to document your requirements for the bicycle lock order. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise requires the Vendor Master, created in the exercise, Create an Extend a Vendor Master Record, the Material Master, created in the exercise, Create a Material Master Record, and the Internal order that you created in the exercise, Maintaining Master Data of an Internal Order. The PReq created in this exercise is used in one or more subsequent exercises in this course. 1. Create a purchase requisitions for a total of 110 pieces of material T-R9## . The locks need to be delivered to plant 1010 one week from today. Your company will receive 110 pieces as follows: ●

●

100 pieces will be placed in stock for plant

1010

10 pieces will be expensed to the Internal order you created in the exercise, Maintaining Master Data of an Internal Order.

The valuation price for the material is

20.

Write down the Purchase requisition number:

Purchase requisition number:_______________________________ 2. Assign the vendor


T-BP## to both items.

319



Unit 7 Solution 27 Create a Purchase Requisition for a Stock Item and a Consumable Material

Business Example Your company is procuring new powerful stronger locks because it has redesigned one of its bicycles. The engineering department will use some of the locks and the rest of the locks will be received into inventory for use in production. Currently, only one vendor can supply the locks. You must create a purchase requisition for the locks, separating the stock portion from the consumable portion. Use a purchase requisition to document your requirements for the bicycle lock order. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise requires the Vendor Master, created in the exercise, Create an Extend a Vendor Master Record, the Material Master, created in the exercise, Create a Material Master Record, and the Internal order that you created in the exercise, Maintaining Master Data of an Internal Order. The PReq created in this exercise is used in one or more subsequent exercises in this course. 1. Create a purchase requisitions for a total of 110 pieces of material T-R9## . The locks need to be delivered to plant 1010 one week from today. Your company will receive 110 pieces as follows: ●

●


1010

10 pieces will be expensed to the Internal order you created in the exercise, Maintaining Master Data of an Internal Order. 20.

The valuation price for the material is

Write down the Purchase requisition number: a) On the Launchpad, choose the

Create Purchase Requisition

b) On the Create Purchase Requisition

screen, choose

tile.

Create Own Item .

c) On the Create Own Item screen, enter the following data:

320

Field

Value

Material

T-R9##

Valuation Price

20

Quantity requested

100




Field

Value

Delivery Date

Today + 7 days

d) Enter the same information, but this time, for

Quantity requested

, enter 10.

e) Choose Add to cart . f) Choose the Shopping Cart and order the 2 Positions. g) Write down the Purchase requisition number in the space provided. h) Go Back to the Launchpad. Purchase requisition number:_______________________________ 2. Assign the vendor

T-BP## to both items.

a) Choose the Manage your Purchase Requisitions b) In the Manage Purchase Requisition enter the material number and press c) In your first item, choose

tile.

view, to search for your material number Go.

T-R9## ,

Edit and assign your source of supply.

Your vendor T-BP## should be assigned. d) In your second item, choose

Edit and assign your source of supply.

Your vendor T-BP## should be assigned. Hint: The price is not adopted from the purchasing info record.

e) Go Back to the Launchpad.


321




322





Unit 7 Lesson 6 Creating Purchase Orders



●


Purchase Orders

Figure 163: Purchase Order

A PO is a formal request to a vendor to supply goods or services based on the conditions of the PO. In the PO, you also need to specify whether the material will be delivered for stock or for direct consumption (for example, a cost center, an asset, or a project). The Goods Receipt (GR) and invoice verification are usually based on the PO. You can minimize data entry time by creating PO items with reference to an existing PO, purchase requisition, quotation, or contract. You can also enter a PO without reference to preceding documents in the system. When you enter PO data, the system suggests default values. For example, it suggests the ordering address, the terms of payment, and freight incoterms based on the vendor master record. If a material master record exists, the system transfers the material short text and the material


323



group automatically. If a purchasing information record already exists in the system, the system proposes the price for the PO. Purchase Order Structure

Figure 164: Purchase Order Structure

Like other purchasing documents in SAP S/4HANA, a PO consists of a document header and one or more items. The document header contains information that refers to the entire PO, like the document currency, the document date, and the terms of payment. The item portion of the document contains data that describes the materials or services ordered. You can also maintain additional information for each item (for example, delivery schedules or item-based text). You can procure materials or services for all the plants attached to your purchasing organization in a PO.

324




Unit 7 Exercise 28 Create a Purchase Order with Reference to PReq.

Business Example Once the purchase requisition is created, you need to create a purchase order for the materials. You want to order from the supplier you created before. The responsible Purchasing Organization is 1010 and the Purchasing Group you are working in is Z##. You will procure 2 items. One item will be delivered for stock and the other item is procured directly for the internal order for testing. The material will be posted first into blocked stock. Make sure that the GR posting and the invoice posting can take place. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise requires the Vendor Master, created in the exercise, Create an Extend a Vendor Master Record, the Material Master, created in the exercise, Create a Material Master Record, and the Internal order that you created in the exercise, Maintaining Master Data of an Internal Order. 1. Create a purchase order for a total of 110 pieces of material T-R9##. The locks need to be delivered to plant 1010 one week from today. Your company will receive 110 pieces as follows: ●

●


1010


2. Use the SAP Fiori app Change Purchase Orders (Advanced) Purchase Order created.

to check and change the

What is the number of the Purchase Order?

3. Use the SAP Fiori app My Purchasing Document supplier TERP10-## and your purchasing group


items to select all purchase orders for Z## .

325



Unit 7 Solution 28 Create a Purchase Order with Reference to PReq.

Business Example Once the purchase requisition is created, you need to create a purchase order for the materials. You want to order from the supplier you created before. The responsible Purchasing Organization is 1010 and the Purchasing Group you are working in is Z##. You will procure 2 items. One item will be delivered for stock and the other item is procured directly for the internal order for testing. The material will be posted first into blocked stock. Make sure that the GR posting and the invoice posting can take place. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise requires the Vendor Master, created in the exercise, Create an Extend a Vendor Master Record, the Material Master, created in the exercise, Create a Material Master Record, and the Internal order that you created in the exercise, Maintaining Master Data of an Internal Order. 1. Create a purchase order for a total of 110 pieces of material T-R9##. The locks need to be delivered to plant 1010 one week from today. Your company will receive 110 pieces as follows: ●

●


1010



Manage Purchase Requisition

b) In the Manage Purchase Requisition enter the material number and press

view, to search for your material number Go.

c) Select the two purchase requisition items and press the d) In the Purchase Order Preview Submit button.

Create Purchase Order

T-R9## , icon.

screen, select the two Purchase orders and press the

e) In the Manage Purchase Requisition

screen, go back to the Launchpad.

2. Use the SAP Fiori app Change Purchase Orders (Advanced) Purchase Order created.

326

tile.

to check and change the


Change Purchase Order (Advanced)

b) On the Display Purchase Order Display/Change icon.

screen, to change the purchase order, choose the

tile.



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Creating Purchase Orders

c) Display the document overview and choose the Your Purchase Order should be visible in the

My Purchase Order

selection variant.

Document Overview .

d) Double-click the Purchase Order. The Purchase Order will be displayed. Note: Check that you are in change mode e) For the first item, delete the account assignment category any warning messages regarding the price or delivery date.

K and press Enter. Ignore

f) In the second line item, change the account assignment category to Ignore the warnings.

F and press Enter.

g) If necessary, press Enter again. h) Go to the item detail of item 20 and, in the Account Assignment tab, enter the internal order created in the unit – Internal Order – in Management accounting. Note: You can search for the order in Controlling Area description.

A000 and by your

i) Save the purchase order and write down the number. What is the number of the Purchase Order?

3. Use the SAP Fiori app My Purchasing Document supplier TERP10-## and your purchasing group a) On the Launchpad, choose the

items to select all purchase orders for Z## .

My Purchasing document items.

b) In the Manage Purchase Order Selection Go.

screen, enter the supplier

T-BP## and choose

c) Choose the Entry Purchase Order. The Purchase orders created should be shown.


327



328




Unit 7 Exercise 29 Run an Internal Order Report

Business Example In a previous exercise, you created a Purchase Requisition with an item, which was assigned to an internal order. Then you created a Purchase Order with reference to the Purchase Requisition. As a result the preliminary commitment on your internal order is changed to a fix commitment. Now check the amount of the commitment on your internal order. For this exercise, you work directly in the back-end system T41 and client 400. 1. Verify that the commitment has been recorded for your internal order. Process the Orders: Actual/Plan/Commitment report for the current period and plan version 0. Execute the report for your internal order using the following information: Field

Value

Controlling Area

A000

Fiscal Year

Current Year

From Period

1

To Period

12

Plan Version

0

Or value(s)

Your internal order from the exercise, Maintaining Master Data of an Internal Order

2. Note the amount of Commitment for Purchase Requirements and Purchase Order. Explain the change. Field

Value

Commitment / Purch.req Commitment /.Pur.Order


329



Unit 7 Solution 29 Run an Internal Order Report

Business Example In a previous exercise, you created a Purchase Requisition with an item, which was assigned to an internal order. Then you created a Purchase Order with reference to the Purchase Requisition. As a result the preliminary commitment on your internal order is changed to a fix commitment. Now check the amount of the commitment on your internal order. For this exercise, you work directly in the back-end system T41 and client 400. 1. Verify that the commitment has been recorded for your internal order. Process the Orders: Actual/Plan/Commitment report for the current period and plan version 0. Execute the report for your internal order using the following information: Field

Value

Controlling Area

A000

Fiscal Year

Current Year

From Period

1

To Period

12

Plan Version

0

Or value(s)

Your internal order from the exercise, Maintaining Master Data of an Internal Order

a) On the SAP Easy Access screen of the back-end system T41 Client 400. choose Accounting → Controlling → Internal Orders → Information System → Reports for Internal Orders → Plan/Actual Comparisons → Additional Key Figures → Orders: Actual/Plan/Commitments . Alternatively, use transaction code S_ALR_87012999. b) On the Orders: Actual/Plan/Commitments: Selection Screen in the table.

, enter the data provided

c) Execute the report. 2. Note the amount of Commitment for Purchase Requirements and Purchase Order. Explain the change. Field

Value

Commitment / Purch.req Commitment /.Pur.Order

330




Unit 7 Exercise 30 Evaluate Purchase Orders

Business Example You want an overview of all of the Purchase Orders that have been created in the Company Code 1010. 1. Start the Manage Purchase Orders Launchpad. 2. Select Purchase Orders using the

app from your TS410 group in the SAP Fiori Company Code value of 1010

Do you find your Purchase Order from the previous exercise? Display your Purchase Order.


331



Unit 7 Solution 30 Evaluate Purchase Orders

Business Example You want an overview of all of the Purchase Orders that have been created in the Company Code 1010. 1. Start the Manage Purchase Orders Launchpad.

app from your TS410 group in the SAP Fiori

a) Choose the corresponding tile in your TS410 group on the SAP Fiori Launchpad to start the app. 2. Select Purchase Orders using the

Company Code value of 1010

a) On the Manage Purchase Orders Screen Go.

, enter the Company Code 1010 and choose

b) To select your Purchase Order, click the arrow on the right side. Do you find your Purchase Order from the previous exercise? Display your Purchase Order.

332




Integrate ARIBA Functionality with Procurement in SAP S/4HANA

Figure 165: Ariba Network

Ariba allows for the location of new suppliers, the streamlining of transaction processes, and the realization of savings with cloud-based procurement software. The Ariba network supports the entire source-to-pay process. Uses of ARIBA Network Table 4: Uses of ARIBA Network Your organization can use ARIBA Network to do the following: Summary

Details

Collaborate immediately with trading partners

Access enabled network suppliers Trade with new suppliers with unlimited supplier onboarding Select from various collaboration processes

Transform paper into electronic transactions

Automatically accept electronic POs and Invoices Convert paper with conversion services Easily allow sellers to transform POs into invoices

Catch and prevent potential errors

Enforce policy and compliance rules in real time Receive alerts and notifications based on transaction data Ensure global invoice compliance


333



ARIBA Integration

Figure 166: Ariba Integration

Integration between SAP Business Suite and the Ariba Network includes the following:

334

●

Purchase order and invoice automation

●

Discount management

●

Ariba procurement content (catalog integration)






●



335



Unit 7 Lesson 7 Posting a Goods Receipt for a Purchase Order



Goods Receipt Processing

Figure 167: Goods Receipt

When goods are delivered against a PO, you enter a GR, referencing the PO. The system checks the PO and copies only the open PO items into the GR transaction. When a GR is recorded against a PO, the following details are checked: ● ●

●

The correct material has been delivered The correct quantity of material has been delivered or whether there has been over- or under-delivery Perishable goods meet the minimum shelf life criteria (the shelf life expiration date check must be active in this case)

Effect of Goods Receipt (GR) When you post the goods receipt to the warehouse or stores, the system generates a material document. This document contains information about the material delivered and the relevant quantity of the material. For stock items, the relevant plant storage location is recorded. If the GR is valuated, the system also generates an accounting document. This document contains the relevant general ledger accounts that were used to post the transaction as a result of the goods receipt.

336



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Posting a Goods Receipt for a Purchase Order

You can enter several GR items against a PO item in one operation. You can do this if the material is delivered in several batches or if it is distributed to several storage locations. When you post a GR for a PO, the system automatically updates the PO history tab in the line item details of the PO. This provides visibility regarding the status of the PO line item. Valuated Goods Receipt

Figure 168: Valuated Goods Receipt

For GRs, you can decide which stock type is relevant when posting a quantity. The stock type is relevant for determining the stock available in materials planning and is also used for withdrawals in inventory management (IM). You can post a goods receipt for the warehouse to the following stock types: ● ●

●

Unrestricted-use stock (this type has no usage restrictions) Quality inspection stock (this type is available from the Materials Requirement Planning (MRP) perspective, but no withdrawals are possible for consumption) Blocked stock (this type is not available from an MRP perspective and no withdrawals are possible for consumption)

You can store a default value for the stock type during the GR in the PO. You can change this default value when you post the GR as long as you are not using the Quality Management (QM) component. You always use movement type 101 to post GRs for a PO to valuated stock. You can only post withdrawals for consumption from unrestricted-use stock. You can withdraw one sample, scrap a quantity, or post an inventory difference from quality inspection stock and blocked stock. When you post a receipt into the warehouse, the quantity and value of the stock increases regardless of the stock type (except for material types without value updating).


337



Quality Management Integration

Figure 169: Stock Overview

The stock overview is a report that displays stock quantities, for the various stock types, for a single material. The stock overview displays material stocks for each organizational level, such as the client, company, code, plant, and storage location. The system totals the quantities posted for a particular stock type for each organizational unit. You can also display the stock overview for batches or valuation types and special stocks, for example, consignment material. Examples for Movement Types

Figure 170: Examples for Movement Types

338




When you enter a goods movement, you must choose a movement type. A movement type is a three-character key used to differentiate goods movements. Examples of goods movements are GR, GI, and transfer postings. The movement type assumes important control functions in IM. It plays a central role in automatic account determination in the SAP ERP. Together with other influencing factors, the movement type determines which stock or consumption accounts the system updates in Financial Accounting (FI). The movement type also determines the screen layout for entering documents or updating quantity fields. Hint: Among other things, the movement type controls the way goods are moved (goods issue (GI), GR, or transfer) and is an important tool used for account determination. SAP comes with a variety of movement types for the most frequently-used goods movements. You can customize other movement types, if necessary. Each movement type has its own cancellation movement type, which corresponds to the number of its movement type + 1. Documents for Goods Movements

Figure 171: Documents for Goods Movements

As soon as the system posts the goods movement, it generates a material document as proof that the transaction caused a change in stock levels. You cannot change the quantities, material, movement type, or organization level. If you want to correct errors, you must create a new document. To reverse the incorrect document postings, you must first cancel the incorrect document. If the goods movement is relevant to inventory valuation, the system creates at least one accounting document in addition to the material document. Goods movements (GR, GI, or transfer postings) are relevant to valuation when they affect inventory valuation in the general ledger. For example, a GR posting for a raw material results


339



in an increase in the stock value of your current assets. If the raw material is only transferred within one plant, the system will not make any postings in FI. Material and Accounting Documents

Figure 172: Material and Accounting Documents

The material and accounting documents for goods movement are created simultaneously. The material document consists of a document header and at least one item. The header information includes the posting date and the user ID of the person who created the document. The system records the quantity of the material posted to the storage location of a plant at line item level. The accounting document records the effects of line material movements on the general ledger accounts. The document header contains applicable data, such as the document date, posting date, posting period, and document currency. The system records the GL account numbers and the associated amounts posted at the line item level. The material and accounting documents are independent documents. You can identify the material document by the material document number and the fiscal year. You can identify the accounting document uniquely using a combination of the following: ●

The company code

●

The accounting document number

●

The fiscal year

The system determines the company code based on the plant where the goods movement occurred.

340




Other Integration Points

Figure 173: Other Integration Points

In addition to the generation of Material (quantity) and Accounting (value) documents, there are other integration points. The other integration points are as follows: ●

Purchasing – updates the PO history

●

QM (if active) – creates an inspection lot

●

●

Warehouse Management (if active) – creates a transfer requirement, which in turn places the material in a warehouse Generating output (for example, the GR slip or a pallet label)


341



342




Unit 7 Exercise 31 Post a Goods Receipt for a Purchase Order

Business Example The material you ordered arrives in the Warehouse. You decided to post the 100 pc for stock first to blocked stock for a quality check. The 10 additional pieces you post for consumption. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise requires the Purchase Order created in the exercise, Create a Purchase Order. 1. Enter a goods receipt with reference to the purchase order for the entire quantity of your material. For an easy way to select, use the SAP Fiori app My Purchasing Documents . Post the Quantity of 100 Pc to blocked stock in Storage Location 101C. As delivery note, enter TERP10-##. Record the Material Document Number.

__________________________________________________________ 2. Use the SAP Fiori app

Post Goods Movements

for the second item.

Record the Material Document Number. __________________________________________________________ 3. Use the SAP Fiori app

1010.

Stock Single Item to check the stock available in your plant

Write down the stock available: Unrestricted Use: __________________________________________________________ Quality Inspection:__________________________________________________________ Blocked Stock:__________________________________________________________


343



Unit 7 Solution 31 Post a Goods Receipt for a Purchase Order

Business Example The material you ordered arrives in the Warehouse. You decided to post the 100 pc for stock first to blocked stock for a quality check. The 10 additional pieces you post for consumption. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise requires the Purchase Order created in the exercise, Create a Purchase Order. 1. Enter a goods receipt with reference to the purchase order for the entire quantity of your material. For an easy way to select, use the SAP Fiori app My Purchasing Documents . Post the Quantity of 100 Pc to blocked stock in Storage Location 101C. As delivery note, enter TERP10-##. Record the Material Document Number.

__________________________________________________________ a) On the Launchpad, choose

My Purchasing Document Items

b) In My Purchasing Document Item

, select the vendor

T-BP## and choose

c) In the result list, go to purchase orders, choose the first item, and choose Receipt for Purchase Orders . d) Enter the Delivery Note TERP10-## in the header, the Stock Type Blocked stock for the first item.

Go. Post Goods

Storage Location

101C , and the

e) Post the Goods Receipts. f) Write down the Material Document Number in the space provided above. g) Go back to the Launchpad. 2. Use the SAP Fiori app

Post Goods Movements

for the second item.

Record the Material Document Number. __________________________________________________________ a) In the Post Goods Movements app, search for your Purchase order number by using the Binocular icon. Alternatively, enter your Purchase Order Number directly. b) Choose the Find Purchase Order c) In dialog box, enter your Supplier Find .

icon. T-BP## or your material number

T-R9## and choose

d) In the result list, select the second item of your purchase order, double-click the entry, and close the result list.

344




e) In the item overview, flag the material as OK. f) Enter your Delivery note number

TERP10-## in the header of your document.

Note: When the OK field is closed in the overview, close the item detail. g) Post the Goods Receipts. h) Write down the Material Document Number in the space provided above. i) Go back to the Launchpad. 3. Use the SAP Fiori app

1010.

Stock Single Item to check the stock available in your plant

Write down the stock available: Unrestricted Use: __________________________________________________________ Quality Inspection:__________________________________________________________ Blocked Stock:__________________________________________________________ a) In the Stock Single Material field.

app, enter your material number,

T-R9##, in the header

b) Write down the stock available in the spaces provided above. c) Look at the material documents posted and the document flow, select the entry with the storage location and select the Material Documents Overview icon. d) Select the first material document and display the material document. e) In the material document, open the f) Click the Purchase Order


Document Flow section.

to display the Purchase Order.

345



346




Unit 7 Exercise 32 Transfer Posting for Material

Business Example After you have posted the goods receipt to the blocked stock you check the material. After the inspection and the approval of the quality you want to transfer the material now to unrestricted use stock. You want to use an SAP Fiori app to perform the posting. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise requires the Purchase Order.

Material Qty created in the exercise, Post Goods Receipt for

1. Transfer the entire quantity of 100 pc of material stock. Use an app for this posting.

T-R9## in plant 1010 from blocked

2. Transfer the quantity of 100 pc from blocked stock to unrestricted use stock. 3. View the quantities available in the plant. Use the single material.

Stock app to receive an overview of a

What is stated in the document flow? ________________________________________________________


347



Unit 7 Solution 32 Transfer Posting for Material

Business Example After you have posted the goods receipt to the blocked stock you check the material. After the inspection and the approval of the quality you want to transfer the material now to unrestricted use stock. You want to use an SAP Fiori app to perform the posting. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise requires the Purchase Order.

Material Qty created in the exercise, Post Goods Receipt for

1. Transfer the entire quantity of 100 pc of material stock. Use an app for this posting. a) On the Launchpad, choose the b) On the Transfer stock enter 1010.

Transfer Stock

T-R9## in plant 1010 from blocked tile.

view, in the Material field, enter T-R9##, and, in the Plant field

c) Press Enter. 2. Transfer the quantity of 100 pc from blocked stock to unrestricted use stock. a) Select the icon next to the quantity of blocked stock.. The icon becomes blue. b) Select the icon next to the unrestricted use stock (it should be blue). c) On the Transfer stock

view, enter the quantity 100 pc.

d) Choose Post. e) Go back to the SAP Fiori Launchpad. 3. View the quantities available in the plant. Use the single material.

Stock app to receive an overview of a

What is stated in the document flow? ________________________________________________________ a) On the Launchpad, choose the

Stock tile.

b) On the Stock – Single material

view, in the Material field, enter T-R9##.

c) In the overview, select the storage location line and display the material documents. d) Choose the transfer posting and display the material document and the document flow. e) Write down the stated document flow in the space provided above.

348







349



Unit 7 Lesson 8 Processing Vendor Invoices



Processing Vendor Invoices

Figure 174: Invoice Verification Process

Invoice verification completes the procurement process in Materials Management (MM). You use logistics invoice verification (LIV) to enter vendor invoices as well as vendor credit memos that relate to a PO. Invoice verification excludes payment or invoice evaluation. Posting the invoice completes the invoice verification process. The system updates the PO history. An open item is posted to the vendor's account in Financial Accounting.

350



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Processing Vendor Invoices

Invoice Verification with Reference

Figure 175: Invoice Verification with Reference

You can also use the delivery note number or the bill of lading as reference documents when posting a vendor invoice. If you enter an invoice for a PO, the system suggests the items from the PO that have not been fully invoiced. For example, if 100 pieces have been delivered and 60 pieces are invoiced, 40 pieces still have to be invoiced. The system also suggests the expected value of the items. The expected value is the quantity that still needs to be invoiced multiplied by the order price. If the discrepancy between the invoice value and the expected value exceeds tolerances, the system blocks the invoice for payment (for example, if the invoice price varies from the PO price). Documents in Invoice Verification

Figure 176: Documents in Invoice Verification

The invoice document consists of a document header and at least one item. The header data includes the vendor (invoicing party), the posting date, and the user ID of the person who


351



created the document. The line item data indicates the amount charged for a certain quantity of a material. The accounting document displays the general ledger postings as a result of the invoice receipt. The document header contains the document date, the posting date, the posting period, and the document currency. The line items contain the general ledger (G/L) account numbers and amounts posted. Posting an Invoice

Figure 177: Posting an Invoice

The effects of posting an invoice are as follows: ●

An accounting document is created.

●

The provisions in the GR/IR clearing account are reversed.

●

The invoice document is entered in the PO history.

●

352

If the invoice price is different from the PO price, the stock value and the current moving average price are recalculated and updated in the material master.




Document Splitting

Figure 178: Document Splitting

In the figure, Document Splitting, a vendor’s invoice is posted and the services are charged to two different cost centers. Each line item is assigned to a different cost center, profit center, and segment. The figure displays the journal entry. Corporate groups may have a requirement to create balance sheets at the segment level. As you can see in the figure, the vendor line is not assigned to a segment. The segments only receive the expense posting, and not the balance sheet posting, which prevents an accurate balance sheet by segment. This is why SAP uses document splitting. General Ledger View

Figure 179: General Ledger View

In Customizing, you can specify that the system needs to complete the missing entries automatically. The correct amount is shown in the figure.


353



You activate document splitting to ensure the segment characteristic splits uniformly. Systematic segmentation means that each document has a zero balance for the entity in question. There are six lines in the document now. The vendor line item and the tax item are split across the two (segments A and B). The balance for each segment is zero. You can create the balance sheet and profit and loss (P&L) statement in full, and the system balances the balance sheet in the background. The figure also shows how the accounts payable and the tax items inherit the segment entity in the document. Document splitting reduces the time and effort the user spends entering documents. Entering six account assignment items would be time consuming. Document splitting is only possible in the new General Ledger. There are two views of the posted documents - the Entry view and the General Ledger view. You can decide which view to use. If you do not need document splitting or it is inactive (for example, the customer only needs to create balance sheets at the company code level), then both views are identical. Customer invoices that distribute revenues among various entities are handled in the same way.

354




Unit 7 Exercise 33 Post the Vendor Invoice

Business Example You received the vendors invoice for your purchase order. The FI department posts that invoice now. The invoice has a total amount of 577,50 €, including 52,50 € VAT. To perform the posting the FI department want to use an App as well. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise requires the PO created in the exercise, Create a Purchase Order, and the Posting created in the exercise, Post Goods Receipt for Purchase Order.

GI

1. Post a vendor’s invoice based on the following data: Field

Value

Company Code

1010

Transaction

Invoice

Invoice Date

Today’s date

Invoicing Party

T-BP##

Posting Date

Today’s date

Reference

TERP10-##

Amount

577,50 EUR

Use the following data for the Item: Field

Value

Tax Code

1I

Item Quantity

100 pc and 10 pc

Use the Value added Tax rate of

52,50.

Write down the document / invoice number:

Invoice number: ______________________________________________ 2. Check that the invoices posted for all Suppliers from an overview and check whether an invoice is blocked.


TERP10 training . Use an app to gain

355



Unit 7 Solution 33 Post the Vendor Invoice

Business Example You received the vendors invoice for your purchase order. The FI department posts that invoice now. The invoice has a total amount of 577,50 €, including 52,50 € VAT. To perform the posting the FI department want to use an App as well. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise requires the PO created in the exercise, Create a Purchase Order, and the Posting created in the exercise, Post Goods Receipt for Purchase Order.

GI

1. Post a vendor’s invoice based on the following data: Field

Value

Company Code

1010

Transaction

Invoice

Invoice Date

Today’s date

Invoicing Party

T-BP##

Posting Date

Today’s date

Reference

TERP10-##

Amount

577,50 EUR

Use the following data for the Item: Field

Value

Tax Code

1I

Item Quantity

100 pc and 10 pc

Use the Value added Tax rate of

52,50.

Write down the document / invoice number:

Invoice number: ______________________________________________ a) On the Launchpad, choose the b) In the Create Supplier Invoice

356

Create Supplier Invoice

tile.

view, enter the data provided in the table.




c) For the Purchase order reference , enter the PO number from the exercise, Create a New Organizational Unit and a Position in Organizational Management and choose Create Item . d) For the Item , enter the data provided in the second table. e) In the Tax section, in the

Value added Tax

filed, enter 52,50.

f) Choose Simulate and then Post the invoice . g) Write down the document / invoice number in the space provided. 2. Check that the invoices posted for all Suppliers from an overview and check whether an invoice is blocked. a) Open the My purchasing document items

TERP10 training . Use an app to gain

app to check the invoices.

b) Choose Supplier Invoices and select all invoices posted for supplier


TERP10-## .

357



358




Unit 7 Exercise 34 Query the Supplier Account

Business Example After you posted the suppliers invoice you want to check the suppliers account. You want to see the line items posted and the supplier evaluation. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Use an app to query the supplier’s account after posting the supplier’s invoice. Use the following values for the Manage Supplier Line Items : Field

Value

Company Code

1010

Supplier

T-BP##

Which Accounts have been posted? Write down the account numbers. Account number

Value

Account 1 Account 2 Account 3 Account 4 2. Find the related documents. Which documents are listed here?


359



Unit 7 Solution 34 Query the Supplier Account

Business Example After you posted the suppliers invoice you want to check the suppliers account. You want to see the line items posted and the supplier evaluation. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Use an app to query the supplier’s account after posting the supplier’s invoice. Use the following values for the Manage Supplier Line Items : Field

Value

Company Code

1010

Supplier

T-BP##

Which Accounts have been posted? Write down the account numbers. Account number

Value

Account 1 Account 2 Account 3 Account 4 a) On the Launchpad, choose the

Manage Supplier Line Items

b) In the Manage Supplier Line Items

tile.

view, enter the data provided in the table.

c) Choose Go. d) Choose the invoice that you posted by clicking the document number and go to the fact sheet. e) Write down the account numbers in the table above. f) Go back to the line item overview. g) Open the Manage Journal

entry to verify your account numbers.

The account numbers should be the following:

360




Account number

Value

Account 1

21100000

Account 2

21120000

Account 3

21120000

Account 4

12600000

2. Find the related documents. Which documents are listed here? a) The following documents should be listed: ●

Incoming Invoice

●

Purchase Order

●

Purchase Requisition

●

Material Document

●

Accounting Document

●

Controlling Document

b) Go back to the Launchpad.


361




362





Unit 7 Lesson 9 Processing the Automatic Payment Run



Payment Process

Figure 180: Elements of the Payment Process

You can pay vendors manually or by using the automatic payment program. The standard system contains common payment methods and corresponding forms defined by country.


363



Overview of the Automatic Payment Program

Figure 181: Overview of the Automatic Payment Program

The system performs the following actions during the payment run:

364

●

Posts payment documents

●

Clears open items

●

Prepares data for printing the payment media




Unit 7 Exercise 35 Create an Automatic Payment Run

Business Example The Accounts Payable department (A/P) runs the payment program once a week. The vendor invoice is paid automatically by the payment program at the beginning of the next month — depending on your selection, together with all the other open vendor items. Note that, in this exercise, when a value includes ##, replace the ## characters with the number that your instructor assigned you. 1. Create your own payment run in the back-end system T41. Enter the first day of the next month as the run date, and your group, GR##, as the identification. 2. Maintain the payment run parameters so that the payment run selects all documents that have been entered up until the first of next month for your vendor’s account, T-BP##, in company code 1010. Any payments in this run should be made by payment method S (Check) and posted on the first of next month. You must enter the posting date of the next payment run so that the system can decide whether the payment has to be made in this payment run, or whether it can wait until the next payment run. The next payment run is a week after the posting date. Note: You can set up the system to include all vendors in the payment run, and also to specify all payment methods that are used.

Hint: For test purposes, it is advisable to activate the additional log so that any errors can be more easily traced. Activate the additional log for your payment run. 3. Have the system start generating the payment proposal by scheduling the proposal to start immediately. Companies usually schedule the payment proposal to be processed in the background at times when the system is less busy (at night, for example). Keep updating the status until a message is displayed telling you that the payment proposal has been created. 4. Accounts payable clerks print out the payment proposal and check that the payments before the actual payment run takes place. This prevents any incorrect payments from being made. If necessary, you can then edit the payment proposal by editing the exception list, removing items from the payment run, or changing payments. Have the system display the payment proposal on the screen.


365



5. After the payment proposal has been checked and accepted as correct, the actual payment run is started, which posts the payments. We also schedule the payment medium creation in this step. Start the payment run by scheduling it to start immediately . Companies usually schedule the payment run in the same way as the payment proposal, to be processed in the background at times when the system is less busy. Select the Create payment medium checkbox in the Schedule Payment dialog box to create the payment media with the payment run. 6. Check the cheque, which has been created in the spool.

366




Unit 7 Solution 35 Create an Automatic Payment Run

Business Example The Accounts Payable department (A/P) runs the payment program once a week. The vendor invoice is paid automatically by the payment program at the beginning of the next month — depending on your selection, together with all the other open vendor items. Note that, in this exercise, when a value includes ##, replace the ## characters with the number that your instructor assigned you. 1. Create your own payment run in the back-end system T41. Enter the first day of the next month as the run date, and your group, GR##, as the identification. a) On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Payable → Periodic Processing → Payments . Alternatively, enter the transaction code F110. Field Name

Value

Run date

1st of the next month

Identification

GR##

b) Press Enter. The status of the new payment run is:

No parameters entered as yet

.

2. Maintain the payment run parameters so that the payment run selects all documents that have been entered up until the first of next month for your vendor’s account, T-BP##, in company code 1010. Any payments in this run should be made by payment method S (Check) and posted on the first of next month. You must enter the posting date of the next payment run so that the system can decide whether the payment has to be made in this payment run, or whether it can wait until the next payment run. The next payment run is a week after the posting date. Note: You can set up the system to include all vendors in the payment run, and also to specify all payment methods that are used.

Hint: For test purposes, it is advisable to activate the additional log so that any errors can be more easily traced. Activate the additional log for your payment run.


367



a) Select the Parameter

tab and enter the following data:

Field Name

Value

Posting date


Documents entered up to


Company codes

1010

Pmt meths (Payment methods)

S

Next p/date

one week after the posting date

(Next posting date)

T-BP##

Vendor b) Choose Edit → Save Parameters.

c) Select the Additional log tab and enter the following data: Field Name

Value

Due date check

Select

Payment method selection in all cases

Select

Line items of the payment documents

Select

Vendors (from/to)

T-BP##

d) Choose Edit → Save Parameters. e) Go back to the Status tab. 3. Have the system start generating the payment proposal by scheduling the proposal to start immediately. Companies usually schedule the payment proposal to be processed in the background at times when the system is less busy (at night, for example). Keep updating the status until a message is displayed telling you that the payment proposal has been created. a) Choose Schedule proposal

(the Proposal button).

b) Choose Start immediately . c) Press Enter. d) Keep updating the status. Press Enter or choose the Status button until the status reads: Payment proposal has been created. 4. Accounts payable clerks print out the payment proposal and check that the payments before the actual payment run takes place. This prevents any incorrect payments from being made. If necessary, you can then edit the payment proposal by editing the exception list, removing items from the payment run, or changing payments. Have the system display the payment proposal on the screen. a) Choose the Display proposal button. b) You should see an outgoing payment

368



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Processing the Automatic Payment Run

Hint: If no payments are displayed on the screen, or only the exception list is displayed, you have made an error somewhere. Look at the proposal log from the initial screen by choosing Display proposal log to see if you can find the error. Delete the payment proposal ( Edit → Proposal → Delete ) and remove the error. Then restart the payment proposal. Repeat this process until payments are displayed in the proposal. c) Switch to the Status tab. 5. After the payment proposal has been checked and accepted as correct, the actual payment run is started, which posts the payments. We also schedule the payment medium creation in this step. Start the payment run by scheduling it to start immediately . Companies usually schedule the payment run in the same way as the payment proposal, to be processed in the background at times when the system is less busy. Select the Create payment medium checkbox in the Schedule Payment dialog box to create the payment media with the payment run. a) Choose Payment run (using F7 or the

Schedule payment

button).

b) Select Start immediately . c) Select Create payment medium

.

d) Press Enter. e) Keep updating the status. Press Enter or choose the Status button until the status displays that the payment run has been carried out and posting orders have been generated and completed. 6. Check the cheque, which has been created in the spool. a) Choose Spool → Cheque → Display . b) Leave the transaction.


369



370




Unit 7 Exercise 36 View Vendor Accounts

Business Example You want to check whether the balance of the vendor’s account is 0 and the open item has been cleared. 1. Check whether the automatic payment run has cleared the original open item. Drill down from the balance of the vendor's account to the payment document. View the complete payment document with the Document Overview icon.


371



Unit 7 Solution 36 View Vendor Accounts

Business Example You want to check whether the balance of the vendor’s account is 0 and the open item has been cleared. 1. Check whether the automatic payment run has cleared the original open item. Drill down from the balance of the vendor's account to the payment document. View the complete payment document with the Document Overview icon. a) On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Payable → Account → Display Balances . Alternatively, enter the transaction code FK10N. Field Name

Value

Vendor

T-BP##

Company code

1010

Fiscal year

current year

b) Choose Execute . c) Drill down on the balance column of the next month. The original open item has now been cleared and a payment item (document type ZP) has been created. Drill down on the document and select the call up document overview icon to see the complete transaction. d) Return to the

372

SAP Easy Access screen.



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Processing the Automatic Payment Run




373



374





1. When a system is converted to SAP S/4HANA, the Material Ledger will be activated. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X

True

X

False

2. Which of the following statements are true? Choose the correct answers. X

A The deactivation of the statistical moving average is not mandatory in SAP S/ 4HANA.

X

B Deactivation of the statistical moving average decreases the transactional data throughput for goods movements.

X

C The deactivation of the statistical moving average is reversible.

X

D The deactivation of the statistical moving average is the result of a new lock behavior for materials with price control Standard.

3. When procuring a consumable material without a material master record, you can fetch this data from a master record. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X

True

X

False

4. What organizational levels do you enter data for in the vendor master record?


375



5. A purchase requisition can be created automatically from another SAP component. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X

True

X

False

6. When a GR is recorded against a PO, which of the following details are checked? Choose the correct answers. X

A The correct material has been delivered.

X

B The correct quantity of material has been delivered.

X

C The total price of the material.

X

D Perishable goods meet the minimum shelf life criteria.

7. In the stock overview, you can also display the stock overview for consignment material. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X

True

X

False

8. When you post an invoice, the provisions in the GR/IR clearing account are reversed. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X

True

X

False

9. Which of the following statements about invoice verification is true? Choose the correct answer.

376

X

A Posting the invoice is the second phase of the invoice verification process.

X

B Logistics invoice verification creates a connection between materials management and inventory management.

X

C When you post an invoice, the system creates an accounting document.

X

D An open item is posted to the vendor's account in Financial Accounting.




10. Which of the following tasks does the system perform during the payment run? Choose the correct answers. X

A It posts payment documents.

X

B It creates open items.

X

C It modifies data for printing the payment media.

X

D It Prepares data for printing the payment media.


377




1. When a system is converted to SAP S/4HANA, the Material Ledger will be activated. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X

True

X

False

2. Which of the following statements are true? Choose the correct answers. X

A The deactivation of the statistical moving average is not mandatory in SAP S/ 4HANA.

X

B Deactivation of the statistical moving average decreases the transactional data throughput for goods movements.

X

C The deactivation of the statistical moving average is reversible.

X

D The deactivation of the statistical moving average is the result of a new lock behavior for materials with price control Standard.

3. When procuring a consumable material without a material master record, you can fetch this data from a master record. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X

True

X

False

4. What organizational levels do you enter data for in the vendor master record? You enter the data for the following organizational levels in the vendor master record: client, company code, and purchasing organization.

378




5. A purchase requisition can be created automatically from another SAP component. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X

True

X

False

6. When a GR is recorded against a PO, which of the following details are checked? Choose the correct answers. X

A The correct material has been delivered.

X

B The correct quantity of material has been delivered.

X

C The total price of the material.

X

D Perishable goods meet the minimum shelf life criteria.

7. In the stock overview, you can also display the stock overview for consignment material. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X

True

X

False

8. When you post an invoice, the provisions in the GR/IR clearing account are reversed. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X

True

X

False

9. Which of the following statements about invoice verification is true? Choose the correct answer. X

A Posting the invoice is the second phase of the invoice verification process.

X

B Logistics invoice verification creates a connection between materials management and inventory management.

X

C When you post an invoice, the system creates an accounting document.

X

D An open item is posted to the vendor's account in Financial Accounting.


379



10. Which of the following tasks does the system perform during the payment run? Choose the correct answers.

380

X

A It posts payment documents.

X

B It creates open items.

X

C It modifies data for printing the payment media.

X

D It Prepares data for printing the payment media.




UNIT 8

Plan to Produce Business Process in SAP S/4HANA

Lesson 1 Describing the Plan to Produce Process in SAP S/4HANA

383

Lesson 2 Defining the Master Data in the Plan to Produce Process

390

Exercise 37: Change a Material Master Record

399

Exercise 38: Change Bill of Material

403

Exercise 39: Change a Work Center

405

Exercise 40: Change the Routing for a Finished Product

407

Lesson 3 Creating a Product Cost Estimate Exercise 41: Create a Standard Cost Estimate

410 415

Exercise 42: Update Material Valuation

419

Lesson 4 Planning Product Demand - Integrated Planning

424

Exercise 43: Manage Planned Independent Requirements

425

Lesson 5 Defining the MRP Process

430

Exercise 44: Display the Material Master Record

437

Lesson 6 Processing MRP Exercise 45: Process an MRP Run

442 455

Exercise 46: Monitor Material Coverage

459

Lesson 7 Describing the Manufacturing Business Process

464

Lesson 8 Creating and Releasing a Production Order

466

Exercise 47: Convert a Planned Order to a Production Order


469

381


For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Unit 8: Plan to Produce Business Process in SAP S/4HANA

Exercise 48: Release a Production Order

473

Lesson 9 Performing Material Withdrawal for a Production Order Exercise 49: Perform Goods Issue for a Production Order

478 481

Lesson 10 Performing an Order Confirmation and a Materials Goods Receipt Exercise 50: Confirm a Production Order and Post Goods Receipt

487 491

Lesson 11 Performing Period End Closing Activities

495

Exercise 51: Calculate Variances in a Production Order

507

Exercise 52: Settle a Production Order

509

Exercise 53: Evaluate CO-PA

511

UNIT OBJECTIVES

382

●

Describe the plan to produce process in SAP S/4HANA

●

Explain the master data need in plan to produce process

●

Create a product cost estimate

●

Plan product demand

●

Define the MRP process

●

Process MRP

●

Describe the steps involved in the manufacturing business process

●

Convert a planned order into production order

●

Explain production order release

●

Perform a material withdrawal for a production order

●

Perform an order confirmation and a materials goods receipt

●

Perform period end closing activities for production order




Unit 8 Lesson 1 Describing the Plan to Produce Process in SAP S/4HANA



Plan to Produce Business Process

Figure 182: Plan to Produce Business Process Overview

The following steps outline the plan-to-produce business process: 1. Perform planning 2. Determine requirements 3. Plan production 4. Produce material


383



5. Perform periodic processing Outstanding Simplifications in MRP Production Planning

Figure 183: Outstanding Simplifications in MRP Production Planning

The figure, Outstanding Simplifications in MRP Production Planning, shows the simplification items that are relevant for MRP and production planning. Manufacturing Execution Basic Subcontracting

Figure 184: Manufacturing Execution Basic Subcontracting

In SAP S/4HANA on-premise edition 1511, the 4.0 logic has been removed, while the 4.5 logic has been simplified. The SAP S/4HANA MRP uses default planning parameters if MRP-area-specific material master records do not exist. You only have to create an MRP area for every subcontractor. It is still possible to create MRP area or supplier-specific material master data if required.

384



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Describing the Plan to Produce Process in SAP S/4HANA

Manufacturing Execution Storage Location MRP

Figure 185: Manufacturing Execution Storage Location MRP

MRP areas cover the same business requirements. Materials with MRP-area-specific MRP type 'ND' (no MRP) can be used instead of materials with a storage location excluded from MRP. Materials with MRP area-specific MRP type 'VB' (reorder point planning) can be used instead of materials with separately planned storage locations. The storage location functionality is a subset of the MRP areas capabilities. Graphical Planning Table

Figure 186: Graphical Planning Table

The graphical planning table (also known as graphical planning board or Gantt chart) can be used for capacity load leveling and sequence planning.


385



The graphical planning table is still available in SAP S/4HANA, but not considered as the target architecture. Currently, there is no functional equivalent available within SAP S/ 4HANA, on-premise edition 1511. Graphical Planning Table as App

Figure 187: Graphical Planning Table as App

The figure, Graphical Planning Table as App, shows how a graphical planning table can appear as an app. Sales & Operations Planning SOP Replaced by IBP

Figure 188: Sales & Operations Planning SOP Replaced by IBP

Sales & Operations Planning (SOP) is a forecasting and planning tool for setting targets for sales and production based on historical, current, or estimated data. SOP is used for long-

386




term strategic planning, not short-term tactical planning. Resource requirements can be computed to determine work center load and utilization. SOP is often performed on aggregated levels such as product groups and work-center hierarchies. Sales & Operations Planning includes standard SOP and flexible planning. Standard SOP comes preconfigured with the system. Flexible planning offers options for customized configuration. Integrated Business Planning for Sales & Operations

Figure 189: Integrated Business Planning for Sales & Operations

Key Capabilities of Integrated Business Planning for Sales & Operations ●

Create the optimal business plan to drive revenue growth and increase market share

●

Effectively balance demand and supply , while attaining financial targets

●

Increase speed and agility of planning

●

Improve forecast accuracy

●

, and drive the most profitable responses

and on-time delivery

Ability to model multiple tiers of the supply chain network including: Customers, DCs, Plants, and Suppliers

●

Ability to model multiple level BOMs as a constraint

●

Capable of planning for distribution, production, and procurement

The Key capabilities of Integrated Business Planning for Sales & Operations are as follows: Future production analytics will be based on SAP HANA, CDS views aggregating transactional data dynamically, and powerful analytical UIs for multi-dimensional reporting. With this, it will be possible to replace the current LIS. You will be able to use classic LIS and the future production analytics in parallel for some time, if you do not switch off the update of the LIS tables. Once future production analytics supports all your analytics requirements, you can switch off the update of the LIS tables. Once you have switched off updating LIS tables, you will notice the following improvements:


387



●

●

There is an improved performance of many transactions (that means: fewer tables to update, fewer locking conflicts) Less memory is required

Sales & Operations Planning (SOP) will be replaced by Integrated Business Planning IBP. Integrated Business Planning supports all SOP features plus advanced statistical forecasting, multi-level supply planning, an optimizer, collaboration tools, an Excel-based UI, and Webbased UIs. PP SOP is intended as a bridge or interim solution, which can be used until IBP is available as part of SAP S/4HANA, on-premise edition 1511 and which allows you a stepwise system conversion from SAP ERP to SAP S/4HANA, on-premise edition 1511. Simplified Sourcing SAP S/4HANA

Figure 190: Simplified Sourcing SAP S/4HANA

The basic idea of this simplification is a reduced set possible sources of supply. SAP S/ 4HANA supports the following types of sources of supply: ●

Production versions

●

Delivery schedules

●

Purchasing contracts

●

Purchasing info records

Sources of supply have a common set of attributes like a temporal validity interval and a quantitative validity interval. Sourcing selects valid sources of supply with the following conditions: ●

Case 1: The source of supply is a production version and: -

388

The procurement type of the material is either 'E' (in-house production) or 'X‘ (both procurement types)




-

-

-

●

nor Locked for automatic

The planned material receipt's quantity is inside the quantity range of the production version The planned material receipt's delivery date is in the validity period of the production version

-

The procurement type is 'F' (external procurement)

-

The purchasing info record is flagged for

-

●

Locked for any usage

Case 2: The source of supply is a purchasing info record and:

-

●

The production version is neither sourcing

Relevant for automatic sourcing

The planned material receipt's quantity is inside the quantity range of the purchasing info record The planned material receipt's delivery date is in the validity period of the purchasing info record

Case 3: The source of supply is a delivery schedule and the procurement type is 'F' (external procurement) Case 4: The source of supply is a purchasing contract and the procurement type is 'F' (external procurement)




389



Unit 8 Lesson 2 Defining the Master Data in the Plan to Produce Process



Material Master Data Record

Figure 191: Material Master — Data Views

The material master data is subdivided into views. The basic data view displays data defined at the client level, and all other views are defined at plant level. A material master contains global data and plant-specific data. Global data is valid across all plants. An example of global data is data that is the same for a material in all production plants. Plant-specific data contains settings for the relevant plant, such as a specific production plant. General data, such as the measurements and weight of a material, is set globally, whereas settings for planning are predefined locally. This data may differ depending on the plant.

390



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Defining the Master Data in the Plan to Produce Process

Material Master — Settings for Supply Chain

Figure 192: Material Master — Settings for Supply Chain

The most important settings for material planning are contained in material requirements planning (MRP) views 1 to 4 of the material master. The MRP type specifies how a material should be planned for processing (MRP, consumptionbased planning, no planning). The lot-sizing procedure determines the lot size of the respective procurement proposals. You can use the procurement type to determine whether a material is to be produced inhouse or procured externally. In-house production times and planned-delivery times specify the time taken for in-house production or external procurement. A level of safety stock can be set. The strategy group controls how the independent requirements behave, while control of the Available-to-Promise (ATP) check takes place on the basis of the availability check group. You can use material production version in MRP4 to define manufacturing processes and, more specifically, to select a task list and bill of material (BOM) for each manufacturing process.


391



Bill of Material

Figure 193: Bill of Material

Bill of Material The Bill of Material (BOM) contains the assemblies, or components, which are to be included in the production of a material. BOMs are used in MRP, production, procurement, and for product costing. A BOM consists of a BOM header and BOM items. The base quantity in the BOM header specifies the amount of the finished product to which item quantities refer. BOMs are single-level. An item of a BOM can contain components. In this way, multi-level production is described using the single-level BOMs of the finished product, the assemblies, and, where required, using the BOMs of the assemblies. In addition to stock items required for the finished product, a BOM can contain documents and text items.

392




BOM Structure

Figure 194: BOM Structure

The settings in the BOM header apply to the entire BOM. BOM usage determines the business applications for which a BOM can be used. The status of the BOM controls whether the BOM is active for particular applications (for example, MRP). The components necessary for the production of the finished product are entered as items of the BOM. The item category specifies the type of item you are using. The various types of item categories are as follows: ●

Stock item The stock items are stored in the warehouse and used in production.

●

Non-stock item The system directly assigns non-stock items to a manufacturing order (not through the warehouse). Non-stock items are not kept in inventory, but procured specifically for the production order.

●

Variable-size item Variable-size items contain variable-size data (for example, the surface area of a steel sheet).

●

Document item Document items contain a supplementary document that describes production using a design and construction diagram.


393



Routings Routings

Figure 195: Routings

Routings contain the steps that are necessary for production and these steps are called operations. Routings include the sequence in which the operations occur, and the work centers at which the operations are to be executed. A routing can be defined using the routing group and group counter. Moreover, the routing contains reference to the material whose production it describes, and, in addition to the standard sequence, can contain parallel or alternative sequences. Alongside the standard values, the routing also contains the time elements that are relevant for scheduling operations. Each operation in the routing may contain its own base quantity, to which these time elements may refer.

394




Routing and Bill of Material

Figure 196: Routing and Bill of Material

A routing and bill of material (BOM) describe production. In this case, you can assign the BOM components to a specific operation. Procurement of the BOM components is then planned at the beginning of the particular operation. The component assignment is performed in the routing. BOM components that are not explicitly assigned are regarded as being assigned to the first operation. Along with the BOM components, you can also assign production resources and tools in the routing. Production resources and tools, such as a measuring instrument or support, are operating facilities that are not location-bound, but are necessary for production.

Production Versions Production Versions The figure, Production Versions, shows an example of a product that is manufactured using two sets of technologies and methods. This requires different routings and different BOMs.


395



Figure 197: Production Versions

Version 0001 produces brackets for large order lots on a numerically controlled (NC) punching machine. The bracket is punched whole from a metal sheet. Because it takes longer to set up an NC punching machine than the actual time it takes to complete the punching operation, version 0002 is used to produce small quantities of brackets with another manufacturing process. This process requires strips of metal. The appropriate alternative is selected using the production version in the material master. The production version determines the manufacturing process according to the routing and the specified BOM. You can store multiple production versions for different lot size intervals in the material master. The group counter values differentiate the individual routings.

396




Work Centers

Figure 198: Work Centers

In a plant, operations or activities, are carried out at a work center. Therefore, a work center specifies where production ultimately takes place. A work center is a specific location in the plant. For example, a work center may refer to a specific machine or department in a plant. Work Center Data The data of the work center is assigned according to thematic views. The work center stores the available capacity of that particular work center and the data needed to calculate the costing of work completed. The default values define the data that has to be transferred into the operation of the routing or used as a reference. By entering a standard value key, a resource is assigned standard values for operations in routings, rate routings, master recipes, and production or process orders to be executed at this resource. A standard value is a planned value used to carry out an operation, such as execution time. Standard values are used in costing, scheduling, and capacity requirements planning to calculate costs, execution times, and capacity requirements. You can enter default values for the operation to be executed at a resource. When you maintain the operations in the routing, rate routing, master recipe, and production or process order, the system copies and refers this information. By assigning a cost center to a resource, you link the resource to cost accounting, and can then carry out product and order costing. You can define the specific output of a resource by assigning activity types assigned to this cost center to the resource. Available capacities of resources are the basis for scheduling process orders, and are required for capacity-requirements planning and shop floor control. To calculate the execution of an operation during process-order scheduling, the available capacity of exactly one of several possible resource capacities is defined as the basis for scheduling. To calculate


397



costs, execution times, and capacity requirements of phases carried out at a resource, you need to enter a suitable formula key on the corresponding screens.

398




Unit 8 Exercise 37 Change a Material Master Record

Business Example The engineering department tried the new lock in one of your bicycles and decided to use this in the future. As the person responsible for planning, you need to extend the material master of your lock, to fulfill the requirements for materials planning. Therefore, you need to maintain the relevant views for material requirements planning. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise requires the Material Master, created in the exercise, Create and Extend a Vendor Master Record. You want to extend the material master record T-R9## for the use in materials planning. The material should be planned automatically by MRP in plant 1010. As the responsible person you need to create the necessary data. The material should be planned based upon the real requirements in the system. The responsible person for planning is 0##. 1. Extend the material master record

T-R9## for the use in materials planning.

2. Create the MRP1, MRP2 , and MRP3 view for Plant 1010 . 3. Enter the following data in the specified views: MRP1

The material should be planned by Forecast consumption, no planning time fence. The responsible person for planning is MRP Controller The lock should be reordered by a fixed quantity of 500 pc every time.

MRP2

The production storage location is 101C. The planned delivery time for this material is 2 days. The time buffers should be 0 days for all floats. A safety stock of 200 pc should be considered.

MRP3

The availability check should be based on daily requirements. A preplanning of the lock is not necessary.


0## .

399



Unit 8 Solution 37 Change a Material Master Record

Business Example The engineering department tried the new lock in one of your bicycles and decided to use this in the future. As the person responsible for planning, you need to extend the material master of your lock, to fulfill the requirements for materials planning. Therefore, you need to maintain the relevant views for material requirements planning. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise requires the Material Master, created in the exercise, Create and Extend a Vendor Master Record. You want to extend the material master record T-R9## for the use in materials planning. The material should be planned automatically by MRP in plant 1010. As the responsible person you need to create the necessary data. The material should be planned based upon the real requirements in the system. The responsible person for planning is 0##. 1. Extend the material master record a) On the Launchpad, choose the

T-R9## for the use in materials planning. Create Material tile.

b) On the Create material (initial screen)

, in the Material field, enter T-R9##.

c) Press Enter. 2. Create the MRP1, MRP2 , and MRP3 view for Plant 1010 . a) On the Select Views screen, select the following views: MRP 1 MRP 2 MRP 3 b) Choose Continue . c) In the Organizational Level dialog box, enter the following data: Field

Value

Plant

1010

Stor. Location

101C

d) Choose Continue . 3. Enter the following data in the specified views:

400




MRP1

The material should be planned by Forecast consumption, no planning time fence. The responsible person for planning is MRP Controller The lock should be reordered by a fixed quantity of 500 pc every time.

MRP2

The production storage location is 101C. The planned delivery time for this material is 2 days. The time buffers should be 0 days for all floats. A safety stock of 200 pc should be considered.

MRP3

The availability check should be based on daily requirements. A preplanning of the lock is not necessary.

0## .

a) On the MRP 1 data view, enter the following information: Field

Value

MRP Type

PD

MRP Controller

0##

Lot size

FX

Fixed lot size

500

b) On the MRP 2 data view, maintain the following data: Field

Value

Production storage Location

101C

Planned del. Time

2

SchedMargin Key

000

Safety stock

200

c) On the MRP 3 tab, in the Availability check field, enter 01. d) Press Enter and save the Master Record.


401



402




Unit 8 Exercise 38 Change Bill of Material

Business Example After the material master has been extended for materials planning, the engineering department needs to change the BOM of the bicycle. The new material needs to be included in the structure of the bicycle, to use the lock in the future in production of the bicycles. Therefore, you change the existing BOM for the existing bicycle (finished good) in plant 1010. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise requires the Material Master, created in the exercise, Create and Extend a Vendor Master Record. 1. Change the existing BOM for the bicycle T-F1## . Include the new material, T-R9## in the BOM of plant 1010 with a quantity of 1 pc. Included the material as a stock material.


403



Unit 8 Solution 38 Change Bill of Material

Business Example After the material master has been extended for materials planning, the engineering department needs to change the BOM of the bicycle. The new material needs to be included in the structure of the bicycle, to use the lock in the future in production of the bicycles. Therefore, you change the existing BOM for the existing bicycle (finished good) in plant 1010. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise requires the Material Master, created in the exercise, Create and Extend a Vendor Master Record. 1. Change the existing BOM for the bicycle T-F1## . Include the new material, T-R9## in the BOM of plant 1010 with a quantity of 1 pc. Included the material as a stock material. a) On the Launchpad, choose the

Change Bill of Material tile.

b) On the Change Material BOM: Initial screen

, enter the following data:

Field

Value

Material

T-F1##

Plant

1010

BOM Usage

1

c) Press Enter. d) On the Change Material BOM: General item overview , to include the material the structure, enter the following data in the next available line for the item: Field

Value

ItemCat

L

Component

T-R9##

T-R9## in

e) Press Enter. f) In the Detail data of the item, enter the quantity of

1 pc.

g) Save your changes.

404




Unit 8 Exercise 39 Change a Work Center

Business Example You have hired a new employee for the assembly of the bicycle. This employee, who you hired in the Unit, Human Capital Management, needs to be included in the existing work center A## for the assembly of the bicycle.

T-

Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise requires the Organizational Unit, PRD-##, created in the exercise, Create an Organizational Unit and a Position. 1. Change the existing work center Organizational Unit.


T-A## in plant 1010 to include the PRD-##

405



Unit 8 Solution 39 Change a Work Center

Business Example You have hired a new employee for the assembly of the bicycle. This employee, who you hired in the Unit, Human Capital Management, needs to be included in the existing work center A## for the assembly of the bicycle.

T-

Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise requires the Organizational Unit, PRD-##, created in the exercise, Create an Organizational Unit and a Position. 1. Change the existing work center Organizational Unit. a) On the Launchpad, choose the

T-A## in plant 1010 to include the PRD-## Change Bill of Material tile.

b) On the Change Work Center: Initial screen


Field

Value

Plant

1010

Work Center

T-A##

c) Press Enter. d) On the Change Work Center: Basic Data

tab, choose the

HRMS icon.

e) On the Change Work Center: Assignment to HR Organizational entity Organizational Unit entry.

screen, select the

f) Search for the organizational unit that you created for production, or enter the Organizational Unit, PRD-## , directly. g) Press Enter. h) Go back to the maintenance of the work center. i) Save your changes.

406




Unit 8 Exercise 40 Change the Routing for a Finished Product

Business Example After you have changed the work center to include the new employee, you need to adjust the routing as well. You now need an extra 5 minutes labor time more for the assembly of the bicycle because the lock must be added. In addition, the new material that you included in the BOM should be used in the first operation as well as all the others. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Change the routing and extend the first operation by 5 min of labor time for the bicycle F1## . 2. Assign all of the material to the beginning of the first operation, using (F7).


T-

CompAllocation

407



Unit 8 Solution 40 Change the Routing for a Finished Product

Business Example After you have changed the work center to include the new employee, you need to adjust the routing as well. You now need an extra 5 minutes labor time more for the assembly of the bicycle because the lock must be added. In addition, the new material that you included in the BOM should be used in the first operation as well as all the others. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Change the routing and extend the first operation by 5 min of labor time for the bicycle F1## . a) On the Launchpad, choose the

T-

Change Routing tile.

b) On the Change Routing: Initial screen


Field

Value

Material

T-F1##

Plant

1010

c) On the Change Routing: Operation Overview , to add 5 min for labor time to the existing 10 min in the first operation, in the Labor field, enter 15. 2. Assign all of the material to the beginning of the first operation, using (F7).

CompAllocation

a) On the right side of the menu bar, choose the icon with three circles. b) Choose CompAllocation (F7). c) Choose all the Items and, again on the right side of the menu bar, choose the ellipsis button. d) In the dialog box, enter

10 (operation).

e) Press Enter. f) Save your changes.

408







409



Unit 8 Lesson 3 Creating a Product Cost Estimate



CO-PC Components CO-PC consists of all aspects of planning the cost of production or services, as well as tracking and analyzing the actual costs. CO-PC CO-PC consists of the following components: ●

Product Cost Planning (PCP) Creates standard cost estimates

●

Cost Object Controlling (COC) Collects actual costs incurred (by using cost objects, such as production orders) during the production of a product or a service

●

Actual costing and Material Ledger (ML) Provides the actual cost of each material at the end of the period

410



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Creating a Product Cost Estimate

CO-PC Overview

Figure 199: CO-PC Overview

PCP estimates the costs of produced goods and services. If a quantity structure (bill of material (BOM) and routing) is available, the system can automatically create a cost estimate based on this data. If no quantity structure is available in the SAP ERP, you can either enter the cost of items manually with the unit costing tool or transfer them automatically from a non-SAP ERP by using batch input. In COC, the actual costs incurred during the production of a product or service are collected on cost objects, such as production orders. Several types of cost objects are available, depending on your requirements. These cost objects include sales orders, production orders, process orders, and product cost collectors. COC focuses on preliminary costing, which calculates planned costs, simultaneous costing which accumulates actual costs, and lastly final costing which adds indirect costs, such as overhead to be allocated to the cost objects. This information allows you to compare planned and actual costs for any phase of the production process. Period-end closing calculates the value of goods in production (work in process) and variances between the planned costs and the actual costs, and settles them to other components such as profitability analysis and Financial Accounting (FI). Actual costing with the material ledger provides actual costs for each material at the end of the period. Materials and their movements are valuated with a standard price during the period. You can collect any variances with respect to this standard in the material ledger when you receive invoices or settle orders. During period-end closing, these variances are used to calculate an actual price for the material in the closed period.


411



Product Cost Planning

Figure 200: PCP Overview

When you create a cost estimate with a quantity structure, you must enter the costing variant, material, plant, and lot size. The dates proposed from the costing variant specify the following details: ●

The period of validity of the cost estimate (costing date from or to)

●

The selection date for the BOM and routing (quantity structure dates)

●

The pricing data for the material components and activities (valuation date)

Itemizations, Cost Element Itemizations, and Cost Component Splits The costing results can be saved and displayed as itemizations, cost-element itemizations, or cost-component splits. The itemization shows detailed information about the origin of the costs, such as the quantities and prices of the materials and internal activities used. The cost-element itemization groups the individual costing items into cost elements. Cost elements are determined in the following ways: ●

Through account determination for materials

●

Through activity type master record, or through activity type planning for activities

●

Through the process master record for processes

The cost-component split groups the cost elements into cost components. When a multilevel structure is valued, the cost component split rolls up so that the original identity of the costs is retained for analysis.

412




Price Update

Figure 201: Price Update

The standard price for the material in the material master record is updated when a standard cost estimate is marked and released. This results in the revaluation of inventory. Prerequisites for marking or releasing a standard cost estimate include: ● ●

The standard cost estimate must be free of errors (status KA, valued without errors). The marking and release of a standard cost estimate must be allowed. The company code and period in which the standard cost estimate can be marked with a set costing variant are entered in the authorization for marking. The employee responsible for setting up authorization does so once per period. If you mark a standard cost estimate, the results are updated in the material master records as the future standard price.

When you release the standard cost estimate, the future prices are updated as the current standard price. You can release a standard cost estimate only once per period, unless you delete the previously released standard cost estimate (by using a special program) from the database. Before you release the standard cost estimate for a product, you must check the standard cost estimate to ensure that it is correct. Specialized reports in the information system allow you to do this.


413



Integration – Standard Price and Standard Cost Estimate

Figure 202: Integration – Standard Price and Standard Cost Estimate

Price control plays a crucial role in material valuation. When the price control indicator field is set to S, the inventory is valuated at the standard price. In addition, goods movement is valuated directly in the system, using a price selected in accordance with the price control indicator. If the standard price was updated by a standard cost estimate, it can be used in COC. The system can use the itemization of standard cost estimates to determine the target costs for manufacturing orders. You can analyze the difference between the target cost and actual cost at the level of variance categories, such as quantity and price variances. The saved itemization provides the basis for variance calculation. In profitability analysis, you can use standard cost estimates (or other material cost estimates) to compare the revenues of the billed quantity with the cost component split of the product. A standard price is also required in the material ledger to determine the actual price.

414




Unit 8 Exercise 41 Create a Standard Cost Estimate

Business Example Now that you have changed the BOM and the routing you need to calculate the cost for your finished product T-F1## again. You run a standard cost estimate to calculate the costs of good manufactured and the costs of goods sold. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. To perform this task. you will log on to the back-end system and use transactional processes. Hint: The marking allowance is done by the instructor. 1. Choose the Marking Allowance button. 2. Choose Company Code

1010 .

3. In the following dialog box, enter Costing Variant

PPC1 and choose

Save .

1. Run a standard cost estimate for your finished product and save it. Perform this task using a transaction. Use the following data: Field

Value

Material

T-F1##

Plant

1010

Costing Variant

PPC1

Costing Lot Size

100

Costing Date from

Today


415



Unit 8 Solution 41 Create a Standard Cost Estimate

Business Example Now that you have changed the BOM and the routing you need to calculate the cost for your finished product T-F1## again. You run a standard cost estimate to calculate the costs of good manufactured and the costs of goods sold. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. To perform this task. you will log on to the back-end system and use transactional processes. Hint: The marking allowance is done by the instructor. 1. Choose the Marking Allowance button. 2. Choose Company Code

1010 .

3. In the following dialog box, enter Costing Variant

PPC1 and choose

Save .

1. Run a standard cost estimate for your finished product and save it. Perform this task using a transaction. Use the following data: Field

Value

Material

T-F1##

Plant

1010

Costing Variant

PPC1

Costing Lot Size

100

Costing Date from

Today

a) On the SAP Easy Access Screen, choose Accounting → Controlling → Product Cost Controlling → Product Cost Planning → Material Costing → Cost Estimate with Quantity Structure → Create . Alternatively, use transaction code CK11N. b) On the Initial screen of Create Material Cost Estimate with Quantity Structure following values provided in the table for the Material and Plant fields.

416

, enter the




c) On the Costing tab, enter the values provided in the table for the Costing Lot Size fields. d) Choose the Dates and, choose the field, enter today’s date.

Costing Variant and

Default value icon and, in the Costing Date from

e) Press Enter. f) Check whether the lock has been included in the calculation. g) Save the data.


417



418




Unit 8 Exercise 42 Update Material Valuation

Business Example You created a new standard cost estimate. The new calculated costs need to be transferred to the material master record. You will update the material price in the accounting view of the material master record. You will use a transaction for that. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you 1. Select the material for update. Field

Value

Posting Period / Year

Actual month / Actual Year

Company Code

1010

Plant

1010

Material

T-F1##

Test Run

Delimit

2. Open a second session and review the material master. What is the future price for the material?

3. Update the material valuation price in the material master of your finished product TTF1## and release the cost estimate. Use the following data: Field

Value



Company Code

1010

Plant

1010

Material

T-F1##

Test Run

Delimit


419



Has the standard price been updated?

420




Unit 8 Solution 42 Update Material Valuation

Business Example You created a new standard cost estimate. The new calculated costs need to be transferred to the material master record. You will update the material price in the accounting view of the material master record. You will use a transaction for that. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you 1. Select the material for update. Field

Value



Company Code

1010

Plant

1010

Material

T-F1##

Test Run

Delimit

a) On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Accounting → Controlling → Product Cost Controlling → Product Cost Planning → Material Costing → Price Update → . Alternatively, use transaction code CK11N. b) In the Initial screen of table.

Price Update: Mark Standard Price

enter the data provided in the

c) Choose Execute . 2. Open a second session and review the material master. a) Use transaction

MM03 to go directly to the material master record of T-F1##.

b) In the initial screen of

Display material master

, enter your material number.

c) Press Enter. d) Choose the Costing 2 tab. e) Enter the Plant


1010 and press Enter again.

421



What is the future price for the material? The future price is 63,.28 € 3. Update the material valuation price in the material master of your finished product TTF1## and release the cost estimate. Use the following data: Field

Value



Company Code

1010

Plant

1010

Material

T-F1##

Test Run

Delimit

a) Go to the Price Update session. b) In the transaction

Price Update transaction, choose the

c) In the Initial screen of the table.

Price Update: Release Standard Price

Release icon. enter the data provided in

d) Choose Execute . e) Go to the Display Material Master

session.

f) Exit the current material master and start the transaction again. g) In the initial screen of

Display material master

, enter your material number.

h) Press Enter. i) Choose the Costing 2 tab. j) Enter the Plant

1010 and press Enter again.

k) Leave both transactions. Has the standard price been updated? Yes the future price has been transferred to the current price and as well to the standard price.

422







423



Unit 8 Lesson 4 Planning Product Demand - Integrated Planning


424

Plan product demand




Unit 8 Exercise 43 Manage Planned Independent Requirements

Business Example Now that you changed the structure of your bicycle, you need to rebuild the existing production plan. Therefore, you want to gain an overview about the current production situation for the material T-F1## . Afterwards, you will rearrange the existing production plan for material T-F1##. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise requires the Vendor Master Record.

Material Master , created in the exercise, Create and Extend a

The PID created in this exercise is required for one or more subsequent exercises in this course. 1. Check the current situation for the bicycle T-F1##. Note: When using the Monitor Material Coverage for the first time, a dialog box appears, where you need to enter your MRP Controller. Choose the MRP Controller 0## in plant 1010.

How much of the material is available in Stock?

How much of the material is already planned?

2. Because there are no requirements in the system, create a production plan for the next 10 weeks. Use the following quantities for the next 10 weeks starting from the following week: W+1

W+2

W+3

W+4

W+5

W+6

W+7

W+8

W+9

W+10

25

25

25

25

25

25

25

25

25

25

3. Check the situation again.


425



Write down the requirement dates and the quantities for the first four planned independent requirements: Requirement

MRP element

Date

Quantity

1 2 3 4

What kind of MRP elements have been created for the Planned independent requirements?

What is the current situation for the material

426

T-F1## ?




Unit 8 Solution 43 Manage Planned Independent Requirements

Business Example Now that you changed the structure of your bicycle, you need to rebuild the existing production plan. Therefore, you want to gain an overview about the current production situation for the material T-F1## . Afterwards, you will rearrange the existing production plan for material T-F1##. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise requires the Vendor Master Record.

Material Master , created in the exercise, Create and Extend a

The PID created in this exercise is required for one or more subsequent exercises in this course. 1. Check the current situation for the bicycle T-F1##. Note: When using the Monitor Material Coverage for the first time, a dialog box appears, where you need to enter your MRP Controller. Choose the MRP Controller 0## in plant 1010. a) On the Launchpad, choose the

Monitor Material Coverage

b) In the dialog box, enter the MRP Controller c) Click the material

tile.

0# in plant 1010 .

Stock Availability and choose

Check Material Coverage

.

How much of the material is available in Stock?

How much of the material is already planned?

2. Because there are no requirements in the system, create a production plan for the next 10 weeks. Use the following quantities for the next 10 weeks starting from the following week: W+1


W+2

W+3

W+4

W+5

W+6

W+7

W+8

W+9

W+10

427



25

25

25

25


25

25

25

25

25

25

Manage PIR tile.

b) On the Manage PIR Material list , select the material

T-F1## and click the line.

c) In the Draft PIR column, enter the values provided in the table. d) Choose the Release PIR button e) Go back to the Manage PIR screen. 3. Check the situation again. Write down the requirement dates and the quantities for the first four planned independent requirements: Requirement

MRP element

Date

Quantity

1 2 3 4 a) On the Launchpad, choose the


tile.

The Stock Availability should be in red. b) Click the Stock Availability foe material R-F1##. and choose

Check Material Coverage

.

c) Write down the requirement dates and the quantities for the first 4 planned independent requirements in the spaces provided in the table. d) Go back to the Launchpad. What kind of MRP elements have been created for the Planned independent requirements?

What is the current situation for the material

428

T-F1## ?



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Planning Product Demand - Integrated Planning


Plan product demand


429



Unit 8 Lesson 5 Defining the MRP Process



The MRP Process

Figure 203: Full Blown Scope — Scope Reduction no Longer Necessary

SAP S/4HANA, on-premise edition 1511 no longer supports net change planning in the planning horizon (processing key NETPL). MRP always determines material shortages for all known material requirements. In other words, MRP can no longer cover only the material shortages inside a limited planning horizon.

430



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Defining the MRP Process

MRP Cockpit

Figure 204: MRP Cockpit — Entry Page

Figure 205: Material Shortages


431



Figure 206: Stock Requirement List with Solution Proposals

Figure 207: Uncovered Sales Order with Solution Proposals

432




Optimized MRP Run

Figure 208: Optimized MRP Run — First Optimization Step

In the first optimization step of the MRP run, the read MRP data already exists. Comparing the classic implementation and the optimized SAP HANA-based implantation you can easily see that read/write activities are optimized by taking advantage of parallelization. New and Classic Mode Working Together

Figure 209: New and Classic Mode Working Together

The MRP run with the


MRP Dispatcher covers the following:

433



●

●

Automatic determination and selection of planning mode per material, dependent on functional requirements of the material regarding planning, that can be overruled manually. The functionality of the new mode will be materials can be planned in the new mode.

enhanced continuously

●

Only very special functionality will remain in the classic mode.

●

Existing customer enhancements

– with that more

will also be supported in the classic mode.

The result is that the implementation of this planning run will not lead to it can be used immediately in a compatible way.

loss of functionality ,

Advantages of MRP on SAP S/4HANA ●

●

●

If a material is transferred from one plant to another, the stock-transfer requirement is not known in the supplying plant until after the material has been planned in the receiving plant. MRP Live determines the sequence in which materials have to be planned across several plants. MRP Live is a prerequisite for the future production planning and detailed scheduling PP/DS solution in SAP S/4HANA. Classic MRP is still available as an interim solution, which at the moment has to be used in the following cases: -

To create capacity requirements with MRP (in a future release, MRP Live will also be able to create capacity requirements).

Net Requirements Calculation

Figure 210: Net Requirements Calculation

In MRP, a net requirements calculation is executed in the planning run to determine whether a material shortage exists for a certain material. In addition, stock and fixed receipts that currently exist (for example, purchase orders, production orders, fixed purchase requisitions, and planned orders) are compared with the safety stock and requirements. The result of this comparison is the quantity available for planning.

434




If the quantity available for planning is lower than zero, a material shortage exists. MRP reacts to material shortages by creating new procurement proposals (purchase requisitions and planned orders). The suggested procurement quantity results from the lot-sizing procedure that is set in the material master.


435



436




Unit 8 Exercise 44 Display the Material Master Record

Business Example You want to gain an overview what kind of information is stored in a material master record. You will check the material master for the bicycle and see how a material master data record is structured. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. To Gain a first overview about the structure of a material master record, check the material master for the bicycle, T-F1## , to be produced. Check the Basic Data, the Sales Data, the Work Scheduling data and the Accounting data. Use the following information: Field

Value

Material number

T-F1##

Plant

1010

Sales Organization

1010


10

2. Review whether the planning strategy is maintained correctly in the finished product by checking the material master for the bicycle T-F1## . Look at the MRP3 data, where you find the information from the perspective of preplanning. Check whether the planning with final assembly is maintained and note the Consumption mode , as well as the consumption periods. In the Forecast requirements section, which values are maintained for the the Consumption Mode and the consumption periods? Write down the values: Field

Strategy Group ,

Value

Strategy Group Consumption Mode Bwd. Consumption per. Fwd. Consumption per.


437



What is the impact of these settings for the finished product? Write down an explanation.

438




Unit 8 Solution 44 Display the Material Master Record

Business Example You want to gain an overview what kind of information is stored in a material master record. You will check the material master for the bicycle and see how a material master data record is structured. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. To Gain a first overview about the structure of a material master record, check the material master for the bicycle, T-F1## , to be produced. Check the Basic Data, the Sales Data, the Work Scheduling data and the Accounting data. Use the following information: Field

Value

Material number

T-F1##

Plant

1010

Sales Organization

1010


10

a) On the Launchpad, choose the b) In the Initial screen of

Display Material tile.

Display Material , in the Material field, enter T-F1##.

c) Press Enter. d) In the dialog box, select the following views: Basic Data, Sales Data 1 and 2, Work Scheduling, and Accounting Data 1 2. Review whether the planning strategy is maintained correctly in the finished product by checking the material master for the bicycle T-F1## . Look at the MRP3 data, where you find the information from the perspective of preplanning. Check whether the planning with final assembly is maintained and note the Consumption mode , as well as the consumption periods. a) To select the views relevant for the preplanning of the material, in the dialog box, select the MRP 3 view, and press Enter. b) In the Organizational Levels

Select View

dialog box, in the Plant field, enter your plant

1010.

c) Press Enter.


439



d) Look at the Forecast requirements section, and write down the values that are maintained for the Strategy Group , the Consumption Mode , and the consumption periods. In the Forecast requirements section, which values are maintained for the the Consumption Mode and the consumption periods? Write down the values: Field

Strategy Group ,

Value

Strategy Group Consumption Mode Bwd. Consumption per. Fwd. Consumption per.

What is the impact of these settings for the finished product? Write down an explanation.

440







441



Unit 8 Lesson 6 Processing MRP


Process MRP

Processing MRP

Figure 211: Material Requirements Planning — Key Features and Benefits

SAP S/4HANA features MRP Live, an MRP run optimized for SAP HANA. MRP Live reads material receipts and requirements, calculates shortages, and creates planned orders and purchase requisitions all in one database procedure. This minimizes the volume of data that has to be copied from the database server to the application server and back, which considerably improves performance. MRP Live has some additional advantages including the following, for example: ●

●

442

The definition of the planning scope is more flexible. MRP Live allows you to plan a set of materials with all components, materials for which a certain production planner is responsible, or one material across all plants. If a material is transferred from one plant to another then the stock-transfer requirement is not known in the supplying plant until after the material has been planned in the receiving plant. MRP Live determines the sequence in which materials have to be planned across several plants.



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Processing MRP

MRP Live is a prerequisite for the future production planning and detailed scheduling PP/DS solution in SAP S/4HANA. Main Function of MRP

Figure 212: Main Function of MRP

The main function of material requirements planning is to guarantee material availability , that is, it is used to procure or produce the requirement quantities on time both for internal purposes and for sales and distribution. This process involves the monitoring of stocks and, in particular, the automatic creation of procurement proposals for purchasing and production.

Figure 213: MRP in In-House Production and External Procurement

Material requirements planning takes current and future sales as its reference point. The planned requirement quantities trigger the MRP calculation. In MRP, the requirements


443



elements include sales orders, planned independent requirements, material reservations, the dependent requirements created by exploding the BOM, and so on. If the MRP run determines shortage quantities, the system creates procurement proposals: Purchase requisitions and planned orders are internal planning elements that can be changed, rescheduled, or deleted at almost any time. With in-house production, the system creates planned orders for planning the production quantities. When planning is complete, planned orders can be converted into production orders. With external procurement, the system either uses a planned order or uses a purchase requisition directly to plan the external procurement quantity. When planning is complete, the planned order is converted into a purchase requisition, which is subsequently converted to a purchase order. Using the creation indicator for purchase requisitions on the initial screen of the planning run, you control whether the system immediately creates purchase requisitions directly, or first creates planned orders. If a scheduling agreement exists for a material and is relevant for MRP in the source list, you can also create schedule lines directly using MRP. You control this using the creation indicator for scheduling agreement delivery schedule lines on the initial screen of the planning run. Improved MRP and PP with Suite on SAP HANA

Figure 214: Improved MRP and PP with Suite on SAP HANA

With SAP S/4HANA, the MRP live concept is enabled to get rid of the danger of planning with obsolete data.

444




Figure 215: What is MRP?

Material Requirements Planning (or MRP) is a supply chain planning process used with other planning process such as, Demand Planning, Supply Planning, Sales & Operations Planning, Production Planning, and Transportation Planning, all of which are used to manage the supply chain activity of the enterprise. MRP is the process of matching enterprise wide supply with actual and forecasted customer demand to identify potential material shortage situations and to recommend potential solutions. Examples of Supply includes material in inventory, planned stock transfers, purchase orders, and good receipts from manufacturing. Examples of Demand includes customer sales orders and forecasts of future customer demand. Supply and demand requirements are location specific and MRP matching is performed to ensure that the materials are in the right location at the right time to fulfill customer demand.


445



MRP Today – Batch-Driven Process and Multiple ERP Transactions

Figure 216: MRP Today – Batch-Driven Process and Multiple ERP Transactions

The MRP Planning Run is a resource intensive batch process. It involves thousands of materials in hundreds of physical locations. It performs hundreds of thousands of database reads from across multiple database tables in ERP. The process typically takes hours to execute, so it is typically run once a week, once every couple of days or overnight. On completion, it creates a “snapshot” of the existing material situation across all the locations in an enterprise. MRP Live

Figure 217: MRP Live

446




MRP Live refers to the migration of the traditional MRP Planning capability to run on SAP HANA. MRP on SAP HANA provides the ability to run MRP faster and, therefore, more frequently. This means more real-time visibility to a broader set of supply and demand data from across the enterprise, including the combination of sales order, inventory, and procurement information into a single view. The solution immediately calculates and highlights the material issues that need to be addressed across thousands of material stock situations. The new process is faster, is streamlined, and is less manually intensive. All of these factors allow the Material Planner to identify issues more quickly and find better solutions to material shortage issues. The migration of MRP to SAP HANA is work in process that started in 2013 and has continued through 2014. Smart Business for MRP

Figure 218: Smart Business for MRP

Traditionally, to identify solutions to materials shortages, a Material Planner had to investigate options across multiple ERP transactions, which was time consuming. With Smart Business for MRP, the ability to identify and make decisions to solve material shortage issues is greatly improved, as follows: ● ●

●

●

More frequent MRP runs provides more timely and accurate material stock information It provides a single, real-time view of material shortage information across sites without having to navigate across multiple ERP transactions There are new views of material shortages from a sales order, inventory, and procurement point of view, instead of just a material view There is new ability to simulate recommended solution viability and effectiveness in realtime across sites and thousands of material situations

As a result of these changes, the Material Planner is much more effective.


447



Improved Solution Identification and Resolution

Figure 219: Improved Solution Identification and Resolution

Smart Business for MRP is a new capability being developed to replace existing MRP UI and transactions in ERP, with the following features: ●

●

● ●

For each material, it provides real-time visibility to the stock situation and indicates when a stock level will become insufficient or critical. It provides personalization capability to allow the Material Planner to filter on certain types of materials and get different and customized views of shortages. It performs re-calculation of thousands of material situations in real-time. It not only suggests potential solutions but, using SAP HANA, also allows the ability to evaluate the potential viability and results of a solution, before it is applied.

SAP Fiori Apps for Production Planning

Figure 220: SAP Fiori Apps for Production Planning

In Suite on SAP HANA, there is also improved UI and processes for traditional Production Planning, Quality Management, and Enterprise Asset Maintenance.

448




In Production Planning, planned orders and purchase requisitions inside the replenishment lead time have to be “released” to the shop floor and the purchasing department respectively. On completion of production, the amount of product produced and raw materials and resources consumed need to “confirmed”. In Suite on SAP HANA, new User interface exists to convert planned orders into production orders, to convert purchase requisitions into purchase orders, to release production orders and to confirm production upon completion. Deployment Options and Architecture

Figure 221: Deployment Options and Architecture

Technically, there are two database deployment options: an integrated one with full deployment as part of Suite on SAP HANA (which is a prerequisite for MRP on SAP HANA), and a side-by side scenario of the SAP HANA database with a traditional database. The latter cannot be used for MRP on SAP HANA.


449



APO on SAP HANA

Figure 222: APO on SAP HANA

MRP is the ERP side of Planning. APO has been migrated to SAP HANA and works side by side with ERP. Note that the APO role in the cloud still has to be determined.

Figure 223: Running Materials Requirements Planning

You can execute the planning run at the following levels: ●

Total planning for a plant You can execute a total planning run for several plants and MRP areas. Total planning for a plant encompasses all MRP-relevant materials for this plant, and includes the BOM explosion for materials with BOMs.

450




●

Planning for an individual material You can execute a single-item planning run for a specific material (single-level) or for all BOM levels (multilevel). Interactive planning of a material is also possible.

From the MRP menu, you can execute total planning online or as a background job. To execute the total planning run as a background job, select a report variant to restrict it to the relevant plant and schedule the job. You can use a user exit to restrict the total planning run to materials that fulfill certain freely definable criteria. For example, you can select all materials for which a particular MRP controller is responsible. MRP Control Parameters

Figure 224: MRP Control Parameters

The following control parameters for MRP are required when you start a planning run: ●

Processing Key You can define the planning type as regenerative planning or net change planning within the total horizon or within the planning horizon only.

●

Create Purchase Requisition and Scheduling Agreement Schedule Lines You can determine whether or in which period purchase requisitions and schedule lines are required as a result of the planning run. These indicators are only relevant for externally procured materials.

●

Create MRP List You determine whether the planning run is to create MRP lists. It is possible to have the system create MRP lists only when certain exception messages are issued. You define the exception messages that are to trigger the generation of an MRP list in the Define and Group Exception Messages activity in Customizing.

●

Planning mode


451



You determine whether the existing planning data is adjusted and the BOMs and task lists re-exploded or whether planning is started again from scratch. You can set the creation checkbox in the MRP group for purchase requisitions, scheduling agreement, schedule lines, and MRP lists. The materials assigned to this MRP group are then planned accordingly in the total planning run. Scope of Planning Run

Figure 225: Scope of Planning Run

With regenerative planning, the system plans all materials in a plant. This is useful for the first planning run and during day-to-day plant operations when data consistency cannot be guaranteed due to technical errors. Due to certain circumstances, such as goods issues, new sales orders, and changes to the BOM structure, it is recommended (particularly with a large number of materials) to execute MRP for only those materials to which MRP-relevant changes have been made. Because of its short runtime, net change planning, which is used to plan only these materials, allows you to execute the planning run at short intervals, yielding the most current planning result. With net change planning in the planning horizon, the system only takes into account changes that are within the planning horizon, and only plans materials to which MRP-relevant changes have been made within the planning horizon. In addition, the materials are only planned within this horizon. You can set the planning horizon as a plant or MRP group parameter in MRP Customizing. The planning horizon must at least include the time period in which sales orders are received, the delivery times, and total lead times for the material. You specify the type of planning to be used in the Processing Key field on the initial screen. With single-item planning, you can decide between net change planning (NETCH) and net change planning in the planning horizon (NETPL). With total planning, in addition to NETCH and NETPL, you can select the NEUPL key to determine that all materials in the planning file are to be planned.

452




Stock Requirements List

Figure 226: Stock Requirements List

The current stock requirements list is a dynamic list that shows the current levels of stock, requirements, and receipts. Changes are visible immediately when the current stock/ requirements list is called, or when the elements in the list display are read from the database using the Refresh function. The MRP list displays the result of the last planning run and is, therefore, static. Changes made after the planning run do not display. You can determine whether an MRP list is to be created during the planning run. The current stock/requirements and MRP list have the same basic structure. Additional similarities between the current stock/requirements and MRP list are as follows: ● ●

●

The worklist of the MRP controller is in the form of a tree, on the left (optional). The header with the material number is above the list. More information displays above the header details. The list contains the individual MRP elements and the corresponding available quantities.


453



Functions of the Stock Requirements List

Figure 227: Functions of the Stock Requirements List

454




Unit 8 Exercise 45 Process an MRP Run

Business Example After the changes to the planned independent requirements you need to schedule a MRP run. The MRP run should be done upon the finished product and include all components including your new lock. The MRP run should be a regenerative run and should be scheduled immediately. After the MRP run you check the log and see whether the requirements are fulfilled and the problems solved. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Run an MRP run. Schedule it to run immediately as a regenerative run. include all BOM components during the run. The MRP run should NOT be repeated daily. Only plan your material for the finished product T-F1## in plant 1010. Name the Job with your user TS410-##. Use the following information: Field

Value

Job Template

Material Requirements Planning (Default)

Job Description

TS410-##

Plant

1010

Material

T-F1##

BOM Components

Selected

Regenerative run

Selected

Planning Mode

3

Start immediately

Selected

2. Check the log of the MRP run. Use the

Display MRP Key Figures app.

How many materials have been planned?


455



Unit 8 Solution 45 Process an MRP Run

Business Example After the changes to the planned independent requirements you need to schedule a MRP run. The MRP run should be done upon the finished product and include all components including your new lock. The MRP run should be a regenerative run and should be scheduled immediately. After the MRP run you check the log and see whether the requirements are fulfilled and the problems solved. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Run an MRP run. Schedule it to run immediately as a regenerative run. include all BOM components during the run. The MRP run should NOT be repeated daily. Only plan your material for the finished product T-F1## in plant 1010. Name the Job with your user TS410-##. Use the following information: Field

Value

Job Template

Material Requirements Planning (Default)

Job Description

TS410-##

Plant

1010

Material

T-F1##

BOM Components

Selected

Regenerative run

Selected

Planning Mode

3

Start immediately

Selected


Schedule MRP Runs

b) In the overview of the scheduled jobs, choose the

tile. New icon.

c) On the Initial Screen New Job Material Requirements planning: Initial screen, in the Details section, enter the values provided in the table for Job Template and Job Description . d) In the Planning Scope section, enter the values provided in the table for Material .

456

Job

Plant and




e) In the Also section, select the

BOM Components checkbox.

f) In the Control Parameters section, select the Planning Mode field, enter 3. g) In the Scheduling Information

Regenerative run

section, select the

h) Choose Edit Scheduling and deselect the

checkbox, and, in the

Start immediately

checkbox.

Recurrence checkbox.

i) Choose OK. You are back in the definition of the new job. j) Choose Schedule . You are back in the

Job Overview .

k) In the Job Overview , press Go until the status changes to

Finished .

l) Choose Log Information . m) Leave the application and go back to the Launchpad. 2. Check the log of the MRP run. Use the a) On the Launchpad, choose the

Display MRP Key Figures app. Display MRP Figures tile.

b) In Display MRP Key Figures , select your MRP run and display the detailed information. c) Choose your entry. d) Note how many materials have been planned. e) Go back to the Launchpad. How many materials have been planned?


457



458




Unit 8 Exercise 46 Monitor Material Coverage

Business Example After the MRP run, you want to check the result and the procurement proposals. You need to check whether planned orders have been created for your finished product and whether purchase requisitions have been created for the lock. For the finished product (T-F1##) you want to use the Monitor Material Coverage lock (T-R9##) you want to use the “old” stock / requirement list.

app. For the

Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Check whether all of the requirements for the finished product been fulfilled. Write down the first four planned orders that have been created to fulfill the planned independent requirements Date

MRP Element

Quantity

Order 1 Order 2 Order 3 Order 4 2. Check the proposals for the lock (Material T-R9##) using the “old” stock requirement list. Use the following information, Field

Value

Material

T-R9##

Plant

1010

What has happened to your lock?

3. Are there purchase requisitions to fulfill the requirements for the lock? Write down the MRP element data for the purchase requisitions.


459



Date

MRP Element

Quantity

Purchase Requisition 1 Purchase Requisition 2 Purchase Requisition 3 4. Go back to the Launchpad.

460




Unit 8 Solution 46 Monitor Material Coverage

Business Example After the MRP run, you want to check the result and the procurement proposals. You need to check whether planned orders have been created for your finished product and whether purchase requisitions have been created for the lock. For the finished product (T-F1##) you want to use the Monitor Material Coverage lock (T-R9##) you want to use the “old” stock / requirement list.

app. For the

Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Check whether all of the requirements for the finished product been fulfilled. Write down the first four planned orders that have been created to fulfill the planned independent requirements a) To check the proposal for the finished product on the Launchpad, choose the Material Coverage tile. b) In the material list, select the material T-F1## and choose

Monitor

Manage Materials .

c) Write down the first four planned orders that have been created to fulfill the planned independent requirements in the table. d) When all your requirements are fulfilled, go back to the Launchpad. Date

MRP Element

Quantity

Order 1 Order 2 Order 3 Order 4 2. Check the proposals for the lock (Material T-R9##) using the “old” stock requirement list. Use the following information, Field

Value

Material

T-R9##

Plant

1010



Monitor Stock / Requirements List

tile.

461



b) In the Stock / Requirement Lis: Initial

screen, enter the data provided in the table.

c) Press Enter. What has happened to your lock? [Correct answer] 3. Are there purchase requisitions to fulfill the requirements for the lock? Write down the MRP element data for the purchase requisitions. Date

MRP Element

Quantity

Purchase Requisition 1 Purchase Requisition 2 Purchase Requisition 3 4. Go back to the Launchpad.

462





Process MRP


463



Unit 8 Lesson 7 Describing the Manufacturing Business Process



Production Order Processing Overview Production Order Processing Overview

Figure 228: Production Order Process

The production order goes through many individual activities as shown in the figure, Production Order Process. Many of these activities can run automatically or in the background so that manual processing of orders is minimized. A number of settings available in Customizing allow you to perform each step in order processing successfully. Functions in the figure marked with (1) can be automated via Customizing. Functions in the figure marked with (2) can be executed via background processing.

464



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Describing the Manufacturing Business Process

WIP determination, variance calculation, and settlement are generally periodic work for Cost Object Controlling (COC), and are usually processed in the background. You can use the quality management (QM) tools during the production process and for the goods receipt. Various interfaces for process integration are available for downloading orders and uploading process messages. Structure of a Production Order

Figure 229: Structure of a Production Order

A production order in SAP S/4HANA has the mapped order structure. A standard sequence of operations may have other (parallel or alternative) operation sequences. You can select from several alternative sequences. The standard sequence must have at least one operation. If routing is already assigned to that FERT material, the system creates an operation automatically. You can choose whether to assign material components, production resources, or tools and trigger points to the operation. Suboperations are permitted within an operation. You can link documents of the document management system (DMS), such as drawings and text. LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●



465



Unit 8 Lesson 8 Creating and Releasing a Production Order



●


Planned Order to Production Order

Figure 230: Planned Order to Production Order

Planned orders are used to plan in-house production of a material. Planned orders contain the basic dates within which production is to take place, as well as basic requirements for the components for production in the form of dependent requirements. Capacity can be planned based on planned orders. For final production execution, the planned order is converted into a manufacturing order. A production order (PP) is an example of a manufacturing order.

466



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Creating and Releasing a Production Order

Production Order Release

Figure 231: Production Order Release

Order release is the basis for further processing of the production order (for example, printing order documents and withdrawing materials). The system manages the production orders by using statuses. The corresponding status is set when the order is released. An availability check can be performed automatically. It is possible to release single operations, entire orders, and multiple orders simultaneously.


467



468




Unit 8 Exercise 47 Convert a Planned Order to a Production Order

Business Example You need to initiate production for the bicycles (T-F1##). You will convert a planned order into a production order to start the production. Once the production order is created, you will look at the production order and the information given there in detail. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Convert the first planned order in a production order. Use the following data: Field

Value

Planning Plant

1010

MRP Controller

0##

Material

T-F1##

Note the production order number. Production order number: ________________________________________ 2. Check whether the production order is visible in the Material Coverage Monitor. What is the system status of the order?

3. How many operations are contained in the order?

4. Which components are included in the order?

5. Exit the application and go back to the Launchpad.


469



Unit 8 Solution 47 Convert a Planned Order to a Production Order

Business Example You need to initiate production for the bicycles (T-F1##). You will convert a planned order into a production order to start the production. Once the production order is created, you will look at the production order and the information given there in detail. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Convert the first planned order in a production order. Use the following data: Field

Value

Planning Plant

1010

MRP Controller

0##

Material

T-F1##

Note the production order number. a) On the Launchpad, choose the

Convert Orders to Production Orders

b) On the Collective Conversion of Planned Orders: Initial Screen in the table.

tile.

, enter the data provided

c) Choose Execute . d) In the list, select the first planned order and choose

Convert .

e) Write down the Production order number. f) Exit the application. Production order number: ________________________________________ 2. Check whether the production order is visible in the Material Coverage Monitor. a) Choose the Monitor Material Coverage b) In the Monitor Material Coverage Materials .

tile.

app, select the Material

T-F1## and choose

Manage

c) Click the Production order. d) In the following view, choose e) In the fact sheet, click

470

Open → Fact Sheet .

System Status

.




What is the system status of the order? There should be 4 Status active: CRTD, PRC, SETC, MANC. 3. How many operations are contained in the order? There should be 3 operations. a) To see how many operations are contained in the order, go back to the fact sheet overview and click Operations . 4. Which components are included in the order? There should be 4 Materials in the order: Material 1(T-S1##), Material 2 (T-S2##), Material 3 (T-R1##), and Material 4 T-R9## 5. Exit the application and go back to the Launchpad.


471



472




Unit 8 Exercise 48 Release a Production Order

Business Example Now you need to release the production orders to start producing the bicycles T-F1##Therefore you need a list that shows you the production orders in the future. First, you will create a variant that can be reused every time. Next, you will release your first production order. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. To perform this task you, need to log on to the back-end system first and, in the back-end system, use transaction codes RPSPOR1 – CREATE VARIANT and RPSPOR2 ASSIGN VARIANT TO USER. 1. Add the transaction codes

RPSPOR1 and RPSPOR2 to you Favorites.

2. Create a variant for the release of your material T-F1## to select the production orders for your material T-F1##. Name the variant TERP10_##. Use the following information: Field

Value

Rel. Schedule Rel. Date to

120

Material

T-F1##

MRP Controller

0##

Variant name

TERP10_##

Description

Bicycle T-F1##

3. Assign Variant TERP10_## to your user. Use the following information: Field

Value

User

TS410-##

Variant

TERP10_##

Variant Position

1

Number of Orders

Display always


473



4. Release your first production order for material T-F1## using the Orders app.

474

Release Production




Unit 8 Solution 48 Release a Production Order

Business Example Now you need to release the production orders to start producing the bicycles T-F1##Therefore you need a list that shows you the production orders in the future. First, you will create a variant that can be reused every time. Next, you will release your first production order. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. To perform this task you, need to log on to the back-end system first and, in the back-end system, use transaction codes RPSPOR1 – CREATE VARIANT and RPSPOR2 ASSIGN VARIANT TO USER. 1. Add the transaction codes

RPSPOR1 and RPSPOR2 to you Favorites.

a) On the SAP Logon screen, choose the

T41 S/4 HANA system.

b) Log on with your user TS410-## and your password. c) Right-click Favorites , and choose d) In the Transaction code

Insert Transaction

field, enter the

e) Repeat steps c) and d) for transaction code

.

RPSPOR1 RPSPOR2.

2. Create a variant for the release of your material T-F1## to select the production orders for your material T-F1##. Name the variant TERP10_##. Use the following information: Field

Value

Rel. Schedule Rel. Date to

120

Material

T-F1##

MRP Controller

0##

Variant name

TERP10_##

Description

Bicycle T-F1##

a) Choose transaction code b) On the entry screen for provided in the table for


RPSPOR1 – CREATE VARIANT from your Favorites. Create Variant for Production order selection , enter the values Rel. Schedule Rel. Date to , Material , and MRP Controller .

475



c) Save the variant. d) Go back to the SAP Easy Access screen. e) In the Screen Variant and Description .

attributes, enter the values provided in the table for

Variant name

f) Save the variant. g) Go back to the SAP Easy Access screen. 3. Assign Variant TERP10_## to your user. Use the following information: Field

Value

User

TS410-##

Variant

TERP10_##

Variant Position

1

Number of Orders

Display always

a) Choose transaction code

RPSPOR2 ASSIGN VARIANT TO USER from your Favorites.

b) On the C hange view “Assign Variant for Production Order Selection for User” enter the data provided in the table and choose Save .

screen,

c) Exit the back-end system. 4. Release your first production order for material T-F1## using the Orders app. a) In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, choose the b) In the Release Production Order List Check availability button.

Release Production

Release Production Orders

tile.

, choose your production order and choose the

c) Confirm the message. d) Select your production order and choose the

Release button.

Now the production order should be delimited from your list. e) Go back to the SAP Fiori Launchpad.

476






●



477



Unit 8 Lesson 9 Performing Material Withdrawal for a Production Order



Material Withdrawal

Figure 232: Production Order — Goods Issue Posting

GI posting for the required components is another milestone in the production order process. The following functions are performed when a GI for the components of the production order is posted: ●

Storage-location-specific update of the stock and consumption fields

●

Reduction of the reservation (for planned withdrawal)

●

Update of costs for unplanned withdrawals

●

Determination of actual costs (valuation) and order update

●

Consumption update In Customizing, you use a plant-specific or company-code-specific valuation variant to define the valuation of material consumption.

478



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Performing Material Withdrawal for a Production Order

●

Generation of material and accounting documents (FI and CO documents)

●

Creation of material document The material document describes the goods movement from the materials management (warehouse) point of view. You can branch from the display of a material document to the display of other documents.

●

Creation of accounting document The accounting document describes the goods movement from the financial accounting point of view.

●

Creation of controlling document The controlling document represents the actual costs posted to the production order.

●

Printing of GI document You can print a GI document.

The GI posting is controlled through a movement type (261), to which each posting refers. This can take place manually or automatically.


479



480




Unit 8 Exercise 49 Perform Goods Issue for a Production Order

Business Example After you released your production order, you want to check the status of the production order. Therefore, you will review the production order. Next you need to post the goods issue for the production order to start with your production of the bicycle T-F1##. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. Display Production Order for Material T-F1## After you released your production order you want to review the production order for material T-F1##. 1. Review the production order for material T-F1## using the

Monitor Production Order

app.

Write down the Start and the Finish Date for the order: Field

Value

Start Date Finish Date Write the Costing Variant Plan

and Reservation / PReq

Field

values:

Value

Costing Variant Plan Reservation / PReq

What is the meaning of Reservation / Preq immediately?

Post Goods Issue to Production Order The material for the production order needs to be issued from the warehouse to production. Therefore you will post the goods issue for the production order. As you realize during the check of the materials that one lock is broken, you ask for one lock with material T-R9## more during goods issue posting. After the posting you review the accounting documents generated. Use the Post Goods Movement tile for this. 1. Post the goods issue for the production order using the Post Goods Movement tile. choose the Executable Action type Goods Issue and Reference Document of type Order. Increase the quantity for Material T-R9## to 11.


481



2. Review the posting and check the accounting documents. What documents have been created and why?

What postings have been made in financial accounting?

482




Unit 8 Solution 49 Perform Goods Issue for a Production Order

Business Example After you released your production order, you want to check the status of the production order. Therefore, you will review the production order. Next you need to post the goods issue for the production order to start with your production of the bicycle T-F1##. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. Display Production Order for Material T-F1## After you released your production order you want to review the production order for material T-F1##. 1. Review the production order for material T-F1## using the a) On the Launchpad, choose the

Monitor Production Order

Monitor Production Orders

app.

tile.

b) On the Initial screen of Production Order List , select your Production Order and choose the Manage Orders button. c) In the Stock / Requirement List

, choose Milestones .

d) Check the dates for the order. e) Go back to the Stock / Requirements List f) In the Stock / Requirement List

.

, choose your Production order number. .

g) Choose Open → Production Order. h) In the Display Production Order

, enter your Order number and press Enter.

i) In the Production order, go to the Reservation / PReq values.

Control tab and check the

Costing Variant Plan

and

j) Go back to the SAP Fiori Launchpad. Write down the Start and the Finish Date for the order: Field

Value

Start Date Finish Date Write the Costing Variant Plan Field

and Reservation / PReq

values:

Value

Costing Variant Plan


483



Field

Value

Reservation / PReq

What is the meaning of Reservation / Preq immediately? Immediately means that the reservations are due to materials planning when the order is created. The purchase requisitions will be created when the order is in system status released as well. Post Goods Issue to Production Order The material for the production order needs to be issued from the warehouse to production. Therefore you will post the goods issue for the production order. As you realize during the check of the materials that one lock is broken, you ask for one lock with material T-R9## more during goods issue posting. After the posting you review the accounting documents generated. Use the Post Goods Movement tile for this. 1. Post the goods issue for the production order using the Post Goods Movement tile. choose the Executable Action type Goods Issue and Reference Document of type Order. Increase the quantity for Material T-R9## to 11. a) On the Launchpad, choose the

Post Goods Movement

tile.

b) In the Initial screen of Post Goods Issue Order , choose the Goods Issue and Reference Document of type Order. c) In Reference Document

field, enter your production order number and press Enter.

d) In the Material Overview , enter the Quantity of e) Mark all the material as

Executable Action type

OK and choose

11 pc for the Material T-R9##

Post .

f) Stay in the transaction for the next task. 2. Review the posting and check the accounting documents. a) In the Post Goods Movement

app, choose

Display → Material Document .

Check that your material document is populated. If it is not, enter your material document number. b) Press Enter. c) To see what documents have been created, go to

Doc. Info and choose

FI Documents .

d) Click the FI document and note the postings. Name each G/L account posted only once. e) Exit the Transaction and go back to the Launchpad.

484



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Performing Material Withdrawal for a Production Order

What documents have been created and why? The Controlling Document has been created due to the consumption of materials for the production order. The FI document has been created due to stock change and consumption. The material ledger document has been created due to the Material Ledger active in SAP S/4HANA. What postings have been made in financial accounting? There should be the following accounts: Account 13300000: Inventory Semi Finished, Account 54300000: Inv. Change SEMI Finished, Account 13100000: Inventory RAW mat, and Account 51100000: Consumpt. RAW


485




486





Unit 8 Lesson 10 Performing an Order Confirmation and a Materials Goods Receipt



Order Confirmation

Figure 233: Production Order — Order Confirmation

An order confirmation is used for the consumption of internal activities. Confirmations are an important basis for entering internal activities performed for an order, progress check, and subsequent capacity requirements planning. For this reason, exact real-time confirmations are important. The figure shows that a confirmation causes various additional functions to be executed. Confirmations from plant data collection (PDC) systems are possible using the production planning PDC (PP-PDC) interface.


487



Effects of an Order Confirmation

Figure 234: Effects of an Order Confirmation

After an order has been confirmed, the subsequent functions are performed. The confirmed quantity, the CNF (Finally Confirmed) status, and the actual costs are written in the production order. When an operation is confirmed, an automatic goods issue could be posted on the basis of the quantity assigned to the material components (backflush). The material components must be prepared for backflush posting and provided for use at the work center. When you confirm the last operation (or confirm the operation where this posting is defined in the control key), an automatic GR is posted. Depending on the request, the GR posting for the materials produced can be attached to the order confirmation or carried out separately. Capacity reduction is carried out in proportion to the quantity or activity. If a scrap or rework quantity is confirmed, the system automatically generates a quality notification (as of ECC 6.0 EhP3).

488



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Performing an Order Confirmation and a Materials Goods Receipt

Goods Receipt Posting

Figure 235: Goods Receipt Posting

The GR posting represents the stock receipt of a product produced using a production order. The following functions are executed when a GR is posted: ●

●

●

The system generates material documents, accounting documents, and Controlling (CO) documents. The material document describes the goods movement from a materials management (warehouse) perspective. The accounting document describes the goods movement from a Financial Accounting (FI) perspective.

●

The system updates the delivered quantity in the order.

●

The CO document records the credit posted to the production order.

●

The GR posting is controlled using a movement type (101), to which each posting refers. This can take place manually or automatically.


489



490




Unit 8 Exercise 50 Confirm a Production Order and Post Goods Receipt

Business Example The materials have been withdrawn for the production order and the production has been finished now. You need to confirm the production order and post the goods receipt for the bicycle T-F1## to stock. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Use the application Confirm Production Order app to confirm the operations for your production order. – Enter time ticket for production order – to confirm the times worked. When you confirm the last operation, the goods receipt will be posted automatically to the production order. Use the following data, using the relevant Operation number (10, 20, or 30): Field

Value

Order

Your Production order number

Operation

10, 20, or 30 as appropriate

Confirmation Type

Final Confirmation

Yield

The full order quantity of your order

Set up Time

Your choice

Processing Time

Your choice

2. Check availability of your bicycle, T-F1##, using the


tile.

Is there stock available? Available stock:__________________________________


491



Unit 8 Solution 50 Confirm a Production Order and Post Goods Receipt

Business Example The materials have been withdrawn for the production order and the production has been finished now. You need to confirm the production order and post the goods receipt for the bicycle T-F1## to stock. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Use the application Confirm Production Order app to confirm the operations for your production order. – Enter time ticket for production order – to confirm the times worked. When you confirm the last operation, the goods receipt will be posted automatically to the production order. Use the following data, using the relevant Operation number (10, 20, or 30): Field

Value

Order


Operation

10, 20, or 30 as appropriate

Confirmation Type

Final Confirmation

Yield

The full order quantity of your order

Set up Time

Your choice

Processing Time

Your choice

a) On the Launchpad, choose the b) On the Initial screen of in the table.

Confirm Production Order

Enter Time ticket for production order

tile. , enter the data provided

c) Save the confirmation. d) Repeat the steps b) and c), replacing the operation with 20. e) Repeat the steps b) and c), replacing the operation with 30. When you confirm the operation 30, the goods receipt posting is done automatically. f) Go back to the Launchpad.

492



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Performing an Order Confirmation and a Materials Goods Receipt

2. Check availability of your bicycle, T-F1##, using the a) On the Launchpad, choose the



b) On the Initial screen of Monitor Material Coverage choose Manage Materials .

tile.

tile.

, select the material

T-F1## and

c) Note the available stock for your product T-F1##: d) Go back to the Launchpad. Is there stock available? Available stock:__________________________________


493




494





Unit 8 Lesson 11 Performing Period End Closing Activities



Manufacturing Variance Calculation

Figure 236: Manufacturing Processing with Management Accounting

After the preliminary costing data is created and the order released, individual and direct costs are initially incurred by material withdrawals. The raw materials inventory is reduced and expenses, in the form of cost elements, flow through the respective consumption accounts to the accounting object (production order). Similarly, external services through invoices are posted directly on the order using account assignments from Financial Accounting (FI). Confirmations constitute a further debit to the production order. A confirmation relates to one or more internal activities performed by a cost center. Period end closing activities for a manufacturing order focus on the cost accounting aspects of production. The first period closing activity could be the calculation of work in process or WIP. If a manufacturing order is not fully delivered, at period end, the costs posted to the order need to be recognized in the balance sheet. The WIP calculation determines the costs that have already been posted in FI as expenses, for those materials still in progress. The second period end closing activity is the variance calculation. A production variance represents the difference between planned and actual costs. Variances are only calculated for


495



a manufacturing order, if it is completely delivered. Whether work in process is calculated or variances are calculated for a manufacturing order, in both cases, the last period end activity of settlement needs to be performed. If the production order has not yet been fully delivered, the settlement will post WIP to the general ledger. If the production order is fully delivered, the settlement will post the manufacturing variances to the general ledger.

Production Order Settlement Process

Figure 237: Production Order Settlement Process

The manner in which a production order is credited and debited depends on the variant of Cost Object Controlling (COC) selected in CO. You can settle orders on the basis of the order or the product. Order settlement credits the order. In most cases, a settlement is done periodically. You can use a settlement profile to control settlement parameters.

496



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Performing Period End Closing Activities

Master Data in Profitability Analysis

Figure 238: Master Data in Profitability and Sales Accounting

The basic terms used in Profitability Analysis are as follows: ●

Characteristic

●

Characteristic value

●

Value field

●

Profitability segment


497



Basic Concepts of Profitability Analysis

Figure 239: Basic Terms Used in Profitability Analysis

Characteristics, characteristic values, and value fields are the main reporting elements in COPA. You use characteristics to specify what you want to report on. Examples of characteristics are divisions, regions, products, and customers. Examples of characteristic values include region south or north. You use the value field to specify the key figures that you want to track and analyze. Examples of value fields are gross sales, surcharges, discounts, and cost of sales. A profitability segment defines a specific value combination of all characteristics, which corresponds to a market segment. The system generates a profitability segment automatically as soon as it is addressed. Profitability Analysis Characteristics in Table ACDOCA In SAP S/4HANA, the billing of a sales order item will be posted into the table ACDOCA. This enables reporting on market segments not only within CO-PA, but also within Financial Accounting. You can report a profit & loss statement to characteristics such as the following: ●

Customer

●


●

Plant

●

Sales Organization

You can also report within the profit & loss statement with Cost of Goods Sold (COGS). If the elements of the Cost Component Split have been assigned to defined G/L Accounts, the COGS can also be reported in the Profit & Loss Statement, such as in COPA. Reporting to market segments and with COGS and, if required, with contribution margin in SAP S/4HANA, it is possible to report in the following:

498




●

Financial Accounting

●

COPA Accounting Based

●

COPA Costing Based (such as in the ERP environment)

To use Drill-Down reporting in Financial Accounting, you must use the Trial Balance Reporting.

Profitability Analysis Types

Figure 240: Types of Profitability Analysis

The Profitability Reporting Methods are as follows: ●

Costing-based Profitability Analysis This method creates reports that display values by value field (flexibly defined key figures). In addition, this method can be expanded with other anticipated values, such as accrued freight costs. Costing-based CO-PA uses special database tables and produces revenues and cost of sales simultaneously when the billing document is calculated.

●

Account-based Profitability Analysis This method creates reports that display values by cost element and revenue element and reconciles directly with Financial Accounting at account level. In addition, this version shares data tables with other Management Accounting applications, such as Cost Center Accounting. It posts revenues when the billing document is created, but updates the cost of sales at the point of goods issue.

In SAP S/4HANA, all data, such as characteristics and key figures, are updated in the central table ACDOCA. Nevertheless, the line items are updated in the following: ●

COEP — Actual Line item for CO-PA account-based

●

CE1xxxx (xxxx — ID of Concerning Area) for CO-PA costing—based

When you define drill-down reporting within CO-PA costing-based, you get the data from the following tables: ●

CE1xxxx — actual line item


499



●

CE2xxxx — plan line item

●

CE3xxxx — sum data

When you define drill-down reporting within CO-PA account-based, you get the data from the following tables: ●

COEP — actual line item

●

COEJ — plan line item

●

COSS, SOSP — sum data

The CO-PA tables are still being updated following the “Primanoa” principle.

Data Flow in Profitability Analysis

Figure 241: Data Flow in Profitability Analysis

The data from sales order management is one of the key sources of information for CO-PA. In costing-based CO-PA, the following are the information Collection Points in the sales order cycle: ●

When an order is created or changed (optional)

●

When an invoice is generated for an order

In account-based CO-PA, the following are the information Collection Points in the sales order cycle:

500

●

When a goods issue is posted

●

When an invoice is generated for the goods issue




Assigning Overhead Costs – Overview

Figure 242: Assigning Overhead Costs – Overview

You can transfer costs from other areas of Management Accounting periodically to CO-PA using activity and template allocations, settlements, and assessments. You can also make direct assignments manually from Financial Accounting to CO-PA. To display all overhead costs in CO-PA, you allocate the overhead costs that were not allocated to Product Cost Controlling to CO-PA. Methods for displaying all overhead costs in CO-PA include the following: ●

Allocation of internal activities

●

Assessment

●

Order settlement

●

Project settlement

You can allocate internal activities from cost centers to CO-PA either directly or indirectly. In addition to the sender (cost center) and receiver (profitability segment), you enter the quantity of the activity provided. The system then valuates this quantity using the price of the activity type in question. The calculated value is credited to the sender and debited to the profitability segment that receives the activity quantity. This means, for example, that you can post a transport activity directly to a specific customer without having to post it to a cost center or an order first.


501



Assessment of Cost Center and Process Costs

Figure 243: Assessment of Cost Center and Process Costs

The cost centers and processes are credited with the allocated amount. This means that all costs can be allocated only once. You assess cost center costs and process costs in the same way as in Overhead Cost Controlling, whereby you define cycles and execute them on a periodic basis. These cycles contain the control information required for assessment and are maintained in Customizing. In the SAP system, you can settle internal orders (Management Accounting), sales orders (sales order management), projects (Project System), and production orders and run schedule headers with product cost collectors (production planning) to profitability segments. Orders and projects can be used for various functions relevant to CO-PA. Order Settlement to Profitability Analysis

Figure 244: Order Settlement to Profitability Analysis

502




The make-to-order manufacturer can use an order or project. If the order or project is a sales order from sales order management, a customer project, or a Management Accounting order for which revenue postings can be made, the manufacturer can post costs, revenues, and sales deductions to the order or project in question. Examples of such costs are the cost of goods manufactured, sales, and administration costs. After the product is finished, the costs and revenues are settled to CO-PA. You can also transfer accrued values (particularly important for milestone billing), such as cost of sales and reserves for imminent losses, to CO-PA.

Profit Center Accounting in New G/L PCA is part of Management Accounting and shows the results of profit centers in overabsorption and underabsorption reports (such as cost center reports). According to most recent theories, you can show the results of profit centers as profit and loss statements and balance sheets in the Financial Accounting. Note: For some time after the migration to General Ledger Accounting (new), you may choose to run PCA in Financial Accounting and EC-PCA in parallel, but this is not recommended by SAP. Especially, if you are using the Document Splitting in New GL with the Profit Center as a Document Splitting Characteristic to General Ledger you have to use Profit Center in New GL . For more information on options for PCA, refer to SAP Notes 1280060 and 826357.

Profit Center Master Data

Figure 245: Profit Center Master Data

By using the buttons on the profit center master data screen, you can access additional data where you can enter other information about the profit center, such as an address, telephone number, or fax number.


503



Profit Center Assignments

Figure 246: Profit Center Assignments

You assign a profit center to each object for which costs or revenues are incurred in your system. When you post the data to the original object, the system automatically posts this data to the Profit Center. In this way, the actual data for the assigned objects in the Profit Center is updated. You can also do the same for planning data. However, this data can be derived alternatively as a summary from planning in the Management Accounting components, if required. Cost centers, business processes, internal orders, projects, production orders, and cost objects have fields for profit center assignments in their master records. A project, for example, the construction of a crane, normally affects more than one profit center (design of the motor, building the chassis, and so on). This means that the different operating structures, such as work breakdown structure elements, network headers, and networks, can be assigned to separate profit centers. When the profit center assignment is determined in the sales order, the revenue postings are transferred to PCA. Profitability segments do not have a master record. A profitability segment combines characteristics such as customer, product, plant, or distribution channel. The profit center is always one of the characteristics. The profit center can be derived automatically from the material and plant, or from other characteristics. You can also enter it manually. You can assign the fixed assets to profit centers indirectly using the cost centers stored in the fixed asset master record. This means that a profit center is the summary of all posted values for all assigned account assignment objects. Additional allocations between the profit centers are possible.

504




Data Flow to Profit Center Accounting in New G/L

Figure 247: Data Flow to Profit Center Accounting in New G/L

Before you can analyze your profits by profit center, the system must summarize all the profit-related postings in PCA. Data is transferred to Profit Center Accounting in New G/L as follows: ●

●

●

All posing in Financial Accounting could be assigned to a profit center with or without a controlling object. Posting cost and revenue in Financial Accounting with accounting to a controlling object such as cost center, internal order, or WBS (Work Breakdown Structure) element (project) that is assigned to a Profit Center leads to an assignment of the posted value to a profit center. Posting in Management Accounting leads to an assignment to the corresponding profit center of the cost objects.

Note: As usual, EC-PCA has been deactivated in the training system because of using New G/L with document splitting.


505



Distribution and Assessment

Figure 248: Distribution and Assessment

Under certain circumstances, you may want to allocate revenues and sales deductions. You can do this in Financial Accounting. One of the main uses of distribution is to distribute balance sheet items (raw materials, fixed assets, and so on) that were originally posted to a profit center and that now must be distributed to various receiver profit centers. Assessing and distributing PCA data makes sense only after completing all period-end closing operations in the components (Financial Accounting, Management Accounting, sales order management, Materials Management) that supply PCA with data. Distribution and assessment are performed just as in Overhead Cost Management, but they apply only to PCA data.

506




Unit 8 Exercise 51 Calculate Variances in a Production Order

Business Example It is period end. You need to perform a variance calculation for your production order. This is a necessary step before settlement of the order. You want to see the impact of variance calculation for the production order. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Calculate the variances for the production order. Use the Controlling Area

A000 and the following information:

Field

Value

Order

Your Order number

Period

Current Period

Test run

Not selected

Which Cost elements show variances and what is the value? Cost element


Variance

507



Unit 8 Solution 51 Calculate Variances in a Production Order

Business Example It is period end. You need to perform a variance calculation for your production order. This is a necessary step before settlement of the order. You want to see the impact of variance calculation for the production order. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Calculate the variances for the production order. Use the Controlling Area

A000 and the following information:

Field

Value

Order

Your Order number

Period

Current Period

Test run

Not selected


Calculate Variance per orde

b) In the dialog box that appears, enter Controlling Area c) On the Initial screen of

Variance calculation

r tile.

A000.


d) Choose Execute . e) In the Variance Calculation: List , choose the elements show variances and their values

Cost element button and note which Cost

f) Leave the transaction. g) Go back to the Launchpad. Which Cost elements show variances and what is the value? Cost element

508

Variance




Unit 8 Exercise 52 Settle a Production Order

Business Example After the variance calculation you need to perform another activity from the period end closing procedures. You must settle the production order. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Settle the production order using an SAP Fiori app. Use the following data: Field

Value

Order


Settlement period

Actual month

Fiscal year

Actual year

Test run

Not selected


509



Unit 8 Solution 52 Settle a Production Order

Business Example After the variance calculation you need to perform another activity from the period end closing procedures. You must settle the production order. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Settle the production order using an SAP Fiori app. Use the following data: Field

Value

Order


Settlement period

Actual month

Fiscal year

Actual year

Test run

Not selected

a) On the Launchpad, choose the b) In the Initial screen of

Single Order Settlement

Actual settlement: Order

tile.


c) Choose Execute . The costs should have been settled. Where have the costs been settled to? The costs should have been settled to the material and the profitability analysis.

510




Unit 8 Exercise 53 Evaluate CO-PA

Business Example You have entered the business transactions in the “Production Process” and in “sales and distribution”. You now want to examine the results from various market segments. You want to know where your profits rose and where they fell, and analyze the causes of these changes. This information is required not only at the end of the period, but also after each sales transaction. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. Display Line Items in Costing-Based CO-PA Generated by the System In this task, you display the line items generated by the system, which are a result of billing and settling the produced finished goods. Note: Make sure that you switch to the costing based CO-PA via menu path → Profitability Analysis → Environment – → Set operating concern operating concern A000 and select Costing-based CO-PA .

Controlling . Choose

1. As a result of billing now and settling the production order for T-F1xx in the production process earlier, postings were made to CO-PA for which the system generated line items. Display the line items by choosing Actual Postings from the menu. Use the following data: Selection Field

Value

Period from

mmm.year mmm — period

Period to

mmm.year

Plan/Act. Indicator

0 (Actual)

Record Type

F

Perform Profit Analysis for Contribution Margin Report in Costing-based CO-PA In this task, you examine the results for your company. Run in account-based CO-PA the contribution margin report S4F20CM (graphical report output) for the current fiscal year. 1. Run the contribution margin report S4F20CM (graphical report output) for the current fiscal year. Use the following data: Selection Field

Value

Fiscal Year

current year


511



Selection Field

Value

Period from

1

Period to

12

Version

0 (Actual)

2. Analyze the result of the customer

T-BP## and the product

T-F1## .

3. Drill down to the actual line items for customer T-BP## to view the postings you made to CO-PA and analyze the corresponding accounting documents.

512




Unit 8 Solution 53 Evaluate CO-PA

Business Example You have entered the business transactions in the “Production Process” and in “sales and distribution”. You now want to examine the results from various market segments. You want to know where your profits rose and where they fell, and analyze the causes of these changes. This information is required not only at the end of the period, but also after each sales transaction. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. Display Line Items in Costing-Based CO-PA Generated by the System In this task, you display the line items generated by the system, which are a result of billing and settling the produced finished goods. Note: Make sure that you switch to the costing based CO-PA via menu path → Profitability Analysis → Environment – → Set operating concern operating concern A000 and select Costing-based CO-PA .


1. As a result of billing now and settling the production order for T-F1xx in the production process earlier, postings were made to CO-PA for which the system generated line items. Display the line items by choosing Actual Postings from the menu. Use the following data: Selection Field

Value

Period from


Period to

mmm.year

Plan/Act. Indicator

0 (Actual)

Record Type

F

a) On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Accounting → —> Controlling → Profitability Analysis → Information System → Execute Report . b) Execute the report

S4F20LI and enter the data provided in the table.

c) Execute the Line Item Based Report. d) In the Navigation Panel , double-click Sales Order .


513



e) Position your cursor on the Gross Revenue key figure displayed for your sales order and select Go to — Line Items. f) You can navigate from the CO-PA line item to the FI/CO documents FI/CO documents to the billing document and your sales order.

and from the

Perform Profit Analysis for Contribution Margin Report in Costing-based CO-PA In this task, you examine the results for your company. Run in account-based CO-PA the contribution margin report S4F20CM (graphical report output) for the current fiscal year. 1. Run the contribution margin report S4F20CM (graphical report output) for the current fiscal year. Use the following data: Selection Field

Value

Fiscal Year

current year

Period from

1

Period to

12

Version

0 (Actual)

a) On the SAP Fiori Launchpad, select the Market Segments Plan/Actuals app and, choose Accounting → Controlling → Profitability Analysis → Information System → Execute Report . b) On the Run Profitability Report: Initial c) Execute the report

screen, select

S4F20CM from the list of reports.

S4F20CM and enter the data provided in the table.

d) Choose Execute . 2. Analyze the result of the customer


T-F1## .

a) On the Execute Profitability Report screen, in the Navigation area, double-click Customer to list all the customers to whom we sold products in the current year. b) Double-click customer T-BP## to fix this value. In the contribution margin report for this specific customer. c) In the Navigation area, double-click T-BP## in the current year.

Form area, you can now see a

Product to list all the products we sold to customer

d) Double-click the product T-F1## to fix this value. In the Form area, you now see a contribution margin report for this specific customer with this specific product. e) In the Navigation area, double-click customer T-BP## to release this value. In the area, you now see a contribution margin report specifically for product T-F1## , independent of the receiving customers. f) In the Navigation area, double-click product T-F1## .

Form

Customer to list all the customers who received the

g) In the Navigation area, double-click the product number

T-F1## to release this value.


514




a) In the Navigation area, double-click products in the current year. b) Double-click customer

Customer to list all the customers to whom we sold

T-BP## to fix this value.

c) In the List area, position your cursor on the actual figure in the first row. d) Choose Goto → Line items . e) Double-click the line item of the actual period to obtain a detail view. f) On the Display Line Items screen, select the the characteristics and the value fields.

Value fields tab page. Analyze the values of

g) To display the accounting documents created together with the CO-PA line item, choose Environment → Integration .


515




516






1. Which of the following statements about materials requirement planning are true? Choose the correct answers. X

A Material requirements planning takes current and future sales as its reference point.

X

B The main function of material requirements planning is the monitoring of stocks.

X

C In MRP,the requirements elements include sales planned independent requirements.

X

D The planned requirement quantities trigger the MRP calculation.

2. Which of the following can be created by processing MRP? Choose the correct answers. X

A Purchase order

X

B Dependent requirements

X

C Planned orders

X

D Planned independent requirements

3. Which of the following functions can be automated via customizing in production order processing? Choose the correct answers. X

A Goods receipt

X

B Upload from process level

X

C Material staging

X

D Order request


517



4. When a goods receipt is posted in the system, which of the following documents are created? Choose the correct answers.

518

X

A Material document

X

B Transfer posting document

X

C Accounting document

X

D Outbound delivery document





1. Which of the following statements about materials requirement planning are true? Choose the correct answers. X

A Material requirements planning takes current and future sales as its reference point.

X

B The main function of material requirements planning is the monitoring of stocks.

X

C In MRP,the requirements elements include sales planned independent requirements.

X

D The planned requirement quantities trigger the MRP calculation.

2. Which of the following can be created by processing MRP? Choose the correct answers. X

A Purchase order

X

B Dependent requirements

X

C Planned orders

X

D Planned independent requirements

3. Which of the following functions can be automated via customizing in production order processing? Choose the correct answers. X

A Goods receipt

X

B Upload from process level

X

C Material staging

X

D Order request


519



4. When a goods receipt is posted in the system, which of the following documents are created? Choose the correct answers.

520

X

A Material document

X

B Transfer posting document

X

C Accounting document

X

D Outbound delivery document




UNIT 9

Warehouse Management Stock Transfer

Lesson 1 Explaining WM Structures and Usage

522

Lesson 2 Outlining the Difference between EWM, WM, and Inventory Management (IM)

530

Lesson 3 Processing a Stock Transfer Order

532

UNIT OBJECTIVES ●

Explain WM structures and usage

●

Explain the difference between EWM and IM

●

Process a stock transfer order


521



Unit 9 Lesson 1 Explaining WM Structures and Usage



Organizational Units Because EWM is connected to an ERP system, there are organizational units, which we must consider to be in both (ERP and EWM). Inventory management takes place in the ERP system and stock is stored in a plant at storage location level. A plant is a location where goods are produced (manufacturing plant) or stored (distribution center) and where services are provided. A plant is assigned to a company code based on a Financial Accounting organization unit. Storage locations are assigned to a plant and keep the stock in view of inventory management. Because of this, at least one storage location is necessary. Storage Locations in a Plant Various storage locations in a plant allow you to do the following: ●

Differentiate between the various stocks of material in a plant

●

Differentiate between the physical storage characteristics

●

Classify the quantities of material in a plant to indicate their use (for example, available for sale) or perhaps their logical location (for example, at a third-party logistics provider)

Although EWM has nothing to do with the SAP Warehouse Management application, both use a “warehouse number” to represent the physical warehouse where materials are stored and managed. This warehouse number must be created in ERP customizing. A substructure does not need to be configured for this warehouse in ERP. It will be activated as an EWM warehouse. In the ERP system, the warehouse number is a three-character field but in EWM, it is a four-character field. Organizational Units for EWM To activate warehouse management in the ERP system, a plant and a storage location (for that plant) is linked with the respective warehouse number.

522



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Explaining WM Structures and Usage

Figure 249: Organizational Units for EWM

Storage Locations In our training course the following two different storage locations are used: ●

AF00 (Available for sale)

●

RD00 (Received on dock)

RD00 is used to track stock that is in the process of putaway, for example, those quantities are not yet physically available. When the product is finally stored in its destination storage bin, a transfer posting changes the stock storage location from RD00 to storage location AF00. In the following sections, we will cover the EWM-specific organizational units. Organizational Units in SAP EWM The warehouse number is the highest level of organizational unit in warehouse management. In practice, the warehouse number usually corresponds to a physical building or distribution center. Each warehouse number has a substructure that maps the spatial relationship in the warehouse complex in detail. There are different forms where products are physically stored in a warehouse. These forms, called Storage Types include the following: ●

Various types of racks

●

Any open storage space

●

Goods receipt areas

●

Goods issue areas

Storage types are represented as a group of warehouse bins with similar characteristics. Storage types are defined on the basis of their spatial or organizational features. Storage sections are subdivisions of a storage type. A storage section represents a group of bins that have a common attribute, for example bins that are used to store fast-moving items. Storage sections are used when determining the putaway storage bin.


523


For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Unit 9: Warehouse Management - Stock Transfer

Storage bins are the lowest level of organizational structure. They are assigned to a storage type and a storage section (if one exists). Storage bins represent the physical location where the goods are stored in the warehouse. When you store a product in your warehouse, you will need to know exactly where it is stored i.e. the storage bin. The coordinates of the storage bin indicate the precise position in the warehouse. Storage bins are master data. Storage bins, independent of their storage type, are logically grouped in activity areas. You define an activity area for each activity: ●

Picking

●

Putaway

●

Physical inventory

Activity areas are used do define bin sorting when warehouse orders are created. According to the activity, the same storage bin can be assigned to multiple activity areas. If stock is kept in a storage bin, the quantity of stock in that bin is represented as a “quant”. A quant is the content of a storage bin and it is used for inventory management of a product in a storage bin. Warehouse Structure

Figure 250: Warehouse Structural Elements

WM Structures and Usage With the introduction of EWM as a new WM application, it is important to decide which warehouse management application is best for your business. In your Supply Chain Management (SCM) solution, do you need SAP Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) or SAP Extended Warehouse Management (EWM)? SAP Warehouse Management (WM), part of SAP R/3 (version 2.0), was released in 1993 and SAP has continuously improved WM from release to release. Today, SAP offers various warehouse management solutions that enable customers to select the solution they need for each of their warehouses.

524




The SAP ERP Warehouse Management System remains a viable alternative for many warehouses. The introduction of the SAP EWM System did not replace the SAP WM system. Instead, it provided an alternative for warehouses that required the functionality available in EWM. An SAP customer can implement SAP WM in some of its warehouses and SAP EWM in other warehouses in its enterprise. One significant difference between the SAP WM system and the SAP EWM system is that the WM system concentrates on internal functions, for example there is little functionality that provides a link to external processes such as contract packaging or transportation.

SAP Warehouse Management Solutions

Figure 251: SAP Warehouse Management Solutions

The main functions of Warehouse Management are as follows: ●

Managing inventory at the storage bin level

●

Mapping and control of all goods movements with transfer orders

●

Monitoring the processing of all goods movements (with the Warehouse Activity Monitor)

●

Connecting to mobile data entry as part of integrated radio frequency solution

●

Connecting to specialized external systems (for example an automated warehouse system) using an interface


525



SAP ERP Warehouse Management

Figure 252: Warehouse Management in ERP

Since its first release, SAP has continuously improved and extended WM to provide increased functionality. SAP R/3 Enterprise Extension Set 2.0 includes this additional functionality: ●

Yard management

●

Cross-docking

●

Value Added Services (VAS)

This functionality is bundled under the name EWM (which is not related to the SCM solution EWM). Lean WM is a simplified version of WM. Both are based on the same principles but Lean WM does not manage the inventory at the storage bin level. Lean WM is a good solution for any customer using one of these: ● ●

A fixed bin strategy A warehouse management solution other than an SAP solution. In this case, the customer can use Lean WM to integrate both solutions.

ERP Decentralized Warehouse Management The Warehouse Management System must always ensure quick response times, especially in warehouses with a high throughput. If the Warehouse Management System runs on the same machine as the ERP system, performance problems may arise. In addition, in some warehouses, the WMS must be available 24 hours a day, regardless of whether other systems are available or not. 24-hour availability must be combined with a low risk of downtime. This is to ensure that the WMS can perform all logistics processes, which are often closely integrated. For these reasons, you can install an SAP system as an independent, decentralized Warehouse Management System in order to receive requests for goods movements from any Enterprise Resource Planning system.

526




Decentralized Warehouse Management (WM)

Figure 253: Decentralized Warehouse Management

In a decentralized WM, the WM is logically or physically separated from the ERP System, therefore: ●

●

The ERP system manages processes, for example the creation of sales orders, purchases orders, and the corresponding deliveries. The decentralized WM manages warehouse processes, for example goods receipt, storage, goods issue, and monitoring warehouse activities.

Although the WM is separate from the ERP System, communication is essential. Communication is achieved as follows: ●

●

Inbound and outbound deliveries (in the ERP system) are replicated via Business Application Programming Interfaces (BAPIs) to the decentralized WM system. Goods movement, once finalized or “posted” in the decentralized WM, are replicated via BAPIs to the ERP System.

Warehouse Management Functions and Processes in SAP EWM In 2005, SAP released its Service Parts Management (SPM) solution. Extended Warehouse Management (EWM) was an integral component of this solution. Today, EWM is considered a standalone application that can be used in any warehousing environment. It does not require any connection to SPM. Since the introduction of EWM, SAP has continuously enhanced the product. From an ERP point of view, EWM is a decentralized WM solution. This means that inbound and outbound deliveries are mandatory. The EWM primary functions are as follows: ●

Inventory management at storage bin level

●

Storage bin determination for incoming goods

●

Stock removal for outgoing goods


527



●

Stock transfers

●

Physical inventory management

Figure 254: SAP Extended Warehouse Management

Additional Functions for Warehouse Management Along with the primary functions, various additional functions are provided to improve warehouse management: ●

Slotting

●

Consolidation and deconsolidation

●

Cross-docking

●

Yard management

●

Complex internal routing

●

Value Added Services (VAS)

●

Labor management

●

Radio frequency Identification

●

Kit-to-stock / Kit-to-order

The warehouse management monitor is another powerful tool. This tool allows you to do the following tasks:

528

●

Supervise and deal with your warehousing documents and processes

●

Check your stock and storage bins

●

Monitor your employees (one of your resources)

●

Check the warehouse workload

●

Supervise the material flow system (MFS)







529



Unit 9 Lesson 2 Outlining the Difference between EWM, WM, and Inventory Management (IM)



Differences between WM and IM

Figure 255: Extended Warehouse Management Processes

EWM for Complex Supply Chain Networks EWM is designed for the management of complex supply chain networks. It is recommended for warehouses or distribution centers with: ●

530

High throughput of various goods with differences such as: -

Size

-

Weight

-

Serial number

-

Country of origin



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Outlining the Difference between EWM, WM, and Inventory Management (IM)

-

Batch

-

Valuation

●

Complex cross-docking and order-fulfillment requirements

●

Detailed packaging and shipping logistics requirements

EWM System Environment and Deployment Options The Extended Warehouse Management System as an application in the SAP SCM solution is designed as a decentralized WM system. Originally, it was released on the SAP SCM platform. Today, that remains a valid deployment option. The main advantage to deploying EWM on the SCM platform is improved performance and flexibility. EWM can be implemented with modules such as: ●

Advanced Planning Optimization (APO)

●

Service Parts Planning (SPP)

●

Global Available-To-Promise (Global ATP)

Due to performance considerations, SAP recommends implementing EWM on a separate machine from their other applications, but new technology for shared-hosting of applications on common servers (for example, cloud computing) can lead to a decision to run EWM on the same server as other applications. EWM can be installed as an add-on to SAP ERP Central Component 6.0 (ECC 6.0). This is an appropriate solution for small warehouses where only a small number of goods are moved.

Figure 256: EWM Deployment Options

In a decentralized setup, EWM can be connected to SAP systems from R/3 4.6C and higher (including SAP R/3 Enterprise and all subsequent SAP ERP releases). Depending on the release of the ERP system or any Enhancement Packages installed, certain functions or processes in SAP EWM might be unavailable. Details are described in the release notes, installation guides, and notes. LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●



531



Unit 9 Lesson 3 Processing a Stock Transfer Order



Processing a Stock Transfer Order

Figure 257: Transfer Posting or Physical Stock Transfer

In transfer postings, the key aspect is a change in the stock ID number or stock category of a material. Transfer postings need not involve a physical goods movement; however, in stock transfers, there is always a physical movement of goods. Examples of transfer postings are as follows: ●

Stock to stock (for example, in quality inspection to unrestricted use)

●

Material to material

Examples of (physical) stock transfers are as follows:

532

●

Storage location to storage location

●

Plant to plant



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Processing a Stock Transfer Order

The figure, Transfer Posting or Physical Stock Transfer, shows examples of transfer postings and physical stock transfers. Note that transfer postings and physical stock transfers can take place at different organizational levels. Stock transfers can take place at the following organizational levels: ●

Storage-location-to-storage-location transfer Stock is transferred between two storage locations within a plant.

●

Plant-to-plant transfer Stock is transferred between two plants belonging to the same company code.

●

Company-code-to-company-code transfer Stock is transferred between two plants assigned to different company codes.

Transfer Postings

Figure 258: Transfer Postings

If you want to withdraw goods from a blocked or quality inspection stock for consumption, you first have to carry out a transfer posting to the unrestricted-use stock. The movement type controls between which stock types a transfer posting occurs. A physical transfer posting between two storage locations can be linked with a stock-to-stock transfer posting. Similar to all goods movements, the system also creates a material document during transfer postings to show a transaction in the system. If the transfer posting is relevant for valuation, an accounting document is generated. The stock-to-stock postings are not relevant for valuation. In contrast, a material-to-material transfer posting ( movement type 309 ) is generally linked with a stock value change. Therefore, such posting is relevant for the update in Financial Accounting (FI).


533



Stock Transfers

Figure 259: Cross-Plant Stock Transfer

The procedures of a cross-plant stock transfer are as follows: ●

One-step procedure

●

Two-step procedure

●

Stock transport order (with or without delivery)

In a plant-to-plant stock transfer, the plants between which the material is transferred can belong to the same company code or different company codes. The cross-plant stock transfers can only be booked out of the unrestricted-use stock. In contrast to a storage-location-to-storage-location stock transfer, a plant-to-plant transfer affects FI and Material Requirements Planning (MRP). In a stock transfer between two plants assigned to different valuation areas, the following scenarios affect FI: ●

●

●

A cross-plant stock transfer leads to a value update in the stock accounts. An accounting document is generated parallel to the material document for the stock transfer. The stock transfer is valuated at the valuation price of the material in the issuing plant. In a cross-company-code stock transfer, two accounting documents are created at the time of posting, one for each company code. The offsetting entry to the stock posting is made to a company-code clearing account.

Hint: If you enter the stock transfer in two separate steps, the valuation always takes place at the first step.

534



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Processing a Stock Transfer Order

Stock Transport Order

Figure 260: Stock Transport Order

A stock transfer that uses a stock transport order has certain advantages over a stock transfer without a stock transport order. The following are the advantages of a stock transfer that uses a stock transport order: ●

The stock transport order is integrated within MRP. The purchase requisitions generated by MRP can be converted into stock transport orders.

●

The receipt can be planned at the receiving plant.

●

The delivery costs and a forwarder or carrier can be entered in the stock transport order.

●

The goods receipt can be posted directly to consumption.

●

●

In a goods receipt into the warehouse, the material to stock in quality inspection or blocked stock can be posted. The entire process (goods issue and goods receipt) can be monitored using the PO history.




535



536





1. Warehouse Management can connect to an automated warehouse system. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X

True

X

False

2. Which of the following statements about a decentralized Warehouse Management (WM) is false? Choose the correct answer. X

A In a decentralized WM, the WM is logically or physically separated from the ERP System.

X

B The WM system manages processes, for example the creation of sales orders, purchases orders, and the corresponding deliveries.

X

C Inbound and outbound deliveries (in the ERP system) are replicated via Business Application Programming Interfaces (BAPIs) to the decentralized WM system.

X

D When goods movement, is finalized in the decentralized WM, it replicated via BAPIs to the ERP System.

3. For small warehouses, where only a small number of goods are moved, EWM should be installed on the SCM platform. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X

True

X

False

4. Which of the following are examples of transfer postings? Choose the correct answers. X

A Storage location to storage location

X

B Plant to plant

X

C Stock to stock

X

D Material to material


537




1. Warehouse Management can connect to an automated warehouse system. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X

True

X

False

2. Which of the following statements about a decentralized Warehouse Management (WM) is false? Choose the correct answer. X

A In a decentralized WM, the WM is logically or physically separated from the ERP System.

X

B The WM system manages processes, for example the creation of sales orders, purchases orders, and the corresponding deliveries.

X

C Inbound and outbound deliveries (in the ERP system) are replicated via Business Application Programming Interfaces (BAPIs) to the decentralized WM system.

X

D When goods movement, is finalized in the decentralized WM, it replicated via BAPIs to the ERP System.

3. For small warehouses, where only a small number of goods are moved, EWM should be installed on the SCM platform. Determine whether this statement is true or false.

538

X

True

X

False




4. Which of the following are examples of transfer postings? Choose the correct answers. X

A Storage location to storage location

X

B Plant to plant

X

C Stock to stock

X

D Material to material


539



540




UNIT 10

Order to Cash Processing in SAP S/4HANA

Lesson 1 Describing the Order to Cash Business Process

543

Lesson 2 Describing the Master Data Used in Sales and Distribution

545

Exercise 54: Check Material Master Record for Sales

547

Lesson 3 Creating a Customer Master Record

551

Exercise 55: Create a Customer Master Data Record

553

Lesson 4 Creating a Condition Record

559

Exercise 56: Create a Condition Record

561

Lesson 5 Processing a Sales Order

564

Exercise 57: Create a Quotation and a Sales Order

571

Exercise 58: Create a Sales Order with Reference to a Quotation

575

Exercise 59: Check and Solve Sales Order Fulfillment Issues

579

Exercise 60: Review the Sales Order

583

Lesson 6 Processing a Delivery Document

587

Exercise 61: Create a Delivery Document

593

Lesson 7 Processing a Customer Invoice

597

Exercise 62: Create a Customer Invoice

603

Exercise 63: Run a CO-PA Report

607


541


For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Unit 10: Order to Cash Processing in SAP S/4HANA

UNIT OBJECTIVES

542

●

Describe the order to cash business process

●

Describe the master data used in sales and distribution

●

Create a customer master record

●

Create a condition record

●

Process a sales order

●

Process a delivery document

●

Process a customer invoice

●

Evaluate CO-PA




Unit 10 Lesson 1 Describing the Order to Cash Business Process



The Order to Cash Business Process

Figure 261: Overview of Sales and Distribution Process

A sales order is an electronic document that captures and records your customer's request for goods or services. The sales order contains all or the information required to process the customer's request throughout the whole process cycle. Shipping processing in Sales and Distribution begins when you create the delivery document. Creating a delivery document includes copying information from the sales order, such as the materials and quantities, to the delivery document. The delivery document controls, supports, and monitors numerous subprocesses for shipping processing, such as the following: ●

Picking

●

Posting the goods issue

The posting of the goods issue can bring about a change based on a quantity basis, as well as on a value basis in stock. Changes based on a value basis are made on the relevant balance sheet accounts in financial accounting.


543



Creating a billing document includes copying information from the sales order and the delivery document onto the billing document. As a result, delivery items and order items (for example, services) can be models for the billing document. The billing document is the sales and distribution document that acts as the basis for creating invoices. The billing document also serves as a data source for financial accounting to help you to monitor and process customer payments. When you create a billing document, the G/L accounts are normally determined automatically and the relevant data is posted. The incoming payment closes the Sales and Distribution Process. It is part of the Financial Accounting application module. LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●

544





Unit 10 Lesson 2 Describing the Master Data Used in Sales and Distribution



Material Master Data Record

Figure 262: Material Master

The material master comprises the following areas: basic data, sales and distribution data, purchasing data, various further data for engineering and design, accounting, costing, warehouse management, and so on. The basic data is relevant for all areas. It is valid for all organizational units within a client. The sales organization data is relevant for sales and distribution. It is valid for the respective sales organization and the distribution channel. The sales: plant data is also relevant for sales and distribution. It is valid for the respective delivering plant. Additional data relevant for different organizational units is available for various other areas.


545



546




Unit 10 Exercise 54 Check Material Master Record for Sales

Business Example You want to sell some bikes to your customer Bikes & More in Stuttgart. Therefore, you have have to check if the relevant sales views and data for the material T-F1## is maintained. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Start the Display Material app from your TS410 group in the SAP Fiori Launchpad 2. Check the Material Master Record for the material T-F1##. Check whether the Basic Data 1, Sales: Sales Org. Data 1 and 2 and Sales: General/Plant Data views are maintained in the relevant organizational units. Use the following information: Field

Value

Material

T-F1##

Plant

1010

Sales Organization

1010


10

Which Delivering Plant , Item Category group, and Loading group are defined?


547



Unit 10 Solution 54 Check Material Master Record for Sales

Business Example You want to sell some bikes to your customer Bikes & More in Stuttgart. Therefore, you have have to check if the relevant sales views and data for the material T-F1## is maintained. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Start the Display Material app from your TS410 group in the SAP Fiori Launchpad a) Choose the Display Material tile in your TS410 group on the SAP Fiori Launchpad to start the app. 2. Check the Material Master Record for the material T-F1##. Check whether the Basic Data 1, Sales: Sales Org. Data 1 and 2 and Sales: General/Plant Data views are maintained in the relevant organizational units. Use the following information: Field

Value

Material

T-F1##

Plant

1010

Sales Organization

1010


10

Which Delivering Plant , Item Category group, and Loading group are defined?

a) Enter the Material , T-F1##. b) Select the Basic Data 1 , Sales: Sales Org. Data 1 and 2 views. c) Enter the values provided in the table for Channel .

and Sales: General/Plant Data

Plant , Sales Organization , and Distribution

d) To see which Delivering Plant is defined, choose the

Sales: Sales org. 21

e) To see which Item Category group is defined, choose the f) To see which Loading group is defined, choose the

548

button.

Sales: Sales org. 2

Sales: General/Plant Data

button. button.



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Describing the Master Data Used in Sales and Distribution

g) Leave the screen.


549




550





Unit 10 Lesson 3 Creating a Customer Master Record



Customer Master Data


The Business Partner is created and the roles necessary for the usage of the BP are assigned. The different roles are created on certain organizational levels. The FI Customer role, which is necessary to use the BP in FI based Sales postings, is assigned to the company code, so the data in this role can be maintained differently in each company code. In the general role of the business partner (BP), the BP name and address is entered. The general role data is relevant for sales and distribution and for accounting. To avoid data redundancy, it is stored centrally (client-specific). It is valid for all organizational units within a client. The customer role data is relevant for sales and distribution. It is valid for the respective sales area (sales organization, distribution channel, division). It includes all data necessary for processing orders, deliveries, invoices, and customer payments. The FI customer role data is relevant for accounting. It is valid for the respective company code. In the role FI Customer (BP used as a Customerin FI), you enter the Reconciliation Account in General Ledger. You can decide to either maintain many roles at once, or to add roles later, whenever you need them.


551



552




Unit 10 Exercise 55 Create a Customer Master Data Record

Business Example As new customers are identified, the new customer information must be entered into the system. The Business Partner record stores all customer information necessary to fulfill the order cycle. You want to sell some bikes (material T-F1##) to your new customer Bikes & More in Stuttgart. Therefore, you have to maintain company code data and sales area data in the relevant organizational areas for this customer in the system. Because the Business Partner exists in general, you only had to add the missing roles. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise requires the Vendor T-BP## that you created the exercise, Create a Vendor Master Record. 1. Start the Maintain Business Partner Launchpad.


2. Maintain the Company Code Data for business partner information:

T-BP## using the following

Field

Value

Business Partner

T-BP##

BP Role

FI Customer

Company Code

1010


12100000

3. Maintain Sales Area Data for Business partner T-BP##, using the following information: Field

Value

BP Role

Customer

Sales Organization

1010


10

Division

00

Sales District

DE0002 (Southern Germany)


553



Field

Value

Currency

EUR

Price Group

C1 (Regular Buyer)

Customer Pricing Procedure

01 (Procedure 01)

Delivering Plant

1010

Shipping Conditions

01 (Standard)

Incoterms

EXW

Inco. Location1

Plant 1

Terms of Payment

0001 (Pay immediately w/o deduction)

Account Assignment Group

01 (Domestic Revenues)

Tax Classification

1 (Liable for Taxes)

4. Maintain Sales Area Data for Business partner T-BP##. Check that the mandatory partner functions have been filled automatically. Write the values in the following table: Partner Function

Number

Sold-To Party Bill-To Party Payer Ship-to Party

554




Unit 10 Solution 55 Create a Customer Master Data Record

Business Example As new customers are identified, the new customer information must be entered into the system. The Business Partner record stores all customer information necessary to fulfill the order cycle. You want to sell some bikes (material T-F1##) to your new customer Bikes & More in Stuttgart. Therefore, you have to maintain company code data and sales area data in the relevant organizational areas for this customer in the system. Because the Business Partner exists in general, you only had to add the missing roles. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise requires the Vendor T-BP## that you created the exercise, Create a Vendor Master Record. 1. Start the Maintain Business Partner Launchpad.


a) Choose the corresponding tile in your TS410 group on the SAP Fiori Launchpad to start the app. 2. Maintain the Company Code Data for business partner information:

T-BP## using the following

Field

Value

Business Partner

T-BP##

BP Role

FI Customer

Company Code

1010


12100000

a) Enter the Business Partner

T-BP##.

b) Switch to Change mode by using the respective button. c) In the Change in BP Role field, choose the

FI Customer value.

d) Choose Company Code at the top of the screen. e) Enter the Company Code 1010.


555



f) On the Customer: Account Management 12100000.

tab, enter the


Hint: If you cannot enter a Reconciliation Account because the field is grey, click the Company Codes button and select Customer for the company Code 1010. g) Save your entries, but do not leave the screen. 3. Maintain Sales Area Data for Business partner T-BP##, using the following information: Field

Value

BP Role

Customer

Sales Organization

1010


10

Division

00

Sales District

DE0002 (Southern Germany)

Currency

EUR

Price Group

C1 (Regular Buyer)

Customer Pricing Procedure

01 (Procedure 01)

Delivering Plant

1010

Shipping Conditions

01 (Standard)

Incoterms

EXW

Inco. Location1

Plant 1

Terms of Payment

0001 (Pay immediately w/o deduction)

Account Assignment Group

01 (Domestic Revenues)

Tax Classification

1 (Liable for Taxes)

a) In the Change in BP role field, choose the value b) Choose Sales and Distribution

Customer .

at the top of the screen.

c) Enter the values provided in the table for Division .

Sales Organization , Distribution Channel , and

d) Confirm your entries by pressing Enter. e) On the Orders tab, enter the values provided in the table for the Sales District , Currency , Price Group , and Customer Pricing Procedure fields.

556



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Creating a Customer Master Record

f) On the Shipping tab, enter the values provided in the table for the Shipping Conditions .

Delivering Plant and

g) On the Billing tab, enter the values provided in the table for Incoterms , Inco. Location1 , Terms of Payment, Account Assignment Group , and Tax Classification . Note that you might have to scroll to access the entries. h) Save your entries. 4. Maintain Sales Area Data for Business partner T-BP##. Check that the mandatory partner functions have been filled automatically. Write the values in the following table: Partner Function

Number

Sold-To Party Bill-To Party Payer Ship-to Party a) On the Partner Functions tab page, in the Customer Data of your new business partner (T-CUS## ), check the values for the partner functions and write them in the table.


557




558





Unit 10 Lesson 4 Creating a Condition Record



Condition Records

Figure 264: Condition Master Data

The condition master data includes prices, surcharges, and discounts, freights, and taxes. You can define condition master data (condition records) to be dependent on various data. You can, for example, maintain a material price customer-specifically or define a discount to be dependent on the customer and the material pricing group. In Customizing, you can control the data on which prices, surcharges, and discounts, freights, or taxes can be dependent. (You can define conditions to be dependent on any document fields). Frequently occurring cases have already been set in the standard system.


559



560




Unit 10 Exercise 56 Create a Condition Record

Business Example Your customer may negotiate special pricing or discounts with you. These special deals are maintained in the SAP S/4HANA Enterprise Management System as “conditions”. You want to create a customer material specific price for your new customer T-BP## and the Bike TF11##. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Using the Set Material Prices the following information:

app, maintain the Price Data for the customer T-BP## using

Field

Value

Condition Type

PPR0

Sales Organization

1010


10

Customer

T-BP##

Material

T-F1##

Valid On

Today

Amount

444 Euro


561



Unit 10 Solution 56 Create a Condition Record

Business Example Your customer may negotiate special pricing or discounts with you. These special deals are maintained in the SAP S/4HANA Enterprise Management System as “conditions”. You want to create a customer material specific price for your new customer T-BP## and the Bike TF11##. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Using the Set Material Prices the following information:

app, maintain the Price Data for the customer T-BP## using

Field

Value

Condition Type

PPR0

Sales Organization

1010


10

Customer

T-BP##

Material

T-F1##

Valid On

Today

Amount

444 Euro

a) Choose the Set Material Prices

from your TS410 group in the SAP Fiori Launchpad.

b) Enter Condition Type PPR0 and press Enter. c) In the dialog box, select

Customer and Material with Release status.

d) On the Screen Change Price (PPR0): Selection screen enter the values provided in the table for the Sales Organization , Distribution Channel , Customer , Material , and Valid On fields. e) Click the Execute button on the top of the screen. f) On the Change Price Condition (PPR0): Overview press Enter. g) Maintain the price by entering

screen, enter

Material T-F1## and

444 in the Amount field.

h) Save your entries.

562



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Creating a Condition Record




563



Unit 10 Lesson 5 Processing a Sales Order



Sales Order Processing

Figure 265: Sales Order Processing

Transactions are application programs that execute business processes in the SAP system, such as creating a sales order, posting an incoming payment, or approving a leave request. A document is a data record that is generated when a transaction is carried out. It reproduces a business event in the system. Output is information that is sent to the customer via various media, such as mail, EDI, or fax, for example, the printout of an order confirmation. When creating an order for a customer, you must consider transport agreements, delivery, and payment conditions, and so on, with business partners. To avoid re-entering this information each time for every activity related to these business partners, relevant data for the activity from the master record of the business partner is simply copied. In the same way, the material master record stores information. This concept is valid for processing data for each master record included in the activity.

564



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Processing a Sales Order

When performing each transaction, applicable organizational elements must be assigned. Assignments to the enterprise structure in the document are generated in addition to the information stored for the customer and material. Sales Document Structure

Figure 266: Sales Document Structure

A sales document is grouped into three levels: header, item, and schedule line. Data is distributed on these levels as follows: ●

Sales document header The data in the document header is valid for the entire document. This includes, for example, customer-related data.

●

Sales document items Each item in the sales document contains its own data. This includes, for example, data about the material and quantities ordered. Each sales document can have several items, while individual items can be controlled differently. Examples include material item, service item, free-of-charge item, or text item.

●

Item schedule lines Schedule lines contain delivery quantities and delivery dates. They belong uniquely to an item. Every item that has a subsequent outbound delivery in the sales and distribution process must have at least a schedule line. The item can have several schedule lines, for example when the quantity ordered is to be delivered in several partial deliveries at different times.

To process the sales documents efficiently, the data can be displayed and processed in different views. The views are grouped into overview, header, and item screens. A new sales document is entered on an overview screen.


565



Sales Order Processing

Figure 267: Sales Order Processing

When an order is processed, the system can run various function to accelerate and assist the order processing. Partners

Figure 268: Partners

You store the partner functions for the customer master in the customer master sales area data. During sales order processing, they are copied as default values into the documents.

566




For sales order processing, you need the mandatory partner functions sold-to party, ship-to party, payer, and bill-to party. In the course of processing a sales order, they can differ from each other or can be identical. The functions are as follows: ●

Sold-to party: places the order

●

Ship-to party: receives goods or services

●

Bill-to party: receives the invoice for goods or services

●

Payer: is responsible for paying the invoice

Other partner functions, such as contact person or forwarding agent, are not required for sales order processing. Partners in the Sales Process

Figure 269: Partners in the Sales Process

You can maintain partner relationships both in sales documents and in the master data. Partner relationships are usually already defined in the business partner record. These are proposed automatically in the document header when you create a sales document. Providing Customizing permits it, you can change or supplement these relationships manually by going to the partner screen and changing the function assignment. You decide whether several partners can be assigned to one partner function in the business partner record in Customizing. If multiple partners are maintained with the same function, a selection list appears containing these partners when you then enter a sales order. In the sales documents, the system has been configured so that only one partner can be assigned to each partner function. The only exception is for outline agreements (partner functions AA and AW). You can also define partners at item level in the sales documents. You can determine which partner functions have to be entered (mandatory functions). You can prohibit anyone from changing a partner that has already been entered (You can indicate that the sold-to party cannot be changed in the sales document for example). It is also possible to enter or change the address of a partner such as the ship-to party manually. This change does not affect the master record.


567



Pricing in Sales Orders

Figure 270: Pricing in Sales Orders

Prices, surcharges, discounts, freight, and taxes (conditions) for a business transaction can be found automatically using the automatic pricing function (condition technique). You can also change these conditions manually. Availability Check in the Sales Order

Figure 271: Availability Check in the Sales Order

568




When you enter a sales order, you can only confirm the delivery of the goods for the required delivery date if the goods are available for all the necessary processing activities, which take place before delivery. On the Sales and Distribution tab page in the material master you can, in Gen./Plant, in the Availability Check field, enter which or what type of availability check should be carried out for this material during order processing. There are also various tables in Customizing, on which the availability check is also dependent. From the availability control screen, you can access the Available to Promise (ATP) quantities, the scope of check for determining available quantity, and the other plants that may have the material available. Incompletion Log

Figure 272: Incompletion Log

Each sales and distribution document contains data required for the document and for further processing. The system determines which fields are displayed in the incompletion log when the user does not fill them during sales order processing. The incompletion log will be displayed automatically when you save your entries. You can also call it by choosing Edit → Incompletion log . In Customizing, you can decide which fields should be part of the incompletion log. The incompletion log functions are available in the sales order and in the delivery.


569



Output

Figure 273: Output

Output is information that is sent to the customer via various media, such as mail, EDI, or fax. Examples include the printout of a quotation or an order confirmation, order confirmations via EDI, or invoices by fax. As with pricing, output determination takes place using the condition technique. Output can be sent for various sales and distribution documents (order, delivery, billing document, and so on). In the output master data, you define the transmission medium, the time, and the partner function for an output type. Output types include quotations, order confirmations, and invoices. Partner functions include sold-to parties, ship-to parties, and bill-to parties. Transmission media include printers, telex, fax, mail, and EDI. Output can be sent, for example, as soon as data is saved, or by means of a standard program that is run regularly (RSNAST00). The layout of an output is defined by a form in SAPscript, Smartform, or PDF. The form is assigned to an output type.

570




Unit 10 Exercise 57 Create a Quotation and a Sales Order

Business Example Your customer T-BP## Bike & More request 10 bikes T-F1##. You want to make him a quotation with special conditions. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Create a quotation using the Create Quotation using the following information:

app from your group

Field

Value

Quotation Type

QT

Sales Organization

1010


10

Division

00

Sold-To party

T-BP##

Valid To

End of next month

Material

T-F1##

Order Quantity

10

Payment Terms

0003

Price (PPR0)

399 Euro

TS410 group and

Write down the quotation number. Quotation number:_______________________________________________________


571



Unit 10 Solution 57 Create a Quotation and a Sales Order

Business Example Your customer T-BP## Bike & More request 10 bikes T-F1##. You want to make him a quotation with special conditions. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Create a quotation using the Create Quotation using the following information:

app from your group

Field

Value

Quotation Type

QT

Sales Organization

1010


10

Division

00

Sold-To party

T-BP##

Valid To

End of next month

Material

T-F1##

Order Quantity

10

Payment Terms

0003

Price (PPR0)

399 Euro

TS410 group and

Write down the quotation number. Quotation number:_______________________________________________________ a) Choose the Create Quotation

app from your TS410 group on the SAP Fiori Launchpad.

b) On the Create Quotation: Initial Screen , enter the Quotation Type and the relevant organizational data as provided in the table. c) Press Enter. d) On the Create Quotation: Overview screen, enter the values provided in the table for the Sold-To Party , Valid To date, Material , and Ordered Quantity . e) Press Enter.

572




f) Click the Sales button and change the Payment Terms to 0003 within 14 days 3& cash discount, within 20 days 2& cash discount and within 30 days Due net. g) Select the item 10 and click the

Display Item Details icon.

h) Click the Conditions button and change the

Price (PPR0) to 399 Euro.

i) Save the Quotation. The Quotation number is displayed on the bottom of the screen. j) Write down the Quotation number in the space provided.


573



574




Unit 10 Exercise 58 Create a Sales Order with Reference to a Quotation

Business Example The Quotation you created in exercise before convinced your customer. He orders the bikes. Therefore, you have to create a sales order with reference to the quotation. You do not enter a PO Number, so the Sales Order will be saved as incomplete. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise uses the quotation number from the exercise, Create a Quotation. 1. Start the Create Sales Order

app from your TS410 group in the SAP Fiori Launchpad.

2. Create a Sales Order with reference to a quotation using the following information: Field

Value

Order Type

OR

Sales Organization

1010


10

Division

00

Sold-To party

T-BP##

Material

T-F1##

Order Quantity

10

Payment Terms

0003

Write down the Sales Order Number. Sales Order Number:_________________________________________________________


575



Unit 10 Solution 58 Create a Sales Order with Reference to a Quotation

Business Example The Quotation you created in exercise before convinced your customer. He orders the bikes. Therefore, you have to create a sales order with reference to the quotation. You do not enter a PO Number, so the Sales Order will be saved as incomplete. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise uses the quotation number from the exercise, Create a Quotation. 1. Start the Create Sales Order


a) Choose the corresponding tile in your TS410 group on the SAP Fiori Launchpad to start the app. 2. Create a Sales Order with reference to a quotation using the following information: Field

Value

Order Type

OR

Sales Organization

1010


10

Division

00

Sold-To party

T-BP##

Material

T-F1##

Order Quantity

10

Payment Terms

0003

a) On the Create Sales Order: Initial Screen , enter the Order Type and the relevant organizational data as provided in the table. b) To reference to the Quotation, choose the

Create with Reference

button.

c) In the Create with Reference dialog box, enter the Quotation Number exercise, Create a Quotation, and choose the Copy button.

from the previous

d) Press Enter.

576




e) Confirm the message:

Enter Customer Reference by pressing Enter.

f) Save the Sales Order . g) In the Save Incomplete Document

dialog box, choose

Save .

h) Write down the Sales Order Number. The Sales Order number is displayed on the bottom of the screen Hint: Normally, you enter a PO-number in the order. Here, you don't, because we want to create an incomplete order, which is important for next exercise. There, we want to check and solve Sales Order Fulfillment Issues. Write down the Sales Order Number. Sales Order Number:_________________________________________________________


577



578




Unit 10 Exercise 59 Check and Solve Sales Order Fulfillment Issues

Business Example You want to check issues in the Sales Order Fulfillment process with the Sales Order Fulfillment Cockpit. You will find the Sales Order that you created in the exercise before and saved without a PO number. You complete your Sales Order to enable the further distribution process. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise uses the Sales Order created in the exercise, Create a Sales Order with Reference to a Quotation. 1. Start the Sales Order Fulfillment Issues Launchpad.


2. How many issues exist in total in Sales Organization 1010 Dom. Sales Org DE? Total number of issues in sales Organization 1010 Dom. Sales Org DE: __________________________________________________________________ 3. How many issues exist in total for your Customer

T-BP## ?

Total number of issues for Customer T-BP##: __________________________________________________________________ 4. Check the issues for your Customer and resolve any issues. 5. How many issues exits now in total for your Customer T-BP##? Total number of issues for Customer T-BP##: __________________________________________________________________


579



Unit 10 Solution 59 Check and Solve Sales Order Fulfillment Issues

Business Example You want to check issues in the Sales Order Fulfillment process with the Sales Order Fulfillment Cockpit. You will find the Sales Order that you created in the exercise before and saved without a PO number. You complete your Sales Order to enable the further distribution process. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise uses the Sales Order created in the exercise, Create a Sales Order with Reference to a Quotation. 1. Start the Sales Order Fulfillment Issues Launchpad.


a) To start the Sales Order Fulfillment Issues TS410 group on the SAP Fiori Launchpad.

app, choose the corresponding tile in your

Be sure that you choose the Sales Order Fulfillment Issues (Analyse Issues ) app, and not the Sales Order Fulfillment Issues (Resolve Issues) app. 2. How many issues exist in total in Sales Organization 1010 Dom. Sales Org DE? a) On the Sales Order Fulfillment Issue Screen Sales Organizations.

, you see the number of issues in the Top 10

b) Note the number of issues in Sales Organization 1010 Dom. Sales Org. Total number of issues in sales Organization 1010 Dom. Sales Org DE: __________________________________________________________________ 3. How many issues exist in total for your Customer a) On the Sales Order Fulfillment Issue Screen left. For a clear view, choose

T-BP## ? , select Customer in the select list on the

Tabular view (small icon on the right top of the screen).

b) Note the number of issues for Customer T-BP##. Total number of issues for Customer T-BP##: __________________________________________________________________ 4. Check the issues for your Customer and resolve any issues. a) Select your Customer

T-BP## and choose

b) Choose Resolve Sales Order Issues

580

Open .

.




Your Sales Order from the previous exercise, Create a Sales Order with Reference to a Quotation, will be listed. c) Click the arrow on the right to open the screen issues details. d) Choose Open and select Sales Order . e) On the Display Standard Order * Overview Order → Edit .

screen, from the Menu, choose

f) On the Change Standard Order * Overview Edit → Incompletion Log .

screen, from the Menu, choose

Hint: Confirm the Enter Customer Reference

Sales

message by pressing Enter.

g) Choose the Complete Data button on the top. h) Fill in the PO number ##-Sales Order in the screen.

Display Standard Order * Header Data

i) Choose Back . j) Save the Order Change. 5. How many issues exits now in total for your Customer T-BP##? Total number of issues for Customer T-BP##: __________________________________________________________________ a) Go back to the Sales Order Fulfillment Tab

of your Browser.

b) Refresh the Issue Detail screen. There a no issues for your Customer.


581



582




Unit 10 Exercise 60 Review the Sales Order

Business Example You want to check the Sales Order that you created in the previous exercise, Check and Solve Sales Order Fulfillment Issues. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise uses the Sales Order created in the exercise, Check and Solve Sales Order Fulfillment Issues. 1. Start the Display Sales Order


2. What is the Shipping Condition of the Sales Order? You find the Shipping Condition in the Header Data of the

Shipping tab.

Shipping Condition: __________________________________________________________________ 3. From which Plant will the Bikes be delivered, and what is the You find the (Delivery)

Shipping Point ?

Plant and the Shipping Point on the Shipping of Item Data

tab.

(Delivery) Plant:_________________________________________________________ Shipping Point:__________________________________________________________ 4. What is the delivery date and what quantity is confirmed? You find the Delivery Date and the Confirmed Quantity Item.

in the Schedule Line(s)

of the order

Delivery Date:_________________________________________________________ Confirmed Quantity:__________________________________________________________ 5. What is the Total Processing status and the Delivery status of the order? Total Processing Status:_________________________________________________________ Delivery Status:__________________________________________________________ 6. View the Document flow of the order.


583



Unit 10 Solution 60 Review the Sales Order

Business Example You want to check the Sales Order that you created in the previous exercise, Check and Solve Sales Order Fulfillment Issues. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise uses the Sales Order created in the exercise, Check and Solve Sales Order Fulfillment Issues. 1. Start the Display Sales Order


a) To start the Display Sales Order app, choose the corresponding tile in your TS410 group on the SAP Fiori Launchpad. 2. What is the Shipping Condition of the Sales Order? You find the Shipping Condition in the Header Data of the

Shipping tab.

a) On the Display Standard Order: Initial Screen , enter the Order number from the exercise, Check and Solve Sales Order Fulfillment Issues, and press Enter. b) On the Display Standard Order * Overview icon. c) On the Display Standard Order * Header

screen, choose the screen, choose the

Display Header Data Shipping button.

d) Note the Shipping Condition . e) Choose Back to return to the

Display Standard Order * Overview

screen

Shipping Condition: __________________________________________________________________ 3. From which Plant will the Bikes be delivered, and what is the You find the (Delivery)

Shipping Point ?

Plant and the Shipping Point on the Shipping of Item Data

a) On the Display Standard Order * Overview Display Item Details icon.

screen, select

b) On the Display Standard Order * Item Data

screen, choose the

c) Note the (Delivery)

tab.

Item 10 and choose the Shipping button.

Plant and the Shipping Point .

d) Choose Back to return to the


screen

(Delivery) Plant:_________________________________________________________ Shipping Point:__________________________________________________________ 4. What is the delivery date and what quantity is confirmed?

584




You find the Delivery Date and the Confirmed Quantity Item. a) On the Display Standard Order * Overview Schedule Lines for Item icon. You are now on the Schedule Line(s)

in the Schedule Line(s)

screen, select

Display Standard Order * Item Data

of the order

Item 10 and choose the screen, and can see the

b) Note the Delivery Date and the Confirmed Quantity . c) Choose Back to return to the


screen

Delivery Date:_________________________________________________________ Confirmed Quantity:__________________________________________________________ 5. What is the Total Processing status and the Delivery status of the order? a) On the Display Standard Order * Overview b) On the Sales order: Status Overview the relevant status. c) Note the Total Processing

Status Overview button.

screen, expand the current header status and note

and the Delivery status.

The Total Processing status is The Delivery status is

screen, choose the

Open .

Not delivered .

Delivery Status:__________________________________________________________ d) Choose Back to return to the


screen

Total Processing Status:_________________________________________________________ Delivery Status:__________________________________________________________ 6. View the Document flow of the order. a) On the Display Standard Order * Overview screen place the cursor in a header field (for example, Sold-To party ) and choose the Display document flow button. You see the document flow on header level for your order. You see that your order is based on your quotation.


585




586





Unit 10 Lesson 6 Processing a Delivery Document



Processing a Delivery Document

Figure 274: The Shipping Process

You trigger shipping activities by creating deliveries. The responsible organizational unit for creating deliveries is the shipping point. The shipping point is the highest-level organizational unit of shipping that controls your shipping activities. Each outbound delivery is processed by one shipping point. The shipping point can be a loading ramp, a mail depot, or a rail depot. It can also be, for example, a group of employees responsible (only) for organizing urgent deliveries. You assign a shipping point at plant level. A shipping point is a physical place and should be near the delivering plant. More than one shipping point can be assigned to a plant. You can also assign several shipping points to a plant. This can also be appropriate for plants in physical proximity. The responsible shipping point is determined for each order item. The system automatically proposes a shipping point that you can change within given limits. The shipping point cannot


587



be changed in the outbound delivery. When an order is processed for delivery by the shipping point, the system only copies into the outbound delivery those order items that are defined for this shipping point. Order items with different shipping points are therefore not copied into the same outbound delivery. Shipping Processing

Figure 275: Shipping Processing

Delivery Document Structure

Figure 276: Structure of Delivery Document

588



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Processing a Delivery Document

A delivery document is grouped into two levels: header and item. The data is distributed across these levels as follows: ●

Delivery document header The data for the document header is valid for the entire document. This includes, for example, data for the ship-to party and schedules for shipping processing.

●

Delivery document item Each item in the delivery document contains its own data. This includes data about the material, quantities, and weights as well as stock information. Each delivery document can have several items. The items can be controlled differently. Examples include material item, free-of-charge item, or text item.

The delivery document does not contain schedule lines. Each schedule line in the sales document can become an item in the delivery document. To process delivery documents efficiently, the data can be read and processed in different views. The views are grouped into overview, header, and item screens. Prerequisites for Delivering an Order

Figure 277: PrerequisitesforDeliveringanOrder

Before an order can be delivered, it needs a ship-to party, a plant, and a shipping line. In addition, the schedule line needs a confirmed quantity and the order must be due.


589



Options for Creating Outbound Deliveries

Figure 278: Options for Creating Outbound Deliveries

You can create an outbound delivery

manually , with or without reference to a particular order.

If you use collective processing (delivery list) , you can deliver goods for all types of shipping documents. In this case, the system creates multiple outbound deliveries automatically. This can take place online or in the background (overnight, for instance).

Picking Process

Figure 279: Picking Outbound Deliveries

590




Picking is the process of preparing or providing goods for delivery to the customer with special attention paid to dates, quantity, and quality. Picking often takes place using the printout of a picking list . In the standard configuration of the system, the prerequisite for posting goods issue is that picking-relevant items are completely picked. This means that the delivery quantity and the pick quantity in the outbound delivery must be the same. Collective Processing in Picking

Figure 280: Collective Processing in Picking

You can introduce picking via collective processing. To do this, you select a work list from all the outbound deliveries ready for picking and edit the relevant deliveries.


591



Goods Issue Processing

Figure 281: Post Goods Issue

When you post goods issue, the system automatically performs the following tasks: ●

●

592

Updates the quantities in inventory management by creating a material document and delivery requirements in materials planning Updates the value change in the balance sheet accounts for inventory accounting by creating an accounting document, which decreases inventory valuation (the postings from the relevant accounting document are based on the cost of the material)

●

Generates additional documents for accounting, for example, for controlling

●

Generates the billing due list

●

Updates the status in all relevant sales documents




Unit 10 Exercise 61 Create a Delivery Document

Business Example To trigger and proceed shipping process, you have to create a Delivery for your Sales Order. After you created the delivery document, you pick the item and post the goods issue. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Create the outbound delivery with reference to the sales order for shipping point your Ship-To Party T-BP## .

1010 and

Write down the document number of the delivery: Document Number:______________________________________ 2. Check the status of the order again. What is the Total processing order?

status, the

Delivery status and the

Billing status of the Sales

Total processing status: ____________________________________________ Billing status: ______________________________________________________ Delivery status:____________________________________________________ 3. View the Document flow of the order and check the (overall) status of your delivery. What is the status of your delivery?_________________________________________ 4. Pick 10 PC of the material for the outbound delivery and post the goods issue. 5. Post the goods issue. 6. Check the status of your delivery using the information.

Outbound Delivery app and the following

Field

Value

Shipping Point

1010

Picking Date

All

Planned GI Date

All

Overall Status

GI Posted

Ship-To Party

T-BP##

What is the Picking status of your delivery?_________________________________________ What is the GI status of your delivery?_________________________________________


593



Unit 10 Solution 61 Create a Delivery Document

Business Example To trigger and proceed shipping process, you have to create a Delivery for your Sales Order. After you created the delivery document, you pick the item and post the goods issue. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Create the outbound delivery with reference to the sales order for shipping point your Ship-To Party T-BP## .

1010 and

a) Start the Create Outbound Deliveries app, by choosing the corresponding tile in your TS410 group on the SAP Fiori Launchpad. b) In the Shipping Point field, enter 1010 and, in the Ship-To Party field, enter T-BP##. c) To see a list of sales documents corresponding to your selection, choose d) Select your sales order and choose e) To navigate the log, choose

Go.

Create Deliveries at the bottom of the screen.

Display Log .

f) Choose the Deliveries category. You find the document number of the created outbound delivery in the log. Write down the document number of the delivery: Document Number:______________________________________ 2. Check the status of the order again. What is the Total processing order?

status, the

Delivery status and the

Billing status of the Sales

a) Start the Display Sales Order app, by choosing the corresponding tile in your TS410 group on the SAP Fiori Launchpad. b) On the On the Display Sales Order: Initial Screen previous exercise and press Enter.

, enter the Order (number) from the

c) On the On the Display Sales Order: Overview Screen, button. d) On the Sales Order: Status Overview Screen note the relevant status. e) Choose the Back button to return to the

, choose the

Status Overview

, expand the current header status and Display Standard Order *: Overview Screen

.

Total processing status: ____________________________________________ Billing status: ______________________________________________________

594




Delivery status:____________________________________________________ 3. View the Document flow of the order and check the (overall) status of your delivery. What is the status of your delivery?_________________________________________ a) On the Display Standard Order *: Overview Screen , place your cursor in a header field (for example, Sold-To party ) and choose the Display Document Flow button. You see the document flow on header level for your order. Your order is based on your quotation and you see the delivery based on your sales order. The status of the delivery is

Open .

4. Pick 10 PC of the material for the outbound delivery and post the goods issue. a) Start the Pick Outbound Delivery Launchpad.

app in your Order Fulfillment group on the SAP Fiori

b) Enter the number of your outbound delivery in the corresponding field and press Enter. c) On the Pick Outbound Delivery screen, ensure that you are in the and enter 10 PC as Picking Quantity .

Picking process step

d) Choose Save . e) Stay in the app. 5. Post the goods issue. a) In the Pick Outbound Delivery

app, choose the

GI Ready view.

b) Choose Post GI . 6. Check the status of your delivery using the information.

Outbound Delivery app and the following

Field

Value

Shipping Point

1010

Picking Date

All

Planned GI Date

All

Overall Status

GI Posted

Ship-To Party

T-BP##

a) Choose the Outbound Delivery app in your Order Fulfillment group on the SAP Fiori Launchpad. b) On the Outbound Delivery Screen choose Go. On the Outbound Delivery Screen status information.

, enter the relevant data as provided in the table and , your delivery is listed and you find the relevant

What is the Picking status of your delivery?_________________________________________ What is the GI status of your delivery?_________________________________________


595




596





Unit 10 Lesson 7 Processing a Customer Invoice



●

Evaluate CO-PA

Processing a Customer Invoice Billing Supports The process of billing supports the following: ●

Creating invoices for products and services

●

Creating credit and debit memos

●

Canceling previously posted billing documents

●

Transferring billing document data to accounting automatically

When you create a billing document, data is copied from the sales order and the delivery document to the billing document. Delivery items as well as order items (for example, services) can be references for the billing document. The billing document serves several important functions: ● ●

●

It is the sales and distribution document that helps you to generate invoices. The billing document serves as a data source for financial accounting (FI) to help you to monitor and process customer payments. When you create a billing document, the G/L accounts will normally be updated automatically.

During this process, the System system carries out the following tasks: ●

Debit posting on the customer receivables account

●

Credit posting on the revenue account


597



Billing Processing

Figure 282: Billing Processing

Creating a Billing Document

Figure 283: Creating a Billing Document

You can create an invoice for a single delivery or sales order. The system can also combine a number of outbound deliveries in one billing document if they have the same characteristics, such as the following:

598



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Processing a Customer Invoice

●

Payer

●

Billing date

●

Destination country

The system can create invoices either on-line or as a background job to be executed during off-peak hours. Billing Document Structure

Figure 284: Billing Document Structure

A billing document is grouped into two levels: header and item. The data is distributed across these levels accordingly, as follows: ●

Billing document header The data for the document header is valid for the entire document. This includes, for example, data about the payer and billing date.

●

Billing document item Each item in the billing document contains its own data. This includes, for example, details about the material, billing quantities, and net values for the items. Each billing document can have several items.

To ensure that the billing documents are processed efficiently, the data can be read and processed in different views. The views are grouped into overview, header, and item screens.


599



Effects of Billing Document

Figure 285: Effects of Billing Document

When you save the billing document, the system automatically generates all the required documents for accounting. In accounting, the System carries out a debit posting on the customer receivables account and a credit posting on the revenue account. The accounting document contains all the completed postings in financial accounting that refer back to pricing in Sales andDistribution, for example, the receivable on the customer account or the obtained net sales and taxes on the relevant G/L accounts. When you save the billing document, further documents for accounting can be automatically generated by the system, for example, for the components Controlling (CO), profitability analysis, market segment analysis (CO-PA) or consolidation (FI-LC). When the billing document is posted, the following also occurs:

600

●

The status in all related sales, delivery, and billing documents, is updated

●

The sales statistics in the sales information system are updated

●

The customer credit account is updated




Document Flow

Figure 286: Document Flow

The documents within a sales and distribution process are linked to each other via the document flow. This enables you to access the history and current status of your sales and distribution processes at any time. You can display the document flow as a list with the linked documents. Depending on the document from which you call up the list, all the relevant preceding and subsequent documents are displayed. From this list, you can display the relevant documents or call up status overviews for the documents. This provides a quick overview of the progress of your sales processes at any time and can be used to answer customer questions quickly and reliably.


601



602




Unit 10 Exercise 62 Create a Customer Invoice

Business Example After you delivered the bikes, you want to invoice them. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise uses the outbound delivery from the previous exercise, Create a Delivery Document. Create the Billing Document Create the billing document with reference to the outbound delivery you created in the exercise before. Write down the document number of the billing document. 1. Start the Create Billing Document


2. Create the billing document with reference to the outbound delivery you created in the exercise, Create a Delivery Document. Write down the document number of the billing document. Billing document number:________________________________ View the Document Flow for your Sales Order 1. Start the Display Sales Order


2. View the document flow for your Sales order from the exercise, Create a Delivery Document. 3. Check the billing status of the sales Order.


603



Unit 10 Solution 62 Create a Customer Invoice

Business Example After you delivered the bikes, you want to invoice them. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise uses the outbound delivery from the previous exercise, Create a Delivery Document. Create the Billing Document Create the billing document with reference to the outbound delivery you created in the exercise before. Write down the document number of the billing document. 1. Start the Create Billing Document


a) To start the Create Billing Document group on the SAP Fiori Launchpad.

app, choose the corresponding tile in your TS410

Hint: Use the Create Billing Documents ADVANCED

app.

2. Create the billing document with reference to the outbound delivery you created in the exercise, Create a Delivery Document. a) In the Document field, enter the document number of your delivery from the exercise, Create a Delivery Document and press Enter. b) On the Invoice (F2) Create: Overview of Billing Items billing document.

screen, choose

Save to create the

The number of the created document is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Write down the document number of the billing document. Billing document number:________________________________ View the Document Flow for your Sales Order 1. Start the Display Sales Order


a) To start the Display Sales Order app, choose the corresponding tile in your TS410 group on the SAP Fiori Launchpad. 2. View the document flow for your Sales order from the exercise, Create a Delivery Document. a) On the Display Sales Order: Initial Screen , in the Order field, enter the document number of your Sales order from the exercise, Create a Delivery Document.

604




b) Confirm your entry by pressing Enter. c) On the Display Standard Order *: Overview Screen , place your cursor in a header field (for example, Sold-To party ) and choose the Display Document Flow button. You see the document flow on header level for your order. You see that your order is based on your quotation. Based on the Sales order, you find the delivery, and based on the delivery, you see the Picking request, the post issue document, and the invoice. Based on the invoice, you find the Accounting document. All (overall) Status is complete, except for the Accounting document. The status not cleared means that there is no payment posted in accounting. 3. Check the billing status of the sales Order. a) In the document flow, select

Standard Order

and choose the

Status Overview button.

b) Expand the Status header. The Billing status is


Fully invoiced .

605



606




Unit 10 Exercise 63 Run a CO-PA Report

Business Example You have entered the business transactions in the “Production Process” and in “sales and distribution”. You now want to examine the results from various market segments. You want to know where your profits rose and where they fell, and analyze the causes of these changes. This information is required not only at the end of the period, but also after each sales transaction. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. Display Line Items in Posting-Based CO-PA Generated by the System In this task, you display the line items generated by the system, which are a result of billing and settling the produced finished goods. Note: Make sure that you switch to the costing based CO-PA using the menu path Controlling → Profitability Analysis → Environment → Set operating concern Choose operating concern A000 and select Costing-based CO-PA .

.

1. As a result of billing now and settling the production order for T-F1## in the production process earlier, postings were made to CO-PA, for which the system generated line items. Display the line items by choosing Actual Postings from the menu. Use the following information: Selection Field

Value

Period from


Period to

mmm.year

Plan/Act. Indicator

0 (Actual)

Record Type

F

Perform Profit Analysis for Contribution Margin Report in Costing-Based CO-PA In this task, you examine the results for your company. Run in account-based CO-PA the contribution margin report S4F20CM (graphical report output) for the current fiscal year. 1. Run the contribution margin report S4F20CM (graphical report output) for the current fiscal year. Use the following information: Selection Field

Value

Fiscal Year

current year


607



Selection Field

Value

Period from

1

Period to

12

Version

0 (Actual)



T-F1## .

3. Drill down to the actual line items for customer T-BP## to view the postings you made to CO-PA and analyze the corresponding accounting documents. Perform Profit Analysis for Contribution Margin Report in Account-Based CO-PA In this task, you examine the results for your company. Run in costing-based CO-PA the contribution margin report S4F20CM (graphical report output) for the current fiscal year. Note: Make sure that you switch to the account-based CO-PA via menu path → Profitability Analysis → Environment → Set operating concern operating concern A000 and select Account-based CO-PA .


1. Run the contribution margin report S4F20CM (graphical report output) for the current fiscal year. Use the following information: Selection Field

Value

Fiscal Year

current year

Period from

1

Period to

12

Version

0 (Actual)



T-F1## .


608




Unit 10 Solution 63 Run a CO-PA Report

Business Example You have entered the business transactions in the “Production Process” and in “sales and distribution”. You now want to examine the results from various market segments. You want to know where your profits rose and where they fell, and analyze the causes of these changes. This information is required not only at the end of the period, but also after each sales transaction. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. Display Line Items in Posting-Based CO-PA Generated by the System In this task, you display the line items generated by the system, which are a result of billing and settling the produced finished goods. Note: Make sure that you switch to the costing based CO-PA using the menu path Controlling → Profitability Analysis → Environment → Set operating concern Choose operating concern A000 and select Costing-based CO-PA .

.

1. As a result of billing now and settling the production order for T-F1## in the production process earlier, postings were made to CO-PA, for which the system generated line items. Display the line items by choosing Actual Postings from the menu. Use the following information: Selection Field

Value

Period from


Period to

mmm.year

Plan/Act. Indicator

0 (Actual)

Record Type

F

a) In the SAP Easy Access Menu , go to Accounting → Controlling → Profitability Analysis → Information System → Execute Report . b) Execute the report

S4F20LI and enter the data provided in the table.

c) Execute the Line Item Based Report

.

d) In the Navigation Panel , double-click Sales Order .


609



e) Position your cursor on the Gross Revenue key figure displayed for your sales order and select Go to — Line Items. f) You can navigate from the CO-PA line item to the FI/CO documents FI/CO documents to the billing document and your sales order.

and from the

Perform Profit Analysis for Contribution Margin Report in Costing-Based CO-PA In this task, you examine the results for your company. Run in account-based CO-PA the contribution margin report S4F20CM (graphical report output) for the current fiscal year. 1. Run the contribution margin report S4F20CM (graphical report output) for the current fiscal year. Use the following information: Selection Field

Value

Fiscal Year

current year

Period from

1

Period to

12

Version

0 (Actual)

a) On the SAP Fiori Launchpad, select the Market Segments Plan/Actuals app and choose Accounting → Controlling → Profitability Analysis → Information System → Execute Report . b) On the Run Profitability Report: Initial c) Execute the report

screen, select



d) Choose Execute . 2. Analyze the result of the customer


T-F1## .

a) On the Execute Profitability Report screen, in the Navigation area, double-click Customer to list all the customers to whom we sold products in the current year. b) Double-click customer


In the Form area, you can now see a contribution margin report for this specific customer. c) In the Navigation area, double-click T-BP## in the current year. d) Double-click the product


T-F1## to fix this value.

In the Form area, you now see a contribution margin report for this specific customer with this specific product. e) In the Navigation area, double-click customer

T-BP## to release this value.

In the Form area, you now see a contribution margin report specifically for product F1## , independent of the receiving customers. f) In the Navigation area, double-click product T-F1## .



610

T-





3. Drill down to the actual line items for customer T-BP## to view the postings you made to CO-PA and analyze the corresponding accounting documents. a) In the Navigation area, double-click products in the current year. b) Double-click customer





g) To display the accounting documents created together with the CO-PA line item, choose Environment → Integration . Perform Profit Analysis for Contribution Margin Report in Account-Based CO-PA In this task, you examine the results for your company. Run in costing-based CO-PA the contribution margin report S4F20CM (graphical report output) for the current fiscal year. Note: Make sure that you switch to the account-based CO-PA via menu path → Profitability Analysis → Environment → Set operating concern operating concern A000 and select Account-based CO-PA .


1. Run the contribution margin report S4F20CM (graphical report output) for the current fiscal year. Use the following information: Selection Field

Value

Fiscal Year

current year

Period from

1

Period to

12

Version

0 (Actual)

a) Switch to costing-based CO-PA. b) On the SAP Fiori Launchpad, select the Market Segments Plan/Actuals app and choose Accounting → Controlling → Profitability Analysis → Information System → Execute Report . c) On the Run Profitability Report: Initial d) Execute the report

screen, select



e) Choose Execute . 2. Analyze the result of the customer


T-F1## .

a) On the Execute Profitability Report screen, in the Navigation area, double-click Customer to list all the customers to whom we sold products in the current year.


611



b) Double-click customer


In the Form area, you can now see a contribution margin report for this specific customer. c) In the Navigation area, double-click T-BP## in the current year. d) Double-click the product


T-F1## to fix this value.

In the Form area, you now see a contribution margin report for this specific customer with this specific product. e) In the Navigation area, double-click customer

T-BP## to release this value.

In the Form area, you now see a contribution margin report specifically for product F1## , independent of the receiving customers. f) In the Navigation area, double-click product T-F1## .

T-




3. Drill down to the actual line items for customer T-BP## to view the postings you made to CO-PA and analyze the corresponding accounting documents. a) In the Navigation area, double-click products in the current year. b) Double-click customer





g) To display the accounting documents created together with the CO-PA line item, choose Environment → Integration .

612






●

Evaluate CO-PA


613



614





1. Company represents the smallest organizational units for which an account group can be set up for the purposes of external reporting. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X

True

X

False

2. Which costs and revenues can be managed and allocated? Choose the correct answer. X

A A company code

X

B A segment

X

C A controlling area


615




1. Company represents the smallest organizational units for which an account group can be set up for the purposes of external reporting. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X

True

X

False

2. Which costs and revenues can be managed and allocated? Choose the correct answer.

616

X

A A company code

X

B A segment

X

C A controlling area




UNIT 11

Project System

Lesson 1 Describing the Process Steps in Project System

619

Lesson 2 Creating a Project Structure

621

Exercise 64: Create a Project Structure

629

Lesson 3 Planning a Project

633

Exercise 65: Plan Resources in a Project

637

Exercise 66: Plan Dates in a Project

643

Exercise 67: Plan Costs in a Project

649

Lesson 4 Budgeting in a Project

655

Exercise 68: Create the Budget for a Project

657

Lesson 5 Executing a Project

660

Exercise 69: Release a Project

663

Exercise 70: Post a Confirmation of Time for your Project

671

Exercise 71: Post Time Confirmation with CATS

675

Lesson 6 Processing Period-End Closing Activities

682

UNIT OBJECTIVES ●

Describe the process steps in project system

●

Create a project structure

●

Plan Resources in a project


617


For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Unit 11: Project System

618

●

Plan dates in a project

●

Plan costs in a project

●

Create the budget for a project

●

Execute a project

●

Record labor for a project

●

Post materials for project

●

Process period-end closing activities




Unit 11 Lesson 1 Describing the Process Steps in Project System



Process Steps in a Project System

Figure 287: Project Characteristics

Projects are tasks that have the following characteristics: ● ●

Projects are usually complex and unique and involve a high degree of risk. Projects have precise targets that are agreed on between the contractor and the sold-to party.

●

Projects are limited in duration and are cost and capacity intensive.

●

Projects involve several departments.

●

Projects are subject to specific quality requirements.


619



●

Projects are of strategic significance for the business carrying them out.

Projects are an integral part of the commercial processes of a business. Before you can control all the tasks that occur as part of project execution, you need a project-specific organizational form that should be in a position central to the user departments involved. Phases in a Project

Figure 288: Phases in a Project

A project comprises several phases. Planning and coordinating large and complex projects require a high degree of precision. When planning the flow of a project, you can schedule deadlines and dates, make resources available, and assign budgets. The project structure provides the support you need during all project phases. LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●

620





Unit 11 Lesson 2 Creating a Project Structure



Project Structure

Figure 289: Project System Master Data

A Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) is a model of a project and shows the required project activities in a hierarchical form. It forms the control basis for planning costs, revenues, payments, scheduling, and budgeting. Activities show the flow of a project as well as the specific tasks involved in a project. Individual tasks are linked to each other by relationships and can be further grouped together to form networks. Activities form the operative basis for planning and controlling dates, costs, and resources (personnel, machinery, production resources, and tools (PRTs), and materials). When activities are assigned to WBS elements, the dates and costs defined in the individual activities are aggregated at the WBS level and can be evaluated. Activity funds already assigned are checked against the budgets of the WBS elements.


621



Work Breakdown Structure (WBS)

Figure 290: WBS Functions

The WBS forms the basis for all subsequent planning tasks in the project. Emphasis is placed on planning, analysis, description, control, monitoring of costs, basic dates, and the budget. Costs, dates, resources, and payments are planned using the activities extrapolated to specific WBS elements. Project Builder

Figure 291: Project Builder

622



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Creating a Project Structure

Use the Project Builder to maintain any object in the project structure except for the assignment of PRTs. Cost Project Operative Indicators

Figure 292: Cost Project Operative Indicators

You use operative indicators to define the characteristics of a WBS element and to specify which tasks are performed by the WBS element when the project is being executed. The operative indicators to define the characteristics of a WBS element are as follows: ●

●

●

WBS elements for which you want to plan costs manually are flagged as planning elements. WBS elements to which you want to post actual costs are flagged as account assignment elements. WBS elements to which you want to post revenues are flagged as billing elements.

The Statistic indicator specifies whether a WBS element is used only for statistical purposes or whether it works with real costs. In the example in this figure, you want to carry out planning as far as level 2 in the project hierarchy. WBS elements of level 3 and below are not planning elements.


623



Editing the Project Using the Project Builder

Figure 293: Editing the Project Using the Project Builder

Use the Project Builder to create or change objects in your project (project definition, WBS elements, activities, activity elements, project structure texts, documents, milestones, and material components). Use detail screens, lists, and graphics (hierarchy graphics and network graphics) for this purpose. In addition to creating project structures manually, you can use any operative project structures (WBSs and networks) and standard structures (standard WBSs and standard networks) as templates. You can also include WBSs, standard WBSs, and standard networks in an existing project structure. When you create projects, you can copy and position both operative projects and standard projects with all the lower-level objects (WBS elements, activities, project structure texts, documents, milestones, and components).

624




Networks and Activities

Figure 294: Networks and Activities – Structures

The activities in a project describe the various steps and the work involved in them. In the Project Builder, you can create activities for WBS elements, meaning that the activities are assigned to the WBS elements and that the planned and actual data for the activities (dates, costs, and payment data) can be aggregated at the WBS element level. Activities are linked to each other by means of relationships, and this linking results in a chronological activity sequence. Activities also form the basis for planning the following quantity structures: ●

Dates (occurring automatically through scheduling)

●

Costs (occurring automatically through costing)

●

Resources (including internal activities and external activities)

●

Material requirements (using the assigned components)

The PS has the following activity categories: ●

Internal processing for capacities staged in your own company

●

External processing for tasks assigned externally

●

Services for procuring external services

●

Cost activities for planning additional primary costs


625



Networks and Activities – Functions

Figure 295: Networks and Activities – Functions

Use the activities in the network to plan resources, including labor, capacities, materials, tools, and services that you require for your project. PS Texts, Documents, and Milestones – Assignments

Figure 296: PS Texts, Documents, and Milestones – Assignments

626




Project structure texts are user-definable texts that are managed in a project structure text catalog. The texts are classified into different text types. You can assign project structure texts to one or more WBS elements or activities. Enter project structure texts in SAP ERP, SAPscript, or Microsoft Word. The SAP ERP database stores the files in question. Use the SAP Document Management System (SAP DMS) in the project structure to assign document info records to WBS elements and activities. In the DMS, assign original (external) documents in various formats (Microsoft Excel, Word, and PPT, BMP, TIFF, and CAD formats) to an (internal SAP ERP) document info record. In the project information system, you can display the document info records and the corresponding original documents online. You can also display the original documents using the Internet. You can assign milestones to activities and WBS elements. Milestones have a range of applications. They can be used for milestone billing in Sales and Distribution, for example, and to start the automatic workflow of tasks.


627



628




Unit 11 Exercise 64 Create a Project Structure

Business Example You want to redesign your bicycle and develop a new product line. To plan all the activities and track the costs and the dates, you will use a project for development. Because there are no SAP Fiori apps available yet, we will use the back-end system direct. To create your project you will copy a standard project T/0001 including the assigned standard network. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Create the project you using the following data: Field

Value

Project Definition

T/00##

Description

Development bicycle TS410-##

Start

Today

Finish

Today + 12 Month

Project Profile

TS410

Std. Project Definition

T/0001

Responsible Person

100000##

Planning element

Set all Elements to Planning elements


629



Unit 11 Solution 64 Create a Project Structure

Business Example You want to redesign your bicycle and develop a new product line. To plan all the activities and track the costs and the dates, you will use a project for development. Because there are no SAP Fiori apps available yet, we will use the back-end system direct. To create your project you will copy a standard project T/0001 including the assigned standard network. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Create the project you using the following data: Field

Value

Project Definition

T/00##

Description


Start

Today

Finish

Today + 12 Month

Project Profile

TS410


T/0001

Responsible Person

100000##

Planning element

Set all Elements to Planning elements

a) In the Sap Easy Access Menu, choose Logistics → Project System → Project → Project . Alternatively, use transaction code CJ20N. b) On the initial screen of

Project Builder , choose Create → Copy Project and press Enter.

c) On the Create Project, enter the following data:

630

Field

Value

Project Definition

T/00##

Description


Start

Today




Field

Value

Finish

Today + 12 Month

Project Profile

TS410


T/0001

d) Press Enter. e) Choose the Overview WBS Elements icon. f) Choose the Basic Data tab and select all the elements as

PE – Planning element

.

g) Go to the Responsibilities in the WBS element Overview and enter Responsible Person 100000## as the Responsible Person for all WBS elements. h) Go to the Detail of the Project Definition and enter the 100000## for the Project Definition .

Responsible Person

i) Save your project.


631




632





Unit 11 Lesson 3 Planning a Project



●


●


Resource Planning in a Project

Figure 297: Aspects of Planning

Project systems allow you to plan in many different ways. You can plan the following facets: ●

Resources


633



●

Dates

●

Materials

●

Revenue

●

Costs

●

Payments

●

Project structures

Assigning Human Resources to a Project

Figure 298: Assigning Human Resources to a Project

You use the activities on a network to plan the resources required for a project. The project structure draws a distinction between the following resources: ●

Internally processed activity Use an internally processed activity to determine the output to be provided by machines or personnel to complete the activity. Evaluate the capacities of the various work centers involved, reschedule these capacities as necessary, and distribute the work among employees.

●

Externally processed activity Use an externally processed activity to specify the necessary services to be provided by other companies to complete the activity.

Carry out external processing through the purchasing department. Service activities are also used to procure services externally.

634



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Planning a Project

There is a difference between service activities and externally processed activities. If you use service activities, you can draw up service specifications and set value limits for any unplanned services. The purchasing department carries out service processing (including the entry and acceptance of the services performed).


635



636




Unit 11 Exercise 65 Plan Resources in a Project

Business Example You want to assign your newly hired project engineer to your project. Therefore, you first need to create a new work center that can be used in the network operations. During the creation, you will assign the organizational structure from HCM to the work center. The employee included in the structure can then be used for the assignment in the project. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise requires the Organizational Unit, PRD-##, that you created in the exercise, Create an Organizational Unit and a Position in Organizational Management. Create a Work Center for the Project System 1. Create a new work center for the usage of project system, T-ENG## by copying an existing work center T-ENG00 . Copy all relevant data views. Use the following data: Field

Value

Plant

1010

Work Center

T-ENG##

Work Center Category

0006

Copy from Plant

1010

Ref. work Center

T-ENG00

2. Assign the work center to the organizational unit, PRD-##, that you created in the exercise, Create an Organizational Unit and a Position in Organizational Management. Allocate the Work Center and the Employee to the Network Now that you have created the new work center, you change your project and allocate the work center in your operations. 1. Assign the work center

T-ENG## to the internal processed operations.

2. For the operations 10 to 40 you assign your personnel number. In operation 50 assign a production work center T-A##. Use the following data: Field

Value

Work Center (Op. 10-40)

T-ENG##


637



638

Field

Value

Work Center (Op. 50)

T-A##

Activity Type (Op. 50)

11




Unit 11 Solution 65 Plan Resources in a Project

Business Example You want to assign your newly hired project engineer to your project. Therefore, you first need to create a new work center that can be used in the network operations. During the creation, you will assign the organizational structure from HCM to the work center. The employee included in the structure can then be used for the assignment in the project. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise requires the Organizational Unit, PRD-##, that you created in the exercise, Create an Organizational Unit and a Position in Organizational Management. Create a Work Center for the Project System 1. Create a new work center for the usage of project system, T-ENG## by copying an existing work center T-ENG00 . Copy all relevant data views. Use the following data: Field

Value

Plant

1010

Work Center

T-ENG##

Work Center Category

0006

Copy from Plant

1010

Ref. work Center

T-ENG00

a) In the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics → Project System → Basic Data → Master Data → Work Center → Master Record . Alternatively, use transaction code CNR1. b) On the initial Actual settlement: Order

screen, enter the data provided in the table.

c) Press Enter. d) In the Copy from dialog box, select Window mark all the views in the data selection area and press Enter. 2. Assign the work center to the organizational unit, PRD-##, that you created in the exercise, Create an Organizational Unit and a Position in Organizational Management. a) On the Create Work Center: Assignment to HR Organizational Entity screen, select Organizational Unit , enter PRD* in the Search Term field and press Enter.


639



b) From the result list, choose your entry c) Return to the

PRD-## . Engineering ##.

Basic Data and change the description to

d) Save the work center. Allocate the Work Center and the Employee to the Network Now that you have created the new work center, you change your project and allocate the work center in your operations. 1. Assign the work center

T-ENG## to the internal processed operations.

a) In the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics → Project System → Project → Project Builder . Alternatively, use transaction code b) On the initial Project Builder screen, select your project

T/00##

CJ20N.

and open it.

c) Expand the entire structure and select the network header. 2. For the operations 10 to 40 you assign your personnel number. In operation 50 assign a production work center T-A##. Use the following data: Field

Value

Work Center (Op. 10-40)

T-ENG##

Work Center (Op. 50)

T-A##

Activity Type (Op. 50)

11

a) Choose the Operations Overview

icon in the Identification and View

b) In the Operations 10 to 40, enter your newly created work center. T-A## and choose

c) In Operation 50, enter the work center

d) On the left side of the project builder, double-check e) To add the Person allocated to the work centre, In the choose the Person assignment tab f) Select the person by searching in the

selection. T-ENG##.

Activity type 11.

Operation 10 to select it. Detail section of Operation 10,

Person field.

There should be only one person available. g) Repeat steps d) to f) for Operations 20 to 40. h) Save your project.

640




Dates Planning in a Project

Figure 299: Basic Dates for WBS Elements

Using the project planning board, you can perform certain tasks. For example, you can select WBS elements and schedule the activities assigned to them. The dates of the assigned activities are summarized to determine the scheduled dates of the WBS elements (thin time bars in the project planning board) and can be copied as planned basic dates. The dates scheduled in the WBS can then be extrapolated within the project structure. In Customizing, you can configure the appropriate scheduling parameters or use predefined scheduling scenarios. You can use the project planning board to change these settings for a particular project. You can plan dates for individual WBS elements and also enter outline dates for your project in the project definition. In rough-cut planning, you specify dates for WBS elements that are binding for more detailed planning. You then use this rough-cut plan as the basis for more detailed planning or scheduling using networks. You can use several functions in date planning to compare, reconcile, and calculate dates at a later point in time.


641



Scheduling a Project

Figure 300: Scheduling a Project

In projects with networks, you can carry out scheduling to derive the activity dates and WBS element dates automatically. The scheduling parameters determine how scheduling is carried out. Networks are always scheduled forward and backward. In the scheduling parameters, the scheduling type specifies the direction in which you begin scheduling. The system determines the earliest dates of the activities by using forward scheduling and the latest dates of activities by using backward scheduling. The difference between the earliest and the latest dates of an activity is referred to as a float. A float can be zero or negative. If the float is negative, the activity is critical. Hint: For processing dates that are directly assigned to activities, create time events and assign them to activities. For example, you can create, draft, review, and specify events and assign them to the first activity. You can add dates and texts for these events. The traffic lights indicate whether these events comply with the planned dates. For example, Progress Tracking for Networks is included in SAP ERP 6.0 Enhancement Package 3.

642




Unit 11 Exercise 66 Plan Dates in a Project

Business Example After you created your project, you want to plan dates on the WBS elements. Due to the assigned network, scheduling is performed automatically by the operations. You want to plan basic dates on the level 2 elements to give a timeframe for the scheduling. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. Plan Basic Dates in the Project You want to plan the basic dates in more detail in the project. Therefore you will enter start and end dates for the level 2 WBS elements. Due to the fact that there is no list functionality available in the project builder, you use the planning board for this. 1. Plan the following basic dates for your project, T/00##: WBS element

Start Date

Finish Date

T/00##-1

Today

Today + 2 M

T/00##-2

Today + 2 M

Today + 4 M

T/00##-3

Today + 3 M

Today + 6 M

T/00##-4

Today + 6 M

Today + 9 M

2. Extrapolate the dates to the higher level WBS and the project definition. Evaluate the Project from a Technical Perspective 1. Evaluate your project T/00## from a technical perspective using the and the following data: Field

Value

PS Info Profile

000000000002

Project

T/00##

Structure Overview

Adjust the overview and include the basic start and basic end date in your layout.


643



Unit 11 Solution 66 Plan Dates in a Project

Business Example After you created your project, you want to plan dates on the WBS elements. Due to the assigned network, scheduling is performed automatically by the operations. You want to plan basic dates on the level 2 elements to give a timeframe for the scheduling. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. Plan Basic Dates in the Project You want to plan the basic dates in more detail in the project. Therefore you will enter start and end dates for the level 2 WBS elements. Due to the fact that there is no list functionality available in the project builder, you use the planning board for this. 1. Plan the following basic dates for your project, T/00##: WBS element

Start Date

Finish Date

T/00##-1

Today

Today + 2 M

T/00##-2

Today + 2 M

Today + 4 M

T/00##-3

Today + 3 M

Today + 6 M

T/00##-4

Today + 6 M

Today + 9 M

a) In the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics → Project System → Project → Project Planning Board → Change Project . . b) On the Initial screen of 00##.

, in the Project field, enter T/

Change Project Planning Board

c) Choose the Open Project icon. d) In the planning board, plan the dates as outline in the table. You can plan the dates by using drag and drop, or double-checking the corresponding WBS element, choosing the Dates tab, and entering Basic Start Date and Basic Fin. Date . e) Stay in the planning board. 2. Extrapolate the dates to the higher level WBS and the project definition. a) Choose the Select All icon to select the WBS elements. b) Choose Edit → Reconcile Dates

→ Extrapolate dates

.

c) Save the project.

644




Evaluate the Project from a Technical Perspective 1. Evaluate your project T/00## from a technical perspective using the and the following data: Field

Value

PS Info Profile

000000000002

Project

T/00##

Structure Overview

Adjust the overview and include the basic start and basic end date in your layout. a) In the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics → Project System System → Structures → Structure Overview . When using the structure overview the first time, the system asks for a

→ Information PS Info Profile .

b) In the PS Info Profile field, enter 000000000002. c) Press Enter. d) On the initial screen of 00##.

Project Info System: Structure

, in the Project field, enter T/

e) Execute the report (F8). You a see the project in a structural overview. f) Open the field selection. g) Choose the Basic Start and Basic End date. Select them on the right side, take them to the left side, and press Enter. h) Exit the report without saving.


645



Cost Planning in a Project

Figure 301: Planning Costs and Revenues for a Project

The types of cost planning in the work breakdown structure (WBS) elements are as follows: ●

Structure-oriented planning In structure-oriented planning, you enter costs for each WBS element and break down your figures by fiscal year.

●

Detailed planning of primary costs and activity inputs Detailed planning of primary costs and activity inputs is cost element based and period based.

●

Unit costing Unit costing is cost element based. You use a profile to enter quantities (material, internal activities, external services, variable items, and so on) for each WBS element.

●

Easy Cost Planning Easy Cost Planning offers you an easy-to-use tool for planning costs by cost element in a quantity structure. You then use Execution Services to enter the commitment and actual data for the planned costs.

In addition to manual planning in the WBS, you have the option of creating activities for WBS elements and using these activities to plan costs. This method has the following advantages:

646




●

The resulting plan can be copied to new projects.

●

If parts of the project are shifted, cost planning is shifted automatically with the activities.

●

Planning using network activities is done by cost element and period.

Planning Costs and Revenues at the Network Level of a Project

Figure 302: Planning Costs and Revenues at the Network Level of a Project

When you plan dates and resources in network activities, the system automatically determines the corresponding planned costs as part of network costing. Planned costs are determined for the following objects: ●

Activity inputs for internally processed activities (an internal activity)

●

Primary costs for externally processed activities and service activities (an external service)

●

Primary costs for general costs activities

●

Primary costs for material components

Activity elements are costed as if they were activities.


647



648




Unit 11 Exercise 67 Plan Costs in a Project

Business Example You have not done the detailed planning of the network, but you want to have cost planning done on a higher level and, in a particular version, to compare the costs later. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. Plan Cost Elements in the Project For a preliminary costing and the option of cost comparison you decide to plan cost for the cost center T-ENG00 with activity type ENG-00 on the WBS elements. You want to compare to the costs in the network. This planning is a manual planning on WBS elements. Because you want to compare to the costs later from network you will perform that costing in a different cost planning version. You will use version 1 for the manual planning. 1. For a preliminary costing and the option of cost comparison, plan costs for the cost center T-ENG00 with activity type ENG-00 on the WBS elements. Use the following data for the planning: Field

Value

Project

T/00##

Version

1

In the Activity Input planning use the following data: WBS element

Cost Center

Activity Type

Quantity

T/00##-1

T-ENG00

ENG-00

40

T/00##-2

T-ENG00

ENG-00

30

T/00##-3

T-ENG00

ENG-00

50

T/00##-4

T-ENG00

ENG-00

60

Evaluate Costs – Cost Comparison Now that you planned your cost manually, you want to compare your planning to the automatic cost planning of the network. 1. Compare your planning to the automatic cost planning of the network by running a cost element report. Use the following data:


649



Field

Value

Project

T/00##

Controlling Area

A000

Plan Version A

0

Plan Version B

1

From fiscal year

1900

To Fiscal year

2017

From Period

1

To Period

12

Use the info profile 000000000001. Write down the planned costs for Version 0 and for Version 1 (the figures can vary, so no solution is provided). Planned Costs Version 0: _____________________________________________________ Planned Costs Version 1: _____________________________________________________

650




Unit 11 Solution 67 Plan Costs in a Project

Business Example You have not done the detailed planning of the network, but you want to have cost planning done on a higher level and, in a particular version, to compare the costs later. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. Plan Cost Elements in the Project For a preliminary costing and the option of cost comparison you decide to plan cost for the cost center T-ENG00 with activity type ENG-00 on the WBS elements. You want to compare to the costs in the network. This planning is a manual planning on WBS elements. Because you want to compare to the costs later from network you will perform that costing in a different cost planning version. You will use version 1 for the manual planning. 1. For a preliminary costing and the option of cost comparison, plan costs for the cost center T-ENG00 with activity type ENG-00 on the WBS elements. Use the following data for the planning: Field

Value

Project

T/00##

Version

1

In the Activity Input planning use the following data: WBS element

Cost Center

Activity Type

Quantity

T/00##-1

T-ENG00

ENG-00

40

T/00##-2

T-ENG00

ENG-00

30

T/00##-3

T-ENG00

ENG-00

50

T/00##-4

T-ENG00

ENG-00

60

a) In the SAP Easy Access Menu, choose Accounting → Investment Management → Investment Projects → Planning → Total Costs → Change . Alternatively, use transaction code CJ40. b) On the initial screen of


Change Cost Planning

enter the data provided in the table.

651



c) Press Enter. d) Select the first level 2 WBS element, e) Enter the following data in the

T/00##-1 , and choose the

Activity Input icon.

Change Planning Activity Input: Overview Screen

WBS element

Cost Center

Activity Type

Quantity

T/00##-1

T-ENG00

ENG-00

40

:

f) Go back. g) Confirm the dialog box with

Yes .

h) Repeat steps d) to g) for the following 3 WBS Elements, T/00##-2 to T/00##-4, using the data provided in the table. i) Select the WBS elements for which you planned the figures and select the Element Plan column. j) From the menu, choose

Cost

Edit → Copy View .

k) Confirm the dialog box by pressing Enter. l) Select all WBS Elements and, from the menu, choose

Edit → Total Up .

m) Confirm the dialog box by pressing Enter. n) Save your planning. Evaluate Costs – Cost Comparison Now that you planned your cost manually, you want to compare your planning to the automatic cost planning of the network. 1. Compare your planning to the automatic cost planning of the network by running a cost element report. Use the following data: Field

Value

Project

T/00##

Controlling Area

A000

Plan Version A

0

Plan Version B

1

From fiscal year

1900

To Fiscal year

2017

From Period

1

To Period

12

Use the info profile 000000000001.

652




a) In the SAP Easy Access Menu, choose Information System → Project System → Financials → Costs → Plan based → By Cost Element → Comparison of 2 Plan Version . Alternatively, use transaction code S_ALR_87013554. b) In the dialog box, enter the info profile c) On the initial screen of table.

000000000001.

Comparison of 2 Plan Version

enter the data provided in the

d) Execute the report. You see a cost element report for your project. Write down the planned costs for Version 0 and for Version 1 (the figures can vary, so no solution is provided). Planned Costs Version 0: _____________________________________________________ Planned Costs Version 1: _____________________________________________________


653




654

●


●


●





Unit 11 Lesson 4 Budgeting in a Project



Budgeting in a Project

Figure 303: Budget Planning in a Project

While you must estimate your project costs as accurately as possible during cost planning, funds are assigned in the form of a budget in the approval phase. The budget differs from the project cost plan in that it is binding. The budget is the device by which the management approves the anticipated development of the project costs over a given period of time.


655



Budgeting Overview

Figure 304: Budgeting Overview

You need to use the maintain original budget transaction to assign funds to a project and its components. In the budget profile, you can specify whether funds are assigned as lump values or are distributed by year. You can prevent users from maintaining the overall project budget for a project by assigning appropriate user statuses. If you lock (freeze) the original budget in this manner, you can change it only by defining supplements, returns, and transfers. You can use the budget release function to make funds available at various points within a fiscal year. You can use the budget carry forward function to transfer any funds not used in the previous year to the budget of the new fiscal year.

656




Unit 11 Exercise 68 Create the Budget for a Project

Business Example After the planning of the project is done you receive a budget allocated. The budgeting takes place based on the cost planning. Be aware that the budget will be allocated for the entire project. For the budgeting you will copy the existing planning from Version 0 into the budget. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. After you planned the costs in the project, your project T/00### receives a budget. Allocate a budget based on the cost planning in the network – Version 0. Assign only an original budget; there is no released budget planned in the budget profile. Use the following data: Field

Value

Project Definition

T/00##

2. Assign 90% of the planned costs as a budget. Note: It is possible that you have planned figures for more than one year. The budgeting then needs to be done for each year.


657



Unit 11 Solution 68 Create the Budget for a Project

Business Example After the planning of the project is done you receive a budget allocated. The budgeting takes place based on the cost planning. Be aware that the budget will be allocated for the entire project. For the budgeting you will copy the existing planning from Version 0 into the budget. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. After you planned the costs in the project, your project T/00### receives a budget. Allocate a budget based on the cost planning in the network – Version 0. Assign only an original budget; there is no released budget planned in the budget profile. Use the following data: Field

Value

Project Definition

T/00##

a) On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Project System → Financials → Budgeting → Original Budget → Change . Alternatively, use transaction code CJ30. b) On the Initial screen of 00## and press Enter.

Change Original Budget , in the Project Definition field, enter T/

c) In the Change Original Budget: WBS Element Overview Elements.

screen, select all WBS

2. Assign 90% of the planned costs as a budget. Note: It is possible that you have planned figures for more than one year. The budgeting then needs to be done for each year. a) Select the Planned Totals , and from the menu, choose b) In the Copy View window, change the percentage to

Edit → Copy View . 90% and press Enter.

c) Change the period to the next year. d) If there are planned costs for the next year as well, proceed as above e) Save the budgeting. f) Ignore the Warning by pressing Enter.

658



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Budgeting in a Project




659



Unit 11 Lesson 5 Executing a Project


Execute a project

●


●


Executing a Project

Figure 305: Issuing Materials from Stock to a Project

Materials establish the link between PS and Sales and Distribution (SD), Materials Management (MM), and Production Planning and Control (PP). By assigning materials to activities, you can plan the necessary material requirements for a project. A distinction is made between stock and nonstock items.

660



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Executing a Project

Project Integration with MM and PP

Figure 306: Project Integration with MM and PP

The item category stock item is used for materials that are kept in stock (warehouse, project, or sales order stock). You create reservations for stock items. Independent requirements (requirements for finished products, saleable assemblies, trading goods, and spare parts) trigger requirements planning. To cover the requirements, you determine order quantities and dates and schedule the corresponding procurement elements. The procurement element for requirements planning is a planned order and, for external procurement, a purchase requisition. In addition, you determine the dependent requirements for materials produced in-house (in other words, the quantity of components required to manufacture a finished product or assembly) by exploding the Bill of Material (BOM). You can create planned orders at each BOM level to cover requirements when a material shortage occurs. After the quantities and dates are planned in requirements planning, you convert these planned procurement elements to exact procurement elements. For production, this element is the production order, and for external procurement, this element is the purchase order.


661



Procuring Non-Stock Materials for a Project

Figure 307: Procuring Non-Stock Materials for a Project

The item category N (nonstock item) is used for components that are not procured by way of warehouse stock, project stock, or sales order stock but are procured directly by the network activity. Purchase requisitions are created for these components. These requisitions are passed directly to purchasing. When the goods are received, they are not placed into stock but posted to the activity. Nonstock items cannot be managed as project stock or sales order stock.

662




Unit 11 Exercise 69 Release a Project

Business Example You planned dates and resources in your project. Now you want to assign the materials from the original BOM of the bicycle to your project. Therefore, you create a project BOM and assign it to the project. Once you have planned the materials you will release your project. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. Create the Project BOM You want to create a WBS BOM to be used as a template in your project. 1. Copy the existing BOM for T-F1## from production to a WBS BOM for the WBS T/00##-3 . Use the following data: Field

Value

WBS Element

T/00##-3

Material

T-F1##

Plant

1010

BOM Usage

3

Copy Material BOM

T-F1##

Plant

1010

Usage

1

Reference Point

ZTS410

Element

Adjust Project – Assign Components to Project 1 1. Assign the components to the project. Use the PS – BOM interface to assign your newly created BOM to your project. Use the following data: Field

Value

Project Definition

T/00##

WBS Element

T/00##-3

Profile

Z410

Material

T-F1##


663



Field

Value

Plant

1010

BOM Usage

3

Release the Project After the planning of your project is finished now you want to see whether the materials have been assigned and you will release your project. 1. Open your Project. 2. Are your materials assigned?

3. Release your project using the

664

Project Definition T/00##.




Unit 11 Solution 69 Release a Project

Business Example You planned dates and resources in your project. Now you want to assign the materials from the original BOM of the bicycle to your project. Therefore, you create a project BOM and assign it to the project. Once you have planned the materials you will release your project. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. Create the Project BOM You want to create a WBS BOM to be used as a template in your project. 1. Copy the existing BOM for T-F1## from production to a WBS BOM for the WBS T/00##-3 . Use the following data: Field

Value

WBS Element

T/00##-3

Material

T-F1##

Plant

1010

BOM Usage

3

Copy Material BOM

T-F1##

Plant

1010

Usage

1

Reference Point

ZTS410

Element

a) On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Bill of Material (BOM) → Bill of Materials → WBS BOM → Single Level → Create . Alternatively, use transaction code CS71. b) On the Initial screen of

Create WBS BOM , enter the following data:

Field

Value

WBS Element

T/00##-3

Material

T-F1##

Plant

1010


665



Field

Value

Usage

3

c) Choose the Copy Material BOM icon. d) In the Copy Material BOM window, enter the following data: Field

Value

Material

T-F1##

Plant

1010

Usage

1

e) Press Enter. f) Select all of the items and choose the

Copy icon.

g) On the screen

Create WBS BOM General Item Overview

h) To choose the

Detail of the first item, double-click the item number.

i) In the Item detail , in the Reference Point

screen, select all of the items.

field, enter ZTS410.

j) Repeat steps h) to i) for all items. k) Save the BOM. Adjust Project – Assign Components to Project 1 1. Assign the components to the project. Use the PS – BOM interface to assign your newly created BOM to your project. Use the following data: Field

Value

Project Definition

T/00##

WBS Element

T/00##-3

Profile

Z410

Material

T-F1##

Plant

1010

BOM Usage

3

a) On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Material → Planning → Bill of Material Transfer . Alternatively, use transaction code CS71. b) On the Initial screen of

666

Bill of Material Transfer enter the following data:

Field

Value

Project Definition

T/00##




Field

Value

WBS Element

T/00##-3

Profile

Z410

c) Choose the Selection Parameters

icon (Shift + F5).

d) In the Selection of BOM Item section, enter the following data: Field

Value

WBS Element

T/00##-3

Material

T-F1##

Plant

1010

BOM Usage

3

e) Choose Execute (F8). f) Confirm the warning by pressing Enter. g) On the Result Overview screen, check whether all the components have been selected and assigned to your network – Operation 40 . h) Save the assignment. Release the Project After the planning of your project is finished now you want to see whether the materials have been assigned and you will release your project. 1. Open your Project. a) On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Project System → Project → Project Builder . Alternatively, use transaction code b) To open your Project, double-click your project in the

CJ20N.

Worklist section.

c) Expand your project. 2. Are your materials assigned? There should be 4 materials assigned to operation 40. 3. Release your project using the

Project Definition T/00##.

a) Select your Project Definition and choose the menu entry

Edit → Status → Release .

b) Save your project.


667



Planned versus Actual Dates

Figure 308: Planned versus Actual Dates

During the planning phase, you enter basic dates for the Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) elements either by creating graphical time bars in the project planning board or by posting direct entries in the master data. In the execution phase, you can set actual dates in the same way as in the project planning board. The Partially Released or Released status must be set before you can enter the actual start and end dates for WBS elements. To monitor dates in the project, compare the basic dates with the actual dates, that is, compare the planned dates with the actual dates or forecasted completion dates. You can use the project planning board or structure information system for analysis purposes.

668




Cross-Application Time Sheet (CATS)

Figure 309: Cross-Application Time Sheet

Cross-Application Time Sheet (SAP CATS) is an integrated function for entering actual time data important in Human Resources (HR), Project System (PS), Plant Maintenance (PM), Customer Service (CS), and Controlling (CO). You can determine the layouts by using data entry profiles.


669



670




Unit 11 Exercise 70 Post a Confirmation of Time for your Project

Business Example The project engineer has worked some hours for the project. You now need to confirm the time for the first two operations. For the following posting you will use CATS later in the next exercise. You will use a collective confirmation for the first posting. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Confirm the first two operations using the following data: Field

Value

Network

Your network number

Operation

10 and 20

Actual Work activity 10

8

Actual work activity 20

20


671



Unit 11 Solution 70 Post a Confirmation of Time for your Project

Business Example The project engineer has worked some hours for the project. You now need to confirm the time for the first two operations. For the following posting you will use CATS later in the next exercise. You will use a collective confirmation for the first posting. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Confirm the first two operations using the following data: Field

Value

Network

Your network number

Operation

10 and 20


8


20

a) On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Project System → Progress → Confirmation → Collective Confirmation . Alternatively, use transaction code CN27. b) On the Initial screen of Network following data:

Confirmation Collective Confirmation

Field

Value


8


20

, enter the

c) In the upper section enter your network number. d) Press Enter. e) In the lower section enter now the following data:

672

Field

Value

Activity

10




Field

Value

Activity

20

f) Press Enter. g) Save the confirmation. h) Confirm any warnings or errors while saving.


673



674




Unit 11 Exercise 71 Post Time Confirmation with CATS

Business Example As an alternative for the confirmation of time you want to use CATS for the time recording. As you have assigned an employee number to your network you will check the possibilities via CATS. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Post the times for activity 30 and 40 with reference to your employee number. Use the following data: Field

Value

Data Entry Profile

ZTS410

Personnel Number

Your employee number

Activity 30

Copy in the Data Entry Area

Activity 40


For Activity 30

5 hours each day of the week

For Activity 40

3 Hours each day of the week

2. Transfer the time recording data to the Project System. Use the following information: Field

Value

Personnel Number


Posting Date

Today

Test Run

Delimit


675



Unit 11 Solution 71 Post Time Confirmation with CATS

Business Example As an alternative for the confirmation of time you want to use CATS for the time recording. As you have assigned an employee number to your network you will check the possibilities via CATS. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Post the times for activity 30 and 40 with reference to your employee number. Use the following data: Field

Value

Data Entry Profile

ZTS410

Personnel Number


Activity 30


Activity 40


For Activity 30


For Activity 40


a) On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Project System → Progress → Confirmation → Time Sheet → CATS Classic → Record Working Times (CAT2) . b) On the Initial screen of

Time Sheet enter the following data:

Field

Value

Data Entry Profile

ZTS410

Personnel Number


c) Choose the Enter Time icon (F5). d) In the Work List section, select icon (F5).

Activity 30 and Activity 40 and choose the

Copy Row

e) In the Data Entry Area for each activity, enter the following data:

676




Field

Value

For Activity 30


For Activity 40


f) Press Enter. g) Choose the Release View icon. h) Select the two activities and choose the

Release icon.

i) Save the data. j) Confirm any messages with Enter. 2. Transfer the time recording data to the Project System. Use the following information: Field

Value

Personnel Number


Posting Date

Today

Test Run

Delimit

a) On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Project System → Progress → Confirmation → Time Sheet → Transfer → Project System → Transfer (CAT5) . b) On the Initial screen of table.

CATS Transfer to Project System

, enter the data provided in the

c) Choose Execute (F8).


677



Posting Materials for a Project

Figure 310: Procuring Materials and Services for a Project

The network generates purchase requisitions for external processing activities, service activities, and materials that are procured directly. These purchase requisitions are passed on to the purchasing department for further processing. The purchasing process involves issuing a request for quotations to vendors (if applicable), entering these quotations in the system, selecting vendors, converting the purchase requisitions into purchase orders, and monitoring the orders until the goods and invoices are received. A service activity triggers a similar purchasing process but can also contain a hierarchy of planned services to be purchased and value limits for unplanned services. The goods receipt for services involves the following steps: 1. Entering the services performed 2. Accepting the services performed

678




FI and CO Postings in a Project

Figure 311: FI and CO Postings in a Project

A purchase requisition that is generated for a project results in a purchase requisition commitment for the account assignment object (activity or Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) element). When the purchase requisition is converted into a purchase order, this results in a purchase order commitment for the account assignment object (this object is a different value type than purchase requisition commitments). Depending on the account assignment category of the purchase order, you can post the actual costs upon the receipt of the goods or their invoice (valuated or nonvaluated goods receipt). Based on the account assignment, the system passes the relevant documents concerning goods movement on to the network activity or WBS elements. As an alternative to having the network generate the purchase requisitions automatically, you can also manually create purchase requisitions and purchase orders and assign them to WBS elements. The figure shows business transactions that establish a connection to WBS elements or activities by using an assignment. By assigning the appropriate documents, the resulting commitment or actual costs are posted directly to a WBS element or the network or activity. During the project planning phase, these costs were planned accordingly. Examples of costs that you can plan include the following:


679



●

● ●

Costs for purchase requisitions, purchase orders, and goods receipts at the network or activity level, using externally processed activities, service activities, or material components that are procured directly Stock withdrawn from the warehouse using the appropriate stock items Invoices posted by using cost activities and costs arising as a result of confirmations by using internally processed activities

Actual costs and revenues arising from purchase requisitions, purchase orders, goods receipts, activity allocations, and invoices for WBS elements match the values of the primary costs, activity input, and revenue planning data for the WBS.

680





Execute a project

●


●



681



Unit 11 Lesson 6 Processing Period-End Closing Activities



Period-End Closing Activities

Figure 312: Period-End Closing Activities

Period-end closing is the framework for carrying out period-related commercial transactions. You use it to ensure that you have determined all the data belonging to a period and that the data is available for enterprise control purposes. ●

Template Allocation While a distributed flat rate is used overhead, the template allocation distributes overhead from business processes or cost center or activity types.

●

Overhead Rates Use overhead costing to allocate overhead through percentage-based or quantity-based overhead rates. The basis for the allocation is the primary cost elements that you post as overhead costs.

682



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Processing Period-End Closing Activities

●

Project Interest Calculation Valuates fund commitments, using costs, revenues, or payments to achieve the best possible project payment flow.

●

Cost Forecast Used to adapt cost planning for changing circumstances. For the cost to complete, the system determines and values the remaining activities on the basis of the plan, forecast, and actual values in the network. The resulting figure is arrived at by adding the actual and commitment costs already incurred in the project to the updated cost to complete.

●

Progress Analysis Used to determine planned and actual project progress values, and to compare the two sets of data. The system uses the overall planned costs to evaluate the work done, therefore the evaluation is not dependent on the costs planned or posted by period. You can determine the relevant values at any time or as part of the period end closing. Use progress analysis to obtain information on the status of your project and how it is developing, which enables you to take corrective action if the project is differing from its plan.

●

Results Analysis A periodic valuation of the project is performed. You can analyze the results of WBS element costs, which are capitalized and used to set up provisions. Results analysis is usually performed in the billing element.

●

Incoming Orders The system uses this function to determine the costs and revenues expected to arise from orders closed or changed in the current period. You can evaluate the values for incoming orders, open orders in the project information system and settle them using profitability analysis.


683



Settlement of a Project

Figure 313: Performing a Settlement for a Project

Actual costs and actual revenues arise in a project or order as a result of the following situations: ●

Material withdrawals and goods receipts

●

Vendor invoices

●

Customer billing

●

Internal activity allocations, transfers, cost distribution, process costs, and overheads

●

Confirmation of network activities

In settlement, costs or revenues are transferred to the following departments: ●

FI (G/L account)

●

Asset Accounting (fixed assets)

●

Cost Accounting 00 or Profitability Analysis (order, cost center, and profitability segment)

●

Project System (WBS elements, networks, and activities)

You need settlement rules to carry out settlements. You can define a settlement rule in the sender object. The settlement rule contains distribution rules and settlement parameters for a sender object. LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●

684






1. Projects are tasks that have the following characteristics: Choose the correct answers. X

A Projects are limited in duration.

X

B Projects are usually complex and unique and involve a high degree of risk.

X

C Projects are not subject to quality requirements.

X

D Projects involve only a single department.

2. The Statistic indicator specifies whether a WBS element is used only for statistical purposes. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X

True

X

False


685




1. Projects are tasks that have the following characteristics: Choose the correct answers. X

A Projects are limited in duration.

X

B Projects are usually complex and unique and involve a high degree of risk.

X

C Projects are not subject to quality requirements.

X

D Projects involve only a single department.

2. The Statistic indicator specifies whether a WBS element is used only for statistical purposes. Determine whether this statement is true or false.

686

X

True

X

False




UNIT 12

SAP Enterprise Asset Management (EAM)

Lesson 1 Processing Business Steps in SAP EAM

689

Lesson 2 Describing Master Data Used in SAP EAM

691

Exercise 72: Display a Functional Location Structure

695

Exercise 73: Create an Equipment Master Record

703

Exercise 74: Display an Asset Master Record

709

Lesson 3 Creating Notifications

719

Exercise 75: Create a Notification

723

Lesson 4 Processing Maintenance Orders

727

Exercise 76: Create a Maintenance Order

735

Exercise 77: Plan a Maintenance Order

739

Exercise 78: Release a Maintenance Order

745

Lesson 5 Executing Maintenance Orders

749

Exercise 79: Confirm Time for Maintenance Order and Goods Issue Posting

755

Exercise 80: Technically Complete a Maintenance Order

759

Lesson 6 Processing Period-End Closing Activities

763

Exercise 81: Perform Period-End Closing Activities

765

UNIT OBJECTIVES ●

Process business steps in SAP EAM

●

Describe functional locations


687


For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Unit 12: SAP Enterprise Asset Management (EAM)

688

●

Describe equipments

●

Describe integration with Asset Accounting (FI-AA)

●

Describe serial numbers

●

Describe other master data used in SAP EAM

●

Create notifications

●

Process maintenance orders

●

Execute maintenance orders

●





Unit 12 Lesson 1 Processing Business Steps in SAP EAM



Process Business Steps in EAM

Figure 314: Corrective Maintenance Process

The corrective maintenance process is divided into the following phases: 1. Notification In the notification phase, malfunctions and other requirements are recorded in a notification. Notifications can be accessed and processed through a list. 2. Planning In the planning phase, orders are created and planned based on the reported requirements. Planning encompasses the steps to be performed, the material required, and any utilities that may be necessary, such as measurement devices and cranes. 3. Control


689



In the control phase, the order runs through checks, such as material availability checks and capacity planning, which are important for the release of the order. If no problems arise during these checks, the order is put in process. The shop papers are printed at this point. 4. Execution In the execution phase, the order is executed. The required material for the order is withdrawn. Even material that has not been planned and, therefore, not reserved by the order can be withdrawn for the order. 5. Completion In the completion phase, partial steps are executed. Examples of partial steps include time confirmation, technical confirmation, and technical completion. The settlement of the order by Controlling (CO) can be performed before or after the technical completion. With SAP workflows, you can control this five-phase business procedure and partly automate it. LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●

690





Unit 12 Lesson 2 Describing Master Data Used in SAP EAM



●

Describe equipments

●


●


●


Functional Locations

Figure 315: Functional Location

Functional locations are hierarchically ordered structures that represent a technical system, building, or part thereof. You can structure a functional location according to the following criteria: ●

Spatial (such as building 1 and building 2)


691



●

Technical (such as press frame and press hydraulics)

●

Functional or process-oriented (such as polymerization and condensation)

The aim of creating a functional location is to structure a technical system or building into units that are relevant to plant maintenance. In creating a functional location, the functional location often takes on the function of the location where individual objects (engines, gearboxes, pumps, and so on) can be installed. In such cases, it is possible to view removal and installation locations from the point of view of the installation location and also from the point of view of the individual installation or removal object. Functional Location Criteria You should use functional locations to structure your systems in the following conditions: ●

●

●

●

●

You want to represent the structures of the technical systems in your company according to functional criteria. You need to perform and record maintenance tasks for certain parts of your technical system. You need to store technical data for certain parts of your technical system and evaluate this data over a long period of time. You want to monitor the cost of maintenance tasks for certain parts of your technical system. You want to analyze the effects of the usage conditions on the likelihood of damage to the installed equipment.

Master Record for Functional Location

Figure 316: Master Record for Functional Location

The master record for the functional location uses the following views:

692



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Describing Master Data Used in SAP EAM

●

General (such as classification, object type, reference data, or manufacturer data)

●

Location (such as location data, or address)

●

●

Organization (for example, account assignment such as company code and cost center, or organizational responsibility, such as maintenance planning plant) Structure (such as structure indicator, higher-level functional location, or equipment)

Example of Functional Location Structure

Figure 317: Example of Functional Location Structure

The identification for functional locations is created using the structure indicator. The structure indicator consists of the following input fields: ●

Coding template A coding template is used to control the characters that may be used for identification (letters, numbers, or both) and how these characters are grouped or split.

●

Hierarchy levels The hierarchy levels are used to define which level ends at which character, as well as the number of hierarchy levels the structure may contain.

A functional location can be identified using a maximum of 40 characters, which is the maximum length of the coding template.


693



694




Unit 12 Exercise 72 Display a Functional Location Structure

Business Example You want to create a functional location structure for your production plant B##. You need to check whether there is a functional location structure available (B00) that you can use as a copying template. Afterwards you adjust your structure and create a new functional location for the new machine that you bought for production. You need to create a new functional location for the Production line TS410-##. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise requires the Cost Center, PROD-##, created in the exercise, Create Cost Centers. Display a Functional Location Structure You want to see whether there is a functional location available in your production plant, that you can use as a template for your production plant. 1. Check the functional location structure

B00 ,

B00

You need to log on to the back-end system. 2. Use the functional location B00 as a template to create your own structure B##. Use GUIbased transactions for this exercise. Use the following information to create the template: Field

Value

Structure Indicator

STR01

FunctLocCategory

M

Functional Location

B00

New Functional Loc Structure

B##

For the new description, use

Bicycle Ltd. GR##.

Create a Functional Location After you created your structure of the Production plant, B##, you need to create a new functional location for the Production Line. 1. Create a new functional location, Use the following data:

B##-1010-0## for the Production Line

Field

Value

Functional Location

B##-1010-0##


TS410-## .

695



Field

Value

Struct. Indicator

STR01

Description

Production Line TS410-##

Cost Center

PROD## (Created in the earlier exercise, Create Cost Centers)

696




Unit 12 Solution 72 Display a Functional Location Structure

Business Example You want to create a functional location structure for your production plant B##. You need to check whether there is a functional location structure available (B00) that you can use as a copying template. Afterwards you adjust your structure and create a new functional location for the new machine that you bought for production. You need to create a new functional location for the Production line TS410-##. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise requires the Cost Center, PROD-##, created in the exercise, Create Cost Centers. Display a Functional Location Structure You want to see whether there is a functional location available in your production plant, that you can use as a template for your production plant. 1. Check the functional location structure

B00 ,

B00

You need to log on to the back-end system. a) On the SAP Easy Access Screen, choose Logisitics → Plant Maintenance → Management of technical objects → Functional Locations Display . Alternatively, use transaction code IH01. b) On the Initial screen of Functional Location Structure: Selection Location field, enter B00 Then Execute

→ Structural

, in the Functional

c) Choose Execute . d) In the structure list, choose the

Expand Whole button.

The functional location B00 is a structure of a production plant for bicycles. This can be used as a coping template for the next task. e) Go back to the Easy Access Screen 2. Use the functional location B00 as a template to create your own structure B##. Use GUIbased transactions for this exercise. Use the following information to create the template: Field

Value

Structure Indicator

STR01

FunctLocCategory

M

Functional Location

B00


697



Field

Value

New Functional Loc Structure

B##

For the new description, use

Bicycle Ltd. GR##.

a) Choose Logisitics → Plant Maintenance → Management of technical objects → Functional Locations → List editing Create . Alternatively, use transaction code IL04. b) On the Initial screen of

Create Functional List Entry


Use the following information to create the template: Field

Value

Structure Indicator

STR01

FunctLocCategory

M

c) Press Enter. d) Choose the Copy Reference button. e) In the following Window, in the Functional Location Functional Loc Structure field, enter B##.

field, enter B00, and, in the New

f) Press Enter. g) Change the description for the GR##.

Highest Level Functional Location

to Bicycle Ltd.

h) Save your entries. Create a Functional Location After you created your structure of the Production plant, B##, you need to create a new functional location for the Production Line. 1. Create a new functional location, Use the following data:

B##-1010-0## for the Production Line

Field

Value

Functional Location

B##-1010-0##

Struct. Indicator

STR01

Description


Cost Center

PROD##

TS410-## .

(Created in the earlier exercise, Create Cost Centers) a) Choose Logisitics → Plant Maintenance → Management of technical objects → Functional Locations Create . Alternatively, use transaction code

698

IL01.




b) On the Initial screen of

Create Functional Location


Field

Value

Functional Location

B##-1010-0##

Struct. Indicator

STR01

c) Press Enter. d) On the Create Functional Location: Mater Data screen, in the Production Line TS410-## for the description.

General tab, enter

e) in the Organization tab, enter Cost Center PROD-##. f) Save the functional location.


699



Describe Equipments

Figure 318: Equipment

A piece of equipment is an individual physical object that is to be maintained as an autonomous unit. Pieces of equipment usually represent single objects, such as pumps, motors, and vehicles, for which you need to perform and record maintenance tasks. Examples of single objects are as follows: ●

Means of production

●

Means of transport

●

Test equipment

●

Production resources or tools

●

Customer devices

●

Building or property

●

Systems or system parts

●

Vehicles

You can install equipment at functional locations. You can link a piece of equipment with a material (if you want to create a piece of equipment using MM, you can create a material with serial number) so that inventory will be in place. Criteria for Equipment Master Record You should always create an equipment master record for a technical object in the following situations: ● ●

700

You need to manage individual data for an object. You require breakdown, planned, or preventive maintenance tasks for an object and need to record them.

●

You need to collect and evaluate technical data for an object over a long period of time.

●

You need to monitor the costs of maintenance tasks for an object.




●

You need to record the usage time of an object at functional locations.

Views of Equipment Master Record

Figure 319: Equipment Master Record

An equipment master record uses the following views in the standard system: ●

General (for example, class, object type, reference data, manufacturer data, and so on)

●

Location (for example, location data, address, and so on)

●

●

Organization (for example, account assignment such as company code and cost center, responsibilities such as maintenance planning plant, and so on) Structure (for example, structure indicator, higher-level functional location, equipment, and so on)

Additional data, or links in the master record for the equipment, can also be activated as tab pages or called up using a button. You can use the time-based data to monitor a piece of equipment dynamically, tracking changes to that equipment over a specific period of time. If your system is customized accordingly, it creates a new time segment automatically whenever certain changes are made in the master record. The time segment describes the equipment usage.


701



702




Unit 12 Exercise 73 Create an Equipment Master Record

Business Example You have ordered a new machine for production. The machine has already arrived and you need to create an equipment master record for that. The new equipment will be included in the functional location for your Production Line TS410-##. Additionally there is an asset needed. You want to check the interface between EAM and FI asset accounting. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you 1. Create an equipment master record for the new machine assign it in your production line TS410-##. Use the following data: Field

Value

Equipment Category

M

Description


Object Type

2000

Acquisition value

100000,-- €

Acquisition date

Today

Maintenance Plant

1010

Work Center

T-A##

Cost Center

PROD##

Planer Group

100

Maintenance Work Center

MECH-00

Functional Location

B##-1010-0##

2. Review the Equipment master record. For the Equipment, use your Equipment number. Record the asset number. Asset number: _______________________________________________________________


703



Unit 12 Solution 73 Create an Equipment Master Record

Business Example You have ordered a new machine for production. The machine has already arrived and you need to create an equipment master record for that. The new equipment will be included in the functional location for your Production Line TS410-##. Additionally there is an asset needed. You want to check the interface between EAM and FI asset accounting. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you 1. Create an equipment master record for the new machine assign it in your production line TS410-##. Use the following data: Field

Value

Equipment Category

M

Description


Object Type

2000

Acquisition value

100000,-- €

Acquisition date

Today

Maintenance Plant

1010

Work Center

T-A##

Cost Center

PROD##

Planer Group

100


MECH-00

Functional Location

B##-1010-0##

a) On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Plant Maintenance → Management of Technical Objects → Equipment → Create . Alternatively, use transaction code IE01. b) On the Initial screen of M.

Create Equipment: Order

, in the Equipment Category

field, enter

c) Press Enter.

704




d) On the General Data tab, enter the following information: Field

Value

Description


Object Type

2000

Acquisition value

100000,-- €

e) Choose the Location tab and enter the following information: : Field

Value

Maintenance Plant

1010

Work Center

T-A##

f) Choose the Organization tab and enter the following information: Field

Value

Cost Center

PROD##

Planer Group

100


MECH-00

g) Choose the Structure tab. h) Choose the Change InstLoc icon. i) In the following window, in the

Functional Location

field, enter B##-1010-0##.

j) Press Enter. k) Save the equipment. 2. Review the Equipment master record. For the Equipment, use your Equipment number. a) On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Plant Maintenance → Management of Technical Objects → Equipment → Display . Alternatively, use transaction code IE03. b) On the Initial screen of Equipment number.

Display Equipment: Order

, in the Equipment field, enter your

c) Press Enter. d) On the Organization tab, identify the asset number and write it down. Note that the Asset number varies, depending on the creation. e) Go back to the SAP Easy Access screen. Record the asset number. Asset number: _______________________________________________________________


705



Describe the Integration with FI-AA

Figure 320: Internal Orders, Fixed Assets, and Enterprise Asset Management

An internal order can be used to collect costs for different classes of assets. During internal order settlement, the system transfers the costs from the internal order to the asset master record. At final settlement, these costs represent the acquisition value of the assets. Based on configuration settings, when a user creates and saves a fixed asset record, an equipment record can be created in SAP Enterprise Asset Management (SAP EAM). Any subsequent changes to either master record can be synchronized between the two records.

706




Assets and Equipment

Figure 321: Assets and Equipment Master Records

The previous method for assigning equipment to an asset was to enter the asset number in the relevant master record; this functionality still exists. Several pieces of equipment can be assigned to an asset, but a piece of equipment can belong only to one asset. You can ensure integration between Asset Accounting (FI-AA) and Plant Maintenance (PM) by synchronously creating or changing equipment and asset. You can set up the system to automatically create an equipment master record whenever you create an asset master record. In this case, the system copies the values of certain master data fields, such as the Company Code and the Inventory Number . If you change master data in the asset at a later point in time, the system then automatically updates the fields in the equipment master record and the other way around. You can also set up a workflow that informs someone (the person responsible in PM, for example) when assets are created or changed.


707



708




Unit 12 Exercise 74 Display an Asset Master Record

Business Example After you created the equipment you want to check whether the asset has been created. You will have a look at the asset master record as well as to the asset explorer. As you have not bought the asset via a purchase order you need to do the FI posting for the asset acquisition as well. You will use your vendor T-BP## for that. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Check the asset master record and evaluate the asset from the perspective of the asset explorer. Use an SAP Fiori app and the following data: Field

Value

Asset

Your asset number from the Equipment

Company Code

1010

What Cost center has been assigned to the asset? Cost Center:__________________________________ 2. Post the asset acquisition from vendor. You bought the asset from the vendor T-BP## for the value of 100.000,-- € plus VAT tax of 19%. Use the Acquisition without order (AP integrated) app and the following data: Field

Value

Document date

Today

Asset


Company Code

1010

Currency

EUR

Vendor

T-BP##

Tax Code

V1

Total amount

119.000,--

Tax amount

19000,--

Asset

Your asset number


709



Field

Value

Amount

100000,-- €

Is the asset acquisition visible? What is the posted amount visible there? __________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________

710




Unit 12 Solution 74 Display an Asset Master Record

Business Example After you created the equipment you want to check whether the asset has been created. You will have a look at the asset master record as well as to the asset explorer. As you have not bought the asset via a purchase order you need to do the FI posting for the asset acquisition as well. You will use your vendor T-BP## for that. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Check the asset master record and evaluate the asset from the perspective of the asset explorer. Use an SAP Fiori app and the following data: Field

Value

Asset


Company Code

1010

a) On the Launchpad, choose the b) On the Initial screen of

Display Asset Master Record

Change Asset Master

tile.


c) Press Enter. d) Choose the Time-dependent down the cost center.

to see the Cost Center that has been assigned and write

e) Go back to the Launchpad. What Cost center has been assigned to the asset? Cost Center:__________________________________ 2. Post the asset acquisition from vendor. You bought the asset from the vendor T-BP## for the value of 100.000,-- € plus VAT tax of 19%. Use the Acquisition without order (AP integrated) app and the following data: Field

Value

Document date

Today

Asset


Company Code

1010

Currency

EUR


711



Field

Value

Vendor

T-BP##

Tax Code

V1

Total amount

119.000,--

Tax amount

19000,--

Asset

Your asset number

Amount

100000,-- €


Acquisition without order (AP integrated)

b) On the Initial screen of Acquisition from Purchase w. Vendor relevant data provided in the table.

tile.

, Header data, enter the

c) Press Enter. d) In the first line item, enter the data provided in the table for Tax Code .

Amount , Tax amount , and

e) In the next line item section, enter the following data provided in the table for Key, Account , and Transaction Type .

Posting

f) Press Enter. g) In the next line item, enter

100.000,-- € in the Amount field.

h) Press Enter. i) Choose the Display Document Overview

item and post the document.

j) Go back to the Launchpad. k) Choose the tile Asset number.

360°View of asset

tile and enter the

Company Code 1010 and your

The posted amount should be 100.000,-- €. l) Exit the asset explorer and go back to the Launchpad. Is the asset acquisition visible? What is the posted amount visible there? __________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________

712




Serial Numbers

Figure 322: Application Example: Plant Maintenance

The figure, Application Example: Plant Maintenance, outlines the following process: 1. A faulty piece of equipment must be dismantled and transferred to the warehouse. A prerequisite for this function is that the equipment is serialized. When equipment is serialized, the tab page for serialization data is activated and a serial number links the equipment to a material. The defective piece of equipment is dismantled and transferred to the warehouse for refurbishment. You have a function for installing and dismantling equipment with simultaneous goods movement. 2. The defective, serialized equipment needs to be refurbished. The serial number links the equipment with a material with condition-based evaluation. A material is broken down into different partial stocks by a condition-based evaluation. There are batches "as new" (C1), "refurbished" (C2), and "faulty" (C3). 3. The refurbished piece of equipment is returned to the warehouse using the linked material and serial numbers. 4. In one step, you can remove a piece of equipment from a storage location and install it at another piece of equipment or functional location. Serialization, therefore, enables inventory management of pieces of equipment. Material and Serial Numbers If a material piece of equipment is to be uniquely identifiable in terms of inventory management, a serial number profile must be entered in the material master. The serial number profile defines the business operations for which serial numbers are mandatory.


713



Figure 323: Material and Serial Number

The serial number profile can be entered in one of the following views in the material master: ●

Sales: General/plant data

●

General plant data/storage 2

If assignment is performed in the view Sales: General/plant data , the profile is displayed automatically in the view General plant data/Storage 2 (and vice versa). The combination of material and serial number is unique on the client level. Equipment and Serial Numbers Two options are available for linking the equipment, material, and serial number: ●

The material and serial number can be assigned to an existing equipment manually.

●

The system creates the equipment and serial number automatically during a posting.

Figure 324: Serialization of Existing Equipment

714




Assigning a serial number to a piece of equipment enables the equipment to be managed from an inventory management perspective. This means that you can use the material serial number to manage the equipment from Plant Maintenance from a Material Management perspective. Managing equipment in this way is desirable, if, for example, an object that was previously only managed as a piece of equipment is to be dismantled and transferred to the warehouse. You perform the assignment in the serialization data of the equipment master record. If you enter a material that already has a serial number profile for the serialization of individual pieces of equipment in the equipment master record, the system displays the last serial number assigned for this material (if a serial number was already assigned). In this way, you can connect the new serial number directly to the last serial number assigned. You can manage the relationship between the material and equipment as follows: ● ●

You can synchronize the equipment number and the serial number with each other. You can synchronize the material coupled with the equipment with the material in the Construction Type field of the equipment ( Structure tab page).

Note: The standard display of the Serial Data view in the equipment master record can be preset in the Customizing settings for the equipment category. If this view is not activated in Customizing, the tab page can be displayed afterwards.

Other Master Data used in EAM

Figure 325: Bills of Material in Plant Maintenance

The maintenance BOM differs from other BOMs. The maintenance BOMs only contain items relevant to plant maintenance.


715



The maintenance BOM has the following important functions: ●

Structuring of the object The structure of an object should be displayed as clearly as possible from a maintenance viewpoint.

●

Spare parts planning in the order If a technical object uses a BOM, you can use this BOM for planning or creating a maintenance order to plan spare parts.

●

Spare parts planning in the task list Spare parts can be planned in the task list based on a BOM.

The categories of maintenance BOMs are as follows: ●

Material BOM

●

Equipment BOM

●

BOM for functional location

Using a Material BOM as a Maintenance BOM

Figure 326: Using a Material BOM as a Maintenance BOM

Material BOMs are always used in plant maintenance when a number of similarly constructed objects have to be maintained. The aim of using a material BOM is to create one BOM and then assign this BOM to the technical objects, instead of creating a BOM for each technical object. This avoids the use of redundant BOMs. A material BOM is a BOM that is first created for a material independent of a technical object. To create a material BOM, you must perform the following tasks in this sequence:

716




1. Create a material. 2. Create a material BOM for the material. 3. Assign a BOM to one or more technical objects (equipment or functional location). You can make the assignment(s) in the respective master record using the Structure view. The number of the corresponding material is entered in the Construction type field.


717




718

●


●

Describe equipments

●


●


●





Unit 12 Lesson 3 Creating Notifications



Notification Structure

Figure 327: Maintenance Notification Structure

Each maintenance notification contains header data, which is the information used to identify and manage the notification. The header data is valid for the complete maintenance notification. You enter and maintain data in a notification item to determine a problem, find any damage, or view maintenance activity executed in greater detail. A notification can contain several items. Activities document the work performed for a notification. They are particularly important for inspections because they prove that certain tasks have been performed. Tasks describe the activities that are pending and which may have arisen only after the maintenance task was executed, such as creating a report.


719



You can also use tasks for planning purposes in certain cases (for example, if order processing is not active). When the process is not active, you can plan to assign different people to process the notification and monitor the execution of activities for specific time periods. Note, however, that no cost monitoring, material planning, or capacity requirements planning is possible for this type of processing. The notification interface is configurable. You can adjust the number of registers and their values according to your requirement, in Customizing.

Notification Creation

Figure 328: Technical Objects in Maintenance Notifications

You can create all the maintenance notification types for the following reference objects: ●

A functional location (with or without an assembly)

●

A piece of equipment (with or without an assembly)

●

A material with a serial number

The hierarchy of this object corresponds to the specified sequence. When you enter a maintenance notification for an assembly on a piece of equipment (which is assigned to a functional location), the system transfers all relevant data for the piece of equipment and functional location. However, you can also enter a maintenance notification without specifying an object number. Examples of maintenance notification without an object number are as follows: ●

●

When a malfunction report refers to an object that is not managed under a number in the system When a maintenance request refers to a new object to be provided for an investment program

The view for the reference object can be selected for an individual notification or notification type in the following ways:

720



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Creating Notifications

● ●

Functional location + Equipment + Assembly (former standard setting) Functional location + Equipment + Assembly, whereby if a functional location has only one piece of equipment, this piece is automatically set for the functional location

●

Functional location

●

Equipment (with and without assembly)

●

Material number + Serial number (with and without the equipment number)

●

Without a reference object


721



722




Unit 12 Exercise 75 Create a Notification

Business Example Your new machine in the production line TS410-## is not working properly. You will create a notification for the maintenance department that they should check the machine and fix the problem if possible. You will create a maintenance request for your equipment to record the malfunction. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Create a maintenance request for the equipment. Assign yourself as the user who reported the notification and set the priority to very high. Use the following data to create the maintenance request: Field

Value

Notification Type

M1

Description

Production line malfunction

Equipment

Your Equipment number

Planner group

T##

Responsible Work Center

MECH-##

Reported by

Your Username

The required start date should be today, one hour later, and the priority very high.


723



Unit 12 Solution 75 Create a Notification

Business Example Your new machine in the production line TS410-## is not working properly. You will create a notification for the maintenance department that they should check the machine and fix the problem if possible. You will create a maintenance request for your equipment to record the malfunction. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Create a maintenance request for the equipment. Assign yourself as the user who reported the notification and set the priority to very high. Use the following data to create the maintenance request: Field

Value

Notification Type

M1

Description

Production line malfunction

Equipment

Your Equipment number

Planner group

T##

Responsible Work Center

MECH-##

Reported by

Your Username

The required start date should be today, one hour later, and the priority very high. a) On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Plant Maintenance → Maintenance Processing → → Notification → Create (general) . Alternatively, use the transaction code IW21. b) On the Initial screen of

Create PM Notification , enter M1 for Notification Type .

c) Press Enter. d) On the Create Pm Notification: Maintenance Request screen, in the enter Production line TS410-## malfunction. e) On the Reference Object

screen, in the

Description field,

Equipment field, enter your Equipment number.

f) In the section Responsibilities section, change the Planner group to T##, the responsible work center, Main Work Ctr to MECH-##, and enter your user in the Reported by field.

724



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Creating Notifications

g) In the Start / End section, enter the following data: Field

Value

Required start

Today / one hour later

Priority

Very high

h) Save the notification.


725




726





Unit 12 Lesson 4 Processing Maintenance Orders



Maintenance Order Creation

Figure 329: Ways to Create Maintenance Orders

A maintenance order can be created for the following cases: ● ●

●

●

●

The maintenance order is created directly (a breakdown order). The maintenance notification is not entered centrally. The maintenance order is created for the maintenance notification by the person responsible. In a maintenance order, several maintenance notifications are combined into one or more objects. An activity report for an existing maintenance order is entered subsequently as a technical confirmation. A maintenance order is automatically generated from a maintenance item by the maintenance plan.


727



Maintenance Order Structure

Figure 330: Elements of a Maintenance Order

The following elements are included in a maintenance order: Header data: The header data contains information that serves to identify and manage the maintenance order. It is valid for the whole maintenance order, such as the number, description, and type of order, scheduled dates for order execution, priority of tasks, creator, last person who changed the order, and so on. Object list: The object list contains the objects to be processed (such as functional locations, equipment, assemblies, and serial numbers) and is implemented if the same activity must be performed at multiple objects of the same type. Order operation: The order operation describes the tasks that are necessary for the maintenance order, who performs the tasks, and the task guidelines. Material list (component list): The material list contains spare parts that are required and used when the maintenance order is executed. Production resources and tools: The production resources and tools are required to execute the maintenance order, but are not used up (such as tools, protective clothing, and trucks). Settlement rule: The data in the settlement rule provides information on who should bear the costs. It is proposed from the master record for the reference object and can be changed when the first settlement rule is maintained for the order.

728



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Processing Maintenance Orders

Costs: The costs view details out how much the estimated, plan, and actual costs are in the value categories for this order. A technical view and a controlling view are also available. Maintenance Order – Object List

Figure 331: Maintenance Order — Object List

The object list is an integral part of the maintenance order. The object list is used to compile multiple notifications and also to assign several technical objects to the order. Even if no reference object has been specified for the maintenance order on the header data screen, you can assign technical objects and maintenance notifications respectively to the maintenance order in the object list. You can also assign both in the object list. If notifications are assigned to the order using the object list, the first notification in the order header appears in the Notification field. The first notification is indicated as the header notification. The header notification and the other notifications in the object list can be separated from the order again. The object list does not control the order. Therefore, no adjustment of work is to be performed, and no update of history or cost distribution takes place. You can use customer exit objects in the object list.


IWO10027 to distribute the order costs proportionately to the

729



Maintenance Order Process

Figure 332: Process Flow for Maintenance Order Using Stock Materials

If the materials that you plan for the maintenance order are kept in stock, they are reserved in the warehouse. You can set the reservation time in your system using the Customizing function. In Customizing, whether the system should make the material reservation effective, generate the purchase requisition immediately, or only generate when the order is released, is decided for each order type. An availability check can be called when components are assigned in the order. An automatic availability check is performed when the order is released. The order can also be released if there is no availability. You can print a material provision list and material withdrawal slips together with the order papers. Planned goods issues are entered with reference to the reservation (reservation number), unplanned goods issues with reference to the order number. The goods issues entered appear in the document flow of the order. If your company does not keep stock of the required spare parts, purchasing has to procure the material from a vendor. From the Plant Maintenance (PM) perspective, material procurement is a support process that integrates PM with purchasing (materials management).

730




Process Flow for Maintenance Order Using Non-Stock Materials

Figure 333: Process Flow for Maintenance Order Using Non-Stock Materials

When components are assigned in the order, additional purchase information can be entered. Depending on the order type, the system generates purchase requisitions either when the order is saved or released. In purchasing, purchase orders are generated from purchase requisitions. The purchase order items are assigned to the maintenance order. You enter goods receipts with reference to the purchase order after the order has been put in process. The account assignment of the purchase order instigates the posting to the order. When you have entered the goods receipts, the maintenance order is debited with the purchase order value. When the invoice is received, any invoice differences are automatically credited to, or debited from the maintenance order. The goods receipts entered appear in the document flow of the order.


731



Effects of the Maintenance Order Release

Figure 334: Effects of the Maintenance Order Release

When you release a maintenance order, the system checks the availability of materials and production resources or tools. At the time of release (at the latest), material reservations become relevant to materials planning, materials withdrawn, and purchase requisitions are generated. The following activities can only be performed after you have released the order:

732

●

Print shop papers

●

Withdraw material

●

Book goods receipts

●

Enter time confirmations

●

Complete task




Issuing Materials to Maintenance Orders

Figure 335: Issuing Materials to Maintenance Orders

The execution phase involves the withdrawal of spare parts from the warehouse and the actual execution of the order. Workers withdraw materials from the warehouse to perform maintenance tasks. Workers can make the following types of withdrawal of stock material: ●

Planned withdrawal

●

Unplanned withdrawal

Materials can also be procured externally. The goods movements for a maintenance order are displayed in the document flow of the order. The Material Where-Used List (IW13) allows you to check which withdrawals for a material were planned and which were unplanned.


733



734




Unit 12 Exercise 76 Create a Maintenance Order

Business Example You want to see all notifications created for maintenance for this course. You need a list to gain an overview about the entire workload for the maintenance department. You chose the notification list for this overview. From the list, you will create a maintenance order for your notification for the maintenance department to start with the repair. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. To gain an overview about all the outstanding maintenance requests, process a notification list for the entire maintenance requests of this course. Select all notification from the training. Use the following data: Field

Value

Notification Type

M1

Created by

TS410-01 to TS410-30

Layout

U_TS410-##

Name

My notification List ##

User specific

Selected

Default

Selected

2. Create the maintenance order from the notification list to initiate the repair of the production line. From the notification list you create the maintenance order and use the following data: Field

Value

Notification

Your notification

Work Duration

20

What is the order number from the notification list? Order Number: ______________________________________________________________


735



Unit 12 Solution 76 Create a Maintenance Order

Business Example You want to see all notifications created for maintenance for this course. You need a list to gain an overview about the entire workload for the maintenance department. You chose the notification list for this overview. From the list, you will create a maintenance order for your notification for the maintenance department to start with the repair. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. To gain an overview about all the outstanding maintenance requests, process a notification list for the entire maintenance requests of this course. Select all notification from the training. Use the following data: Field

Value

Notification Type

M1

Created by

TS410-01 to TS410-30

Layout

U_TS410-##

Name


User specific

Selected

Default

Selected

a) On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Plant Maintenance → Maintenance → Processing → Notification → List editing → Change . Alternatively, use transaction code IW28. b) On the initial screen Change Notifications: Selection of Notifications , enter the data provided in the table for the Notification Type and Created by fields. c) Execute the list. d) Choose the Current Variant

icon.

e) In the Window that appears, on the right side, choose right side column and select it to the left side.

Set the entry Order

f) Choose the Save as icon. g) In the following window, enter the following data:

736




Field

Value

Layout

U_TS410-##

Name


User specific

Selected

Default

Selected

h) Press Enter. i) Press Enter again. The order number should be included in the display variant. j) Stay in the list for the next step. 2. Create the maintenance order from the notification list to initiate the repair of the production line. From the notification list you create the maintenance order and use the following data: Field

Value

Notification

Your notification

Work Duration

20

a) In the notification list, select your notification and choose the b) On the Initial screen of field, enter 20.

Create Maintenance Order: Central Header

Create Order button. in the Work Duration

c) Press Enter. d) Save the order. e) Write down the order number from the notification list. f) Return to the Easy Access screen. What is the order number from the notification list? Order Number: ______________________________________________________________


737



738




Unit 12 Exercise 77 Plan a Maintenance Order

Business Example Now that the maintenance order is created the maintenance planner needs to plan the order. You will need an external maintenance worker to assist in the repair. As well you will add some materials to your order. As the order is already created, you need to change the existing order and do the planning. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise uses the Maintenance order number, from the exercise, Create a Maintenance Order 1. Change the maintenance order created before. You will need an external maintenance assistance from the company that delivered the production equipment, therefore, you will plan that external work in the order. Use the following data: Field

Value

Order

Your maintenance order number (From the exercise, Create a Maintenance Order)

Control Key

PM02

Operation Short text

External assistance

Operation Qty

10 H

Price

100,-- €

Material Group

P001

Purchasing Group

Z##

Purchasing Org

1010

Vendor

T-BP##

Requisitioner

Your name

Component

T-STS410

Req. Quantity

1 PC

Item Category

L

Plant

1010


739



Field

Value

Sloc

101A

2. Add a material that has been delivered when you received the production machine. The material is named T-STS410 Spare Part TS410. Assign the component to Operation 10 and add 1 PC to the order. Use the following information:

740

Field

Value

Component

T-STS410

Req. Quantity

1 PC

Item Category

L

Plant

1010

Sloc

101A




Unit 12 Solution 77 Plan a Maintenance Order

Business Example Now that the maintenance order is created the maintenance planner needs to plan the order. You will need an external maintenance worker to assist in the repair. As well you will add some materials to your order. As the order is already created, you need to change the existing order and do the planning. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise uses the Maintenance order number, from the exercise, Create a Maintenance Order 1. Change the maintenance order created before. You will need an external maintenance assistance from the company that delivered the production equipment, therefore, you will plan that external work in the order. Use the following data: Field

Value

Order

Your maintenance order number (From the exercise, Create a Maintenance Order)

Control Key

PM02

Operation Short text

External assistance

Operation Qty

10 H

Price

100,-- €

Material Group

P001

Purchasing Group

Z##

Purchasing Org

1010

Vendor

T-BP##

Requisitioner

Your name

Component

T-STS410

Req. Quantity

1 PC

Item Category

L

Plant

1010


741



Field

Value

Sloc

101A

a) On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Maintenance → Maintenance Processing transaction code IW32. b) On the Initial screen of number

Logistics → Plant → Order → Change . Alternatively, use

Change Order , in the Order field, enter your Maintenance order

c) Press Enter. d) Choose the Operations tab and enter the values provided in the table for and Operation Short text in operation 20.

Control Key

e) Press Enter. f) In the window, enter the following data: Field

Value

Operation Qty

10 H

Price

100,-- €

Material Group

P001

Purchasing Group

Z##

Purchasing Org

1010

Vendor

T-BP##

Requisitioner

Your name

g) Press Enter. h) Go back to the operation overview. 2. Add a material that has been delivered when you received the production machine. The material is named T-STS410 Spare Part TS410. Assign the component to Operation 10 and add 1 PC to the order. Use the following information:

742

Field

Value

Component

T-STS410

Req. Quantity

1 PC

Item Category

L

Plant

1010

Sloc

101A




a) Choose the Components

tab and enter the data provided in the table.

b) Press Enter. c) In the following window in the

Operation field, enter 10.

d) Save the order.


743



744




Unit 12 Exercise 78 Release a Maintenance Order

Business Example Now that the maintenance order is planned you need to release the order. You will review the order first and then release and print it. You will use change transaction to proceed. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise uses the Maintenance order number, from the exercise, Create a Maintenance Order 1. Review the costs and the system status of your maintenance order. What is the total amount of costs?

What is the current status of the maintenance order?

What do these statuses mean?

2. To release the order, put the order in process to and print the maintenance order.


745



Unit 12 Solution 78 Release a Maintenance Order

Business Example Now that the maintenance order is planned you need to release the order. You will review the order first and then release and print it. You will use change transaction to proceed. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise uses the Maintenance order number, from the exercise, Create a Maintenance Order 1. Review the costs and the system status of your maintenance order. a) On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Maintenance → Maintenance Processing transaction code IW32. b) On the Initial screen of number



c) Press Enter. d) Choose the Costs tab. Here you see the total amount of costs and the current status. e) To see the meaning of each status, Choose the Information icon behind the system status. What is the total amount of costs? The total amount of costs should be 2.300,-- € What is the current status of the maintenance order? The status should be: CRTD; MANC; PRC What do these statuses mean? CRTD means Created, means Pre Costed.

MANC means that Material availability not checked, and

PRC

2. To release the order, put the order in process to and print the maintenance order.

746




a) Choose the Put in Process...

icon.

b) In the following dialog box, choose c) In the next dialog box, choose the

Print with online window . Print Preview icon.

d) Choose Back to skip through the individual documents. e) When back in the dialog box, choose

Cancel .

The System Status should have changed to

REL MACM PRC SETC.

f) Save the order.


747




748





Unit 12 Lesson 5 Executing Maintenance Orders



Confirmation of Times

Figure 336: Order Confirmation: Times and Activities

You can confirm the time required for work on a maintenance order in the following ways: ●

Individual entry of time for each order operation

●

Collective entry by direct entry or using an operation list

●

●

Overall completion confirmation (such as time, activities, measurement values, and so on) on a collective screen Entry using the Cross-Application Time Sheet (CATS)

You can enter the maintenance activities performed in the following ways: ●

As maintenance notifications with notification type corresponding order


Activity report and assigned to the

749



●

As confirmation texts that can be entered with confirmations of time (these texts are not as easy to structure and analyze as activity reports)

You can enter measurement readings as measurement documents for the reference object. Order Completion Process After you enter the completion confirmations for operations or suboperations in a maintenance order, the system automatically assigns the status PCNF (partially confirmed) to these operations or suboperations. If you have not made any setting in Customizing that a final completion confirmation should be proposed automatically, the system assigns the status. As soon as all the operations or suboperations in a maintenance order have been completely confirmed, the order itself is assigned the status CNF (finally confirmed). There is always a risk of completion confirmations being assigned to the wrong operations or suboperations or entered with the wrong data. The system, therefore, allows you to reverse completion confirmations if required. An internal maintenance operation is performed by a maintenance work center, which is assigned to a cost center. Therefore, the completion confirmation triggers an internal activity allocation between this cost center and the plant maintenance order, debiting the order with the costs. These costs are calculated by multiplying the recorded work time with the activity price. Overall Completion Confirmation

Figure 337: Overall Completion Confirmation

The overall completion confirmation enables you to confirm not only working times, but all of the relevant details for an order on a single screen, configured to suit your individual requirements. Time confirmations and technical confirmations can, therefore, be processed in the same way. You also have the option of confirming an inspection round within the overall completion confirmation. If an activity is assigned a technical object and the corresponding counter (as

750



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Executing Maintenance Orders

production resource or tool), you can also record the counter readings or measurement values for the activity along with the actual times.

Technical Completion

Figure 338: Maintenance Order – Technical Completion Options

You have the following options to complete the maintenance order: ●

Complete the maintenance order and notification separately

●

Complete the maintenance order together with assigned notifications

To complete the order and notification together, the notification must not contain any outstanding tasks. If there are any outstanding tasks (status OSTS) in a notification, you cannot complete the notification. You must first mark the tasks as finished. You can, however, complete the order belonging to the notification as the outstanding tasks may not necessarily belong to the order performed (in certain circumstances, a new order may be required for this). All notifications with outstanding tasks can be identified easily from their status (OSTS) and then processed.


751



Maintenance Order – Technical Completion

Figure 339: Maintenance Order – Technical Completion

The maintenance order obtains the status TECO (technically completed). In other words, the maintenance work required for this order has been completed. A completed maintenance order can only be changed online in the following ways: ●

Lock or unlock the maintenance order

●

Set the deletion flag

●

Enter goods movements that are still outstanding, and confirmations and invoice receipts

●

Change the settlement rule

If you have not maintained a settlement rule for the maintenance order, it is created automatically by the system. If this is not possible because of missing data, the system directs you to where the settlement rule can be maintained. All the purchase requisitions without purchase orders that still exist for the maintenance order are marked with a deletion flag. All open reservations and capacities that exist for the maintenance order are closed. Technical Completion – Reference date A reference date and time must be entered during the technical completion. This depends on what periods are assigned to the order in the Plant Maintenance Information System (PMIS). However, the reference date has no influence on the determination of the location and account assignment data. This date is determined and set to the date when the order is created. If, for example, the cost center of the equipment changes during the order processing, you can, if necessary, use the context menu ( Update Reference Object Data update the order.

752

) to




You can find the following data in the maintenance history: ●

Order data

●

Data from maintenance notifications

●

Usage histories

You can use this data for the evaluation of past work and the planning of new work. Reversing Technical Completion

Figure 340: Reversing Technical Completion

If required, you can reverse the status TECO. The order is given the status that it had before the technical completion. In other words, capacity requirements and reservations are restructured and the deletion indicator is reset for unconverted purchase requisitions.


753



Maintenance Notification – Completion

Figure 341: Maintenance Notification – Completion

Before you complete a maintenance notification, check the following conditions: ●

All data, which refers to the reference object for the maintenance notification, is available and correct.

●

All the relevant item data is available and correct.

●

All the relevant task data is available and correct.

●

All tasks have been completed or released. There are no more outstanding tasks.

●

All technical data related to the breakdown and availability of the technical system is available and correct.

The consequences of maintenance notification completion are as follows: ●

●

●

754

The reference date and time determine the periods assigned to the notification in the PMIS. The maintenance notification is locked for changes, which means that you can no longer change notification data. The notification is assigned the status NOCO (notification completed).




Unit 12 Exercise 79 Confirm Time for Maintenance Order and Goods Issue Posting

Business Example Your maintenance department has fixed the machine. The technicians received the materials in advance from the warehouse as a handover without posting. The technicians now record the hours and post the goods issue to the maintenance order. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Confirm the maintenance order using the following data: Field

Value

Profile

ZTS410

Order

Your maintenance order

Operation

10

Act. Work

25 H

Work Center

MECH-##

Final Confirmation

Selected

Atyp

1410

Material

T-STS410

Qty

1

Plant

1010

SLoc

101A


755



Unit 12 Solution 79 Confirm Time for Maintenance Order and Goods Issue Posting

Business Example Your maintenance department has fixed the machine. The technicians received the materials in advance from the warehouse as a handover without posting. The technicians now record the hours and post the goods issue to the maintenance order. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Confirm the maintenance order using the following data: Field

Value

Profile

ZTS410

Order

Your maintenance order

Operation

10

Act. Work

25 H

Work Center

MECH-##

Final Confirmation

Selected

Atyp

1410

Material

T-STS410

Qty

1

Plant

1010

SLoc

101A

a) On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Plant Maintenance → Maintenance Processing → Completion confirmation → Entry → Overall Completion Confirmation . Alternatively, use transaction code IW42. b) On the Initial screen of Extras → Settings.

Overall Completion Confirmation

c) In the following dialog box, enter the profile

756

, from the menu, choose

ZTS410 and choose Save..




d) On the Initial screen of Overall Completion Confirmation number and press Enter.

, enter your Production order

e) In the Operation Overview , delete the Operation number 20. f) In Operation number 10 enter the following data: Field

Value

Operation

10

Act. Work

25 H

Work Center

MECH-##

Final Confirmation

Selected

Atyp

1410

g) Choose the Operation Data icon. h) In the Goods Movements for operation 0010

section, enter the following data:

Field

Value

Material

T-STS410

Qty

1

Plant

1010

SLoc

101A

i) Save the confirmation.


757



758




Unit 12 Exercise 80 Technically Complete a Maintenance Order

Business Example Now that the maintenance order is confirmed the order needs to be technically completed. With the technical completion, the outstanding Purchase requisition will be deleted as well. The work from the external technician is not needed. In addition to the order, the assigned notification will also be closed. You will technically complete both objects and review the order. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise uses the Maintenance order number, from the exercise, Create a Maintenance Order 1. Check the status of the purchase requisition that you created from the order. Use the Production order number from the exercise, Create a Maintenance Order Is the purchase requisition still open?

Are there actual costs on the order?

2. Set the status of the maintenance order to

Technical completion

and close the order..

What is the status of the Purchase Requisition now?

What is the system status of the notification?


759



Unit 12 Solution 80 Technically Complete a Maintenance Order

Business Example Now that the maintenance order is confirmed the order needs to be technically completed. With the technical completion, the outstanding Purchase requisition will be deleted as well. The work from the external technician is not needed. In addition to the order, the assigned notification will also be closed. You will technically complete both objects and review the order. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise uses the Maintenance order number, from the exercise, Create a Maintenance Order 1. Check the status of the purchase requisition that you created from the order. Use the Production order number from the exercise, Create a Maintenance Order a) On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Maintenance → Maintenance Processing transaction code IW32. b) On the Initial screen of number.



c) Press Enter. d) Go to Operations , choose Operation 20, and choose the

Actual Data icon.

e) To check whether the purchase requisition is still open, double-click the Purchase Requisition number. f) Go back to the Order Header. g) To check whether there are costs on the order, choose

Costs .

Is the purchase requisition still open? Yes the status of the Purchase requisition is still open. Are there actual costs on the order? There should be actual costs of 1.500,-- € on the order. 2. Set the status of the maintenance order to a) Choose the Complete Technically

760

Technical completion

and close the order..

icon.




b) In the following window, check whether

Complete notifications

is marked.

c) Press Enter. d) Go back in the order and check whether the

Purchase Requisition

is changed.

e) Press Enter. f) Go to Operations , select Operation 20, and choose the

Actual Data icon again.

g) To check the status of the Purchase Requisition, double-click the Purchase requisition. h) To check the system status of the assigned notification, go back to the Order Header, and choose the Display icon next to the notification. i) Exit the notification and the order. j) When asked to save the data, confirm with

Yes .

k) Return to the SAP Easy Access screen. What is the status of the Purchase Requisition now? The Status of the Purchase Requisition is Deleted. What is the system status of the notification? The system status of the notification is Order assigned.


NOCA – Notification closed and ORAS -

761




762





Unit 12 Lesson 6 Processing Period-End Closing Activities



Period-End Closing Activities

Figure 342: Maintenance Order Settlement

You can use the maintenance order to plan and execute maintenance work. This means that the order initially bears all the costs that result from the planning and consumption of resources. The costs generated by consuming the resources required appear on the debit side of the order as actual costs. You should answer the following questions to ensure that cost allocation and tracking adhere to the allocation-by-cause principle: ●

Is the order really the originator of the costs?

●

What is the role of the maintenance object or maintenance requester?

This is the basis of order settlement. Depending on the type of task, the order is settled to its actual originator and credited with the costs of resources consumed. Order costs are borne by another receiver, which is also a cost accounting object. This can, for example, be the cost center of the maintenance object, or the organizational unit that requested this work to be executed.


763



Therefore, the order is merely a collector of all costs incurred during the planning and execution phases with the purpose of tracking them from a cost-related perspective. The routine maintenance tasks that arise through the technical administration of a specific maintenance object are generally settled to the cost center of this object. To perform technical administration of the maintenance object, the corresponding cost center must be specified as the receiver in the settlement rule for the order. The actual costs for the order are passed on to the cost center, which is debited. At the same time, these costs are credited to the order. The balance of actual costs for the order after complete settlement equals zero while the actual cost on the cost center is greater than zero.

764




Unit 12 Exercise 81 Perform Period-End Closing Activities

Business Example The maintenance order is technically completed. The outstanding purchase requisition is deleted and not needed. Due to period end, the order will be settled and completed from a business perspective. Note that in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Settle the maintenance order using the following data: Field

Value

Order

Your maintenance order number

Settlement period

Actual month

Fiscal year

Actual year

Test run

Deselected

In the detailed list – Settled values, who is the receiver of the costs?

How have the labor costs been settled to the receiver?


765



Unit 12 Solution 81 Perform Period-End Closing Activities

Business Example The maintenance order is technically completed. The outstanding purchase requisition is deleted and not needed. Due to period end, the order will be settled and completed from a business perspective. Note that in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Settle the maintenance order using the following data: Field

Value

Order

Your maintenance order number

Settlement period

Actual month

Fiscal year

Actual year

Test run

Deselected

a) On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Plant Maintenance → Maintenance Processing → Completion → Individual Processing → Settle . Alternatively, use transaction code KO88. b) On the Initial screen of

Actual settlement: Order


c) Choose Execute . d) To see how the labor costs have been settled, first choose Receiver to see the cost elements.

Sender and then choose

e) Exit the settlement and return to the SAP Easy Access screen. In the detailed list – Settled values, who is the receiver of the costs? The costs have been settled to the cost center PROD##. How have the labor costs been settled to the receiver? The labor costs have been settled to the receiver by a settlement cost element – secondary cost element 92112000.

766



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Processing Period-End Closing Activities




767



768





1. Functional locations are hierarchically ordered structures and could be used, for example, to represent a technical system. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X

True

X

False

2. During an internal order settlement, the system transfers the costs from the internal order to the equipment record. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X

True

X

False

3. Which of the following elements are included in a maintenance order? Choose the correct answers. X

A Order operation

X

B Settlement rule

X

C Object list

X

D Activity report


769




1. Functional locations are hierarchically ordered structures and could be used, for example, to represent a technical system. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X

True

X

False

2. During an internal order settlement, the system transfers the costs from the internal order to the equipment record. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X

True

X

False

3. Which of the following elements are included in a maintenance order? Choose the correct answers.

770

X

A Order operation

X

B Settlement rule

X

C Object list

X

D Activity report



Sap Ts410_en_col03_s4hana - Cloud - 2017 Rel_part_nw

Recommend Documents